DQ130112-M00-000-GE-MA-0001 R0.pdf

MANUAL OPERACION DQ130112-M00-000-GE-MA-0001 Revisión 0

ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS PROYECTO MINERA ESPERANZA ESPESADORES DE CONCENTRADO 36 M.

ANTOFAGASTA MINERLAS PROYECTO MINERA ESPERANZA ESPESADORES DE CONCENTRADO 36M, TAG 325-TK-602

MANUAL OPERACION Documento Nº DQ130112-M00-000-GE-MA-0001

REV

Aprobación Cliente :

_____________________________________________

Fecha:

_____________________________________________

DESCRIPCIÓN

PREPARÓ

REVISÓ

APROBÓ

FECHA

0

MANUAL DE OPERACIÓN Y MANTENCION

JS

JS

RD

22-09-2014

A

MANUAL DE OPERACIÓN Y MANTENCION

JS

JS

RD

18-02-2014

Outotec Chile S.A.

Página 1 de 1

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

1.1

PÁGINA 1 DE 11

ANTECEDENTES GENERALES

DESCRIPCIÓN GENERAL ................................................................................................... 2 COMPONENTES PRINCIPALES.......................................................................................... 5 1.1.1 MECANISMO MOTRIZ ........................................................................................ 5 1.1.2 UNIDAD HIDRÁULICA ........................................................................................ 5 1.1.3 MEDICIÓN DE TORQUE .................................................................................... 5 1.1.4 ESTANQUE ........................................................................................................ 6 1.1.5 ESTRUCTURA DE RASTRAS ............................................................................ 6 1.1.6 MEDICIÓN DE CAMA (Bed mass sensor)........................................................... 6 1.1.7 FEEDWELL ......................................................................................................... 6 1.1.8 ADICIÓN DE FLOCULANTE ............................................................................... 8 1.1.9 TABLERO DE CONTROL ................................................................................... 8 1.1.10 SISTEMA DE CONTROL .................................................................................... 9 ESPECIFICACIONES DE PROCESO................................................................................. 10 ESPECIFICACIONES TÉCNICAS ...................................................................................... 11

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 2 DE 11

DESCRIPCIÓN GENERAL

El espesamiento es una operación de separación sólido líquido realizada en un equipo espesador, donde el objetivo central es producir una fase líquida con mínimos contenidos de partículas sólidas (overflow) y una fase de alto contenido en sólidos (underflow). El equipo espesador es alimentado por la pulpa de alimentación, la cual es transportada e introducida por la parte superior del espesador, a través de una cañería de alimentación (feedpipe). Esta pulpa de alimentación es descargada tangencialmente a un pozo de alimentación central (feedwell), donde la pulpa es diluida, con la misma agua recuperada por el espesador (autodil), y mezclada con un agente polimérico, denominado floculante, permitiendo así la aglomeración de partículas sólidas que dan paso a la formación de flóculos que decantan bajo el efecto de las fuerzas gravitacionales. La pulpa floculada sedimenta para dar formación a una zona sedimentada compacta, denominada comúnmente cama, la que posee una interfase definida e identificable entre el líquido clarificado y el material compactado. La figura 1 presenta el arreglo general del espesador de concentrado de 36m tag 325-TK-002 del Proyecto Esperanza. El líquido clarificado alimenta por rebalse a una canaleta de recolección periférica ubicada en la parte superior del espesador y sale del proceso de espesamiento a través de una tubería. Mientras tanto, el underflow espesado es transportado, hacia un cono central ubicado en la base del espesador, por medio de un mecanismo de rastra, siendo luego bombeado y extraído del espesador hacía la siguiente etapa del proceso.

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

PÁGINA 3 DE 11

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

Figura 1: Planta y vista frontal del Espesador de 36m tag 325-TK-002

Tabla 1: Descripción de ítemes de la Figura 1 Ítem

Descripción

1

Panel de Control

2

Unidad Hidráulica (Hydraulic Power Pack)

3

Estanque

4

Estructura soporte de Estanque

5

Pasillo (parrillas de piso) y Barandas

6

Mecanismo de Levante (Rake Lift)

7

Mecanismo de rastras

8

Sistema de alimentación

9

Sistema de control de espuma

10

Drive

11

Reductor

12

Viga Monoriel

13

Sensor de nivel de cama

14

Transmisor de presión de cama

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

PÁGINA 4 DE 11

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 5 DE 11

COMPONENTES PRINCIPALES 1.1.1

MECANISMO MOTRIZ El mecanismo motriz comprende un motor hidráulico montado sobre un reductor planetario de multi-etapas (Gearbox), el cual actúa como el reductor final para el accionamiento del ensamble de las rastras. El reductor del espesador tiene una entrada de bajo torque / alta rpm y cubre hasta una salida de alto torque / bajas rpm. La entrada viene por el motor asentado en la parte superior del reductor y la salida va a la base de giro del eje de accionamiento de la rastra. El reductor del espesador posee un diseño planetario epicíclico que consiste en varias fases, cada una con su propia razón fija. La proporción del reductor global es el producto de las proporciones de cada fase. Los reductores más grandes (torque más alto) requieren proporciones más altas, y más fases, para generar un torque más alto. Las características técnicas de cada uno de los componentes del espesador se encuentran en el Capítulo 3.

1.1.2

UNIDAD HIDRÁULICA La unidad hidráulica (Hydraulic Power Pack) es la encargada de accionar el motor hidráulico acoplado al Gearbox. En el Proyecto Esperanza, las unidades hidráulicas son fabricadas en Maestranza Diesel, el Capítulo 3 contiene información adicional respecto a los componentes, operación y mantención de la esta unidad hidráulica.

1.1.3

MEDICIÓN DE TORQUE

La medición de torque es realizada en forma indirecta a través la medición de la presión de operación en la unidad hidráulica. La presión hidráulica se muestra en un indicador digital con escala de 0 -100%. La señal es generada por un transductor / transmisor de presión hidráulica montado sobre la unidad hidráulica. La presión hidráulica es directamente proporcional al torque de la rastra. Existe un switch de presión que detiene la unidad si el torque sobrepasa una presión equivalente a 95% del valor máximo. La protección final contra un torque alto es el uso de una válvula de alivio de presión.

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

1.1.4

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 6 DE 11

ESTANQUE

La pared (tank wall) y el fondo (floor) son fabricados con planchas de acero carbono. El fondo posee una forma cónica con pendiente de (1/6) 9,46º, en el fondo se encuentra ubicado el cono central de descarga el cual está provisto de tuberías para: la descarga normal del espesador “underflow”, otra para la descarga de emergencia del espesador “dump” y en las tuberías de descarga hay líneas para el lavado en caso de emergencias “flushing”. Además el cono posee una tubería de diámetro 80NB para instalación de sensor de presión (Bed mass sensor). El piso del estanque está apoyado en vigas radiales soportadas a su vez por columnas.

1.1.5

ESTRUCTURA DE RASTRAS

La rastra del espesador está soportada sobre el eje del accionamiento y posee cuatro brazos, dos cortos y dos largos, equipadas con cuchillas (blades) para barrer la totalidad del fondo del espesador una vez por revolución. Las rastras desplazan los sólidos hacia el centro, ayudando también a compactar los sólidos y a mantener en movimiento la cama. La dirección de rotación normal de la rastra es en el sentido del movimiento de los punteros del reloj, vista desde arriba.

1.1.6

MEDICIÓN DE CAMA (Bed mass sensor)

El transmisor de presión Endress+Hauser PMP75, ubicado en el cono inferior de descarga, genera una señal digital Foundation Fieldbus, la cual se parametriza para representar la masa de cama al interior del espesador representadas en valores de porcentaje entre 0 y 100% (solo agua o cantidad de agua y pulpa predefinida). Esta señal se usa normalmente para controlar la extracción de underflow desde el espesador.

1.1.7

FEEDWELL

El Feedwell es el componente del espesador que está encargado de recibir y acondicionar la pulpa alimentada al equipo. El diseño del Feedwell se realiza para permitir la de-aireación de la pulpa, la alimentación de pulpa al Feedwell es tangencial de manera de promover la correcta mezcla entre la pulpa, el floculante y la solución clarificada producida por el espesador. CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 7 DE 11

La solución clarificada es alimentada al Feedwell mediante el sistema Autodil.

Figura 2: Esquema de funcionamiento del feewell

AUTODIL® Autodil® corresponde un sistema de dilución de la pulpa de alimentación al espesador, que utiliza como agente de dilución la solución clarificada producida por el espesador. La solución de dilución ingresa al feedwell donde es usada para diluir la pulpa entrante y producir la mezcla entre la alimentación y el floculante. El sistema Autodil® usa la diferencia natural de presión entre la pulpa en el interior del feedwell y la solución clarificada fuera de éste, tal como muestra la figura 2. Ranuras y compuertas ubicadas en el feedwell permiten al agua de dilución mezclarse con la pulpa en el interior del feedwell. Como el sistema opera con un diferencial de cabeza hidráulica, es independiente de la proporción del flujo de masa que ingresa al equipo. Para el caso de del Proyecto Cerro Negro solo tiene una compuerta.

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 8 DE 11

Figura 3: Principio de funcionamiento del sistema Autodil®

1.1.8

ADICIÓN DE FLOCULANTE

El floculante se agrega al espesador sobre la base de una dosificación fija por tonelada de sólidos secos tratados.

1.1.9

TABLERO DE CONTROL

El tablero de control está diseñado para controlar localmente el sistema motriz de los espesadores de concentrado. El tablero cuenta con un HMI 6” Touch, una botonera para Partir/Parar, un selector de modo de operación Manual/Automático, entre otros. En la siguiente figura se muestra un esquema del tablero de control considerado, junto con el detalle de sus funciones.

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 9 DE 11

Figura 4: Tablero de Control y detalle de funciones e indicaciones

1.1.10

SISTEMA DE CONTROL

La filosofía de control está orientada a la producción de underflow (UF) con densidades de sólido adecuadas de acuerdo al tipo de espesador y a la recuperación de solución clara (OF) de bajos contenidos de material sólido suspendido. Para ello es necesario plantear una estrategia de control orientada a estabilizar variaciones en la alimentación al espesador, esquemáticamente, lo anterior se resume como:

Alimentación Floculante

Estrategia de Control

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

Underflow Overflow

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

Figura 5: Esquema del sistema de control

ESPECIFICACIONES DE PROCESO -

Espesador de concentrado 36m, 325-TK-002

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

PÁGINA 10 DE 11

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 11 DE 11

ESPECIFICACIONES TÉCNICAS

-

Espesador de concentrado 36m, 325-TK-002 Diámetro espesador

36 m

Pendiente fondo

1:6

Diámetro feed well

2000 mm

Autodil®

1 Ranura

Motor eléctrico

11 kW

Gearbox

Bonfiglioli 321 L5 FZ

Velocidad punta rastra

0.053 rpm

Torque máximo mecanismo

930.000 Nm

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

1.2

PÁGINA 1 DE 5

INSTRUCCIONES DE SEGURIDAD

PRECAUCIONES DE SEGURIDAD ..................................................................................... 2 OBLIGACIONES DEL OPERADOR ...................................................................................... 2 RIESGOS ESPECÍFICOS ..................................................................................................... 2 1.2.1 PRECAUCIONES DURANTE LA INSTALACIÓN ................................................... 2 1.2.2 PRECAUCIONES DURANTE OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ......................... 3

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALCIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 2 DE 5

PRECAUCIONES DE SEGURIDAD El conocimiento de las normas y procedimientos de seguridad básicos es un requisito fundamental para la operación e instalación de los espesadores de Outotec. Este manual de operación y mantenimiento contiene información importante de seguridad, por lo que debe ser estudiado por todas las personas que trabajarán directa e indirectamente con el espesador. En adición, también deberán conocer las normas y procedimientos para la prevención de riesgo propios de la faena donde se realizará la instalación del equipo.

OBLIGACIONES DEL OPERADOR Los operadores relacionados con la operación de los espesadores se encuentran obligados a: Estar familiarizados con las normas y procedimientos de seguridad ocupacional de la faena y ser instruidos en la operación de los espesadores Outotec. Haber leído y estudiado el manual de operación y estar preparados para la operación del espesador de acuerdo a las instrucciones expuestas en este manual.

RIESGOS ESPECÍFICOS 1.2.1

PRECAUCIONES DURANTE LA INSTALACIÓN La instalación de un espesador siempre requiere el apoyo de una empresa experimentada en el montaje mecánico y que conozca las prácticas de trabajo seguro. Se requiere un Plan de Seguridad de Faena para el proceso de montaje, el que deberá cubrir los siguientes aspectos:

Roles y responsabilidades del trabajo. Identificación y evaluación de riesgos. Análisis de seguridad de la tarea. Habilidades y competencias. Inducción en el sistema de seguridad de la compañía mandante. Etiquetado eléctrico (Tagging). CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALCIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 3 DE 5

Procedimiento en el manejo de sustancias peligrosas. Procedimientos de operación segura para equipos de levante. Equipos de Protección Personal. Métodos de Trabajo en Caliente. Planes de emergencia y primeros Auxilios.

Las áreas de riesgo (sin limitación) son las siguientes: Descarga y traslados de los equipos. Manipulación de los equipos para ponerlos en su posición de instalación (izaje y ajustes descendentes) Aseguramiento de equipos parcialmente instalados. Trabajo en caliente. Etiquetado de los equipos eléctricos. Trabajo en altura. Trabajo con chorro de arena. Pintura. Trabajo con herramientas asociadas a la erección de espesadores.

1.2.2

PRECAUCIONES DURANTE OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

Una vez que el espesador ha sido instalado deben tenerse en cuenta los siguientes aspectos relacionados a la seguridad durante el comisionamiento, operación y mantenimiento del espesador. En términos generales, los espesadores son bastante fáciles de mantener y de operar. La mayoría de las tareas de mantención se llevan a cabo en el puente, dentro de los límites de los pasamanos. En caso de surgir la necesidad del acceso de personal a áreas fuera de los pasamanos, deberá tenerse el ó los permisos adecuados y el debido cuidado (quizás deberá estar presente un observador con boya salvavidas), debiendo usarse además un arnés de cuerpo completo, asegurado de tal modo que la cabeza de la persona que lo usa no pueda quedar sumergida en el agua. Al revisarlos, sírvase tomar nota de las siguientes sugerencias con respecto a la seguridad:

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALCIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 4 DE 5

Deberán cumplirse estrictamente y en todo momento los procedimientos de seguridad de faena. Deberá aislarse siempre la electricidad, realizando los bloqueos necesarios, antes de comenzar cualquier trabajo eléctrico. Todo el trabajo eléctrico deberá ser llevado a cabo por personas calificadas en la tarea. Asimismo, los trabajos de mantención deberán ser ejecutados por personal idóneamente calificado. Siempre aísle la energía antes de llevar a cabo trabajos mecánicos en cualquier componente. Se deberán seguir estrictamente todos los procedimientos de etiquetado de faena. Siempre despresurice las líneas hidráulicas antes de comenzar cualquier trabajo operando las válvulas solenoides manualmente. Siempre proceda a soltar mangueras hidráulicas / fittings lentamente, con el fin de permitir que la presión acumulada se libere lentamente. Asegure que todas las protecciones sean restituidas a sus lugares de instalación después de finalizar cualquier trabajo, o cuando la persona involucrada abandone el área. Cualquier derrame de aceite deberá ser limpiado de inmediato con el fin de prevenir que las personas tropiecen, se resbalen o se caigan. Objetos extraños pueden caer dentro del espesador y producir la detención de la rastra u ocasionar obstrucciones de los equipos de bombeo. Para prevenir esta situación sugerimos que la faena de operaciones implemente su propio procedimiento para reducir este problema a un mínimo (por ej., barbiquejos o canastillos / letreros). En caso que un objeto extraño caiga al equipo comunicar inmediatamente a los encargados de la operación del equipo.

IMPORTANTE: Nunca operar u activar el mecanismo de movimiento de las rastras mientras se encuentren personas al interior del espesador. No realizar bypass a las alarmas activas con el fin de operar el espesador

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALCIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 5 DE 5

IMPORTANTE: No manipule el tablero de control eléctrico una vez que el comisionamiento haya sido completado o en caso que el espesador esté siendo alimentado eléctricamente.

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALCIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

1.3

PÁGINA 1 DE 13

INSTALACIÓN Y PRECOMISIONAMIENTO

INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACIÓN ................................................................................ 2 PRECOMISIONAMIENTO .................................................................................................... 8 1.3.1 INSPECCION INICIAL ......................................................................................... 8 1.3.2 PRECOMISIONAMIENTO ................................................................................... 8 1.3.3 HOJAS DE CHEQUEO DE PRECOMISIONAMIENTO ..................................... 11

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 2 DE 13

INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACIÓN

NOTA: Antes de comenzar con la etapa de instalación, asegúrese de haber leído las Instrucciones de Seguridad.

El orden típico de montaje, resumido esquemáticamente, es el siguiente:

1. Situar verticalmente las columnas de soporte verificando el nivel en el centro del extremo superior de cada columna. Asegure las columnas a las fundaciones y luego instale el refuerzo de las columnas. Tolerancia verticalidad de columnas = 1/1000. 2. Asegure las vigas del piso sobre las columnas de soporte y coloque el apoyo central en su lugar de instalación. Asegúrese que éste esté centrado y suelde las vigas radiales en su lugar de instalación. Refiérase a planos Montaje estructura soportante.

Imagen 1: Estructura soportante (columna y vigas radiales)

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 3 DE 13

Imagen 2: Cono central.

3. Utilizando el cono central como referencia de ubicación y posicionamiento, suelde las placas del piso por puntos generando curvatura indicada en los planos. Refiérase a planos Montaje estanque.

Imagen 3: Placas o planchas de piso.

4. Suelde por punto las secciones de la pared del estanque para fijarlas en su posición de instalación, refiriéndose a planos Montaje estanque. Tolerancia de verticalidad en la pared del estanque = 1/200. 5. Suelde por puntos la canaleta (Launder) para fijarlas en su lugar de instalación, asegurándose de su nivel. Refiérase a planos Montaje Estanque. Termine de soldar el estanque, anillo de coronamiento, placas del piso, canaletas, marco soporte de puente y placas retenedoras de espuma (froth baffle).

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 4 DE 13

Imagen 4: Estanque.

6. Pre-montar puente (Bridge) en el piso con parrillas de piso, barandas y conteniendo el paquete hidráulico, panel de control y sistema de accionamiento (reductor y buje de acoplamiento). Montar y apernar en el piso, soldando alrededor de las planchas de unión, previo chequeo de la distancia entre perforaciones del puente respecto de soportes del estanque. Refiérase a planos de Montaje de puente. 7. Dejar raspador de cono y eje en interior de cono central previamente posicionado con guía inferior (si aplica). 8. Pre-ensamblar el Feedwell y cono deflector en mitades y posicionarlos dentro del estanque. 9. Dejar dentro del estanque rastras, tensores, y eje para ensamble final. 10. Izar el puente completo,(pre-ensamblado fuera del estanque) y posicionarlo sobre el estanque, para su posterior fijación a través de las uniones apernadas.

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 5 DE 13

Imagen 5: Puente.

11. Montar tubo de torque y acoplar a mecanismo de accionamiento, a través del flange de conexión. Tolerancia verticalidad tubo de torque = 1/1000. Refiérase al plano de Montaje de tubo de torque. 12. Montar y apernar guía inferior cono raspador y tubo de torque en su parte inferior (si aplica). Refiérase al plano de Montaje de tubo de torque. 13. Montaje de feedwell, con sus vigas soportantes, levantar y apernar a vigas puente. Refiérase a plano de Montaje de Feedwell.

Imagen 6: Tubo de Torque y Feedwell.

14. Montar cono deflector y raspador de cono a feedwell, ajuste de separación a medida según plano de montaje de feedwell.

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 6 DE 13

15. Montar Rastras a tubo de torque con sus correspondientes tensores de rastra y accesorios mata espuma. Refiérase a plano de Montaje de rastras. Refiérase a plano Montaje de rastras. 16. Montar, posicionar cañería de alimentación (feed pipe) en estanque según disposición general para cada equipo. Refiérase a plano de Montaje de Feed pipe. 17. Montar tubería de alimentación (Feedpipe) y conectar a flange de entrada a feedwell, apernar soportes de tubería a puente. 18. Montar todos los accesorios restantes.

Imagen 7: Montaje interior de estanque.

19. Previo al Precomisionamiento inspeccione y alinee el mecanismo de la rastra como sigue. a)

Seleccione un punto sobre la viga del piso del estanque en un radio de un brazo corto.

b)

Posicione un brazo de rastra sobre ese punto y verifique que esté paralelo a la viga de piso. Tome nota de la altura en el lado inferior del brazo de la rastra (no la cuchilla) sobre este punto en el piso del estanque. Refiérase a plano de montaje de las rastras.

c)

Haga girar las rastras hasta que el brazo siguiente se encuentre sobre el punto seleccionado. Asegúrese que su CAPÍTULO 1

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 7 DE 13

altura hasta el lado inferior del brazo esté a la misma altura que b) precedente, más o menos 10 mm. d)

Repita el procedimiento de (c) precedente para los brazos largos de las rastras.

e)

Apriete uniformemente los tirantes entre los brazos de las rastras. Asegúrese que las rastras tengan por lo menos 100 mm aproximado de espacio libre entre ellas y la pared lateral del estanque. Encuentre el punto en el cual la pared del estanque esté más cerca de las rastras y úselo como dato de referencia.

Imagen 8: Alineamiento de mecanismo de rastras.

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 8 DE 13

PRECOMISIONAMIENTO

1.3.1

INSPECCION INICIAL

Asegúrese de que el puente se encuentre nivelado y centrado con respecto al estanque. El eje del accionamiento mecánico debe estar instalado centrado manteniendo un distanciamiento constante con respecto al cono de descarga. Posteriormente revise la posición centrada del feedwell. Una vez que la instalación del espesador es finalizada es necesario realizar una etapa precomisionamiento con la finalidad de verificar todas las dimensiones, espaciamientos, tolerancias y ajustes con tal de evitar posibles daños que pudiesen ocurrir durante la puesta en marcha o la operación.

1.3.2

PRECOMISIONAMIENTO

AJUSTE DE LA UNIDAD HIDRÁULICA Verifique la dirección de rotación del motor con la válvula direccional en la posición normal. Si es necesario calibre y/o realice el recambio del Transductor de Presión (Torque), de acuerdo a las siguientes instrucciones. Calibración 1. Active el sistema de accionamiento. Las rastras debieran desplazarse en modo “DIRECTA” 2. Suba el punto de ajuste del switch de presión. Unas pocas vueltas (en el sentido de los punteros del reloj) debieran ser suficientes. 3. Utilizando la válvula de bola en la descarga, estrangúlela lentamente para acumular presión. 4. Observe el indicador de presión del accionamiento y no permita que la presión suba más allá de la “Torque Máximo del Mecanismo”. 5. Una vez que la presión llegue al valor indicado precedentemente, debiera operar la válvula de alivio, con lo que el cierre adicional de la válvula de control de flujo ya no causará aumento de presión adicional.

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 9 DE 13

Si esta presión no se alcanza, el punto de ajuste de la válvula de alivio es demasiado bajo. 6. Si la presión aumenta, no siga cerrando la válvula. 7. Observe el despliegue de pantalla digital marcado como torque en el panel indicador. Debiera mostrar 100%. Si no es así, utilice el ajuste de tramo del transductor. 8. Una vez completado el paso 5, abra la válvula de bola de descarga, cuando esté totalmente “abierta”, se debiera mostrar 0%. Si no es así, utilice el tornillo de ajuste cero para reajustar. 9. Cada reajuste compensa al otro, de manera que se deberá “cerrar” y “abrir” la válvula de bola y reajustar correspondientemente. Después de repetir esto algunas veces, se debiera lograr los puntos de ajuste de 0% y 100%. 10. Una vez completada la calibración, "cierre" lentamente la válvula de bola hasta que el despliegue de pantalla indique 95%. Luego baje el punto de ajuste del switch de presión de manera que se dispare el accionamiento. Verifique esto un par de veces. Cada vez que se dispare, tendrá que presionar el botón de reseteo en el tablero de control, volviendo a comenzar nuevamente. 11. Se ha completado el proceso de calibración. 12. Asegúrese que la válvula de bola haya sido dejada totalmente abierta. 13. Dejar la unidad operando en posición DIRECTA. Recambio 1. Aísle la corriente a la fuente de energía. 2. Desconecte el cableado y línea hidráulica. 3. Recambie la unidad y vuelva a conectar. 4. Vuelva a hacer partir la fuente de energía.

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 10 DE 13

Switch de Presión La unidad hidráulica tiene un switch de presión ajustable para el disparo de torque alto. El ajuste se realiza cerrando lentamente la válvula de control de flujo de la línea de accionamiento para aumentar la presión. Switch de Bajo Nivel de Aceite Hidráulico La unidad hidráulica tiene un switch de nivel de aceite hidráulico bajo que dispara la unidad si el nivel de aceite baja demasiado. Este switch viene preajustado de fábrica. Válvula de Alivio de Presión del Accionamiento Si la presión hidráulica sobrepasa la presión de disparo por alguna razón, la válvula de alivio de by-pass de líquido debería operar para evitar daños a la caja de engranajes y al mecanismo de la rastra. El ajuste se realiza retirando la tapa de cubierta de la válvula de alivio ubicada sobre la bomba hidráulica (la que tiene tuerca de base más grande) y soltando la tuerca de seguridad, atornillando hacia fuera, cerrando lentamente la válvula de control de flujo y ajustando la válvula de alivio de tal modo que el indicador de presión indique el valor requerido. Atornillar hacia adentro aumenta la presión.

Nótese que el switch de presión necesita primero ser ajustado a una presión más alta y luego ser reajustado una vez que se haya ajustado la válvula de alivio.

AJUSTE DE LAS RASTRAS

NOTA: Antes de comenzar con el ajuste de las rastras es necesario realizar el Ajuste de la unidad hidráulica.

Velocidad de la Rastra La velocidad de rotación de la rastra se regula ajustando la válvula de velocidad hidráulica. Esta es una válvula de aguja ubicada en el lado de presión de la bomba hidráulica del accionamiento. CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 11 DE 13

La velocidad de la rastra estará normalmente en aproximadamente 0.212 rpm. La velocidad ideal de la rastra mantiene un perfil de cama de pulpa plano, desde la pared del estanque hacia el centro. Si la velocidad es demasiado baja, podría formarse un agujero al centro. En caso contrario, si es demasiado alta, la cama sería más alta en el centro del espesador, caso en el que la masa acumulada en el eje puede volcarse hacía las paredes, causando turbulencia y produce un rebalse sucio. Dirección de la Rastra Se utiliza un botón en el panel indicador ubicado al costado de la unidad hidráulica para establecer la dirección de la rastra. Las rastras revertirán esta dirección solamente cuando se presiona este botón. Una vez que se libera el botón, el movimiento de las rastras volverá a ser hacia adelante. AJUSTE DE LA POSICIÓN DEL CONO DEFLECTOR El distanciamiento entre el cono deflector y el feedwell puede ser ajustado mediante pernos entre el fondo del feedwell y el cono deflector. AJUSTE DE LA POSICIÓN DEL RASPADOR DEL CONO DEFLECTOR El raspador del cono deflector es posicionado sobre el eje de la rastra y es ajustado tal que exista una separación de 75 mm aproximado entre el raspador y el cono deflector.

1.3.3

HOJAS DE CHEQUEO DE PRECOMISIONAMIENTO

A continuación se indica una lista como pre-requisito para el comisionamiento para las diferentes disciplinas. ESPECIALIDAD MECÁNICA Inspección visual de instalación completa. Alineación, conexión y rotación. Chequeo de bombas. Verificación de acoplamientos.

soldaduras

de

terreno,

tensión

Control dimensional.

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

de

pernos

y

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 12 DE 13

Verificación que los elementos rotatorios no tocan las partes estacionarias y que las holguras están de acuerdo a lo establecido en los planos. ESPECIALIDAD ELÉCTRICA Inspección visual de instalación completa. Prueba de aislamiento y continuidad de cables. Pruebas de aislamiento de generadores, transformadores y motores, paneles y cajas de distribución. Pruebas de puesta a tierra. Pruebas de corriente estática en interruptores y elementos de control. Chequeo de distribución de alumbrado y enchufes. Chequeo de la instalación total de los elementos en cada área. Monitoreo de temperatura. Chequeo de que la energía eléctrica se encuentra disponible para todos los equipos eléctricos. Chequeo de aislamiento de los equipos. ESPECIALIDAD INSTRUMENTACIÓN Calibración y pruebas de instrumentos antes de su instalación. Inspección visual de instalación completa. Prueba de aislamiento y continuidad de cables. Limpieza, soplado, prueba de presión y roturas de las cañerías neumáticas e hidráulicas. Ajustes de control, posiciones de alarma y botones de parada. Pruebas de lazo de control. Pruebas de los funcionamientos de los sistemas de control. Durante el precomisionamiento, deben estar disponibles, por lo menos, los siguientes documentos: Especificación de alarmas y puntos de paradas, incluyendo los valores preliminares esperados para activar una alarma o crear una acción de parada. Se deben mencionar las acciones de parada, los rangos de CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 13 DE 13

medición y magnitudes. Los valores de las alarmas y acciones de parada deben ser actualizados durante la puesta en marcha cuando se conozcan los valores finales de operación. Lista de los instrumentos de terreno indicando la posición de falla de las válvulas. Descripción del Control de Proceso, incluyendo la descripción completa de todo el proceso de control. Diagrama funcional de lazos con la descripción detallada de la operación de los lazos individuales, enclavamientos especiales y conexiones entre controladores. Diagramas de lazo de instrumentos. Se deberán llenar las siguientes hojas de chequeo cuando se realice el precomisionamiento: Lista de Chequeo Mecánico Espesador, Unidad Hidráulica. Lista de Chequeo Eléctrico. Lista de Chequeo de Instrumentación.

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 1 DE 13

MANUAL DE OPERACIÓN

1.4

OPERACIÓN DEL ESPESADOR.......................................................................................... 2 4.1 PUESTA EN MARCHA ........................................................................................... 3 4.2 DETENCIÓN PROGRAMADA DEL ESPESADOR (sin detención de rastras)......... 4 4.3 DETENCIÓN PROGRAMADA DEL ESPESADOR (con detención de rastras)........ 5 4.4 DETENCIÓN DE EMERGENCIA DEL ESPESADOR ............................................. 5 SUGERENCIAS GENERALES DE OPERACIÓN ................................................................. 6 DIAGNÓSTICO DE PROBLEMAS EN LA OPERACIÓN ....................................................... 7 4.5

ESTRATEGIAS DE CONTROL DE PROCESO .................................................... 12

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 2 DE 13

OPERACIÓN DEL ESPESADOR Las etapas involucradas en el proceso de espesamiento son: Alimentación de pulpa a través de la línea de alimentación (feedpipe) hacía el interior del feedwell. El floculante se adiciona al interior del feedwell, a través de aspersores, para obtener la cantidad y mezcla de floculante óptima. En el feedwell promueven el mezclado de la pulpa de alimentación con el floculante y nos entrega el tiempo de la residencia adecuado. La pulpa de alimentación floculada cae en la parte superior de la cama formada en el fondo del espesador. El cono deflector controla la velocidad de ingreso de la pulpa floculada hacia la cama fluidizada, permitiendo de esta forma una salida radial para cubrir toda el área del piso del espesador. Esto ayuda a la rápida separación de los sólidos del líquido, y ayuda capturar las partículas finas. El líquido claro es empujado hacia la parte superior y es recuperado por la canaleta perimetral (launder), saliendo del sistema por la caja de overflow. Los sólidos depositados en el fondo son barridos hacia el cono de la descarga localizado en el centro de la unidad de espesamiento. Esto es logrado por un juego de brazos de rastras de movimiento lento con cuchillos inferiores. Los sólidos se retiran entonces del cono por bombas o por gravedad.

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

4.1

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 3 DE 13

PUESTA EN MARCHA

Antes de comenzar la puesta en marcha del espesador se debe haber revisado el correcto funcionamiento de los diferentes componentes del espesador, incluyendo la instrumentación y el sistema de control (Precomisionamiento, ver sección 1.3). Adicionalmente el espesador se debe encontrar con agua en su interior al momento de comenzar la puesta en marcha del equipo. Procedimiento: 1. Verificar que el Selector Directo/Inverso se encuentre en la posición Directo. En caso contrario mover el selector a la posición Directo 2. Mover el Selector Manual/Automático a la posición Manual 3. Oprimir la botonera verde que da partida al motor que hace girar la rastra 4. Verificar que la rastra gire en dirección de los punteros del reloj, vista desde arriba. 5. Poner en operación el sistema preparador de floculante y asegurarse de que haya suficiente solución madre. 6. Comenzar a alimentar el espesador con la pulpa. 7. Comenzar a alimentar el floculante y el agua de dilución. En el inicio de la operación del espesador se recomienda utilizar una dosis de floculante baja (10% de la dosificación nominal) hasta que la cama alcance rápidamente un 20%. Si la dosis de floculante puesta es demasiada alta para empezar (mayor a 50% de la dosificación nominal), la alimentación se sobre floculará y la cama requerirá demasiado tiempo para formarse, adicionalmente, existe el riesgo de que el espesador pueda embancarse. Si se comienza la operación sin la adición de floculante, la cama del espesador será de baja densidad, además, se hace muy difícil que el sistema de control pueda detectar la cama por lo que existe el riesgo que la cama llegue a la canaleta de overflow. 8. Ajuste la dosificación de floculante de acuerdo al flujo de sólidos alimentados al espesador. 9. Poner en Operación la bomba de descarga del underflow del espesador, recirculando su descarga al espesador hasta que se alcance la cama deseada dentro del espesador. CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 4 DE 13

10. Normalizar la descarga del underflow del espesador y por ende detener la recirculación hacia el espesador. A medida que se llena el espesador con pulpa, se debe monitorear continuamente tanto la densidad de descarga como el torque del accionamiento de la rastra. Cuando la densidad se acerque al valor requerido, deberá aumentarse la velocidad de la bomba, regulándola para que la densidad de descarga mantenga su valor. Si no se puede lograr la densidad requerida incluso con una baja velocidad de bombeo, es posible que sea necesario aumentar la dosis de floculante. Si la densidad de descarga tiende a ser demasiado alta y el torque de la rastra es alto, esta condición puede aliviarse aumentando la velocidad de la bomba y/o disminuyendo la dosificación de floculante. La claridad del agua recuperada es influenciada por la dosificación de floculante. Si la claridad es insuficiente, aumente la dosificación de floculante. Recuerde que también la densidad de la descarga es influenciada por la dosificación de floculante y una mayor cantidad de floculante produce una mayor densidad de la descarga.

Mientras el motor este funcionando, la luz de rastra funcionando estará encendida. Una vez que el motor llegue a régimen (20 Seg), se habilitarán los comandos de Giro de Rastra.

NOTA: Cuando se cambia la dirección de giro con la unidad hidráulica funcionando, es necesario mantener al menos 20-30 segundos en la posición “Neutro” para prevenir daños en la unidad.

4.2

DETENCIÓN PROGRAMADA DEL ESPESADOR (sin detención de rastras) Este tipo de detención se emplea cuando se espera que el equipo va a dejar de ser alimentado por 2 horas o menos. 1. Detenga la bomba de dosificación de floculante. 2. Detenga la alimentación al espesador. CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 5 DE 13

3. Continúe descargando normalmente el espesador hasta alcanzar un porcentaje de sólidos en el underflow de 30% a 35%. 4. Detenga el suministro de agua de dilución.

4.3

DETENCIÓN PROGRAMADA DEL ESPESADOR (con detención de rastras) Este tipo de detención se emplea cuando se espera que el equipo va a dejar de ser alimentado por más de 2 horas. 1. Detenga la bomba de dosificación de floculante. 2. Detenga la alimentación al espesador. 3. Continúe descargando el espesador hasta que la descarga bombeada consista básicamente de solución libre de sólidos. Luego detenga la bomba de descarga. 4. Detenga el suministro de agua de dilución. 5. Lave con agua a presión la línea de descarga de relaves. 6. Oprimir la botonera roja que detiene el motor que hace girar la rastra

4.4

DETENCIÓN DE EMERGENCIA DEL ESPESADOR En caso que el equipo deba ser detenido por emergencia, ya sea por corte de energía u otro motivo se recomienda seguir el siguiente procedimiento: 1. Abra la válvula manual de descarga y descargue todo el material del espesador. 2. En caso que sea factible, lave con agua a presión la línea de descarga de relaves. Si después de una detención total del equipo (programada o de emergencia) las rastras no arrancan se debe vaciar el espesador hasta que quede visible el lecho en las paredes del estanque y utilizar agua a alta presión para empujar los sólidos al cono de descarga del estanque hasta que las rastras puedan arrancar.

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 6 DE 13

SUGERENCIAS GENERALES DE OPERACIÓN

1. Una de las claves fundamentales en la operación exitosa de los esperadores de pasta es una correcta adición de floculante. Para lograr un consumo adecuado de floculante es necesario agregar éste, lo más diluido posible dispersándolo de la mejor manera posible sin agitación excesiva. Es recomendable que si el floculante se prepara en una concentración de 0,25% p/p, éste deberá ser diluido a aproximadamente 0,015% e inyectado a baja presión por vía de las cañerías rociadoras al pozo de alimentación central. En algunos casos, el floculante debe adicionarse antes debiendo mezclarse bien la pulpa para que se formen los flóculos. Sin embargo, hay veces en que pasa exactamente lo opuesto, rompiéndose los flóculos a causa de la adición temprana del floculante en un flujo turbulento que tiene lugar dentro del pozo de alimentación central antes de la entrada al lecho. 2. Tenga paciencia con cualquier cambio realizado. Proporcione un tiempo adecuado para que ellos sean efectivos y se logre visualizar su efecto. 3. Bajo condiciones de operación estables, realice cambios pequeños y espere durante 15 a 30 minutos. 4. En casos de emergencia en los que se requiera una velocidad de bombeo de descarga alta, aumente la velocidad durante un período de 30 seg. 5. El objetivo principal es obtener un rebalse claro y una descarga espesa. 6. Cuando tome muestras en el feedwell, haga uso de la escotilla suministrada. 7. Cuando tome muestras de la descarga, permita que la pulpa corra desde el punto de muestreo durante 5-10 seg antes de tomar la muestra. 8. Antes de activar la modalidad automática, trate (De acuerdo a la Experiencia) de lograr que la unidad opere cercana a los puntos deseados de torque, nivel de cama, dosificación de polímero, y velocidad de bombeo de descarga para el tonelaje de operación. 9. Use cañerías o mangueras flexibles y acoples rápidos para la conexión con las cañerías rociadoras de floculante con el fin de facilitar el acceso para realizar pruebas, limpieza, etc.

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 7 DE 13

DIAGNÓSTICO DE PROBLEMAS EN LA OPERACIÓN

NOTA: El procedimiento de operación que se describe a continuación puede necesitar algo de modificación sobre la base de la experiencia obtenida durante el comisionamiento de las unidades. En particular, la cantidad y puntos de agregado óptimos del floculante se establecerán durante el comisionamiento o los meses iniciales de operación.

Como regla general para la operación del espesador, es útil considerar las siguientes situaciones y posibles soluciones:

Problema: Torque bajo y Nivel de cama bajo Posible causa

Posible solución

Reducción de flujo de alimentación Densidad de alimentación baja

1. Chequee el flujo de alimentación y la densidad de descarga. 2. Reduzca velocidad de descarga en la bomba de UF.

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 8 DE 13

Problema: Torque bajo y Nivel de cama alto Posible causa

Posible solución

Floculación insuficiente causada por:

1. Chequee el flujo de alimentación y la densidad de descarga y ajuste la dosificación de floculante según la dosis requerida (si es necesario). Si continua el problema, aumente la dosificación de polímero en 10 15% y espere 15 minutos con tal de observar resultados.

1. Aumento del flujo de alimentación sin suficiente aumento del floculante. 2. Aumento de la densidad de sólidos en la alimentación. 3. Rotura en la línea de suministro de floculante. 4. Bomba de floculante detenida. 5. Problema de mezclado en el estanque de floculante. 6. Bloqueo de los rociadores.

2. Revise el correcto funcionamiento de la planta de floculante. 3. Revise el funcionamiento de los rociadores.

Problema: Torque alto y Nivel de cama bajo Posible causa

Posible solución

Floculación excesiva causada por: 1. La velocidad de la bomba de floculante se ha ajustado accidentalmente en un punto demasiado alto. 2. Se está preparando una solución demasiado concentrada en la planta de floculante.

1. Reduzca la dosificación de floculante en un 25% y acelere la bomba de descarga para devolver el torque a su punto de operación normal. 2. Si el torque continúa alto, disminuya el polímero gradualmente en reducciones de 10% cada una, esperando media hora para ver el efecto

3. Aumento de material grueso que puede haberse decantado antes 4. Revise el correcto funcionamiento de que tuviera lugar una buena de la planta de floculante. floculación.

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 9 DE 13

Problema: Torque alto y Nivel de cama alto Posible causa

Posible solución

1. Bloqueo de la línea de descarga de UF. 2. Bloqueo del cono de descarga – cavitación de la bomba y aumento de la presión de la línea

1. Acelere la bomba de descarga en incrementos de 10% y observe la presión de la línea de relaves.

3. La válvula de descarga se ha cerrado accidentalmente.

Problema: Las rastras no giran Posible causa

Posible solución

Falla en el motor eléctrico

Revise el suministro de energía

Falla en manguera hidráulica Pernos de acoplamiento sueltos Falla en el motor hidráulico

Inspeccione todas las mangueras en cuanto a filtraciones o roturas Revise el apriete de los pernos del eje de accionamiento Retire el motor y revise

Falla de la caja de engranajes Falla de la bomba hidráulica Válvula de by pass hidráulica desajustada Problemas eléctricos

Inspeccione la caja de engranajes en cuanto a ruidos discordantes o vibraciones Cuidadosamente desconecte la manguera para verificar si hay flujo Verifique y reajuste la válvula de bypass hidráulico (para que se dispare sobre el disparo eléctrico, es decir, a un torque de 100%) Inspeccione todos los fusibles y disparos del tablero

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 10 DE 13

Problema: Accionamiento de la rastra desliza Posible causa

Posible solución

Aire en las líneas hidráulicas

Realizar purga de las líneas de aire.

Sellos de motor / bomba desgastado

Reemplazar

Problema: Caída del sistema por alto torque Posible causa

Posible solución

1. Bloqueo de la línea de descarga de UF 2. Bloqueo del cono de descarga – cavitación de la bomba y aumento de la presión de la línea 3. La válvula de descarga se ha cerrado accidentalmente

1. Seleccionar “operación local” con la rastra en neutro 2. Verificar la operación de la bomba de underflow 3. Limpiar embancamiento en el cono (flushing water) 4. Iniciar operación de la rastra manteniendo un torque bajo 40%.

Problema: Problemas con la bomba hidráulica Posible causa

Posible solución

1. Sobrecargas eléctricas en el motor

1. Verificar sobrecargas eléctricas en el motor

2. Nivel de aceite hidráulico 2. Verificar nivel de aceite hidráulico 3. Nivel de aceite en el reductor 3. Verificar el nivel de aceite en el reductor

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 11 DE 13

Problema: Medición incorrecta del nivel de interfase Posible causa

Posible solución

El Sensor de Interfase incorrectamente Revise manual del instrumento y calibrado calibre nuevamente Daño en el sensor de interfase

Inspeccionar sensor de interfase

Problema: Medición de torque incorrecta Posible causa

Posible solución Restrinja el flujo de la bomba para simular una presión de 0-100%.

Falla del transductor Recalibre el tablero del medidor por vía del transductor de torque Problema: Feedwell rebalsando Posible causa

Posible solución

Bloqueo del cono deflector restringe o impide el flujo a través de la tolva de alimentación

Cuando el espesador esté parcialmente vaciado, inspeccione el cono deflector en cuanto a bloqueos. Si ha pasado por él material muy grueso, es posible que esté bloqueado. En este caso, limpie y baje el cono en caso de que todavía se esté procesando este material.

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

4.5

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 12 DE 13

ESTRATEGIAS DE CONTROL DE PROCESO

a) Control de inventario

Un sensor de presión en el cono del underflow (Bed mass sensor) cuantifica el inventario de los sólidos 4mA = el tanque lleno de agua. 20mA = el tanque lleno pulpa a una altura definida. Esta es la medida relativa de masa de la cama y de esta manera es posible elaborar un lazo de control simple con la bomba de descarga de UF.

b) Control de la densidad de descarga UF La densidad puede medirse en la línea de descarga. Sin embargo, usando sólo la densidad para controlar el underflow la bomba no permite el control del inventario. La mejor opción para la lógica de control es usar un control en cascada donde la densidad de underflow es un lazo primario y la presión de la cama es un lazo secundario. Esta solución necesita una cuidadosa afinación y debe usarse con un buen control de la dosis de floculante.

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 13 DE 13

c) Control de floculante Medición nivel de interfase Para el control de la velocidad de la bomba de dosificación de floculante en un espesador HRT, puede usarse como variable de control la cama de material sólido, siempre que esta responda a los efectos de la floculación. Para ello se requiere un control estable del inventario de sólidos y por ello debe ser implementado el sensor de presión Bed mass sensor. La medición del nivel de la interfase se realiza a través de un sensor de nivel (LT).

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

1.5 N° Documento

MANUAL FILOSOFÍA DE CONTROL

Revisión

DQ130112-E30-000-IN-IN-001

PÁGINA 1 DE 1

2

Descripción FILOSOFÍA, ESTRATEGIAS Y TÁCTICAS DE CONTROL ESPESADOR PLANTA 325-TK-002

CAPÍTULO 1 MANUAL INSTALACIÓN OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS PROYECTO ESPERANZA ESPESADOR 36M

SUMINISTRO DE EQUIPOS Proyecto Nº DQ130112

MANUAL FILOSOFÍA, ESTRATEGIAS Y TÁCTICAS DE CONTROL ESPESADOR PLANTA 325-TK-601 Documento Nº DQ130112-E30-000-IN-IN-001

REV

Aprobación Cliente :

_____________________________________________

Fecha:

_____________________________________________

DESCRIPCIÓN

PREPARÓ

REVISÓ

APROBÓ

FECHA

2

ACTUALIZA TAGS Y ALCANCE

L.C.B.

J.S.M.

J.S.M.

25-06-2014

1

ACTUALIZA TAGS NUMBERS

L.C.B.

J.S.M.

J.S.M.

09-04-2014

0

EMITIDO PARA CONSTRUCCION

L.C.B.

J.S.M.

J.S.M.

29-01-2014

B

EMITIDO PARA INFORMACIÓN

L.C.B.

J.S.M.

J.S.M.

13-12-2013

A

PARA COORDINACIÓN INTERNA

L.C.B.

J.U.G.

J.S.M.

05-12-2013

ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS PROYECTO ESPERANZA ESPESADOR 36M

FILOSOFÍA, ESTRATEGIAS Y TÁCTICAS DE CONTROL DQ130112-E30-000-IN-IN-001 Revisión 2

Contenido

Página

1

ALCANCE........................................................................................................................ 3

2

OBJETIVO ....................................................................................................................... 4

3

FILOSOFÍA DE CONTROL (P & ID DQ-130112-G2856-T10-0250) ................................. 5

3.1

PRINCIPIO DE OPERACIÓN .......................................................................................... 5

3.2

FEEDWELL DE ALIMENTACIÓN CENTRAL................................................................... 5

3.3

ESTRATEGIA DE CONTROL .......................................................................................... 6

3.3.1

ACCIONAMIENTO HIDRÁULICO DE MOVIMIENTO ................................................... 6

3.3.2

ACCIONAMIENTO DE LEVANTE DE RASTRA ........................................................... 8

3.3.3

MEDICIÓN DE INTERFASE......................................................................................... 8

3.3.4

MASA DE CAMA .......................................................................................................... 9

4

TACTICA DE CONTROL ............................................................................................... 10

4.1

PARTIR / PARAR .......................................................................................................... 10

4.2

DIRECCIÓN DE RASTRA ............................................................................................. 10

4.3

LEVANTE AUTOMÁTICO DE RASTRA......................................................................... 10

4.4

SISTEMA DE SEGURIDAD DE LEVANTE RASTRA ..................................................... 12

4.5

MOVIMIENTO MANUAL DE RASTRA........................................................................... 12

4.6

BAJO NIVEL DE ACEITE EN RESERVORIO DE UNIDAD HIDRÁULICA ..................... 12

4.7

TEMPERATURA DE ACEITE HIDRÁULICO ................................................................. 12

4.8

BAJO NIVEL EN LA UNIDAD REDUCTORA ................................................................. 13

4.9

TRIP DE TORQUE DE RASTRA ................................................................................... 13

4.10

MEDICIÓN DE INTERFASE O NIVEL DE CAMA .......................................................... 13

4.11

MASA DE CAMA ........................................................................................................... 13

5

SISTEMA DE CONTROL ............................................................................................... 14

6

APENDICE A: DIAGRAMA DE LEVANTE AUTOMATICO DE RASTRA........................ 15

Outotec (Chile) S.A. I:\MINPRO\DQ130112\T10\Z_TRABAJO\IN\IN\Filosofia de Control\R2\DQ130112-E30-000-IN-IN-001 R2.doc

Página 2 de 15

ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS PROYECTO ESPERANZA ESPESADOR 36M

1

FILOSOFÍA, ESTRATEGIAS Y TÁCTICAS DE CONTROL DQ130112-E30-000-IN-IN-001 Revisión 2

ALCANCE Este documento establece la Filosofía de Control en el ámbito de Ingeniería de Detalles, donde se describe el funcionamiento del Espesador de concentrado de cobre de 36m diámetro 325-TK-601 en planta de concentrado, diseñado para Compañía Minera Antofagasta Minerals dentro del marco del Proyecto Esperanza.

Outotec (Chile) S.A. I:\MINPRO\DQ130112\T10\Z_TRABAJO\IN\IN\Filosofia de Control\R2\DQ130112-E30-000-IN-IN-001 R2.doc

Página 3 de 15

ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS PROYECTO ESPERANZA ESPESADOR 36M

2

FILOSOFÍA, ESTRATEGIAS Y TÁCTICAS DE CONTROL DQ130112-E30-000-IN-IN-001 Revisión 2

OBJETIVO El objetivo principal de un espesador es recuperar agua del relave o concentrado. Una vez que la pulpa llega al espesador, se le adiciona floculante para sedimentar los sólidos con el fin de lograr la separación de las partículas, las cuales se depositan en el fondo de este espesador. La superficie superior de la cama de pulpa depositada en el fondo forma una interfase bien definida, que tiene sobre ella una capa de líquido clarificado, el cual es recuperado por rebalse.

Outotec (Chile) S.A. I:\MINPRO\DQ130112\T10\Z_TRABAJO\IN\IN\Filosofia de Control\R2\DQ130112-E30-000-IN-IN-001 R2.doc

Página 4 de 15

ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS PROYECTO ESPERANZA ESPESADOR 36M

3 3.1

FILOSOFÍA, ESTRATEGIAS Y TÁCTICAS DE CONTROL DQ130112-E30-000-IN-IN-001 Revisión 2

FILOSOFÍA DE CONTROL (P & ID DQ-130112-G2856-T10-0250) PRINCIPIO DE OPERACIÓN El espesador HRT (High Rate Thickener) está diseñado para espesar lodos minerales, obteniendo un concentrado de alta consistencia; y al mismo tiempo, un líquido clarificado para su reutilización en la planta. El espesador es alimentando por la parte superior mediante una tubería (Feed Pipe), la que desemboca tangencialmente en la parte central del espesador (Feedwell). Este concentrado se mezcla con un agente químico diluido (polímero floculante), el cual se adosa a las partículas sólidas para formar grandes “flóculos”, que son precipitados por la fuerza gravitacional. Este precipitado se deposita en el fondo del espesador para formar una cama de concentrado produciéndose una interfaz bien definida entre esta cama y el líquido aclarado sobre ella. Para medir el nivel de esta interfaz se utiliza un sensor / transmisor de nivel en la parte superior del espesador. El espesador utiliza un feedwell patentado para asegurar la eficiencia de floculación. Y además se incorpora un diseño de rastrillo que mejora la permeabilidad y liberación de agua del lodo mineral. El líquido clarificado (Overflow) cae mediante rebalse a una canaleta periférica (Overflow Launder) ubicado en la parte superior del espesador, este liquido clarificado (Overflow) se recupera para ser reutilizado otros procesos dentro de la planta. El lodo engrosado se va acumulando en un cono central en la base del espesador mediante un mecanismo de rastrillo (rastra o Rake). Y luego se bombea a la siguiente etapa del proceso de acuerdo a la masa medida mediante un sensor de presión en el cono central. El espesador está provisto de brazos de rastras equipados con cuchillas dispuestas para barrer la totalidad del fondo una vez por revolución. Las rastras desplazan los sólidos hacia el centro (Cono Undeflow), ayudando también a mantener en movimiento la cama y compactar los sólidos en el mismo.

3.2

FEEDWELL DE ALIMENTACIÓN CENTRAL La pulpa entrante ingresa tangencialmente al feedwell de alimentación circular produciendo una suave mezcla de la pulpa y floculante, el feedwell está diseñado de tal manera de producir una dilución óptima que maximiza la sedimentación de sólidos y liberación de agua, sin la necesidad de agregar agua adicional.

Outotec (Chile) S.A. I:\MINPRO\DQ130112\T10\Z_TRABAJO\IN\IN\Filosofia de Control\R2\DQ130112-E30-000-IN-IN-001 R2.doc

Página 5 de 15

ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS PROYECTO ESPERANZA ESPESADOR 36M

3.3

FILOSOFÍA, ESTRATEGIAS Y TÁCTICAS DE CONTROL DQ130112-E30-000-IN-IN-001 Revisión 2

ESTRATEGIA DE CONTROL El sistema de rotación de rastra consiste en una unidad hidráulica (Power Pack) conectado a un motor hidráulico, el que está directamente acoplado a una caja de engranaje planetario como reductor final del accionamiento (GearBox). El eje de salida del reductor está acoplado al eje de accionamiento de la Rastra. El reductor está montado sobre una base acoplada a cuatro cilindros de levante (Sistema de Levante Rastra) permitiendo un levante máximo de 600mm. El torque es medido indirectamente mediante el transductor de presión OT-9700 montado en el Power Pack junto con el switch de presión alto OSH-9702A (95% Torque Nominal). Mientras que la posición de levante de rastra es medida con el sensor de posición ZIT-9703 y los límites de carrera ZSH-9701A; ZSL-9701B montados en la estructura de esta unidad.

3.3.1

Accionamiento Hidráulico de Movimiento El accionamiento hidráulico de Movimiento incorpora: La Selección de modos Local / Remoto que sólo podrá ser seleccionado desde consola de operaciones (PCS Cliente). Existen dos formas de control del espesador: Automático ó Manual. El control “Automático” corresponde al control del torque levantando la Rastra según lógica de control instaurada en el sistema de control del cliente (DCS) y replicada en el panel o controlador local (suministrado por otros) en el

Outotec (Chile) S.A. I:\MINPRO\DQ130112\T10\Z_TRABAJO\IN\IN\Filosofia de Control\R2\DQ130112-E30-000-IN-IN-001 R2.doc

Página 6 de 15

ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS PROYECTO ESPERANZA ESPESADOR 36M

FILOSOFÍA, ESTRATEGIAS Y TÁCTICAS DE CONTROL DQ130112-E30-000-IN-IN-001 Revisión 2

espesador (se replica ante una eventual falla o perdida de comunicación). El control “Manual” significa que el levante y giro de la Rastra se realiza inhabilitando la lógica de control de torque, actuando mediante comandos desde consola o localmente en terreno según sea el Modo Remoto ó Local respectivamente. En modo de operación “Remoto”, el control y monitoreo es realizado desde Consola ya sea de forma Automático ó Manual mediante comunicación Profibus DP. En este modo no se podrá comandar ningún movimiento mediante el Panel Control, pero si puede ser detenido mediante parada de emergencia HS-9702H o la lógica de protección de la rastra programada en el DCS o Controlador del del Panel Local (suministrado por otros). En modo de operación “Local”, los comando de movimiento y giro de la rastra, consisten en selectores de tres posiciones tipo JOG, es decir que se debe mantener accionado el comando en la posición deseada y al soltar vuelve a una posición Neutra, esto con el fin de mantener siempre una condición neutra en el espesador de manera que al pasar de remoto / Local no existan problemas de operación. El comando para subir/bajar Rastra es HS-9702C y el comando de Giro directa/reversa es HS-9702H, al accionar estos comando actuarán sobre solenoides en la unidad hidráulica para producir los movimientos deseados. En la forma de operación “Automático”, los movimientos de la rastra serán gobernados de acuerdo a la Táctica de Control descrita el punto 4.3. El switch de presión OSH-9703A que se acciona con el 95% del torque activara la alarma OAH-9703A en el panel local (por otros). La activación de este Switch provocará la detención de la unidad hidráulica y con ello el giro de la rastra, permitiendo sólo el movimiento vertical de la rastra hasta que se levante la condición de alarma. El switch de bajo nivel de aceite hidráulico (LSL-9703C) en el reservorio de la unidad, al ser activado encenderá una alarma de advertencia LAL-9703C. De igual forma se considera un switch en el Gear Box LSL-9703B que encenderá una alarma de nivel bajo LAL-9703B. La activación de estos switch provocará la detención de la unidad hidráulica automáticamente. Sensor de temperatura TT-9699, con el cual detecta la alta temperatura de aceite hidráulico indicando alarma de temperatura alta TAH-9699. Medición de Torque: La presión hidráulica de la unidad reductora (Torque de Rastra) se mostrara en un indicador digital con escala de 0 -100% en panel local (suministrado por otros). Esta presión es medida con el transductor de presión OT-9700 y en forma local será mostrada en el indicador de presión PI-9700. Outotec (Chile) S.A. I:\MINPRO\DQ130112\T10\Z_TRABAJO\IN\IN\Filosofia de Control\R2\DQ130112-E30-000-IN-IN-001 R2.doc

Página 7 de 15

ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS PROYECTO ESPERANZA ESPESADOR 36M

FILOSOFÍA, ESTRATEGIAS Y TÁCTICAS DE CONTROL DQ130112-E30-000-IN-IN-001 Revisión 2

La protección mecánica contra torque alto será el uso de una válvula de alivio de presión ajustada manualmente al 100% torque Nominal, esta actúa de respaldo a la protección eléctrica precedente, eliminando la posibilidad de sobrecarga del sistema motriz. 3.3.2

Accionamiento de levante de Rastra Para poder controlar el torque de la rastra (Forma de Control Automático) se cuenta con un sistema hidráulico de levante de rastra, si el nivel de torque alcanza o sobrepasa el 50% de la carga total de torque las rastras deberán subir automáticamente y si el torque es menor que el 40% el sistema hidráulico deberá bajarlas. Para accionar el levantar o bajar rastras, se actúa sobre una solenoide de tres posiciones con la que cuenta la unidad para este fin. Para poder medir la posición de la rastra se cuenta con los siguientes instrumentos: La posición de elevación de rastra será medida por el Sensor de Posición ZT9704 enviando esta señal al panel local de control (por otros), donde se puede visualizar este valor. Además se cuenta con un switch de posición alto ZSH-9702A y un switch de posición bajo de ZSL-9702B, para determinar los límites de carrera de la rastra superior e inferior y tomar la acción inmediata de detención de movimiento. Por último, la unidad hidráulica cuenta con un filtro de aceite hidráulico el cual avisa físicamente el cambio de filtro y junto con ello acciona un switch (PDSH-9705) cuya señal es enviada al panel de control (por otros), en el cual se deberá desplegar una alarma de cambio de filtro. El sistema de levante cuenta con un sistema de seguridad hidroneumático que consiste en un acumulador de nitrógeno-aceite hidráulico que permite el levante automático de la rastra en caso de corte de energía o falla hidráulica. Esta unidad cuenta con un transductor de presión PT-9706 con el cual mide el valor de presión en el acumulador, además de un indicador de presión PI-9706 en el cual se puede leer este valor.

3.3.3

Medición de Interfase La medición de nivel de interfase será entregada por el instrumento LIT-9697, éste entrega señales que indican los niveles de la fase de agua clara y fase intermedia. Esta señal será enviada al sistema de control del cliente (DCS de la Planta).

Outotec (Chile) S.A. I:\MINPRO\DQ130112\T10\Z_TRABAJO\IN\IN\Filosofia de Control\R2\DQ130112-E30-000-IN-IN-001 R2.doc

Página 8 de 15

ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS PROYECTO ESPERANZA ESPESADOR 36M

3.3.4

FILOSOFÍA, ESTRATEGIAS Y TÁCTICAS DE CONTROL DQ130112-E30-000-IN-IN-001 Revisión 2

Masa de Cama El transmisor de presión PIT-9698 ubicado en la pared lateral del cono de descarga genera una señal en FieldBus Foundation, la que mide la masa de lecho entre 0 y 100%. Esta señal será enviada al sistema de control del cliente (DCS de la Planta).

Outotec (Chile) S.A. I:\MINPRO\DQ130112\T10\Z_TRABAJO\IN\IN\Filosofia de Control\R2\DQ130112-E30-000-IN-IN-001 R2.doc

Página 9 de 15

ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS PROYECTO ESPERANZA ESPESADOR 36M

4 4.1

FILOSOFÍA, ESTRATEGIAS Y TÁCTICAS DE CONTROL DQ130112-E30-000-IN-IN-001 Revisión 2

TACTICA DE CONTROL PARTIR / PARAR Cuando se hace partir la rastra, el motor eléctrico de la unidad hidráulica sigue funcionando a menos que: Se detecte bajo nivel de aceite hidráulico en el reservorio de la unidad hidráulica. Se detecte una señal de alerta de torque alto (95% Max Torque). Exista una falla de motor en MCC. Mientras el motor este energizado, una luz Roja indicará que la rastra está en funcionamiento.

4.2

DIRECCIÓN DE RASTRA La dirección de rastra será comandada en modo remoto desde consola o en modalidad manual desde el Panel de Control (suministrado por otros) mediante un switch tipo JOG. Este comando debe contar con tres posiciones: Adelante / Neutro / Reversa, la posición normal del comando es “Neutro”, para mover la rastra se debe mantener accionado el comando en la dirección que se desee, una lógica en el sistema de control o en el controlador local determinará los tiempos de transición de un modo a otro, básicamente cuando se cambia la dirección con la unidad hidráulica funcionando es necesario pausar al menos 5-10 segundos en la posición “Neutro”, esto para prevenir daños en la unidad. (Valores se deberán ajustar durante la puesta en marcha) Al seleccionar “Adelante” se energizará la “Solenoide Directa”, de la misma manera si se escoge “Reversa” se energizará la “Solenoide de Reversa”. Se Des-energizan ambas cuando se escoge la modalidad “Neutro”. Existen indicadores en el panel que mostrarán en que modalidad de giro está la unidad.

4.3

LEVANTE AUTOMÁTICO DE RASTRA El transductor de presión del power drive (Torque) de la rastra entrega una señal 0 – 20 mA correspondiente al 0 – 100% del torque de la rastra, esta señal es alambrada al panel de control local (Controlador ABB, suministrado por otros) y a su vez al sistema de control del cliente (DCS) donde es utilizada para el control de Levante-Rastra. En el Apéndice A se muestra un diagrama de flujo de la lógica de control de Levante-Rastra. La rastra se levanta automáticamente energizando su respectiva solenoide cuando: El torque supera el 50% del máximo torque y

Outotec (Chile) S.A. I:\MINPRO\DQ130112\T10\Z_TRABAJO\IN\IN\Filosofia de Control\R2\DQ130112-E30-000-IN-IN-001 R2.doc

Página 10 de 15

ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS PROYECTO ESPERANZA ESPESADOR 36M

FILOSOFÍA, ESTRATEGIAS Y TÁCTICAS DE CONTROL DQ130112-E30-000-IN-IN-001 Revisión 2

El Limit Switch Superior de la posición Rastra no está activado y Mientras el modo de operación sea Auto para el panel de control Hasta que: El torque este por debajo del 45% del máximo torque ó El Limit Switch Superior de posición rastra se accione La rastra se baja automáticamente energizando su repectiva solenoide cuando: El torque es inferior al 40% del máximo torque y El Limit Switch Inferior de posición Rastra no está accionado y Mientras el modo de operación sea Auto en el panel de control Hasta que: El torque alcanza el 50% del máximo torque ó El Limit Switch Inferior de posición Rastra es accionado La secuencia automática de bajar rastra consiste en un temporizador que cuando se inicia el comando de bajar rastra, energiza la solenoide correspondiente por 2 segundos y la des-energiza por (0.5 x el tiempo que toma 1 revolución del mecanismo de la rastra) (Valores se deberán ajustar durante la puesta en marcha). Cuando la rastra alcanza su más baja posición el Limit Switch Inferior (N.C:): Enciende indicador de Rastra Completamente Abajo. Des-energiza la solenoide de bajar rastra y Deshabilita el botón de Bajar Rastra Cuando la rastra alcanza su más alta posición el Limit Switch Superior (N.C:): Enciende el indicador de Rastra Completamente Arriba. Des-energiza la solenoide de subir rastra y Deshabilita el botón de Subir Rastra

Outotec (Chile) S.A. I:\MINPRO\DQ130112\T10\Z_TRABAJO\IN\IN\Filosofia de Control\R2\DQ130112-E30-000-IN-IN-001 R2.doc

Página 11 de 15

ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS PROYECTO ESPERANZA ESPESADOR 36M

4.4

FILOSOFÍA, ESTRATEGIAS Y TÁCTICAS DE CONTROL DQ130112-E30-000-IN-IN-001 Revisión 2

SISTEMA DE SEGURIDAD DE LEVANTE RASTRA El transductor de presión del Acumulador de seguridad (PT-9706) entrega una señal 4 – 20 mA correspondiente al 0 – 290 [bar], esta señal es alambrada al panel de control (PLC) donde es utilizada para el control de llenado del Acumulador. Este acumulador debe estar en un rango de presiones de 90 a 250 [bar], para ello se cuenta con dos solenoides “Carga Acumulador” (N.O.) y “Descarga Acumulador” (N.O.). La válvula de “Carga Acumulador” (N.O) se debe activar energizando su respectiva solenoide cuando: La presión del Acumulador sea menor que 90 [bar]. Hasta que: La presión del Acumulador sea igual a 250 [bar]. La válvula de “Descarga Acumulador” (N.O) se debe activar energizando su respectiva solenoide en todo momento a menos que exista un corte de energía, en tal caso abrirá de forma natural dejando actuar al sistema de seguridad.

4.5

MOVIMIENTO MANUAL DE RASTRA La Rastra puede ser subida o bajada manualmente girando el selector al lado respectivo, siempre y cuando desde consola sea activado el modo manual. Girando el selector para subir la Rastra se energizará la solenoide correspondiente mientras no esté activado el limit switch superior. Girando el selector para bajar la Rastra se energizará la solenoide correspondiente mientras no esté activado el limit switch inferior ó el torque sea mayor que 50%.

4.6

BAJO NIVEL DE ACEITE EN RESERVORIO DE UNIDAD HIDRÁULICA El switch de nivel bajo de aceite hidráulico (LSL-9703C) en el reservorio de aceite de la unidad hidráulica, detiene y deshabilita la unidad hidráulica, encendiendo la luz piloto que indica bajo nivel de aceite hidráulico.

4.7

TEMPERATURA DE ACEITE HIDRÁULICO Sensor de temperatura TT-9699, detecta la alta temperatura de aceite hidráulico la que se indica como alarma de temperatura alta TAH-9699. La temperatura también puede

Outotec (Chile) S.A. I:\MINPRO\DQ130112\T10\Z_TRABAJO\IN\IN\Filosofia de Control\R2\DQ130112-E30-000-IN-IN-001 R2.doc

Página 12 de 15

ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS PROYECTO ESPERANZA ESPESADOR 36M

FILOSOFÍA, ESTRATEGIAS Y TÁCTICAS DE CONTROL DQ130112-E30-000-IN-IN-001 Revisión 2

vrse en el indicador de tempartura TI-9699 instalada en el reservorio de la unidad hidráulica. 4.8

BAJO NIVEL EN LA UNIDAD REDUCTORA El Switch de Nivel Bajo (N.O.) de la unidad reductora (GearBox) enciende el piloto que indica bajo nivel de aceite en GearBox, al ser activado.

4.9

TRIP DE TORQUE DE RASTRA En condición de Trip de torque de rastra por activación el switch de presión alto (N.C.) de la unidad hidráulica, se detiene el motor eléctrico del sistema de giro encendiendo el piloto correspondiente a la alarma de Torque Alto y deshabilitando la función bajada de rastra hasta que desaparezca dicha condición. Este trip se produce cuando se alcanza el 95% del torque máximo de operación.

4.10 MEDICIÓN DE INTERFASE O NIVEL DE CAMA La medición de nivel de interfase esta dado por el instrumento LIT-9697 montado en el puente del espesador, éste instrumento entrega señales mediante Fieldbus Foundation al PCS, dichas señales representan los niveles de la fase de agua clara o fase intermedia. 4.11 MASA DE CAMA El transmisor de presión PIT-9698 ubicado en la pared lateral de la caja de descarga genera una señal en Fieldbus Foundation al PCS, la que mide la masa de lecho entre 0 y 100%. Esta señal se usa normalmente para controlar la extracción de descarga o bomba de underflow

Outotec (Chile) S.A. I:\MINPRO\DQ130112\T10\Z_TRABAJO\IN\IN\Filosofia de Control\R2\DQ130112-E30-000-IN-IN-001 R2.doc

Página 13 de 15

ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS PROYECTO ESPERANZA ESPESADOR 36M

5

FILOSOFÍA, ESTRATEGIAS Y TÁCTICAS DE CONTROL DQ130112-E30-000-IN-IN-001 Revisión 2

SISTEMA DE CONTROL El sistema de control de este espesador considera respetar el estándar de Minera Esperanza de modo que toda la lógica de control del espesador se realizará desde el sistema de control del cliente (DCS), la cual además estará respaldada en un controlador en el panel de control local (suministrado por otros), de modo que el equipo quede protegido ante una eventual pérdida de comunicación o falla.

Outotec (Chile) S.A. I:\MINPRO\DQ130112\T10\Z_TRABAJO\IN\IN\Filosofia de Control\R2\DQ130112-E30-000-IN-IN-001 R2.doc

Página 14 de 15

FILOSOFÍA, ESTRATEGIAS Y TÁCTICAS DE CONTROL DQ130112-E30-000-IN-IN-001 Revisión 2

ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS PROYECTO ESPERANZA ESPESADOR 36M

6

APENDICE A: DIAGRAMA DE LEVANTE AUTOMATICO DE RASTRA

Comienzo

Torque es Menor que 40 %

Torque es Mayor que 50 %

NO

SI

SI

NO

SI

Limit Switch Inferior activado?

Limit Switch Superior activado?

NO

NO

Bajar Rastra

Subir Rastra

(2 sec por ½ revolución )

(Cosntante)

Torque es Mayor que 50 % SI

Parar de Bajar Rastra

SI

NO

NO

Torque es Menor que 40 % SI

Parar de Subir Rastra

Outotec (Chile) S.A. I:\MINPRO\DQ130112\T10\Z_TRABAJO\IN\IN\Filosofia de Control\R2\DQ130112-E30-000-IN-IN-001 R2.doc

Página 15 de 15

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

DISPOCISIÓN GENERAL

2.1 N° Documento

PÁGINA 1 DE 1

Revisión

Descripción

DQ130112-G2856-T10-0001

3

Dimensiones Generales Espesadores (GA)

DQ130112-G2856-T10-0100

1

Cuadro de cargas

DQ130112-G2856-T10-0101

1

Planta y Cargas

CAPÍTULO 2 PLANOS DE MONTAJE Y DIAGRAMAS

DQ130112 JS

09.04.2014

DQ130112 JS

20/11/13

DQ130112 JS

20/11/13

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PLANOS DE MONTAJE

2.2 N° Documento

PÁGINA 1 DE 1

Revisión

Descripción

G2856-T10-GAISO

1

Plano de Montaje - Isometric View

G2856-T10-GA001

0

Plano de Montaje - General Arregment

G2856-T10-GA002

0

Plano de Montaje - Support Structure, Underflow Cone

G2856-T10-GA003

0

Plano de Montaje - Floor Plate

G2856-T10-GA004

1

Plano de Montaje - Tank

G2856-T10-GA005

1

Plano de Montaje - Bridge, Monoriel Beem, Grating, Handrail

G2856-T10-GA006

0

Plano de Montaje - Drive Shaft, Long/Short Rake Arm

G2856-T10-GA007

0

Plano de Montaje - Feedweel - Feedpipe

G2856-T10-GA008

0

Plano de Montaje - Miscelaneo

G2856-T10-GA009

0

Plano de Montaje - Miscelaneo

G2856-T10-GA010

0

-

-

Plano de Montaje - Meschanism Tabla de Torque de Apriete de Pernos

CAPÍTULO 2 PLANOS DE MONTAJE Y DIAGRAMAS

DQ130112 JS

16/05/14

DQ130112 JS

16/05/14

DQ130112 JS

16/05/14

TABLAS DE TORQUE APRIETE PERNOS

FACTORES DE CORRECCIÓN DE TORQUE LUBRICACIÓN O SUPERFICIE CAMBIOS EN EL TORQUE Aceite

Reducir torque 15% to 25%

Pelicula seca (Teflon o basado en molibdeno (eg. Reducir torque 50% Molicote, MoS2) Encerado seco (Cetyl alcohol) Reducir torque 50% Superficie de Cromo No cambia Superficie de Cadmio Reducir torque 25% Superficie de Zinc Reducir torque 15% ASTM A325 / ASTM A449 / SAE GRADO 5 Torque de Ajuste (ft lbs) Tamaño Perno Encerado Galvanizado Seco 1/4 4 11 8 5/16 9 11 8 3/8 15 39 31 7/16 25 62 49 1/2 38 94 75 9/16 54 136 109 5/8 75 188 150 3/4 133 333 266 7/8 215 537 429 1 322 805 644 1 1/8 397 992 794 1 1/4 560 1.400 1.120 1 3/8 734 1.836 1.469 1 1/2 975 2.438 1.950 1 3/4 1.143 2.857 2.286 2 1.719 4.297 3.438 2 1/4 2.514 6.284 5.027 2 1/2 3.438 8.594 6.875 2 3/4 4.660 11.651 9.321 3 6.157 15.391 12.313

Torque de Ajuste (Nm) Encerado Galvanizado Seco 5,4 15,0 10,9 12 15 11 20 53 42 34 84 67 52 128 102 73 185 148 102 256 204 181 453 362 292 730 583 438 1.095 876 540 1.349 1.080 762 1.904 1.523 998 2.497 1.998 1.326 3.316 2.652 1.554 3.886 3.109 2.338 5.844 4.676 3.419 8.546 6.837 4.676 11.688 9.350 6.338 15.845 12.677 8.374 20.932 16.746

Página 1 de 3

TABLAS DE TORQUE APRIETE PERNOS

ASTM A354-BD / ASTM A490 / SAE GRADE 8 Tamaño Perno 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/8 1 1/4 1 3/8 1 1/2 1 3/4 2 2 1/4 2 1/2 2 3/4 3 3 1/4 3 1/2 3 3/4 4

Torque de Ajuste (ft lbs) Encerado Seco 6 12 12 25 22 44 35 70 53 107 77 154 106 212 188 376 303 606 454 909 644 1.287 938 1.875 1.191 2.382 1.581 3.161 2.494 4.988 3.750 7.500 5.484 10.969 7.500 15.000 8.897 17.794 11.753 23.507 15.143 30.286 19.133 38.266 23.773 47.545 29.085 58.100

Torque de Ajuste (Nm) Encerado Seco 8,2 16 16 34 30 60 48 95 72 146 105 209 144 288 256 511 412 824 617 1.236 876 1.750 1.276 2.550 1.620 3.240 2.150 4.299 3.392 6.784 5.100 10.200 7.458 14.918 10.200 20.400 12.100 24.200 15.984 31.970 20.594 41.189 26.021 52.042 32.331 64.661 39.556 79.016

Página 2 de 3

TABLAS DE TORQUE APRIETE PERNOS

TABLA DE TORQUE PARA PERNOS METRICOS O MECANICOS Seco Galvanizado + MoS2 Hilo Grado Grado Diámetro Paso 4.6 5.6 8.8 10.9 12.9 4.6 5.6 8.8 10.9 12.9 Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm M4 0,70 1,0 1,4 3,0 4,4 5 0,8 1,0 2,3 3,3 3,8 M5 0,80 2,0 2,7 5,9 8,7 10 1,5 2,0 4,4 6,5 7,5 M6 1,00 3,5 4,6 10 15 18 2,6 3,5 7,5 11,3 13,5 M8 1,25 8,4 11 25 36 43 6,3 8,3 18,8 27,0 32,3 M10 1,50 17 22 49 72 84 12,8 16,5 36,8 54,0 63,0 M12 1,75 29 39 85 125 145 21,8 29,3 63,8 93,8 108,8 M14 2,00 46 62 135 200 235 34,5 46,5 101,3 150,0 176,3 M16 2,00 71 95 210 310 365 53,3 71,3 157,5 232,5 273,8 M18 2,50 97 130 300 430 500 72,8 97,5 225,0 322,5 375,0 M20 2,50 138 184 425 610 710 103,5 138,0 318,8 457,5 532,5 M22 2,50 186 250 580 820 960 139,5 187,5 435,0 615,0 720,0 M24 3,00 235 315 730 1.050 1.220 176,3 236,3 547,5 787,5 915,0 M27 3,00 350 470 1.100 1.550 1.800 262,5 352,5 825,0 1.162,5 1.350,0 M30 3,50 475 635 1.450 2.100 2.450 356,3 476,3 1.087,5 1.575,0 1.837,5 M33 3,50 645 865 1.970 2.770 3.330 483,8 648,8 1.477,5 2.077,5 2.497,5 M36 4,00 830 1.150 2.530 3.560 4.280 622,5 862,5 1.897,5 2.670,0 3.210,0

Página 3 de 3

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 1 DE 1

CIRCUITO HIDRÁULICO

2.3 N° Documento

Revisión

Descripción

PO-OU-DG-00

0

Dimensiones Generales - Unidad Hidráulica

PO-OU-EH-00

4

Esquema Hidráulico - Unidad Hidráulica

CAPÍTULO 2 PLANOS DE MONTAJE Y DIAGRAMAS

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

1675 1462,5

1008

F 1600

792,5

310

F 376,5

640

284

E

2085

1499

2463

1030

E

381

690

D

370

503

884

D

20

890

1637 4x

1677

14mm.

35

960

C

C

1565

NOTAS: - Capacidad Deposito Hidr ulico: 250 litros - Dimensiones del Tablero El ctrico considerado: 1000x800x300 mm. - Tolerancias Dimensionales seg n DIN 7168, Grado de Precisi n Basto.

B

GRADO DE PRECISION

8

7

6

63

mas de 30 hasta 120

mas de 120 hasta 315

mas de 315 hasta 1000

mas de 1000 hasta 2000

mas de 2000 hasta 4000

0.05

0.1

0.15

0.2

0.3

0.5

0.8

MEDIAN0

0.1

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.5

0.8

1.2

2

BASTO

0.15

0.2

0.5

0.8

1.2

2

3

4

REV 5

12.5

mas de 6 hasta 30

0.05

A NOTA: Este plano reemplaza a documento No. PO-DH-792 Dimensiones Generales

mas de 3 hasta 6

FINO

0 C B

A

0.8-0.4-0.2 6.3-3.2-1.6 mas de 0.5 hasta 3

09-01-2014 EMITIDO PARA VALIDACI N 07-01-2014 EMITIDO PARA APROBACI N 19-12-2013 EMITIDO PARA APROBACI N EMITIDO PARA REVISION Y 19-12-2013 APROBACION INTERNA FECHA DESCRIPCI N HISTORIAL DE REVISIONES 4

MODIFICACIONES

0.1-0.05

POR FECHA FIRMA

A.A.

A.A.

A.A.

19.12.13

06.01.14

08.01.14

1

2

3

DIMENSIONES FECHA GENERALES 19 Dic.13 FECHA REEMPLAZADO 5 POR DIB. N REEMPLAZA A DIBUJO N

4

Maestranza Diesel S.A.

CLIENTE J.S. J.S. DISE APROBADA REVIS APROB 3 H.P.

Proyectos Oleohidr ulica

NOMBRE A.Alvear H.Perez H.Perez

B

PDH 792 O.T. 16641 Esc.:

1:15

A FECHA Dimensiones Generales 20-11-2013 19-12-2013 PLANO N PO-OU-DG-00 U.Dim. mm. A2 1 / 1 19-12-2013 REF. A 2 1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

A

A

B

B NOTA: CONEXIONES CONEXIONES

A1 B1 A2 A3 A4 A5 B2 L

(MOTORES) (CILINDROS) (DRENAJE)

C

C A1

B1

L

A2

A3

A4

A5

B2

27

D

D

14

14 A1

14

B1

T1

A2

19

P1

E

P

17 Giro -

A

14

2 B

T1

T2

P1

P2

T

B2

A3

19

P

A

14

B

T2

T3

P2

P3

T

14

B3

A4

19

P

A

2 B

T4

P3

P4

X

20

P4

T

P

A

23

26

E

T

a

26 P T

1 A

B A

a P T

P

T4

19

A

16

14

1

2 B

T

P

A

B

T

21

F

T3

B4

24

APROBADO

18 1 P

A

B

P

T

A

2 B

F

T

A B a

b

22

POR: ..................................................... FIRMA: ..............................

21

P T 1 P

A

15

B

a

G

T

A B

B

A

X

25

b

G

P T

17 Levante -

14

NOTAS:

28

2.- ACEITE MINERAL ISO VG 46

14

B

H

32

9

32 31 30

32

A P

13 P= 11kW n= 1450rpm

11 Vg= 28 cc Q = 42 Lts/min

12

S

10 Vg= 4 cc Q = 6 Lts/min

B

A S

L1

L

17

16

7 8

5

4

31

29

I B

30

6

2

J

K

4 EMITIDO PARA DOSIER DE CALIDAD 3 EMITIDO PARA DOSIER DE CALIDAD 2 EMITIDO PARA DOSIER DE CALIDAD 1 0 D C B A REV.

L

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Bosch Rexroth Bosch Rexroth Bosch Rexroth

2 1 1

9RD0405 RDOD/057X4

Vivoil

1 1 1

26 25

M-3SED 6 UK1X/350CG110N9K4 4WE6 H 61 / EW110 N9 K4

Bosch Rexroth Bosch Rexroth

2 1

24 23 22

Z2FS K6 - 2 Z2S 6-2-6X 4WE6 J 61 / EW110 N9 K4

Bosch Rexroth Bosch Rexroth Bosch Rexroth

1 1 1

21 20 19

ZDBD S6 G 342/01

Bosch Rexroth Bosch Rexroth Bosch Rexroth

2 1 4

HED 8 OA-12 ABZMM63 - 250 BAR/MPA MBS-1750

Bosch Rexroth Bosch Rexroth Danfoss

1 3 2

Divisor de Flujo

Placa Base

18 17 16

1 Capacidad: 250 L.

3

HAB50-330-3X ABZSS30 DBDS 6 G1X/200

29 28 27

Acumulador de Vejiga Bloque de Seguridad

9

10

11

12

H.P. H.P. H.P. M.Z. A.A. A.A. H.P. A.A. A.A. POR FECHA

13

15 14 13

Minimess

1LE2321-2BB11-4GA3 | 11kW

Hydrotechnik Siemens

1 7 1

12 11 10

Campana de Montaje Bomba de Pistones Axiales Bomba de Engranajes

PR 300/155/434/4 A10VSO 28 DFR AZPF-11-005RRR01MB

HBE Bosch Rexroth Bosch Rexroth

1 1 1

9 8 7

Intercambiador de Calor Filtro de Retorno Elemento Filtro

BLK-4-4-ABB 10TEN0160 H10XLA00 1.0160 H10XL-A00-0-M

Bosch Rexroth Bosch Rexroth

1 1 1

6 5 4

Sensor de Temperatura Switch de Nivel/Temperatura Tapa de Llenado

NS 1 - NO / 300 SE2

HBE HBE

1 1 1

3 2 1

Visor de Nivel AB 40-40 / DN250

HBE Maestranza Diesel S.A.

1 1 1

Detalle/Modelo

Marca

Maestranza Diesel S.A.

H

I

J

K

Cant.

PDH 792 O.T. 16641 Esc.:

NOMBRE A.Alvear

FECHA 18-10-2013

H.Perez H.Perez

18-10-2013 21-10-2013 REF. A

14

L

UPH 11KW U.Dim. A2 1 / 1

15

16

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

P&ID

2.4 N° Documento DQ-130112-G2856-T10-0250

PÁGINA 1 DE 1

Revisión 5

Descripción P&ID TAG 325-TK-602

CAPÍTULO 2 PLANOS DE MONTAJE Y DIAGRAMAS

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

2.5 N° Documento

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 1 DE 1

DIAGRAMAS PANEL DE CONTROL

Revisión

Descripción

Nota: Panel de Control a ser suministrado por otros, fuera del alcance de suministro de Outotec.

CAPÍTULO 2 PLANOS DE MONTAJE Y DIAGRAMAS

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

MOTOR HIDRÁULICO

3.1 Equipo Espesador 36m 325-TK-002

PÁGINA 1 DE 1

Revisión NA

Descripción Catalogo Danfoss OMT 250

CAPÍTULO 3 DOCUMENTACIÓN DE COMPONENTES

Catalogue

Hydraulic motors OMT

s i k l c u c i i i l l u a l u r ra ydrau Hydra Hyd ydrau u H H s q i e c l i k u l k u i q u l a i r l a u r y d u a d r y H a r y d y cs H lics yd lik H H s i u e l c i a u u u l ra auliq ydra Hydr drau r r H y d d k H i y H Hy aulik raul ulik k k i i d r l l a y d Hy ue H Hydr ydrau ydrau d H H q e y i l u H e u uliq e u u e q q i e i l u l a u u q r u i q yd ydra ydra raul rauli d H H d y s y H s c s H i c l c i l s lics u u c a a i r r a l r d d u y y yd ydra drau H H k ulik s H y i H l H u a a ik ulik c r r i l d d u y y u a a H H r r a r d d y yd que que y H H i i y l l k i H u e u l u ics ra ydra drau q i l u raul y H d a r y H H cs e Hyd Hyd Low speed high torque motors

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Book 1 Partition 3

HK.13.B1.02

A wide range of hydraulic motors

OMT

OMV

OMTW OMS

OMPW

OMSS

OMP

OMR OMR

Danfoss is Europe's largest producer of low speed high torque hydraulic motors . We can offer more than 1600 different hydraulic motors, categorised in types, variants and sizes (incl. different shaft versions). The motors vary in size (rated displacement) from 8 cm3 to 800 cm3 per revolution. Speeds range up to approx. 2500 rpm for the smallest type and up to approx 600 rpm for the largest type. Maximum operating torques vary across the ranges from 1.3 daNm to 250 daNm (peak) and maximum power-outputs from 2.0 kW to 64 kW.

Characteristic features: • Smooth running over the entire speed range • Constant operating torque over a wide speed range • High starting torque • High return pressure without use of drain line • High efficiency • Long life under extreme operating conditions • Robust and compact design • High radial and axial bearing capacity • For applications in both open and closed loop hydraulic systems • Suitable for a wide variety of hydraulics fluids Variants Standard/Extended Programme The Danfoss metric motor programme has been divided into standard ranges and extended ranges.

Survey of literature with technical data on Danfoss hydraulic motors

Detailed data on all Danfoss motors can be found in our motor catalogue, which is divided into 4 individual subcatalogues: • General information on Danfoss hydraulic motors: function, use, selection of hydraulic motor, hydraulic systems, etc. • OML and OMM technical data on small motors.

2

HK.13.B-

OMM

OMH

OML

The standard ranges are characterised by technical features appealing to a large number of applicatons. The extended ranges are characterised by motors adapted to specific applications and comprising the following variants among others: • • • • • • • • • • • •

Motors with corrosion resistant parts Wheel motors with recessed mounting flange OMP, OMR motors with needle bearing Short motors without bearings Ultra short motors Motors with integrated drum brake Motors with integrated negative holding brake Motors with integrated flushing valve Actuator motors Compact motors; type OMN Motors with speed censor Motors with tacho connection

Planetary gears Danfoss represents a complete range of planetary gears with flanges and couplings designed for Danfoss hydraulic motors. The combination of motors and gears makes it possible to obtain completely smooth running at fractional speeds and torques up to 65.000 daNm. Examples of Danfoss hydraulic motor applications • Machines for agriculture and forestry • Mining machinery • Construction plant equipment and access platforms • Grass cutting machinery • Special vehicles • Ship's equipment and winches on fishing vessels • Machine tools • Woodworking and sawmill machinery • Plastic and rubber machinery etc.

• Technical data on medium sized motors: OMP, OMR and OMH • Technical data on large motors: OMS, OMT and OMV A general survey brochure on Danfoss hydraulic motors giving a quick motor reference based on power, torque, speed and capabilities.

Contents and data survey Contents Type OMS, OMSW, OMSS, OMS B Type OMT, OMTW, OMTS Type OMV, OMVW, OMVS Conversion factors

max. max max.

1000 min-1, 63 daNm, 780 min-1, 137 daNm, 630 min-1, 211 daNm,

21 kW 40 kW 64 kW

Page 4 20 36 48

Speed, torque and output

Continuous values

Intermittent values

Peak values

Max. speed

Max. torque

Max. output

The bar diagram above is used for a quick selection of relevant motor sizes for the application. The final motor size can be determined by using the function diagram for each motor size. Thread designation The designation G for pipe thread replaces the previous designation BSP.F, cf BS/ISO 228/1.

The function diagrams for - OMS can be found on pages 7 - 10 - OMT can be found on pages 25 - 27 - OMV can be found on pages 40 - 42.

HK.13.B-

The function diagrams are drawn on the basis of actual tests on a representative number of motors from our production. The diagrams apply to a return pressure between 5 and 10 bar when using mineral based hydraulic oil with a viscosity of 35 mm2/s and a temperature of 50°C. For further explanation concerning how to read and use the function diagrams, please consult the paragraph “Selection of motor size” in our catalogue “General Information”.

3

Hydraulic motor OMT

Code numbers and weight

Motor type

OMT 160

OMT 200

OMT 250

OMT 315

OMT 400

OMT 500

Cylindrical shaft

151B3000

151B3001

151B3002

151B3003

151B3004

151B3005

Splined shaft

151B3006

151B3007

151B3008

151B3009

151B3010

151B3011

Tapered shaft

151B3012

151B3013

151B3014

151B3015

151B3016

151B3017

P.t.o. shaft

151B3018

151B3019

151B3020

151B3021

151B3022

151B3023

Weight (kg)

20

20.5

21

22

23

24

Wheel motor Motor type

OMTW 160 OMTW 200

OMTW 250 OMTW 315 OMTW 400 OMTW 500

Cylindrical shaft

151B3024

151B3025

151B3026

151B3027

151B3028

151B3029

Tapered shaft

151B3030

151B3031

151B3032

151B3033

151B3034

151B3035

Weight (kg)

22

22.5

23

24

25

26

Motor type

OMTS 160

OMTS 200

OMTS 250

OMTS 315

OMTS 400

OMTS 500

Without output shaft

151B3036

151B3037

151B3038

151B3039

151B3040

151B3041

20

20.5

21

22

23

24

OMT FX

Short motor

Weight (kg)

Motors with tacho connection For code numbers of motors with tacho connection, please contact Danfoss Sales Organization for Hydraulics. Brake motor OMT FX Motor type

OMT FX

OMT FX

OMT FX

OMT FX

OMT FX

Motor size

160

200

250

315

400

500

Wheel bolt flange 151B3207

151B3208

151B3209

151B3210

151B3211

151B3212

Thread hole flange

151B3200

151B3201

151B3202

151B3203

151B3204

151B3205

Weight (kg)

31.0

31.5

32.0

33.0

34.0

35.0

Motor type

OMT FL

OMT FL

OMT FL

OMT FL

OMT FL

OMT FL

Motor size

160

200

250

315

400

500

Cylindrical shaft

151B4000

151B4001

151B4002

151B4003

151B4004

151B4005

Splined shaft

151B4007

151B4008

151B4009

151B4010

151B4011

151B4012

24.5

25.0

25.5

26.5

27.5

28.5

Motor type

OMT FH

OMT FH

OMT FH

OMT FH

OMT FH

OMT FH

Motor size

160

200

250

315

400

500

Cylindrical shaft

151B4021

151B4022

151B4023

151B4024

151B4025

151B4026

Splined shaft

151B4028

151B4029

151B4030

151B4031

151B4032

151B4033

24.5

25.0

25.5

26.5

27.5

28.5

Brake motor OMT FL

Weight (kg)

Brake motor OMT FH

Weight (kg)

20

HK.13.B-

OMT

Technical data

Technical data OMT OMTW OMTS OMT FX OMT FL OMT FH

OMT OMTW OMTS OMT FX OMT FL OMT FH

OMT OMTW OMTS OMT FX OMT FL OMT FH

OMT OMTW OMTS OMT FX OMT FL OMT FH

OMT OMTW OMTS OMT FX OMT FL OMT FH

OMT OMTW OMTS OMT FX OMT FL OMT FH

160

200

250

315

400

500

161.1

201.4

251.8

326.3

410.9

523.6

cont.

625

625

500

380

305

240

int.1)

780

750

600

460

365

285

Motor type

Motor size Geometric displacement

(cm3/rev)

Max. speed

(min-1)

Max. torque

(daNm)

Max. output

(kW)

Max. pressure drop

(bar)

Max. oil flow

(l/min)

Max. starting pressure with unloaded shaft

(bar)

Min. starting torque Min. speed 3)

(daNm)

cont.

47

59

73

95

108

122

int.1)

56

71

88

114

126

137

102

133

144

160

peak 2)

66

82

cont.

26.5

33.5

33.5

33.5

30

26.5

int.1)

32

40

40

40

35

30

cont.

200

200

200

200

180

160

int.1)

240

240

240

240

210

180 210

peak 2)

280

280

280

280

240

cont.

100

125

125

125

125

125

int.1)

125

150

150

150

150

150

10

10

10

10

10

10

at max. press. drop cont.

34

43

53

74

84

95

at max. press. drop int.1)

41

52

63

89

97

106

10

9

8

7

6

5

(min-1)

Type

Max. inlet pressure

OMT, OMTW, OMTS (bar) OMT FX, OMT FL, OMT FH

Max. return pressure with drain line 4)

cont.

210

140

int. 1)

250

175

peak 2)

300

210

Brake motors Type

1) 2) 3) 4) 5)

Max. pressure in drain line 4) (bar)

Holding torque 5) (daNm)

Brake-release pressure 4) (bar)

Max. pressure in brake line (bar)

OMT FX, OMT FL

5

120

12

30

OMT FH

5

120

30

280

Intermittent operation: the permissible values may occur for max. 10% of every minute. Peak load: The permissible values may occur for max. 1% of every minute. Operation at lower speeds may be slightly less smooth. Brake motors must always have a drain line. The brake-release pressure is the difference between the pressure in the brake line and the pressure in the drain line. For the supply of motors with holding torques higher than those stated, please contact the Sales Organization for Danfoss Hydraulics.

Max. permissible shaft seal pressure

OMT FX, OMT FL and OMT FH must always be fitted with drain line. Max. pressure in drain line is 5 bar OMT, OMTW, OMTS motors have incorporated check valves In applications without drain line the pressure on the shaft seal will never exceed the pressure in the return line.

HK.13.B-

Max. return pressure without drain line or max. pressure in the drain line int. operation cont. operation

21

OMT

Technical data

Oil flow in drain line

The table shows the max. oil flow in the drain line for all OMT motors. The values are measured at a return pressure less than 5-10 bar.

Pressure drop (bar) 140

210

Pressure loss in the motor

The curve applies to an unloaded output shaft and an oil viscosity of 35 mm2/s.

22

HK.13.B-

Viscosity (mm2/s)

Oil flow in drain line (l/min)

20

2.5

35

1.5

20

5

35

3

OMT

Direction of shaft rotation and shaft load

Direction of shaft rotation

Permissible shaft load for OMT and OMTW

The output shaft runs in tapered roller bearings that permit high axial and radial forces. The permissible radial load on the shaft is shown for an axial load of 0 and 1000 daN as a function of the distance from the mounting flange to the point of load application. Curve A shows max. radial shaft load. Any shaft load exceeding the values quoted in the curve will involve a risk of breakage. The other curves apply to a B10 bearing life of 3000 hours at 200 min-1 when mineral based hydraulic oil with a sufficient content of anti-wear additives is used. Bearing life calculations can be made using the explanation and formula provided in the chapter “Bearing dimensioning” in the subcatalogue “General information”.

A: Max. radial shaft load

HK.13.B-

23

OMT FX, FL and FH

Radial and axial loads

Permissible radial and axial loads for OMT FX

OMT FX shafts run in ball race bearings. This means that OMT FX can be used for heavy vehicles and for winches with relatively high tractive effort without the necessity for further bearings on wheel or winch drum. The drawing shows the permissible axial and radial forces. Curve A shows the maximum radial load. Any radial load exceeding the values quoted in the curve will involve a risk of breakage. The other curves apply to a B 10 bearing life of 3000 hours at 50 min-1 when mineral-based hydraulic oil with a sufficient content of antiwear additives is used.

A: Max. radial load

Permissible radial and axial loads for OMT FL and OMT FH

OMT FL shafts run in taper roller bearings. This means that OMT FL and OMT FH can be used for very heavy vehicles and for winches with great tractive efforts without the necessity for further bearings on wheel or winch drum. The drawing shows the permissible axial and radial forces. Curve A shows the maximum radial load. Any radial load exceeding the values quoted in the curve will involve a risk of breakage. The other curves appliy to a B10 bearing life of 3000 hours at 200 min-1 when mineral-based hydraulic oil with a sufficient content of anti-wear additives is used.

A: Max. radial load

24

HK.13.B-

Function diagrams

Explanation of function diagram use, basis and conditions can be found on page 3.

OMT

Note: Intermittent pressure drop and oil flow must not occur simultaneously.

- A: Continuous range - B: Intermittent range (max. 10% operation every minute)

HK.13.B-

25

Function diagrams

Explanation of function diagram use, basis and conditions can be found on page 3. - A: Continuous range - B: Intermittent range (max. 10% operation every minute)

26

HK.13.B-

OMT

Note: Intermittent pressure drop and oil flow must not occur simultaneously.

Function diagrams

Explanation of function diagram use, basis and conditions can be found on page 3.

OMT

Note: Intermittent pressure drop and oil flow must not occur simultaneously.

- A: Continuous range - B: Intermittent range (max. 10% operation every minute)

HK.13.B-

27

OMT

Shaft versions

Shaft versions

A: Cylindrical shaft G: Parallel key A12 × 8 × 70 DIN 6885

28

B: Involute splined shaft ANS B92.1 - 1970 standard Flat root side fit Pitch 12/24 Teeth 17 Major dia. 1.50 inch Pressure angle 30°

HK.13.B-

C: Tapered shaft (ISO/R775) E: DIN 937 Across flats: 46 Tightening torque: 50 ± 3 daNm F: Taper 1:10 H: Parallel key B12 × 8 × 28 DIN 6885

D: P.t.o. shaft DIN 9611 Form 1 (ISO/R500 without pin hole) ** Deviates from DIN 9611

Dimensions

OMT

OMT

Type

Lmax.

L1 *)

L2

OMT 160

190

16.5

140

OMT 200

195

21.5

145

OMT 250

201

27.8

151

OMT 315

211

37.0

161

OMT 400

221

47.5

171

OMT 500

235

61.5

185

C: Drain connection G 1/4 ; 12 mm deep D: M10; 10 mm deep E: G 3/4; 17 mm deep

*) The gearwheel set is 3.5 mm wider across the rollers than the L1 dimensions

HK.13.B-

29

Dimensions

OMTW wheel motor

Type

Lmax.

L1 *)

L2

OMTW 160

123

16.5

73

OMTW 200

128

21.5

78

OMTW 250

134

27.8

84

OMTW 315

144

37.0

94

OMTW 400

154

47.5

104

OMTW 500

168

61.5

118

C: Drain connection G 1/4; 12 mm deep D: M10; 10 mm deep E: G 3/4; 17 mm deep

*) The gearwheel set is 3.5 mm wider across the rollers than the L1 dimensions

30

HK.13.B-

OMTW

Dimensions

OMTS

OMTS short motor

Type

Lmax.

L1 *)

OMTS 160

146

16.5

L2 96

OMTS 200

151

21.5

101

OMTS 250

157

27.8

107

OMTS 315

166

37.0

116

OMTS 400

177

47.5

127

OMTS 500

191

61.5

142

C: Drain connection G 1/4 ; 12 mm deep D: M10; 10 mm deep E: G 3/4; 17 mm deep

*) The gearwheel set is 3.5 mm wider across the rollers than the L1 dimensions

Installing the OMTS

The cardan shaft of the OMTS motor acts as an “output shaft”. Because of the movement of the shaft, no seal can be fitted at the shaft output. Internal oil leakage from the motor will therefore flow into the attached component. During start and operation it is important that the spline connection and the bearings in the attached component receive oil and are adequately lubricated. To ensure that the spline connection receives sufficient oil, a conical sealing ring between the shaft of the attached component and the motor intermediate plate is recommended. This method is used in the OMT.

HK.13.B-

The conical sealing ring (code. no. 633B9022) is supplied with the motor. To ensure that oil runs to the bearings and other parts of the attached component, the stop plate must have a hole in it (see fig. overleaf). We recommend an O-ring between motor and attached component. The O-ring (code no. 151B1040) is supplied with the motor. If motor and attached component have been separated, remember to refill before starting up. Fill the oil through the drain connection.

31

OMTS

Technical data

Dimensions of the attached component

A: O-ring: 125 × 3 mm B: External drain channel C: Drain connection G 1/4; 12 mm deep D: Conical seal ring E: Internal drain channel F: M12; min. 18 mm deep G: Oil circulation hole H: Hardened stop plate

Internal spline data for the component to be attached

The attached component must have internal splines corresponding to the external splines on the motor cardan shaft (see drawing below).

Material: Case hardening steel with a tensile strength corresponding at least to 20 MoCr4 (90 daN/mm2).

See also SAE 8620 for further information on steel material.

Hardening specification: • On the surface: HV = 750 ± 50 • 0,7 ± 0,2 mm under the surface: HV = 560

Internal involute spline data Standard ANS B92.1-1970, class 5 (corrected m ⋅ × = 1; m = 2.1166) Fillet root side fit

mm

inch

Number of teeth

z

16

16

Pitch

DP

12/24

12/24

30°

30°

Pressure angle Pitch dia.

D

33,8656

1.3333

Major dia.

Dri

38,4 +0,4 0

1.5118 +.0157 0

Form dia. (min.)

Dfi

37,6

1.4803

Minor dia.

Di

32,15 +0,04 0

1.2657 +.00157 0

Space width (circular)

Lo

4,516 -.± 0,037

.1777 ±.0014

Tooth thickness (circular)

So

2,170

.0854

Fillet radius

Rmin.

0,5

.02

Max. measurement between pins*

l

26,9+0.1 0

1.059 +0,04 0

Pin dia.

d

4,834 ± 0,001

.1903 ±.00004

* Finished dimensions (when hardened)

Drain connection on OMTS or attached component

32

A drain line ought to be used when pressure in the return line can exceed the permissible pressure on the shaft seal of the attached component.

If a drain line is fitted to the attached component, it must be possible for oil to flow freely between motor and attached component.

The drain line can be connected at two different points: 1) at the motor drain connection 2) at the drain connection of the attached component.

The drain line must be led to the tank in such a way that there is no risk of the motor and attached component being drained of oil when at rest.

HK.13.B-

The maximum pressure in the drain line is limited by the attached component and its shaft seal.

Dimensions

OMT FX

OMT FX

C: Brake-release port G 1/4; 12 mm deep (BS/ISO 228/1) D: Drain connection G 1/4; 12 mm deep E : G 3/4; 17 mm deep F : 4 × M12; 27 mm deep G: 10 × M12 H: Wheel bolts 5 × M14 × 1.5 I : M10; 10 mm deep Type

Lmax. 1 Lmax. 2 L1 *)

L2

OMT 160 FX

223

227

16.5

62.3

OMT 200 FX

228

232

21.5

67.3

OMT 250 FX

234

238

27.8

73.5

OMT 315 FX

243

247

37.0

82.8

OMT 400 FX

254

258

47.5

93.3

OMT 500 FX

268

272

61.5 107.1

*) The gearwheel set is 3.5 mm wider across the rollers than the L1 dimensions

HK.13.B-

33

OMT FL and FH

Dimensions

L

OMT FL and OMT FH

Type

Lmax.

L1 *)

L2

OMT 160 FL/FH

228

16.5

178

OMT 200 FL/FH

233

21.5

183

OMT 250 FL/FH

239

27.8

189

OMT 315 FL/FH

248

37.0

199

OMT 400 FL/FH

259

47.5

209

OMT 500 FL/FH

273

61.5

223

C: G 3/4; 17 mm deep (BS/ISO 228/1) D: Drain connection G 3/8; 14 mm deep E: Brake-release port G 1/4; 12 mm deep F: M10; 10 mm deep

*) The gearwheel set is 3.5 mm wider across the rollers than the L1 dimensions

34

HK.13.B-

Technical data

OMT

Motors with tacho connection OMT T, OMTW T, OMTS T Dimensions

Dimensions (mm) Motor size

160

200

250

315

400

500

Type OMT T

223

228

234

244

254

268

Type OMTW T

156

161

167

177

187

201

Type OMTS T

179

184

190

199

210

224

C: M5 (4); 8 mm deep

Weight of tacho connection unit: 0.2 kg

Angular backlash

Tolerances in the connection between the motor output shaft and tacho connection give a certain angular backlash. Backlash can be defined as the angle the output shaft will turn on reversing before the tacho shaft is engaged. On the OMT motors the backlash is min. 7.9° and max. 12.4°.

Permissible load on the tacho drive of motor

• Torque: 0.01 Nm cont. and 0.04 Nm int. • Radial force in the middle of drive shaft: 5 daN at 0-800 min-1 • Axial load: 5 daN

HK.13.B-

35

Danfoss quality and hydraulic range ISO 9001

INTERNATIONAL STANDARD INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION ORGANISATION INTERNATIONALE DE NORMALISATION

ISO 9001

Quality management and quality assurance standards Danfoss Mobile Hydraulics have been manufactured to meet the quality demands specified by ISO 9001.

Conversion factors

1 daNm 1 daN 1 bar 1 mm

= = = =

88.51 lbf in 2.248 lbf 14.50 lbf/in2 0.0394 in

1 cm3 1 litre 1 litre °F

= = = =

0.061 in3 0.22 gallon, UK 0.264 gallon, US 1.8 × °C + 32

Catalogues and leaflets are available for detailed information on the following hydraulic components: • • • • • • • • •

Low-speed high-torque hydraulic motors Planetary gears Hydrostatic steering units Steering columns Valve blocks Flow-amplifiers Priority valves Torque amplifiers Variable displacement hydraulic pumps

• • • • • • • • •

Pump controls Proportional valves Remote control units Electronics for hydr. components Rotary actuators Gear wheel motors Gear wheel pumps Cartridge valves Directional control valves

Danfoss can accept no responsibility for possible errors in catalogues, brochures and other printed material. Danfoss reserves the right to alter its products without notice. This also applies to products already on order provided that such alterations can be made without subsequential changes being necessary in specifications already agreed. All trademarks in this material are property of the respective companies. Danfoss and the Danfoss logotype are trademarks of Danfoss A/S. All rights reserved.

48

HK.13.B1.02 © Danfoss 03/97

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

REDUCTOR

3.2 Equipo Espesador 36m 325-TK-002

PÁGINA 1 DE 1

Revisión NA

Descripción Bonfiglioli 321 L5 FZ

CAPÍTULO 3 DOCUMENTACIÓN DE COMPONENTES

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

UNIDAD HIDRÁULICA

3.3 Equipo Espesador 36m 325-TK-002

PÁGINA 1 DE 2

Revisión NA

Descripción Unidad Hidráulica 11 kW

CAPÍTULO 3 DOCUMENTACIÓN DE COMPONENTES

MANUAL DE OPERACIONES

Nombre del Cliente: Outotec Chile S.A. Nombre del Proyecto: Minera Esperanza Cliente Final: ---

TAG Unidad N°: ---

Descripción del Proyecto:

PDH: 792

Unidad Hidráulica para Equipo Espesador

Orden de Compra N°: 4500159879

Revisión MD Firma: Nombre: Alejandro Alvear Cargo: Dibujante/Diseñador Fecha: 25-02-2014 Nombre: Cargo: Fecha:

Aprobación Inspector de Calidad Firma:

Aprobación MD Firma: Nombre: Hernán Perez Cargo: Jefe Proyectos Fecha: 26-02-2014 Nombre: Cargo: Fecha:

Validación Cliente Final Firma:

Maestranza Diesel S.A.|Manual de Operaciones Unidad Hidráulica ||PDH– 792 – Minera Esperanza

1

MANUAL DE OPERACIONES

1. DESCRIPCIÓN DE LA UNIDAD La Unidad de Potencia Hidráulica está diseñada para el accionamiento de Reductores Planetarios y Cilindros Hidráulicos. Para ello, cuenta con componentes hidráulicos que aseguran el funcionamiento requerido, como por ejemplo Válvulas Direccionales, además de Instrumentos de Control, tales como Switch de Nivel, Indicador de Saturamiento de Filtro, Presóstato y Switch de Temperatura. La Unidad considera Bombas en Tándem de Pistones Axiales (Caudal Variable) más una Bomba de Engranajes, además de un Intercambiador de Calor, para realizar el enfriamiento del fluido hidráulico. Además cuenta con un Sistema de Emergencia Hidroneumático con un Acumulador de Nitrógeno.

Maestranza Diesel S.A.|Manual de Operaciones Unidad Hidráulica ||PDH– 792 – Minera Esperanza

2

MANUAL DE OPERACIONES

2. DESCRIPCIÓN DE LOS COMPONENTES

Fig.1.- Modelo Representativo •

BANDEJA RECEPTORA DE ACEITE (1) o

ABZBN-250/40 - W12ST/M/MD

Tiene la capacidad de confinar el volumen total del Depósito Hidráulico + aproximadamente 25% de reserva, en caso de vaciado o emergencia.

•

DEPÓSITO HIDRÁULICO (2) o

ABZBN-250/40-B12ST/M/MD

Su función principal es confinar el Fluido Hidráulico necesario para la operación del Sistema. Además permite disipar el Calor a través de sus paredes. Tiene un volumen efectivo de 250 litros.

Maestranza Diesel S.A.|Manual de Operaciones Unidad Hidráulica ||PDH– 792 – Minera Esperanza

3

MANUAL DE OPERACIONES

•

TAPA DE INSPECCIÓN (3) o

RD-350

HBE

Tapa Frontal de la Unidad Hidráulica, en donde se tiene acceso hacia el interior del depósito cuando éste se encuentra sin aceite.

•

TAPA DE LLENADO (4) o

•

•

ÖS-EK127 TH

HBE

Permite visualizar físicamente el nivel y temperatura del aceite del Depósito Hidráulico.

SENSOR DE TEMPERATURA (6) o

HBE

Permite el llenado del Depósito Hidráulico y a la vez mantener libre de impurezas externas.

VISOR DE NIVEL (5) o

SE2

MK2-G1/2-MS-M3/100

Bühler

Supervisa la Temperatura del Fluido Hidráulico, mandando señales eléctricas en el caso de que la temperatura se encuentre superior a lo requerido.

•

MOTOR ELÉCTRICO (7) o

•

Siemens

PR 250/175/588/4

HBE

Es la fuente primaria de energía.

CAMPANA DE MONTAJE (8) o

Nema 15HP/FRAME 254TC

Permite el montaje en línea de la Bomba Hidráulica al Motor Eléctrico mediante unos dispositivos llamados Machones de Montaje, que comunican el Eje del Motor con el de la Bomba Hidráulica, transmitiendo Energía Mecánica.

•

BOMBA HIDRÁULICA DE PISTONES (9) o

A10VSO28DFR

Rexroth

Bomba Hidráulica de Pistones Axiales. Transforma la Energía Mecánica en Energía Hidráulica, generando el Caudal y la Presión necesaria para la Operación del Sistema.

•

BOMBA HIDRÁULICA DE ENGRANAJES (10) o

S05A174S0TSEC300313

Hybel

Bomba Hidráulica de Engranajes. Transforma la Energía Mecánica en Energía Hidráulica, generando el Caudal necesario para la Operación del Sistema.

•

SWITCH DE NIVEL (11) o

NS 1-NO/300

HBE

Supervisa el Nivel de Aceite mandando una Señal Eléctrica en el caso de que haya un bajo nivel del fluido en el Depósito Hidráulico.

•

VÁLVULA DE CORTE (12 - 13) o

Ubicada en la zona de succión de la Bomba hidráulica, tiene la función de cortar el paso del fluido desde el depósito, evitando que evacúe aceite en el caso de realizar alguna mantención.

•

MANIFOLD (14) o

Bloque de acero que sirve para comunicar fluido hidráulico a ciertos componentes.

Maestranza Diesel S.A.|Manual de Operaciones Unidad Hidráulica ||PDH– 792 – Minera Esperanza

4

MANUAL DE OPERACIONES

•

TRANSMISOR DE PRESIÓN (15) o

• •

•

• •

• •

•

Z2SE6A1-6X

Rexroth

Z2FS 6-2-4X/2QV

Rexroth

ZDB 6 VP2-4X/315V

Rexroth

4WE6 H 61/EW110N9K4

Rexroth

Permite Direccionar el Caudal que entrega la Bomba hacia los Actuadores.

VÁLVULA DE LANZADERA (23) o

Rexroth

Se utiliza para limitar la presión del sistema.

VÁLVULA DIRECCIONAL (22) o

M3SED 6UK1X/350CG110N9K4

Regula el Caudal del Sistema, actuando sobre la Velocidad de avance y/o giro de los Actuadores.

VÁLVULA LIMITADORA DE PRESIÓN (21) o

Rexroth

Sirve para el bloqueo libre de fugas de una o dos conexiones a consumidores.

VÁLVULA ESTRANGULADORA (20) o

G342/1

Permite Direccionar el Caudal que entrega la Bomba hacia los Acumuladores.

VÁLVULA ANTIRETORNO (19) o

Rexroth

Placa Base para el montaje de las válvulas.

VÁLVULA DIRECCIONAL DE ASIENTO (18) o

HED 8 OA-2X/350K14

Realiza la medición de Presiones en el Sistema, convirtiéndola en una Señal Eléctrica.

PLACA BASE (17) o

Danfoss

Convierte la presión en una señal eléctrica analógica.

PRESÓSTATO (16) o

MBS 1750

WRVZ 06S-CCB

IMAV

Válvula Selectora que tiene como función enviar una señal hidráulica al Regulador DFR de la Bomba de Pistones Axiales, para que ésta alcance la presión deseada.

•

VÁLVULA DIRECCIONAL (24) o

•

Rexroth

Permite Direccionar el Caudal que entrega la Bomba hacia los Actuadores.

DIVISOR DE CAUDAL (25) o

4WE6 J 61/EW110N9K4 9RD0405 RDOD/057X4

Vivoil

Permite separar el Caudal en dos tramos, alimentando los actuadores desde un mismo punto de origen.

•

MANÓMETRO (26) o

•

Rexroth

Entrega el valor de Presión de Trabajo del Sistema.

ACUMULADOR DE VEJIGA (27) o

ABZMM63-250BAR/MPA

HAB50-330-4X/2G09G-2N111-CE Rexroth

Sirve para acumular energía hidráulica, amortiguación de pulsaciones y compensar el aceite de fugas y de volumen.

•

BLOQUE DE SEGURIDAD (28) o

ABZSS30M-3X/330E/S309

Rexroth

Se utiliza para la protección, cierre y descarga de los acumuladores hidráulicos.

Maestranza Diesel S.A.|Manual de Operaciones Unidad Hidráulica ||PDH– 792 – Minera Esperanza

5

MANUAL DE OPERACIONES

•

INTERCAMBIADOR DE CALOR (29) o

•

Bühler

Permite bajar la temperatura del fluido hidráulico mediante aire

FILTRO DE RETORNO (30) o

BLK-3.4-AB8-50HZ

10TEN0160-H10XLA00-V2,2-M-S5 Rexroth

Permite filtrar el aceite hidráulico en el punto de retorno al Depósito para que en éste no ingresen partículas y no contaminen el Fluido.

•

TABLERO ELÉCTRICO (31) o

Equipo que concentra los dispositivos de protección y control eléctrico de la Unidad Hidráulica.

3. DESCRIPCIÓN DE OPERACIÓN El Equipo opera cuando es accionado Motor Eléctrico (7), activando la Bomba Hidráulica de Pistones (9), y ésta (mediante arrastre) a la Bomba Hidráulica de Engranajes (10). Éstas Bombas aspiran el Fluido del Depósito Hidráulico (2) y lo desplaza hacia el Sistema. La Presión Máxima se normaliza mediante la Válvula Limitadora de Presión (21) agregada en el Sistema. El Caudal entregado por las Bombas (en el caso de la Bomba Hidráulica de Pistones (9) ajustado por la Válvula Reguladora de Flujo montada a la salida de ésta), entra a las Placas Bases (17) alimentando los Conjuntos de Válvulas (18-19-20-21-22-23-24). Al accionarse la Válvula Direccional (22), dirige el Fluido hacia el Divisor de Caudal (25), separando el Flujo para alimentar los Cilindros Hidráulicos del Espesador. Por el contrario, al accionar la Válvula Direccional (24), deriva el Fluido hacia los conectores de salida, donde se conecta directamente el(los) Motor(es) Hidráulico(s) del Espesador. La Presión de trabajo se visualiza desde los Manómetros (13). El Retorno del Fluido transita por el Intercambiador de Calor (29) y luego hacia el Filtro de Retorno (30) antes de regresar al Depósito Hidráulico (2).

Maestranza Diesel S.A.|Manual de Operaciones Unidad Hidráulica ||PDH– 792 – Minera Esperanza

6

MANUAL DE OPERACIONES

PLANOS

Maestranza Diesel S.A.|Manual de Operaciones Unidad Hidráulica ||PDH– 792 – Minera Esperanza

7

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

1675 1462,5

1008

F 1600

792,5

310

F 376,5

640

284

E

2085

1499

2463

1030

E

381

690

D

370

503

884

D

20

890

1637 4x

1677

14mm.

35

960

C

C

1565

APROBADO Maestranza Diesel S.A.

Maestranza Diesel

POR: ..................................................... FIRMA: ..............................

0.1-0.05 GRADO DE PRECISION

1 0 C B

A

1 REV 8

7

6

5

0.8-0.4-0.2 6.3-3.2-1.6 mas de 0.5 hasta 3

mas de 3 hasta 6

12.5

63

mas de 6 hasta 30

mas de 30 hasta 120

mas de 120 hasta 315

mas de 315 hasta 1000

mas de 1000 hasta 2000

mas de 2000 hasta 4000

FINO

0.05

0.05

0.1

0.15

0.2

0.3

0.5

0.8

MEDIAN0

0.1

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.5

0.8

1.2

2

BASTO

0.15

0.2

0.5

0.8

1.2

2

3

4

MODIFICACIONES

B

NOTAS: - Capacidad Deposito Hidr ulico: 250 litros - Dimensiones del Tablero El ctrico considerado: 1000x800x300 mm. - Tolerancias Dimensionales seg n DIN 7168, Grado de Precisi n Basto. POR FECHA FIRMA

EMITIDO PARA DOSIER DE CALIDAD 25-04-2014 HP 09-01-2014 CLIENTE EMITIDO PARA VALIDACI N 07-01-2014 J.S. EMITIDO PARA APROBACI N 19-12-2013 J.S. EMITIDO PARA APROBACI N EMITIDO PARA REVISION Y DISE 19-12-2013 H.P. APROBACION INTERNA FECHA APROBADA REVIS DESCRIPCI N APROB HISTORIAL DE REVISIONES 4 3

A.A.

A.A.

A.A.

19.12.13

06.01.14

08.01.14

1

2

3

DIMENSIONES FECHA GENERALES 19 Dic.13 FECHA REEMPLAZADO 5 POR DIB. N REEMPLAZA A DIBUJO N

4

Maestranza Diesel S.A. Proyectos Oleohidr ulica

NOMBRE A.Alvear H.Perez H.Perez

B

PDH 792 O.T. 16641 Esc.:

1:15

A FECHA Dimensiones Generales 20-11-2013 19-12-2013 PLANO N PO-OU-DG-00-1 U.Dim. mm. A2 1 / 1 19-12-2013 REF. A 2 1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

A

A

B

B NOTA: CONEXIONES CONEXIONES

A1 B1 A2 A3 A4 A5 B2 L

(MOTORES) (CILINDROS) (DRENAJE)

C

C A1

B1

L

A2

A3

A4

A5

B2

27

D

D

14

14 A1

14

B1

T1

A2

19

P1

E

P

17 Giro -

A

14

2 B

T1

T2

P1

P2

T

B2

A3

19

P

A

14

B

T2

T3

P2

P3

T

14

B3

A4

19

P

A

2 B

T4

P3

P4

X

20

P4

T

P

A

23

26

E

T

a

26 P T

1 A

B A

a P T

P

T4

19

A

16

14

1

2 B

T

P

A

B

T

21

F

T3

B4

24

APROBADO

18 1 P

A

B

P

T

A

2 B

F

T

A B a

b

22

POR: ..................................................... FIRMA: ..............................

21

P T 1 P

A

15

B

a

G

T

A B

B

A

X

25

b

G

P T

17 Levante -

14

NOTAS:

28

2.- ACEITE MINERAL ISO VG 46

14

B

H

32

9

32 31 30

32

A P

13 P= 11kW n= 1450rpm

11 Vg= 28 cc Q = 42 Lts/min

12

S

10 Vg= 4 cc Q = 6 Lts/min

B

A S

L1

L

17

16

7 8

5

4

31

29

I B

30

6

2

J

K

4 EMITIDO PARA DOSIER DE CALIDAD 3 EMITIDO PARA DOSIER DE CALIDAD 2 EMITIDO PARA DOSIER DE CALIDAD 1 0 D C B A REV.

L

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Bosch Rexroth Bosch Rexroth Bosch Rexroth

2 1 1

9RD0405 RDOD/057X4

Vivoil

1 1 1

26 25

M-3SED 6 UK1X/350CG110N9K4 4WE6 H 61 / EW110 N9 K4

Bosch Rexroth Bosch Rexroth

2 1

24 23 22

Z2FS K6 - 2 Z2S 6-2-6X 4WE6 J 61 / EW110 N9 K4

Bosch Rexroth Bosch Rexroth Bosch Rexroth

1 1 1

21 20 19

ZDBD S6 G 342/01

Bosch Rexroth Bosch Rexroth Bosch Rexroth

2 1 4

HED 8 OA-12 ABZMM63 - 250 BAR/MPA MBS-1750

Bosch Rexroth Bosch Rexroth Danfoss

1 3 2

Divisor de Flujo

Placa Base

18 17 16

1 Capacidad: 250 L.

3

HAB50-330-3X ABZSS30 DBDS 6 G1X/200

29 28 27

Acumulador de Vejiga Bloque de Seguridad

9

10

11

12

H.P. H.P. H.P. M.Z. A.A. A.A. H.P. A.A. A.A. POR FECHA

13

15 14 13

Minimess

1LE2321-2BB11-4GA3 | 11kW

Hydrotechnik Siemens

1 7 1

12 11 10

Campana de Montaje Bomba de Pistones Axiales Bomba de Engranajes

PR 300/155/434/4 A10VSO 28 DFR AZPF-11-005RRR01MB

HBE Bosch Rexroth Bosch Rexroth

1 1 1

9 8 7

Intercambiador de Calor Filtro de Retorno Elemento Filtro

BLK-4-4-ABB 10TEN0160 H10XLA00 1.0160 H10XL-A00-0-M

Bosch Rexroth Bosch Rexroth

1 1 1

6 5 4

Sensor de Temperatura Switch de Nivel/Temperatura Tapa de Llenado

NS 1 - NO / 300 SE2

HBE HBE

1 1 1

3 2 1

Visor de Nivel AB 40-40 / DN250

HBE Maestranza Diesel S.A.

1 1 1

Detalle/Modelo

Marca

Maestranza Diesel S.A.

H

I

J

K

Cant.

PDH 792 O.T. 16641 Esc.:

NOMBRE A.Alvear

FECHA 18-10-2013

H.Perez H.Perez

18-10-2013 21-10-2013 REF. A

14

L

UPH 11KW U.Dim. A2 1 / 1

15

16

MANUAL DE OPERACIONES

FICHAS TÉCNICAS

Maestranza Diesel S.A.|Manual de Operaciones Unidad Hidráulica ||PDH– 792 – Minera Esperanza

8

3OLUTIONSFOR&LUID4ECHNOLOGY

43

(9$2!5,)+:5"%(‘2 (9$2!5,)##/-0/.%.43 

!,5-).)5-2%).)'5.'3$%#+%,$). !,5-).)5-#,%!.).'#/6%23$). -)402/&),$)#(45.' 7)4(&/2-'!3+%4 02/$5+4"%3#(2%)"5.' Û2EINIGUNGSDECKEL2$ UND2$F·R 3TAHL±LBEHŸLTERMITNIEDRIGER"AUH±HE Û2EINIGUNGSDECKEL2$UNDNACH$). Û0ROïLDICHTUNGAUS0ERBUNAN."23TANDARD 6ITON &0- UND%0$-LIEFERBAR Û3CHRAUBENANZUGSMOMENTF·RDIESE2EINIGUNGSDECKEL MAX.M Û0R·FDRUCKF·RALLE2$ 4YPENMAX BAR Û&IRMENSCHRIFTZUGODER,OGOKANNEINGEGOSSENWERDEN Û!LLE'R±šENAUCHIN3TAHLUNDIN%DELSTAHLLIEFERBAR

!53&—(25.'4%),+2%)36%23#(2!5"5.'

$%3#2)04)/. Û#LEANINGCOVER2$ AND2$FORSTEEL OILTANKSOFLOWSIZE Û#LEANINGCOVER2$ANDACCTO$). Û&ORMGASKETAVAILABLEOFPERBUNAN."2STANDARD VITON&0- AND%0$Û3CREWTORQUEFORTHISCLEANINGCOVERS.MMAX Û4ESTPRESSUREFORALL2$TYPESBARMAX Û#OMPANYLOGOCANBECASTEDON Û!LLSIZESALSOAVAILABLEINSTEELANDSTAINLESSSTEEL

6%23)/.&,!.'%!33%-",).'

$ICHTUNG'ASKETS X $."23TANDARD

2$ $ICHTUNG'ASKETS X $."23TANDARD $&0-

2$  $ICHTUNG'ASKETS X $."23TANDARD $&0- $%0$-

2$ 6 $). $ICHTUNG'ASKETS X $."23TANDARD $&0- $%0$-

2$ 6 $). $ICHTUNG'ASKETS X $."23TANDARD $&0- $%0$-

2$ 6  

.)6%!5 ‘,3#(!5',3%2,%6%,/),'!5'%3

‘3

‘34(

!24 .2 0!24./

490 490%

!

"

#

 

‘3 ‘34(







 

‘3 ‘34(







 

‘3 ‘34(







 

‘3 ‘34(







!USF·HRUNGMIT4HERMOMETER

%XECUTIONWITHTHERMOMETER

%).&—,,%2

7%2+34/&&% Û'EHŸUSE3TPULVERBESCHICHTET Û3TOPFEN 3CHAUGLAS0! Û3KALENPLATTEN06# Û$ICHTUNGEN."2OPTIONAL&0- ÛGEEIGNETF·R(YDRAULIK±LE(,UND(,0

-!4%2)!,3 Û#ASE3TPOWDERCOATED Û0LUG0! Û3CALEPLATES06# Û'ASKETS."2OPTIONALLY&0- Û!PPRORIATEFORHYDRAULICOILS(,AND(,0

4%#(.)3#(%$!4%. Û%INSATZBEREICH Ñl#Ül# Û!NZEIGEBEREICH4HERMOMETER ‘3 l#Ül# ‘3Ñl#Ül# Û3CHRAUBENANZUGSMOMENT.MMAX

4%#(.)#!,$!4! Û!PPLICATIONRANGEÑl#Ül# Û)NDICATIONRANGETHERMOMETER ‘3 l#Ül# ‘3 Ñl#Ül# Û3CREWEDSTARTINGTORQUE .MMAX

&),,%23 -ONTAGEBILD-OUNTINGDRAWING

3% 7%2+34/&&% 4%#(.)3#(%$!4%. Û"EL·FTUNGSHAUBE3TAHL VERCHROMT Û&LANSCH3TAHL VERCHROMT Û,UFTïLTERELEMENTqM Û%INF·LLSIEB3TAHLVERZINKT Û$ICHTUNGEN+ORK 0ERBUNAN."2

!24 .2 0!24./

490 490%

³!

"

#

³$

%



3%











“

qM



3%











“

qM



4!.+"/(25.' "/2).').4!.+

,5&4&),4%2 !)2&),4%2-)#2/.

-!4%2)!,3 4%#(.)#!,$!4! Û!IRSCOOP3TEEL CHROMECOATED Û&LANGE3TEEL CHROMECOATED Û!IRïLTERELEMENTqM Û&ILLERSIEVE3TEEL ZINCCOATED Û'ASKETSCORK 0ERBUNAN."2

.)6%!5 3#(7)--3#(!,4%2,%6%,37)4#(%3 3%2)%.3

02/$5+4"%3#(2%)"5.'

-)43#(!,4+/.4!+4 7)4(37)4#(#/.4!#4

Û%LEKTRISCHE.IVEAU·BERWACHUNG Û 'EEIGNETF·R-INERAL±LE $IESEL UND"ENZIN Û 3CHALTKONTAKT Û %LEKTRISCHE3CHALTUNGF·R.IVEAU MINMAX Û 3TANDARDAUSF·HRUNG.IVEAU MAX+ONTAKTOFFEN

$%3#2)04)/.

!24 .2 0!24./

min.. level

490 490%

4%#(.)3#(%$!4%. 4%#(.)#!,$!4! Û+ONTAKTROHR3TEM-ESSING"RASS Û3CHWIMMER&LOAT.YLON Û-AX4EMPl# Û3CHUTZART0ROTECTION)0 Û(YSTERESE(YSTERESIS MM Û-AX6OLT-AXVOLTAGE6!# Û-AX3CHALTSTROM -AXSWITCHCURRENT .IVEAU !,EVEL! Û0OWER!#$#.IVEAU,EVEL 76!

,  

.3 ./ .3 ./

 

 

.3 ./ .3 ./

 

 

.3 ./ .3 ./

 

 

.3 ./ .3 ./

 

Û%LECTRICALLEVELSUPERVISION Û !PPROPRIATEFORMINERALOIL DIESELANDBENZINE Û SWITCHCONTACT Û %LECTRICALCIRCUITFORLEVEL MINMAX Û 3TANDARDVERSIONLEVEL MAXCONTACTOPEN

$URCH$REHENDES3CHWIMMERSWIRDDER+ONTAKTGEŸNDERTAUF -AX.IVEAU+ONTAKTGESCHLOSSEN -IN.IVEAU+ONTAKTOFFEN

"YTURNINGTHEðOATTHECONTACTISCHANGEDTO MAXLEVELCONTACTCLOSED MINLEVELCONTACTOPEN

.)6%!5 3#(7)--3#(!,4%2,%6%,37)4#(%3 3%2)%.3

02/$5+4"%3#(2%)"5.' Û%LEKTRISCHE.IVEAU·BERWACHUNG Û 'EEIGNETF·R-INERAL±LE $IESELUND"ENZIN Û 3CHALTKONTAKTE Û %LEKTRISCHE3CHALTUNGF·R .IVEAU MINMAX Û 3TANDARDAUSF·HRUNG.IVEAU MAX+ONTAKTOFFEN

-)43#(!,4+/.4!+4%. 7)4(37)4#(#/.4!#43

$%3#2)04)/.

!24 .2 0!24./

Û%LECTRICALLEVELSUPERVISION Û !PPROPRIATEFORMINERAL OIL DIESELANDBENZINE Û SWITCHCONTACTS Û %LECTRICALCIRCUITFORLEVEL MINMAX Û 3TANDARDVERSIONLEVEL MAXCONTACTOPEN

490 490%

,

,

 

.3 ./ .3 ./

 

 

 

.3 ./ .3 ./

 

 



.3 ./





$URCH$REHENDES3CHWIMMERSWIRDDER+ONTAKTGEŸNDERTAUF -AX.IVEAU+ONTAKTGESCHLOSSEN -IN.IVEAU+ONTAKTOFFEN



"YTURNINGTHEðOATTHECONTACTISCHANGEDTO MAXLEVELCONTACTCLOSED MINLEVELCONTACTOPEN

4%#(.)3#(%$!4%. 4%#(.)#!,$!4! Û+ONTAKTROHR3TEM-ESSING"RASS Û3CHWIMMER&LOAT.YLON Û-AX4EMPl# Û3CHUTZART0ROTECTION)0 Û(YSTERESE(YSTERESIS MM Û-AX6OLT-AXVOLTAGE6!# Û-AX3CHALTSTROM -AXSWITCHCURRENT .IVEAU !,EVEL! Û0OWER!#$#.IVEAU 0OWER!#$#,EVEL 76!

'%3!-4,)%&%2 02/'2!--

Û/ILTANKSMADEOFSTEEL STAINLESSSTEEL

ۑLBEHŸLTERAUS!LUMINIUM Û/ILTANKSMADEOFALUMINIUM

Û2EINIGUNGSDECKELUNDSONSTIGES "EHŸLTERZUBEH±R Û#LEANINGCOVERSANDFURTHER ACCESSORIES

Û4ANKHEIZUNGEN Û4ANKHEATERS

Û0UMPENTRŸGERUND:UBEH±R Û"ELLHOUSINGSANDACCESSORIES

Û0UMPENTRŸGERMIT‘L +·HLER Û7ŸRMETAUSCHER Û"ELLHOUSINGWITHOIL COOLER Û(EATEXCHANGERS

Û3/&4%8kELASTISCHEUNDDREHSPIELFREIE 7ELLENKUPPLUNGEN Û3/&4%8kELASTICANDNOBACKLASH SHAFTCOUPLINGS

Û34!2%8kðEXIBLE+UPPLUNGEN Û34!2%8kðEXIBLECOUPLINGS

("%'MB( (±NNESTRAšE .EUENRADE'ERMANY

("%'MB( 0OSTFACH0/"OX .EUENRADE'ERMANY

0HONE   &AX   

INFO HBE HYDRAULICSCOM WWWHBE HYDRAULICSCOM

WWWE HOLDINGDE

4WWWPLAKARTDE

$%,)6%29 02/'2!--%

3OLUTIONSFOR&LUID4ECHNOLOGY

ۑLBEHŸLTERAUS3TAHL%DELSTAHL

Temperature sensor Thermolog MK2 / EK2

One parameter to minimize the operating cost of hydraulic and lube systems is to prolong the life of the fluid itself. The continuous and precize control of fluid temperature within an acceptable span contributes significantly to this objective. Modern process control systems cope with this problem by regulating the operating temperature wilthin a narrow span if they receive precise signals with a low response time. The Thermolog transmitter measures the tempeature and responds to changes quickly and accurately. Changes are output using a 4 to 20 mA signal suitable for many controllers. The Thermolog MK2 can be mounted to the tank top, the tank wall fitted into pipework by means of a standard tube fiting.

A DIN or a M12 cable connector is available optional. The sensor is available in either brass or stainless steel.

!

Rugged design

!

Electrical insert easy to remove

!

DIN or optional M12 connector

!

Elastomer seal fitted as standard

!

DIN connector allows to adjustment of cable orientation in 90 ° steps

The unit consists of two modules which can be separated from each other. The “wet” part remains at the reservoir whereas the “dry” part can be removed for inspection. This eliminates the need to drain the reservoir or pipework for maintenance.

DE 11 0005 05/2002

Bühler Meß- und Regeltechnik GmbH D - 40880 Ratingen, Harkortstr. 29 Tel.: + 49 (0) 2102 / 49 89-0 Fax: + 49 (0) 2102 / 49 89-20 e-mail: [email protected]

technical data types

MK2 and EK2

temperature sensor

PT 100 class B DIN / IEC 751

36A/F

F000118E

14

max. load max. operating temperature storage temperature

-0 °C to +100 °C 1000 mm 10 - 30 V DC 4 - 20 mA (0 °C = 4 mA) (100 °C = 20 mA) =(UB-7,5 V)/0,02 A -20 °C to +100 °C -40 °C to +100 °C

62

measuring range max. length of probe operating voltage (UB) output

37

elastomerseal NBR

max. operating pressure

type MK 2 = brass type EK 2 = 1.4571 stainless Typ MK2 = 5 bar Typ EK2 = 10 bar

mounting depth min. 50

material probe

L= max.1000

G 1/2

ø11 (brass) ø10 (1.4571)

connectors

protection class cable gland

M3 3 pol. + PE DIN 43650

M12 (socket) 4pol.

IP 65 PG 11

IP 67** PG 7**

other connectors upon request

** with fixed plug

37

38

62

M12x1

F000043X

max. current

230 V AC/DC

F000040X

24 V DC

order information part-no . of the basic version, L=variable with connectors MK2 EK2

M3 1122299 1122399

M12 (with socket and plug) 1124299 1124399

lenght L = ... mm L = ... mm

order information: you need : Temperature sensor with connector type M3, length L= 520 mm, operating pressure 2 bar you order : part-no. 1122299 Temperature sensor Thermolog MK2-M3-L=520 we reserve the right to amend specifications

 NEMA Motor Data Ordering data Bestelldaten:

1LE2321-2BB11-4GA3

Client order no. / Kunden-Auftrags-Nr.: Order no. / Siemens-Auftrags-Nr.: Offer no. / Angebots-Nr.: Remarks / Bemerkung:

Item no. / Item-Nr.: Consignment no. / Komm.-Nr.: Project / Projekt:

Nameplate Data Type

SD100 - NEMA Premium Efficiency

HP

15.00

Rating

Voltage

400 V

Amps

Mounting and motor protection Type of construction

( G ) Round body - C-Face

Cont.

Motor protection

Without winding protection (A)

Ins. Class

Class F (Standard)

Terminal box design

Floor mount, T.Box LHS F-1 (3)

19.00

S.F.

1.15

FL RPM

1500.0

Amb. Temp.

40 deg C

FL Efficiency

92.4 %

Temp. Rise

Class B

FRAME

254TC

kVA Code

G

DE AFBMA

45BC03JPP3

NEMA Des

B

ODE AFBMA

45BC03JPP3

Mtr WT

286

Hertz

50

Ph

3

Bearing Data DE

ODE

Bearing Size

6309 ZZ C3

6309 ZZ C3

Bearing Type

Ball Bearing

Ball Bearing

AFBMA

45BC03JPP3

45BC03JPP3

Mechanical Data

Typical Performance Data Load

No Load

Efficiency Power Factor Current (A) Inverter Duty

SAFE STALL TIME

21.0

3/4

Full Load

92.3 %

92.8 %

92.4 %

Rtr wt (lbs)

754.3

Rtr WK2

1.68

FLT (lb-ft)

44.0

LRT

81.0

64,5 %

74,7 %

80,0 %

11.8 A

9.50 A

14.25 A

19.00 A

VT

20:1

CT

LRC

HOT (s)

1/2

116.0 A

Ext Load Inertia (WK2) Capability

COLD (s)

33.0

BDT

103.0

220,0 lb-ft²

20:1

Typical Noise Data A-weighted Sound

Octave Band Center Frequencies Hertz (Hz)

Pressure Level

63

125

250

500

1000

2000

4000

8000

SPL

72.0

at 3 feet

0.0

49.0

60.0

67.0

68.0

66.0

63.0

50.0

SPwrL

83.0

Wiring Connection Information Description

Special design/ Sonderausführung:

3 PHASE - 9 LEAD - WYE

Voltage

L1

L2

L3

Connected together

-- -- --

-- -- --

-- -- --

-- -- --

-- -- --

HIGH

T1

T2

T3

-- -- --

Lubrication Information Manufacturer

Mobil Polyrex EM or equal

Type

Polyurea (standard)

DE Capacity (oz.)

0,5

ODEnd Capacity (oz.)

0,5

Relubricate bearings every six months (more frequent if conditions require). See Instruction Manual.

Technical data are subject to change! There may be discrepancies between calculated and rating plate values.Technische Änderungen vorbehalten! Es könnte

generated / Generiert: 11.11.2013 14:26:45

Axial Piston Variable Pump A10VSO

RE 92711/01.12 1/48 Replaces: 06.09 and RE 92707/11.10

Data sheet

Series 31 Sizes 18 to 140 Nominal pressure 280 bar Maximum pressure 350 bar Open circuit Contents Type code for standard program

Features 2

Technical data

4

Technical data, standard unit

6

Technical data, high-speed version

7

– Variable pump in axial piston swashplate design for hydrostatic drives in an open circuit – The flow is proportional to the drive speed and the displacement

DG – Two-point control, directly operated

10

– The flow can be steplessly varied by adjustment of the swashplate angle.

DR – Pressure control

11

– 2 case drain ports

DRG – Pressure control, remotely operated

12

– Excellent suction characteristics

DFR, DFR1 – Pressure and flow control

13

– Low noise level

DFLR – Pressure, flow and power control

14

– Long service life

ED – Electro-hydraulic pressure control

15

– Axial and radial load capacity of drive shaft

ER – Electro-hydraulic pressure control

16

– Favorable power/weight ratio

Dimensions sizes 18 to 140

18

– Versatile controller range

Dimensions through drive

36

– Short control time

Summary mounting options

41

Combination pumps A10VO + A10VO

42

– The through drive is suitable for adding gear pumps and axial piston pumps up to the same size, i.e., 100% through drive.

Connector for solenoids

44

Installation instructions

46

General instructions

48

2/48

Bosch Rexroth AG

A10VSO Series 31 | RE 92711/01.12

Type code for standard program A10VS

O

02

03

01

/ 04

05

31 06

– 07

V 08

Version Standard version (without symbol) 01 HFA, HFB, HFC hydraulic fluid (except for Skydrol)

High-speed version

09

10

11

12

13

18

28

45

L

L

L

71 100 140 L

L

L

–

L

L

L

L

L

E

–

–

L

L

L

L

H

Axial piston unit 02 Swashplate design, variable, nominal pressure 280 bar, maximum pressure 350 bar

A10VS

Operation mode 03 Pump, open circuit

O

Size (NG) 04 Geometric displacement, see table of values on pages 6 and 7

18

28

45

71 100 140

L

L

L

L

L

L

DG

L

L

L

L

L

L

DR

X-T open

L

L

L

L

L

L

DFR

X-T closed

L

L

L

L

L

L

DFR1

–

L

L

L

L

L

FE11)

L

L

L

L

L

L

DFE11)

L

L

L

L

L

L

DRG

Control device Two-point control, directly operated Pressure control with flow control, hydraulic

with swivel angle control, electric pressure and swivel-angle control, electric

05

with pressure cut-off, remotely operated hydraulic electrical

negative characteristic positive characteristic

12V

L

L

L

L

L

L

ED71

24V

L

L

L

L

L

L

ED72

12V

L

L

L

L

L

L

ER712)

24V

L

L

L

L

L

L

ER722)

–

L

L

L

L

L

DFLR

Pressure, flow and power control Series 06 Series 3, Index 1

07

31

Direction of rotation Viewed on drive shaft

clockwise

R

counter clockwise

L

Seals 08 FKM (fluor-caoutchouc)

1) 2)

V

See RE 30030 The following must be taken into account during project planning: Excessive current levels (I > 1200 mA with 12 V or I > 600 mA with 24 V) to the ER solenoid can result in undesired increase of pressure which can lead to pump or system damage: - Use Imax current limiter solenoids. - A sandwich plate pressure reducing valve can be used to protect the pump in the event of overflow. An accessory kit with pressure reducing sandwich plate can be ordered from Rexroth under part number R902490825.

= available

M= on request

– = not available

RE 92711/01.12 | A10VSO Series 31

Bosch Rexroth AG

3/48

Type code for standard program A10VS

O

02

03

01

Drive shaft Splined shaft ANSI B92.1a 09

Parallel keyed shaft DIN 6885

10

11

Mounting flange ISO 3019-2

/ 04

31

05

–

06

07

09

10

11

12

13

18

28

45

standard shaft

L

L

L

L

L

L

S

similar to shaft "S" however for higher input torque

L

L

L

L

–

–

R

L

L

L

L

L

L

P

not for through drive

71 100 140

18

28

45

2-hole

L

L

L

71 100 140 – L L

4-hole

–

–

–

–

18

28

45

L

L

L

71 100 140 – L L

12

–

–

–

L

42

18 L

28 L

45 L

71 100 140 L L L

N00

K01

Service line port SAE flange ports on opposite side, metric fastening thread

Through drive without through drive Flange ISO 3019-1

coupling for splined shaft1)

Diameter

diameter

82-2 (A) 101-2 (B)

–

–

L

–

A B

5/8 in

9T 16/32DP

L

L

L

L

L

L

3/4 in

11T 16/32DP

L

L

L

L

L

L

K52

7/8 in

13T 16/32DP

–

L

L

L

L

L

K68

1 in

15T 16/32DP

–

–

L

L

L

L

K04

1 1/4 in 14T 12/24DP

–

–

–

L

L

L

K07

1 1/2 in 17T 12/24DP

–

–

–

–

L

L

K24

152-4 (D)

1 3/4 in 13T 8/16DP

–

–

–

–

–

L

K17

Ø 63, metric 4-hole

shaft key Ø 25

–

L

L

L

L

L

K57

127-2 (C)

12

V 08

Flange ISO 3019-2 Diameter 80, 2-hole

3/4 in

11T 16/32DP

L

L

L

L

L

L

KB2

100, 2-hole

7/8 in

13T 16/32DP

–

L

L

L

L

L

KB3

1 in 125, 2-hole 180, 4-hole

15T 16/32DP

–

–

L

L

L

L

KB4

1 1/4 in 14T 12/24DP

–

–

–

L

L

L

KB5

1 1/2 in 17T 12/24DP

–

–

–

–

L

L

KB6

1 3/4 in 13T 8/16DP

–

–

–

–

–

L

KB7

18 L

28 L

45 L

71 100 140 L L L

Connectors for solenoids2) 13 HIRSCHMANN connector – without suppressor diode 1) 2)

Coupling for splined shaft as per ANSI B92.1a Connectors for other electric components can deviate.

= available

M= on request

– = not available

H

4/48

Bosch Rexroth AG

A10VSO Series 31 | RE 92711/01.12

Technical data Hydraulic fluid

Notes on the choice of hydraulic fluid

Before starting project planning, please refer to our data sheets RE 90220 (mineral oil) and RE 90221 (environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids) for detailed information regarding the choice of hydraulic fluid and application conditions.

In order to select the correct hydraulic fluid, it is necessary to know the operating temperature in the reservoir (open circuit) in relation to the ambient temperature.

When using environmentally acceptable hydraulic fluids, the limitations regarding technical data and seals must be observed. Please contact us. When ordering, indicate the hydraulic fluid that is to be used. Operating viscosity range For optimum efficiency and service life we recommend that the operating viscosity (at operating temperature) be selected in the range νopt = opt. operating viscosity 16 ... 36 mm /s 2

referred to reservoir temperature (open circuit). Limits of viscosity range For critical operating conditions the following values apply: 10 mm2/s short-term (t ≤ 1 min) at max perm. case drain temperature of 90 °C.

nmin =

The hydraulic fluid should be selected so that within the operating temperature range, the viscosity lies within the optimum range (νopt), see shaded section of the selection diagram. We recommend to select the higher viscosity grade in each case. Example: at an ambient temperature of X °C the operating temperature is 60 °C. In the optimum operating viscosity range (νopt; shaded area) this corresponds to viscosity grades VG 46 resp. VG 68; VG 68 should be selected. Important: The case drain temperature is influenced by pressure and input speed and is always higher than the reservoir temperature. However, at no point in the component may the temperature exceed 90 °C. The temperature difference specified on the left is to be taken into account when determining the viscosity in the bearing. If the above conditions cannot be met, due to extreme operating parameters please contact us.

Please also ensure that the max. case drain temperature of 90 °C is not exceeded in localized areas (for instance, in the bearing area).The fluid temperature in the bearing area is approx. 5 K higher than the average case drain temperature.

Filtration of the hydraulic fluid The finer the filtration the better the cleanliness level of the hydraulic fluid and the longer the service life of the axial piston unit.

Depending on the installation situation, special measures are necessary at temperatures between -40 °C and -25 °C. Please contact us.

In order to guarantee the functional reliability of the axial piston unit it is necessary to carry out a gravimetric evaluation of the hydraulic fluid to determine the particle contamination and the cleanliness level according to ISO 4406. A cleanliness level of at least 20/18/15 must be maintained. At very high hydraulic fluid temperatures (90 °C to maximum 115 °C), a cleanliness level of at least 19/17/14 according to ISO 4406 is necessary.

For detailed information on operation with low temperatures see data sheet RE 90300-03-B.

If the above cleanliness levels cannot be maintained, please contact us.

nmax =

1000 mm2/s short-term (t ≤ 1 min) on cold start (p ≤ 30 bar, n ≤ 1000 rpm, tmin -25 °C)

Selection diagram 1600 1000 600 400

-40

-20

20

40

60

80

100

1600

0 10 VG 68 VG 46 VG 32 VG 2 2

VG

200

Viscosity ν [mm2/s]

0

100 60 40

36 νopt.

20

16

10

5 -40

-25

-10 0 10

30

50

70

90

5 115

Temperature t in °C tmin = -40 °C

Fluid temperature range

tmax = +115 °C

RE 92711/01.12 | A10VSO Series 31

Bosch Rexroth AG

5/48

Technical data Operating pressure range Pressure at service line port B

Definition

Nominal pressure pnom _________________ 280 bar absolute

Nominal pressure pnom The nominal pressure corresponds to the maximum design pressure.

Maximum pressure pmax _______________ 350 bar absolute Single operating period ___________________________ 2.5 ms Total operating period _____________________________ 300 h Minimum pressure (high-pressure side) _____ 10 bar absolute1)

Pressure p

Rate of pressure change RA max ______________ 16000 bar/s pnom

Maximum pressure pmax The maximum pressure corresponds to the maximum operating pressure within the single operating period. The total of the single operating periods must not exceed the total operating period. Minimum pressure (high-pressure side) Minimum pressure in the high-pressure side (port B) that is required in order to prevent damage to the axial piston unit. The minimum pressure depends on the speed and displacement of the axial piston unit.

Δt Δp

Rate of pressure change RA Maximum permissible pressure build-up and pressure reduction speed with a pressure change over the entire pressure range.

Pressure at suction port S (inlet) Minimum pressure pS min __________________ 0.8 bar absolute Maximum pressure pS max _________________10 bar1) absolute Note Please contact us for values for other hydraulic fluids.

Pressure p

Time t Single operating period

t1

t2

tn

Maximum pressure pmax Nominal pressure pnom

Case drain pressure Maximum permissible case drain pressure (at port L, L1): Maximum 0.5 bar higher than the inlet pressure at port S, however not higher than 2 bar absolute.

Minimum pressure (high-pressure side)

pL max abs _________________________________2 bar absolute1) 1)

Other values on request

Time t Total operating period = t1 + t2 + ... + tn

6/48

Bosch Rexroth AG

A10VSO Series 31 | RE 92711/01.12

Technical data, standard unit Table of values (theoretical values, without efficiencies and tolerances: values rounded) Size

NG

18

28

45

71

100

140

Geometrical displacement per revolution Vg max

cm3

18

28

45

71

100

140

maximum at Vg max

nnom

rpm

3300

3000

2600

2200

2000

1800

maximum at Vg < Vg max

nmax perm rpm

3900

3600

3100

2600

2400

2100

at nnom and Vg max

qv max

l/min

59

84

117

156

200

252

at nE = 1500 rpm and Vg max

qvE max

l/min

27

42

68

107

150

210

at nnom, Vg max

Pmax

kW

30

39

55

73

93

118

at nE = 1500 rpm and Vg max

PE max

kW

12.6

20

32

50

70

98

Tmax

Nm

80

125

200

316

445

623 223

Speed1)

Flow

Power at Δp = 280 bar

Torque Δp = 280 bar

at Vg max and Rotary stiffness, drive shaft

Δp = 100 bar

T

Nm

30

45

72

113

159

S

c

Nm/rad

11087

22317

37500

71884

121142

169537

R

c

Nm/rad

14850

26360

41025

76545

–

–

P

188406

c

Nm/rad

13158

25656

41232

80627

132335

Moment of inertial rotary group

JTW

kgm2

0.00093

0.0017

0.0033

0.0083

0.0167

0.0242

Angular acceleration, maximum2)

α

rad/s2

6800

5500

4000

3300

2700

2700

Filling capacity

V

L

0.4

0.7

1.0

1.6

2.2

3.0

kg

12

15

21

33

45

60

Weight (without through drive) approx. m 1)

The values are applicable: - for an absolute pressure pabs = 1 bar at suction port S - within the optimum viscosity range from νopt = 16 to 36 mm2/s - for mineral-oil based hydraulic fluid.

2)

The scope of application lies between the minimum necessary and the maximum permissible drive speeds. Valid for external excitation (e.g. diesel engine 2- to 8-fold rotary frequency, cardan shaft 2-fold rotary frequency). The limiting value is only valid for a single pump. The loading capacity of the connecting parts must be taken into account.

Note Exceeding the maximum or falling below the minimum permissible values can lead to a loss of function, a reduction in operational service life or total destruction of the axial piston unit. We recommend to check the loading through tests or calculation / simulation and comparison with the permissible values.

Determination of size Flow Torque Power

qV = T P

= =

Vg
s
O
s
ηV

[l/min]

1000 Vg
s
Δp

[Nm]


s
Q
s
Imh 2π
s
5
s
O 60000

=

qV
s
Δp 
s
ηt

[kW]

Vg

=

Displacement per revolution in cm3

Δp

=

Differential pressure in bar

n

=

Speed in rpm

ηV

=

Volumetric efficiency

ηmh

=

Mechanical-hydraulic efficiency

ηt

=

Total efficiency(ηt = ηV
s
ηmh)

8/48

Bosch Rexroth AG

A10VSO Series 31 | RE 92711/01.12

Technical data Permissible radial and axial loading on the drive shaft Size

NG

Radial force maximum at a/2

18

28

45

71

100

140

N

350

1200

1500

1900

2300

2800

+ Fax max N

700

1000

1500

2400

4000

4800

Fq

Fq max

a/2 a/2 a

Axial force maximum ±Fax

Permissible input and through-drive torques Size

NG

18

28

45

71

100

140

Torque at Vg max and Δp = 280 bar1)

Tmax

Nm

80

125

200

316

445

623

TE max

Nm

124

198

319

626

1104

1620

Ø

in

3/4

7/8

1

1 1/4

1 1/2

1 3/4

TE max

Nm

160

250

400

644

–

–

Input torque for drive shaft, maximum2) S R P

Ø

in

3/4

7/8

1

1 1/4

–

–

TE max

Nm

88

137

200

439

857

1206

Ø

mm

18

22

25

32

40

45

Maximum through-drive torque for drive shaft

1) 2)

S

TD max

Nm

108

160

319

492

778

1266

R

TD max

Nm

120

176

365

548

–

–

P

TD max

Nm

88

137

200

439

778

1206

Without considering efficiency For drive shafts free of radial load

Distribution of torques

T1

T2

TE 1. Pumpe 1st pump

2. Pumpe 2nd pump

TD

RE 92711/01.12 | A10VSO Series 31

Bosch Rexroth AG

9/48

Technical data Drive power and flow Operating material: Hydraulic fluid ISO VG 46 DIN 51519, t = 50 °C Size 18

Size 71

_ _ _ _ n = 1500 rpm

_ _ _ _ n = 1500 rpm

______ n = 3300 rpm

______ n = 2200 rpm 80

140

40

20

Pqv max

20

10

Pqv zero

0

0 0

50

100

150

200

250 280

Operating pressure [bar]

70

qv

120

60

100

50

80

40

Pqv max

60

30

40

20

Pqv zero

10

20

0

0

Size 28

Drive power P [kW]

qv

Flow qV [l/min]

30

Drive power P [kW]

Flow qV [l/min]

160

60

0

50

_ _ _ _ n = 1500 rpm

100

150

200

250 280

Operating pressure [bar]

______ n = 3000 rpm

40

qv

Pqv max

20 0 0

50

100

150

20 10

P 200qv zero 250 280

0

Operating pressure [bar]

Size 45 _ _ _ _ n = 1500 rpm

______ n = 2000 rpm 180

60

100

50

80

40 30

60

20

Pqv zero

50

80

40

qv Pqv max

30

40

20

20

10

0 150

200

0 Pqv zero 250 280

10 0

0 0

Drive power P [kW]

50

100

150

200

250 280

Operating pressure [bar]

Size 140 _ _ _ _ n = 1500 rpm ______ n = 1800 rpm 260

130

240

Operating pressure [bar]

qv

120

220

110

200

100

180

Flow qV [l/min]

Flow qV [l/min]

100

100

70

Pqv max

120

20

60

50

80

140

40

110

0

90

qv

160

______ n = 2600 rpm

60

100

200

Drive power P [kW]

30

90

Pqv max

160

80

140

70

120

60

100

50

80

40

60

30

Pqv zero

40

20

20

10

0

0 0

50

100

150

200

250 280

Operating pressure [bar]

Drive power P [kW]

60

_ _ _ _ n = 1500 rpm

Flow qV [l/min]

40

Drive power P [kW]

Flow qV [l/min]

Size 100 90 80

RE 92711/01.12 | A10VSO Series 31

Bosch Rexroth AG

13/48

DFR/DFR1 – Pressure and flow control Circuit diagram, sizes 18 to 100

X

The pressure control overrides the flow control function. Note The DFR1 version has no connection between X and the reservoir. Unloading the LS-pilot line must be possible in the valve system. Because of the flushing function sufficient unloading of the X-line must also be provided.

L

B

Flow control at n1 = 1500 rpm; tfluid = 50 °C)

Operating pressure pB [bar] Setting range1)

280

25

Hysteresis / pressure rise Δp max

Static characteristic

L1

S

Circuit diagram, size 140 With DFR1 plugged

Flow qv [l/min]

1)

X

In order to prevent damage to the pump and the system, this setting range is the permissible setting range and must not be exceeded. The range of possible settings at the valve are greater.

Flow qv [l/min]

Speed n [rpm]

Hysteresis / pressure rise Δpmax

B Static characteristic at variable speed

Differential pressure Δp Standard setting: 14 to 22 bar. If another setting is required, please state in clear text. Relieving the load on port X to the reservoir results in a zero stroke ("standby") pressure which lies about 1 to 2 bar higher than the differential pressure Δp. System influences are not taken into account.

Not included in the delivery contents

With DFR1 plugged

Not included in the delivery contents

In addition to the pressure control function (see page 11), the pump flow may be varied by means of a differential pressure over an adjustable orifice (e.g. directional valve) installed in the service line to the actuator. The pump flow is equal to the actual required flow by the actuator, regardless of changing pressure levels.

Port for B

Service line

S

Suction line

L, L1

Case drain (L1 plugged)

X

Pilot pressure

Control data Data for pressure control DR, see page 11. Maximum flow deviation measured at drive speed n = 1500 rpm. NG Δqv max

l/min

18

28

45

71

100

140

0.9

1.0

1.8

2.8

4.0

6.0

Control fluid consumption DFR maximum approx. 3 to 4.5 l/min Control fluid consumption DFR1 ____ maximum approx. 3 l/min Volume flow loss at qVmax, see page 9.

RE 92711/01.12 | A10VSO Series 31

Notes

Bosch Rexroth AG

17/48

RE 92711/01.12 | A10VSO Series 31

Bosch Rexroth AG

21/48

Before finalizing your design request a certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.

Dimensions size 28 DFR/DFR1 – Pressure and flow control, hydraulic Clockwise rotation

Valve mounting for ccw rotation

V 118 90

B X

L 14

L

max. 110

9.5 6.3

Flange ISO 3019-2

40

X

45°

0 -0.054

80

45°

14 40

L1

140 164

S

164 206

74

Ø1 74

80

Ø100

74

83.5

119.3 136

W

58.7 Ø32

S 47.6

22.2

Detail W Ø20

Detail V

B 30.2

Ports Designation

Port for

Standard

Size1)

Maximum State pressure [bar]2)

B

Service line, fastening thread

SAE J5183) DIN 13

3/4 in M10 x 1.5; 17 deep

350

O

S

Suction line, fastening thread

SAE J5183) DIN 13

1 1/4 in M10 x 1.5; 17 deep

10

O

L

Case drain fluid

DIN 38524)

M18 x 1.5; 12 deep

2

O5)

L1

Case drain fluid

DIN 38524)

M18 x 1.5; 12 deep

2

X5)

38524)

M14 x 1.5; 12 deep

350

O

G 1/4in; 12 deep

350

O

X

Pilot pressure

DIN

X

Pilot pressure with DG-control

DIN ISO 2284)

For the maximum tightening torques the general instructions on page 48 must be observed. Depending on the application, short-term pressure spikes can occur. Consider this when selecting measuring equipment and fittings. Pressure values in bar absolute. 3) Only dimensions according to SAE J518, metric fastening thread deviating from the standard. 4) The spot face can be deeper than as specified in the standard. 5) Depending on the installation position, L or L1 must be connected (see also installation instructions on pages 44, 45) O = Must be connected (plugged on delivery) X = Plugged (in normal operation) 1)

2)

22/48

Bosch Rexroth AG

A10VSO Series 31 | RE 92711/01.12

Before finalizing your design request a certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.

Dimensions size 28 Drive shaft

25.1

Usable shaft length

P Parallel shaft key DIN 6885, A6x6x32

16

25 41

2) 3) 4) 5)

M64), 5)

2

41

1)

36 + 0.3 0.0 32

16

5 ø22 +0.009 -0.004

16 5

Splined shaft 7/8 in 13T 16/32DP1)2) (SAE J744)

24.4 -0.2

33.1

R

1/4-20UNC-2B3) 5)

Splined shaft 7/8 in 13T 16/32DP1) (SAE J744) 1/4-20UNC-2B3) 5)

S

ANSI B92.1a, 30° pressure angle, flat root, side fit, tolerance class 5 Spline according to ANSI B92.1a, run out of spline is a deviation from standard. Thread according to ASME B1.1 Thread according to DIN 13 For the maximum tightening torques the general instructions on page 48 must be observed.

46

RE 92711/01.12 | A10VSO Series 31

Bosch Rexroth AG

Before finalizing your design request a certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.

Dimensions size 28 DG

DFLR

Two-point control, directly operated

Pressure, flow and power control

to flange surface

Valve mounting for ccw rotation

198 3 G 1/4 in

Valve mounting for ccw rotation

X

X

25 +0.4

L

40 max. 110

to flange surface 158

23/48

12 99.5 103.5

119 135.5

DR

DRG

Pressure control

Pressure control, remotely operated

Valve mounting for ccw rotation

ED7. / ER7. Electro-hydraulic pressure control to flange surface

140

X

Valve mounting for ccw rotation

135.51)

ER7.: 170.5 mm when using a sandwich plate pressure reducing valve. For details of connection options and drive shafts, see also pages 21 and 22 1)

X

119 136

136

130

Valve mounting for ccw rotation

max. 110

X

118

40 max. 110

to flange surface

36/48

Bosch Rexroth AG

A10VSO Series 31 | RE 92711/01.12

Before finalizing your design request a certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.

Dimensions through drive K01 flange ISO 3019-2 (SAE J744 - 82-2 (A)) Coupling for splined shaft according to ANSI B92.1a-1996 Cut A - B A3 A

45°

.5

A2

Ø82.55 +0.050 –0.020

06 Ø1

5/8 in 9T 16/32 DP1) (SAE J744 - 16-4 (A)) NG

A1

A2

A3

A42)

18

182

10

43.3

M10 x 1.5, 14.5 deep

28

204

10

33.7

M10 x 1.5, 16 deep

45

229

10.7

53.4

M10 x 1.5, 16 deep

71

267

11.8

61.3

M10 x 1.5, 20 deep

100 338

10.5

65

M10 x 1.5, 16 deep

140 350

10.8

77.3

M10 x 1.5, 16 deep

A4 10

B to mounting flange

A1

K52 flange ISO 3019-2 (SAE J744 - 82-2 (A)) Coupling for splined shaft according to ANSI B92.1a-1996

3/4 in 11T 16/32 DP1) (SAE J744 - 19-4 (A-B)) NG

Cut A - B A3 A

10

45°

.5

Ø82.55 +0.05 –0.02

06 Ø1

A1

A2

A3

A42)

18

182

18.8

38.7

M10 x 1.5, 14.5 deep

28

204

18.8

38.7

M10 x 1.5, 16 deep

45

229

18.9

38.7

M10 x 1.5, 16 deep

71

267

21.3

41.4

M10 x 1.5, 20 deep

100

338

19

38.9

M10 x 1.5, 16 deep

140

350

18.9

38.6

M10 x 1.5, 16 deep

A4 A2

B to mounting flange

A1

K68 flange ISO 3019-2 (SAE J744 - 101-2 (B)) Coupling for splined shaft according to ANSI B92.1a-1996

7/8 in 13T 16/32 DP1) (SAE J744 - 22-4 (B))

Cut A - B A3

A

A1

A2

A3

A42)

28

204

17.8

41.7

M12 x 1.75, continuous

45

229

17.9

41.7

M12 x 1.75, 18 deep

71

267

10

45°

omitted for NG28

NG

Ø101.6 +0.05 –0.02

6

Ø14

20.3

44.1

M12 x 1.75, 20 deep

100 338

18

41.9

M12 x 1.75, 20 deep

140 350

17.8

41.6

M12 x 1.75, 20 deep

omitted for NG28

A4

A2 B 1) 2)

to mounting flange

A1

30° pressure angle, flat root, side fit, tolerance class 5 Thread according to DIN 13, observe the general instructions on page 48 for the maximum tightening torques.

RE 92711/01.12 | A10VSO Series 31

Bosch Rexroth AG

41/48

Summary mounting options SAE – mounting flange Through-drive1) Mounting option – 2nd pump Coupling Flange Short A10VO/31 A10V(S)O/5x ISO 3019-1 for splined des. NG (shaft) NG (shaft) shaft 82-2 (A) 5/8 in 10 (U) K01 18 (U)

101-2 (B)

127-2 (C)

152-4 (4-hole D) 1) 2) 3)

3/4 in

K52

18 (S, R)

7/8 in

K68

1 in

K04

1 1/4 in

K07

1 1/2 in

K24

28 (S, R) 45 (U, W)1) 45 (S, R) – 71 (S, R) 100 (U)3) 100 (S)

1 3/4 in

K17

140 (S)

10 (S) 18 (U) 18 (S, R) 28 (S, R) 45 (U, W)1) 45 (S, R) 60, 63 (U, W) 2) 85 (U, W)3) 100 (U, W) 85 (S) 100 (S) –

Gear pump design (NG)

Through drive available for NG

F (5 to 22)

18 to 140

–

18 to 140

N/G (26 to 49)

28 to 140

–

45 to 140

–

71 to 140

–

100 to 140

–

140

Gear pump design (NG)

Through drive available for NG

Not for main pump NG28 with K68 Not for main pump NG45 with K04 Not for main pump NG71 with K07

ISO – mounting flange Through-drive1) Mounting option – 2nd pump Coupling Flange Short A10VO/31 A10V(S)O/5x ISO 3019-2 for splined des. NG (shaft) NG (shaft) shaft 80-2 3/4 in 10 (S) KB2 18 (S, R)

–

18 to 140

100-2

7/8 in

KB3

28 (S, R)

–

–

28 to 140

1 in

KB4

45 (S, R)

–

–

45 to 140

125-2

1 1/4 in

KB5

71 (S, R)

–

–

71 to 140

1 1/2 in

KB6

100 (S)

–

–

100 to 140

1 3/4 in

KB7

140 (S)

–

–

140

180-4 (4-hole B)

Shaft key Through-drive1) Mounting option – 2nd pump Coupling Flange Short A10VO/31 A10V(S)O/5x ISO 3019-2 for shaft des. NG (shaft) NG (shaft) key 80-2 3/4 in – K57 –

Radial piston pump

Through drive available for NG

R4

28 to 140

42/48

Bosch Rexroth AG

A10VSO Series 31 | RE 92711/01.12

Before finalizing your design request a certified installation drawing. Dimensions in mm.

Combination pumps A10VO + A10VO

When using combination pumps it is possible to have multiple, mutually independent circuits without the need for a splitter gearbox. When ordering combination pumps the model codes for the first and the second pump must be joined by a "+". Order example: A10VSO100DFR1/31R-VSB12K04+ A10VSO45DFR/31R-VSA12N00 If no further pumps are to be factory-mounted, the simple type code is sufficient.Included in the delivery contents of the pump with through drive are then: coupling and seal, with plastic cover to prevent penetration by dust and dirt. It is permissible to use a combination of two single pumps of the same size (tandem pump), considering a dynamic mass acceleration force of maximum 10 g (= 98.1 m/s2) without an additional support bracket. Each through drive is plugged with a non-pressure-resistant cover. Before commissioning the units, they must therefore be equipped with a pressure-resistant cover. Through drives can also be ordered with pressure-resistant covers. Please specify in clear text. For combination pumps comprising more than two pumps, the mounting flange must be calculated for the permissible moment of inertia.

Permissible mass moment of inertia NG

18

28

45

71

100

140

Permissible mass moment of inertia static

Tm

Nm

500

880

1370

2160

3000

4500

dynamic at 10 g (98.1 m/s2)

Tm

Nm

50

88

137

216

300

450

Mass with through-drive plate Mass without through drive (e.g. 2nd pump)

m m

kg kg

14 12

19 15

25 21

39 33

54 45

68 60

Distance center of gravity

l

mm

90

110

130

150

160

160

m2

m1

m1, m2, m3

Mass of pumps

[kg]

l1, l2, l3

Distance center of gravity

[mm]

m3

l1 Tm = (m1 s l1 + m2 s l2 + m3 s l3) s

l2 l3

1 102 [Nm]

RE 92711/01.12 | A10VSO Series 31

Bosch Rexroth AG

43/48

Connector for solenoids HIRSCHMANN DIN EN 175 301-803-A /ISO 4400

Changing connector position

without bidirectional suppressor diode ___________________H

If necessary, you can change the position of the connector by turning the solenoid.

Type of protection according to DIN/EN 60529 ________ IP65 The sealing ring in the screw cable fitting is suitable for line diameters of 4.5 mm to 10 mm. The line connector is not included in the delivery contents. This can be supplied by Bosch Rexroth on request. Bosch Rexroth material number: R902602623 Cable fitting M16x1.5 tightening torque: MA = 1.5 - 2.5 Nm

65.4

Mounting bolt M3 Tightening torque: MA = 0.5 Nm

(1)

Ø37

(2)

50 68.5

Device plug on solenoid according to DIN 43650

line connector DIN EN 175301-803-A Wiring screw connector M 16x1.5

PE A 1

PE A 2

1

2

To do this, proceed as follows: 1. Loosen the mounting nut (1) of the solenoid. To do this, turn the mounting nut (1) one revolution counter-clockwise. 2. Turn the solenoid body (2) to the desired position. 3. Retighten the mounting nut of the solenoid. Tightening torque: 5+1 Nm. (size WAF26, 12-pt DIN 3124) On delivery, the position of the connector may differ from that shown in the brochure or drawing.

44/48

Bosch Rexroth AG

A10VSO Series 31 | RE 92711/01.12

Installation instructions General

Below-reservoir installation (standard)

The axial piston unit must be filled with hydraulic fluid and air bled during commissioning and operation. This must also be observed following a longer standstill as the axial piston unit empty via the hydraulic lines.

Below-reservoir installation means the axial piston unit is installed outside of the reservoir below the minimum fluid level.

1

Especially with the installation position "drive shaft upwards" or "drive shaft downward", attention must be paid to a complete filling and air bleeding since there is a risk, for example, of dry running.

2 a min

a min SB

SB

ht min h min

The case drain fluid in the motor housing must be directed to the reservoir via the highest case drain port (L1, L2, L3).

ht min h min

L

For combinations of multiple units, make sure that the respective case pressure in each unit is not exceeded. In the event of pressure differences at the case drain ports of the units, the shared case drain line must be changed so that the minimum permissible case pressure of all connected units is not exceeded in any situation. If this is not possible, separate case drain lines must be laid if necessary.

L S

L1

3

To achieve favorable noise values, decouple all connecting lines using elastic elements and avoid above-reservoir installation.

4 a min

a min

In all operating conditions, the suction line and case drain line must flow into the reservoir below the minimum fluid level. The permissible suction height hS is a result of the overall pressure loss, but may not be greater than hS max = 800 mm. The minimum suction pressure at port S must also not fall below 0.8 bar absolute during operation.

L1 S

SB

SB ht min h min

ht min h min L1

S

S L

Installation position

L1

L

See the following examples 1 to 12. Additional installation positions are available upon request. Recommended installation positions: 1 and 3.

Installation position

Air bleed

Filling

1

L

S + L1

2

L1

S+L

3

L1

S+L

4

L

S + L1

Key, see page 45.

RE 92711/01.12 | A10VSO Series 31

Bosch Rexroth AG

45/48

Installation instructions Above-reservoir installation

Inside-reservoir installation

Above-reservoir installation means the axial piston unit is installed above the minimum fluid level of the reservoir. To prevent the axial piston unit from draining, a height difference hES min of at least 25 mm at port L 1 is required in installation position 6.

Inside-reservoir installation is when the axial piston unit is nstalled in the reservoir below the minimum fluid level. The axial piston unit is completely below the hydraulic fluid.

Observe the maximum permissible suction height hS max = 800 mm. A check valve in the case drain line is only permissible in individual cases. Consult us for approval.

5

If the minimum fluid level is equal to or below the upper edge of the pump, see chapter "Above-reservoir installation". Axial piston units with electrical components (e.g. electric control, sensors) may not be installed in a reservoir below the fluid level.

9

6 F

F

hES min

L

L L1

ht min

SB

L

S

L1

hs max SB

a min

L

L1 S

S

hs max

10 a min

L1

h min

S

ht min h min

SB

ht min h min

ht min h min

a min

a min

11

12 a min

7

a min

8

F L1

SB

L1 S

F S

S

S ht min

SB

L

L

h min

L1

L hs max

SB

L

ht min

L1 h min

hs max SB

SB

ht min h min

ht min h min

a min

a min

Installation position

Air bleed

Filling

9

L

L, L1

10

L1

L, L1

11

L1

S + L, L1

12

L

S + L, L1

Installation position

Air bleed

Filling

5

F

L (F)

S

Suction port

6

F

L1 (F)

F

Filling / air bleeding

7

F

S + L 1 (F)

L, L1

Case drain port

8

F

S + L (F)

SB

Baffle (baffle plate)

ht min

Minimum necessary immersion depth (200 mm)

hmin

Minimum necessary spacing to reservoir bottom (100 mm)

hES min

Minimum necessary height needed to protect the axial piston unit from draining (25 mm).

hS max

Maximum permissible suction height (800 mm)

amin

When designing the reservoir, ensure adequate distance between the suction line and the case drain line. This prevents the heated, return flow from being drawn directly back into the suction line.

46/48

Notes

Bosch Rexroth AG

A10VSO Series 31 | RE 92711/01.12

RE 92711/01.12 | A10VSO Series 31

Notes

Bosch Rexroth AG

47/48

48/48

Bosch Rexroth AG

A10VSO Series 31 | RE 92711/01.12

General instructions – The A10VSO pump is designed to be used in open circuit. – Project planning, installation and commissioning of the axial piston unit require the involvement of qualified personnel. – Before operating the axial piston unit, please read the appropriate instruction manual thoroughly and completely. If necessary, request these from Bosch Rexroth. – During and shortly after operation, there is a risk of burns on the axial piston unit and especially on the solenoids. Take appropriate safety measures (e.g. by wearing protective clothing). – Depending on the operating conditions of the axial piston unit (operating pressure, fluid temperature), the characteristics may shift. – Service line ports: - The ports and fastening threads are designed for the specified maximum pressure. The machine or system manufacturer must ensure that the connecting elements and lines correspond to the specified application conditions (pressure, flow, hydraulic fluid, temperature) with the necessary safety factors. - The service line ports and function ports are only designed to accommodate hydraulic lines. – Pressure cut-off and pressure control do not provide security against pressure overload. A separate pressure relief valve is to be provided in the hydraulic system. – The data and notes contained herein must be adhered to. – The product is not approved as a component for the safety concept of a general machine according to DIN EN ISO 13849. – The following tightening torques apply: - Fittings: Observe the manufacturer‘s instruction regarding the tightening torques of the used fittings. - Mounting bolts: For mounting bolts with metric ISO thread according to DIN 13 or thread according to ASME B1.1, we recommend checking the tightening torque individually according to VDI 2230. - Female threads in axial piston unit: The maximum permissible tightening torques MG max are maximum values for the female threads and must not be exceeded. For values, see the following table. - Threaded plugs: For the metal threaded plugs supplied with the axial piston unit, the required tightening torques of the threaded plugs MV apply. For values, see the following table.

Ports

Maximum permissible tightening torque for female threads MG max

Required tightening torque for threaded plugs MV

Size of hexagon socket of threaded plugs

Standard

Thread size

DIN 3852

M14 x 1.5

80 Nm

45 Nm

6 mm

M16 x 1.5

100 Nm

50 Nm

8 mm

DIN ISO 228

M18 x 1.5

140 Nm

60 Nm

8 mm

M22 x 1.5

210 Nm

80 Nm

10 mm

M27 x 2

330 Nm

135 Nm

12 mm

G 1/4 in

70 Nm

–

–

Bosch Rexroth AG Axial piston units An den Kelterwiesen 14 72160 Horb a. N., Germany Tel.: +49-7451-92-0 Fax: +49-7451-82-21 [email protected] www.boschrexroth.com/axial-piston-pumps

© This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not be reproduced or given to third parties without its consent. The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No statements concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application can be derived from our information. The information given does not release the user from the obligation of own judgment and verification. It must be remembered that our products are subject to a natural process of wear and aging. Subject to change.

CATÁLOGO

DE PRODUTOS

Certificado NBR ISO 9001

hybel.com.br

3

2

Há 30 anos a Hybel busca satisfazer as necessidades dos segmentos agrícola, rodoviário, construção civil móbil e industrial no mercado brasileiro. Um trabalho que lhe rendeu uma ótima reputação de excelência em engenharia e durabilidade dos seus produtos. Reputação esta que tem permitido a expansão do seu mercado em muitos países, estando presente nos principais continentes do mundo. Com filiais no Brasil e nos EUA, a Hybel tem produtos de alta performance para automação dos sistemas hidráulicos.

MERCADO

Hybel fabricante de componentes hidráulicos, fundada em 1981, produzindo, desde então, equipamentos hidráulicos para automação dos segmentos agrícola, rodoviário, construção civil móbil e industrial. Com sua moderna planta industrial, localizada no sul do Brasil, distribui seus produtos através de suas filiais localizadas nos grandes centros comerciais do país e uma unidade em Chicago nos EUA. A empresa conta também com uma unidade de fundição e tratamento térmico. Visando a alta performance dos seus produtos, a Hybel está sempre em permanente busca de aperfeiçoamento dos seus processos produtivos. Usando máquinas CNC de última geração organizados em células robotizadas, cada peça é submetida a múltiplas inspeções com rigoroso controle de qualidade desde sua matéria-prima até os produtos acabados. Essa combinação de experiência e capacidade de produção permite à empresa buscar constantemente novos mercados e vencer desafios.

A 

A EMPRESA

S 75

S 05

S 11

S 003

S 117

S 12

SÉRIES ESPECIAIS

S 63

Dentre a extensa linha de bombas que compõe o portfólio de produtos, a Hybel possui as séries especiais. Com características próprias estas atendem as variadas necessidades construtivas. Dos mercados Agrícola, Rodoviário e Construção Civil (móbil) e Industrial.

S 33

S 53

As bombas hidráulicas da série Iron Pump são desenvolvidas especialmente para as mais duras aplicações. São equipamentos robustos de projeto preciso e eficiente, projetados para terem uma longa vida útil. Elas são produzidas em unidades simples ou múltiplas, possuindo corpo principal, flange de fixação e tampa traseira em partes segmentadas. Produzidas em ferro fundido de alta resistência e um projeto que permite uma grande variedade de combinações de montagens.

As bombas e motores hidráulicos da série Bombas de Buchas, projetadas especialmente para aplicações que exigem maiores pressões e rotações, proporcionam melhor eficiência volumétrica, maiores pressões até 270 bar e baixo índice de ruído. Elas são produzidas em unidades simples e múltiplas, possuindo corpo principal, flanges de fixação e tampas em partes segmentadas. Isto permite uma grande variedade de combinações de montagem.

SÉRIE BOMBAS DE BUCHAS

S 50

S 30

SÉRIE IRON PUMP

Os produtos da série AluminiBeta são sinônimos de alto desempenho e eficiência, apresentando baixos níveis de ruído e altas pressões de operação. Com dimensão reduzida, baixo peso em relação a força transmitida, sua construção é composta por corpo principal em liga de alumínio, rotor múltiplo de engrenagens com mancais ita deslizantes permitindo compensação hidrostática. O projeto Aluminißeta possibilita em que as bombas sejam montadas em unidades simples ou múltlipas, com ou sem válvulas auxiliares.

SÉRIE ALUMINIBETA

PRODUTOS

ALTA PERFORMANCE EM BOMBAS E MOTORES HIDRÁULICOS

ALTA PERFORMANCE

EM BOMBAS E MOTORES HIDRÁULICOS

3

4

2

W

F3

W

SENTIDO DE ROTAÇÃO 1: HORÁRIO 2: ANTI-HORÁRIO 3: DUPLO SENTIDO

H3

B

30

30: VAZÃO EM L/MIN.

T: TAMPA TRASEIRA : NENHUM VALOR, PRIM. E SEC. PRESSURIZ (OU) PRIM.e SEC. NÃO PRSSURIZADOS. 2: PRIMÁRIO PRESSURIZ.E SECUND.NÃO PRESSURIZ. 3: PRIMÁRIO NÃO PRESSURIZ. E SECUND.PRESURIZ. W: PÓRTICO CONVERTIDO NA LATERAL F3: TIPO DE ROSCA DO PÓRTICO PRIMÁRIO H3: TIPO DE ROSCA DO PÓRTICO SECUNDÁRIO

T

B: 20 a 50 Bar. C: 55 a 100 Bar. D: 105 a 150 Bar. E: 155 a 200 Bar.

TIPO DE SÉRIE: TIPO – S: BOMBA SM: MOTOR SDF: DIVISOR DE FLUXO SÉRIE – ALUMINIBETA: 03, 05, 11, 12 e 17 FERRO FUNDIDO: 30, 33, 50, 53, 63 e 75

UNIDADE A: UNIDADE SIMPLES B: UNIDADE MÚLTIPLA C: EIXO SEGMENTADO

LINHA DE DRENO 0: SEM 1: NA TAMPA MANCAL – 1/4”NPT 2: NA TAMPA MANCAL – 1/4”BSP 3: NA TAMPA MANCAL – 1/8”NPT 4: 5: NA TAMPA TRASEIRA – 1/4”NPT 6: NA TAMPA TRASEIRA – 1/4”BSP 7: NA TAMPA TRASEIRA – 1/2”NPT 8: NA TAMPA TRASEIRA – 7/16”UNF 9: PARA DUPLA VEDAÇÃO – 1/8” NPT

B

CÓDIGO EXEMPLO

S30

ROLAMENTO SUPLEMENTAR S: SEM C: COM

1

77

S

O

TS

TIPO DE TAMPA TRASEIRA TS: SEM PÓRTICOS. TP: SEM PÓRTICOS COM EXTENÇÃO DE ROSCA. TL: CONEXÃO COM BOMBA TRASEIRA. TR: TAMPA COM RESERVATÓRIO. T##: COM PÓRTICOS TRASEIROS (USAR O CÓDIGO DOS PÓRTICOS CONFORME TABELA). T**: COM VÁLVULA (USAR CÓDIGO DE VÁLVULAS AUXILIARES)

FLANGE DE MONTAGEM 01: TAMPA PARA BOMBA TANDEM 02: PARA S11 MOTOBOMBA ALTURA DE 15 mm 05: FLANGE REDONDA DE 6 FUROS PILOTO Ø 66,68 mm 24: FLANGE 40X40 mm COM PARAF.PASSANTE, COM RETENTOR E LINHA DE PRESSÃO 25: FLANGE 40X40 mm COM PARAF.PASSANTE, COM RETENTOR 26: FLANGE 60X60 mm COM PARAFUSO PASSANTE, PILOTO Ø 50mm 27: FLANGE 60X60 mm COM PARAF.PASSANTE DO LADO OPOSTO, PILOTO Ø 50 mm 28: FLANGE 60X60 mm COM PARAF.PASSANTE, SEM RETENTOR, PILOTO Ø 52 mm 29: FLANGE 60X60 mm COM PARAF.PASSANTE DO LADO OPOSTO, PILOTO Ø 52 mm 31: IDEM A TAMPA 33 COM FURO DE FIXAÇÃO Ø 9 mm 32: FLANGE VALMET PARA MOTOR MW 33: FLANGE RETANGULAR (EURO 1) 96X71,4 mm, PILOTO Ø 36,4 mm 34: FLANGE RETANGULAR (EURO 2) 100X72 mm, PILOTO Ø 80 mm 35: FLANGE RETANGULAR (EURO 3) 132X88,4 mm, PILOTO Ø 100 mm 36: FLANGE RETANGULAR (EURO 4) 145X102 mm, PILOTO Ø 105 mm (DIN 20) 37: IDEM A TAMPA 34 COM ROLAMENTO SUPLEMENTAR (DIN 28) 62: FLANGE SAE B 4 FUROS, PILOTO Ø 101,6 mm 65: FLANGE SAE C 4 FUROS, PILOTO Ø 127 mm 72: FLANGE VENTURE J1 (SEMELHANTE SAE-A) 73: FLANGE SAE AA 2 FUROS 74: FLANGE SAE A 2 FUROS, PILOTO Ø 82,5 mm 76: FLANGE SAE B 2 FUROS, TIPO CURTA, PILOTO Ø101,6 mm 77: FLANGE SAE B 2 FUROS, PILOTO Ø101,6 mm 78: FLANGE SAE C 2 FUROS, PILOTO Ø127 mm 79: FLANGE SAE 2 FUROS, TIPO CURTA, PILOTO Ø127 mm 80: FLANGE QUADRADO 50,8X50,8 mm PILOTO Ø 45,25 mm 81: FLANGE RETANGULAR 67,7X73 mm PILOTO Ø 30 mm 99: FLANGES ESPECIAIS

CONFIGURE SEU PRODUTO

056

15

AIG3

040

01

DESLOCAMENTO VOLUMÉTRICO EM cm³/rot. SEGUNDA UNIDADE (APENAS PARA BOMBAS MÚLTIPLAS)

F3A

DIMENSÃO DE PORTICOS DA SEGUNDA UNIDADE (APENAS PARA BOMBAS MÍLTIPLAS)

SEM PÓRTICO Polegadas

40 mm

55 mm

28 mm 33 mm

V X

62 mm

40 mm

55 mm

20 mm

S

19 mm

55 mm

18 mm R

26 mm

35 mm

15 mm

T

30 mm

13 mm

U

Ø B mm

Ø A mm P

CÓDIGO

M

L

K

J

I

H

G

F

E

D

C

B

A

Q

76,2

50,8 63,5

2”

3”

38,1

1 1/ 2”

2 1/ 2”

25,4

22,2

7/ 8”

31,8

19,0

3/ 4”

1”

15,9

5/ 8”

1 1/ 4”

9,5 12,7

1/ 2”

6,4

mm

3/ 8”

1/ 4”

1º CÓDIGO TAMANHO DA CONEXÃO

M12X1,75

M8X1,25

M8X1,25

M6X1

M8X1,25

M8X1,25

M6X1

M6X1

C

5 /8-11 UNC

1/ 2-13 UNC

1/ 2-13 UNC

1/ 2-13 UNC

7/ 16-14 UNC

3/ 8-16 UNC

3/ 8-16 UNC

5/ 16-18 UNC

SAE Código 1

M16X2,0

M12X1,75

M12X1,75

M12X1,75

M10X1,5

M10X1,5

M10X1,5

M8X1,25

Métrico Código 2

SPLIT FLANGE PARAFUSO MONTAGEM

2º CÓDIGO

CÓDIGO 7 PARA 45º

2 1/ 2-12 UNF

1 7/8-12 UNF

1 5/8-12 UNF

1 5/16-12 UNF

1 3/16-12 UNF

1 1/16-12 UNF

7/ 8-14 UNF

3/ 4-16 UNF

9/ 16-18UNF

1/ 2-20 UNF

SAE Código 3

1 1/2 -11 1/2

1 1/4 -11 1/2

1-11 1/ 2

3/ 4-14

1/ 2-14

3/ 8-19

1/ 4-19

CÓDIGO 8 PARA 90º

2-11

1 1/2 -11

1 1/4 -11

1-11

3/4 -14

1/2-14

3/8 -19

1/4 -19

BSP Código 6

ROSCA PARA TUBO NPT Código 5

FLANGE EUROPÉIA

M48X2

M42X2

M33X2

M30X1,5

M26X1,5

M12X1,5

M18X1,5

Métrico Código 4

ROSCA RETA

CORPO INTERMEDIÁRIO - CÓDIGO FORMADO CONFORME TABELA ABAIXO E TABELA DE DIMENSÕES DE PÓRTICOS (APENAS PARA BOMBAS MÚLTIPLAS).

EIXO MOTRIX DA SEGUNDA UNIDADE (APESAR P/BOMBAS MULTIPLAS)

27: CILÍNDRICO CHAVETADO Ø19,05 SAE 19-1 CONF.COMMERCIAL (24) 28: CILÍNDRICO CHAVETADO Ø19.012.CONF.RACINE 29: CILÍNDRICO CHAVETADO Ø19.012.CONF.RACINE LONGO 30: CILÍNDRICO CHAVETADO Ø23,8 ROSCA 7/8”-18 NS, CHAV.Ø3/4”X3/16” 31: CILÍNDRICO CHAVETADO Ø 3/4” (LONGO) 32: CILÍNDRICO CHAVETADO Ø12.7 CHAVETA 3mm 33: CILÍNDRICO CHAVETADO Ø3/4” 34: CILÍNDRICO CHAVETADO Ø18mm 35: CILÍNDRICO CHAVETADO Ø22,22 SAE B 36: CILÍNDRICO CHAVETADO Ø15, CHAVETA 3,15 mm 37: CILÍNDRICO CHAVETADO Ø25,35mm 38: CILÍNDRICO CHAVETADO Ø 22,22 ROSCA 5/8-18 UNF 39: CILÍNDRICO CHAVETADO Ø31,75mm SAE C 42: CÔNICO CHAVETADO 1:5 ROSCA M12X1.5, CHAVETA DE 3mm 43: CÔNICO CHAVETADO 1:5 ROSCA M14X1.5, CHAVETA DE 4mm 44: CÔNICO CHAVETADO 1:5 ROSCA M16X1.5, CHAVETA DE 5mm 46: CÔNICO CHAVETADO 1:8 ROSCA M12X1.5, CHAVETA DE 3mm 47: CÔNICO CHAVETADO 1:8 ROSCA M12X1.5, CHAVETA DE 4mm 48: CÔNICO CHAVETADO 1:5 ROSCA ½-20 UNF, CHAVETA DE 4mm 49: CÔNICO CHAVETADO 1:8 ROSCA M10X1, CHAVETA DE 3mm

DIMENSÕES DE PÓRTICOS Este código é formado pela identificação do ø ext.Do tubo desejado nas conexões (1º código), acompanhado da identificação do tipo de conexão (2º código), o código completo é formado pelo grupo de digitos identificando as conexões da esquerda do produto para a direita, vista pelo lado do eixo e independentemente do sentido de rotação, lembrando que o eixo matriz deve ser visto na posição superior.

H1F3

DESLOCAMENTO VOLUMÉTRICO EM cm³/rot

01: EIXO CONECTOR PARA UNIDADE MÚLTIPLA 08: ESTRIADO 9 DENTES Ø 1/2” – ANSI B92.1 09: ESTRIADO 11 DENTES Ø 3/4” 10: ESTRIADO 12 DENTES Ø 3/4” 11: ESTRIADO 9 DENTES DIN 5432 12: ESTRIADO 6 DENTES 13: ESTRIADO 9 DENTES SAE A 14: ESTRIADO 10 DENTES Ø 17mm 15:ESTRIADO 13 DENTES SAE B 16: ESTRIADO 13 DENTES DIN 5480 17: ESTRIADO 14 DENTES SAE C 18: ESTRIADOS 15 DENTES 19: ESTRIADOS 19 DENTES 20: ESTRIADOS 13 DENTES CURTO (CLARK) 21:CHANFRADO, ESPECIAL 22: CHANFRADO COM ARRASTADOR 6,25X10X12mm 23: CHANFRADO COM ARRASTADOR 6,25X7X15,6mm 24: EIXO ESTRIADO 16 DENTES 25: EIXO CHAVETADO Ø 5/8” (CHAVETA DE 4X4X19) 26:CILÍNDRICO CHAVETADO Ø12mm

EIXO MOTRIZ

ALTA PERFORMANCE EM BOMBAS E MOTORES HIDRÁULICOS

ALTA PERFORMANCE

EM BOMBAS E MOTORES HIDRÁULICOS

5

6

ALTA PERFORMANCE

S12

S11

S05

S03

1.2 0.073

NS

cm³/rot

in³/rot

Tamanho Nominal

6

0,15

cm3/rot

in3/rot

bar

bar

bar

rpm

rpm

Pressão Máxima Contínua

Pressão Máxima Intermitente

Pressão de Partida

Rotação Máxima

Rotação Mínima

4

4

600

5

5

0,5

300

280

250

0,49

3500

0,68

3600

325

300

270

0,68

11,2

11

3300

0,81

13,3

13

1,2

19,7

19

500

500

3000

0,99

16,3

16

19

250

230

210

1,18

19,4

2800

275

250

230

1,43

23,4

27

2400

245

220

200

31

31

2300

235

215

195

2100

220

210

185

2,01

32,9

33

2200

150

130

110

1,61

26,4

26

2500

270

250

220

0,73

12

12

3500

250

230

200

0.262

4.3

43

1,89

2500

200

180

160

1,38

1,65

27

22 22,7

290

270

240

0,61

10

10

280

250

220

0.220

3.6

36

3000

23

0,49

0,99

3000

0,87

14,2

16

Opções Volumétricas

8,15

8

0,34

4000

0,31

4000

0,24

600

2,5

TN

De Deslocamento Volumétrico

2

Unidade

Rotação Mínima

Parâmetro

rpm

Rotação Máxima

Tamanho Nominal

bar

rpm

Pressão de Partida

bar

Pressão Máxima Intermitente

0,24

11,2

8 08

16,3

0,15

bar

Pressão Máxima Contínua

8,1

14

in3/rot

Deslocamento Volumétrico

4

11

2,5

cm3/rot 5,6

Opções Volumétricas

TN

8

2

Unidade

Parâmetro

Tamanho Nominal

4

500

3600

rpm

300

Rotação Mínima

4000

bar

0,43

rpm

280

0,37

Rotação Máxima

0,31

Pressão de Partida

bar

Pressão Máxima Intermitente

0,24 260

0,18

bar

07

7

in³/rot

Pressão Máxima Contínua

Deslocamento Volumétrico

06

6

cm³/rot

05

03

NS 04

Opções Volumétricas 3

Unidade

Parâmetro

Tamanho Nominal

5

500

rpm

4000

Rotação Mínima

300

3.3

33

0.201

bar

0.153

2.5

25

rpm

275

250

0.128

2.1

21

Rotação Máxima

4

0.098

1.6

16

Opções Volumétricas

Pressão de Partida

bar

bar

Pressão Máxima Contínua

Pressão Máxima Intermitente

Deslocamento Volumétrico

12

Unidade

Parâmetro

DADOS DE DESEMPENHO

SÉRIE ALUMINIBETA

EM BOMBAS E MOTORES HIDRÁULICOS

S17

ALTA PERFORMANCE

0,84

cm3/rot in3/rot

Filtros

rpm

Rotação Mínima

0,96

23

1,38

22,7

3300

1,13

18,6

19

300

280

250

28

1,69

27,7

500

3100

1,5

24,6

25

38

2,29

37,5

3000

1,98

32,5

33

Opções Volumétricas

44

2800

250

240

220

2,65

43,4

52

2600

230

220

200

3,13

51,3

Recomendamos filtros com capacidade de controlar a limpeza do fluido conforme classe 18/15 ou melhor da norma ISO 4406.

rpm

Rotação Máxima

bar

bar

Pressão Máxima Intermitente Pressão de Partida

bar

Pressão Máxima Contínua

16 15,7

3400

13,7

TN

D Deslocamento Volumétrico

14

Unidade

Parâmetro

Tamanho Nominal

EM BOMBAS E MOTORES HIDRÁULICOS

7

8

ALTA PERFORMANCE

6.5

5

01 3.5

13

Torque máx. 110 Nm / 972 Lb.in

3,17

26

11

Torque máx. 110 Nm / 972 Lb.in

Torque máx. 110 Nm / 972 Lb.in

Estriado de 09 dentes DIN 5482 Flanges de fixação disponíveis: 26 27 31 33 34 37 74

Estriado 9 dentes ø 5/8”

37

19

Chavetado ø 12mm

01

25

Torque máx. 110 Nm / 972 Lb.in

Ø12

Eixo de conexão para bombas múltiplas. Flanges de fixação disponíveis: 01

S11

Chavetado reto ø 5/8”

12

8

Chafrado 5mm

Ø10.9

S03 e S05

13.6

OPÇÕES DE PONTA DE EIXO

Ø12

SÉRIE ALUMINIBETA

49

32

B

A

F

13

Torque máx. 121 Nm / 1074 Lb.in

C ÚTIL

Estriado de 09 dentes SAE A Flanges de fixação disponíveis: 26 27 31 33 34 37 74

Eixo cônico 1:8 com rosca M10X1

Chavetado reto ø 1/2”

S12

A

F

F

B

A C

09

Torque q máx. 110 Nm / 972 Lb.in

I

25

Torque máx. 222 Nm / 1961 Lb.in

C USEFUL

A

Cilíndrico chavetado ø 5/8 mm Flanges de fixação disponíveis: 74 34

B

16

Torque máx. 223 Nm / 1973 Lb.in

ÚTIL

C

Estriado 11 dentes 16/32DP Flanges de fixação disponíveis: 34 74

B

Estriado de 13 dentes DIN 5480 Flanges de fixação disponíveis: 26 27 31 33 34 37 74

H

EM BOMBAS E MOTORES HIDRÁULICOS

E

E

E E

ALTA PERFORMANCE

A

I

A

F

13

Torque máx. 395 Nm / 3495 Lb.in

C ÚTIL

B

A

I

34

Torque máx. 121 Nm / 1074 Lb.in

C ÚTIL

Cilíndrico chavetado ø 18 mm Flanges de fixação disponíveis: 26 27 31 33 34 37 74

B

34

Torque máx. 121 Nm / 1074 Lb.in

C ÚTIL

Estriado 09 dentes SAE A Flanges de fixação disponíveis: 05 74

B

Cilíndrico chavetado ø 18 mm Flanges de fixação disponíveis: 26 27 31 33 34 37 74

EM BOMBAS E MOTORES HIDRÁULICOS

E

A CD

C

Torque máx. 145 Nm / 1278 Lb.in

I

33

B

CD

A

Torque máx. 193 Nm / 1707 Lb.in

L

I

42 46

Cônico chavetado Flanges de fixação disponíveis: 26 27 31 33 34 37 74

B

A

41 42 46 47

Torque máx. 193 Nm / 1707 Lb.in

L

I

Cilíndrico chavetado ø 3/4 Flanges de fixação disponíveis: 34 74

B

9

Cônico chavetado Flanges de fixação disponíveis: 26 27 31 33 34 37 74

F E

F

H H

H H

H

E E

G G

Ø8 (2x .7 )

74

74

12

80

Quadrado 50,8 X 50,8mm ø piloto 45,25mm

Flange SAE A 2 furos ø piloto 82,55 mm

60

40

40

2,5 Ø1

10,5 10,5

23

60

40

31.5

30

. ø10.5

63

60

80

(4x)

ø14

) (2x ø9 (2X )

25.3

Parafuso passante 4 furos com vedação

Flange SAE AA 2 furos ø piloto 50,8 mm

100

25

60

10,5

Parafuso passante 2 furos com linha de pressão ø 9 mm

74

14.

15.7

40

Ø8 (2x .7 )

24

7.2

01

73

Ø3 2

Parafuso passante 2 furos

3

+_02

ø10.5.(

2x )

80 60 30

Parafuso passante 2 furos

THREAD M10x1.5 (2x)

22.2

Retangular 67,7 X 73mm ø piloto 30mm

102

82.5

Flange SAE AA 2 furos ø piloto 50,8 mm

73

7.2

26

81

Ø10 .3

S03, S05, S11, S12 E S17

14.3

14.3

ø10.5

30

2x)

22.2

130 106,4

x) .( 2 ø11

24.3 14.5

7.2

27

6.2

74

88.4 108.4

44.2

ø 11

37.4

28

24

9.4

35

Flange retangular, diâmetro piloto 99.94 mm 132 x 88.4

53,2

Flange SAE A, diâmetro piloto 82.55 mm

THREAD 0x1.5 M1 (2x)

60

80

Parafuso passante oposto 2 furos

60

ALTA PERFORMANCE

32.4

ø7.1

35.7

(4 x)

71.4

89.4 18. 64

23.4

53.2

44.1 38 12.7

130 106.4

ø 11

SAE B 2 furos, diâmetro piloto 82.55 mm

SAE B 2 furos, diâmetro piloto 101.6 mm

96

.8

33

Flange Européia retangular, diâmetro piloto 36.47 mm, com furos de fixação de 7.1 mm

EM BOMBAS E MOTORES HIDRÁULICOS

114

OPÇÕES DE FLANGE DE MONTAGEM PADRÃO

ø47.8 ø52

31.5 60

95

79.5 100

Ø 50,8 50

100 113

6.1

74

77

)

71.4

23.4 4.8

31

1. 3 R4

21

57.5 12.2

SAE B 2 furos, diâmetro piloto 101.6 mm

ÚTIL

ø 11.2

4.7

05

Flange redonda 6 furos, diâmetro piloto 68.66 mm

ø9 (4 x

35.7

89.4

Flange Européia retangular diâmetro piloto 36.47mm com de fixação de 9mm

32.4

SÉRIE ALUMINIBETA

44, , 2

96

ALTA PERFORMANCE

132

50 ø82.55 ø99.9

Ø 36.47 ø 82.55

120

EM BOMBAS E MOTORES HIDRÁULICOS

ø 134

36.47

77

Ø66.7 144.6

Ø9

13

Unidade de Negócios Porto Alegre Rua Azevedo Sodré, 90 – Passo da Areia Porto Alegre / RS – CEP 91340-140 Fone 51 3362 7487 / 3341 9803 Fax 51 3341 0897 [email protected]

Unidade de Negócio Belo Horizonte Rua Castelo de Obidos, 658 – Castelo Belo Horizonte / MG – CEP 31330-320 Fone 31 3471 1851/ Fax 31 3471 1849 [email protected]

Unidade de Negócio São Paulo Rua Vicente Soares da Costa, 182 Jardim Primavera – São Paulo / SP CEP 02755-000 Fone 11 3796 1090 / Fax 11 3935 1478 [email protected] Unidade de Negócios Piracicaba Av. Limeira, 445 - Vila Areião Piracicaba / SP – CEP: 13411-018 Tel: 19 3413 2966 / Fax: 19 3413 2603 E-mail: [email protected] Unidade de Negócios Recife Rua José Natário, 175 – Areias Recife / PE – CEP 50900-000 Fone 81 3251 8260 / Fax 81 3249 1124 [email protected] Unidade de Negócios Goiânia Av. Consolação, 680 – Cidade Jardim Goiânia / GO – CEP 74420-230 Tel: 0800 720 8888 / Fax: 62 3581 8151 [email protected] Unidade de Negócio Curitiba Rua das Carmelitas, 4499 – Loja 01 Boqueirão – Curitiba / PR - CEP 81730-050 Fone 41 3286 4426 / Fax 41 3286 4426 [email protected]

Unidade de Negócio Rio de Janeiro Rod. Presidente Dutra, 4301 São João do Meriti / RJ - CEP 25535-350 Tel: 0800 720 8888 / Fax: 48 2101 8895 [email protected] Chicago – Illinois Hidrodinamica INC 165 Joey St. – Zip Code 60007 Elk Grove Village, IL Chicago – USA Fone 1 847 357 1440 www.hidrodinamica.net [email protected]

Certificado NBR ISO 9001

hybel.com.br

REV00 – Dez/11

Unidade de Negócios Ribeirão Preto Av. Ma de Jesus Condeixa, 850 – Jd. Paulista Ribeirão Preto / SP – CEP 14091-240 Fone 16 3624 7444 / Fax 16 3627 0197 [email protected]

*As imagens são meramente ilustrativas e o fabricante fica no direito de alterações sem aviso prévio.

Matriz – Brasil Rod. Luiz Rosso, 4.230 – Km 04 Criciúma / SC – CEP 88803-470 - Cx. P. 3244 Fone + 55 48 2101 8888 / Fax + 55 48 2101 8895 [email protected]

MAKING MODERN LIVING POSSIBLE

Folleto técnico

Transmisor de presión para aplicaciones de carácter general, tipo MBS 1700 y MBS 1750 Los transmisores de presión compactos MBS 1700 y MBS 1750 están diseñados para el uso en aplicaciones de carácter general y ofrecen una medida de la presión fiable, incluso en condiciones ambientales adversas. La versión MBS 1750, con amortiguador de pulsos integrado, está diseñada específicamente para el uso en aplicaciones en las que el medio influye de forma notablemente negativa, dando lugar a efectos de cavitación, golpes de ariete o picos de presión, y ofrece una medida de la presión fiable, incluso en condiciones ambientales adversas. Su excelente estabilidad ante vibraciones, sólida estructura y alto nivel de protección EMC/EMI permiten a estos transmisores de presión satisfacer los requisitos industriales más estrictos.

Características

© Danfoss A/S (IA-MS/IM) 2014-02

yy Carcasa y piezas en contacto con el medio fabricadas en acero resistente a los ácidos (AISI 316L)

yy Conexiones de presión: G 1/4 A y G 1/2 A, EN 837 (MBS 1700) G 1/4, DIN 3852-E; junta DIN 3869-15 (MBS 1750)

yy Rango de presión manométrica (relativa): 0 – 25 bar

yy Compensación de temperatura y calibración por láser

yy Señal de salida: 4 – 20 mA

yy Apto para el uso en atmósferas explosivas pertenecientes a la Zona 2

IC.PD.P21.Q3.05 / 520B6083

1

Folleto técnico

Transmisor de presión para aplicaciones de carácter general, tipos MBS 1700 y MBS 1750

Aplicación y condiciones del medio (MBS 1750)

Aplicación

Condiciones del medio

La cavitación, los golpes de ariete y los picos de presión son frecuentes en sistemas hidráulicos cuya velocidad de flujo sufre fluctuaciones como resultado, por ejemplo, del cierre rápido de una válvula o los arranques y paradas de una bomba.

Los líquidos que contienen partículas pueden obstruir la boquilla. Instalar el transmisor en posición vertical minimiza el riesgo de obstrucción, ya que el paso a través de la boquilla se limita al período de tiempo comprendido entre el arranque y el momento en que se llena el volumen muerto situado tras el orificio de la boquilla. La viscosidad del medio apenas afecta al tiempo de respuesta. Incluso con viscosidades de hasta 100 cSt, el tiempo de respuesta no supera los 4 ms.

Son problemas que pueden tener lugar a la entrada o a la salida, incluso con presiones de trabajo muy reducidas. Amortiguador de pulsos

Datos técnicos

Rendimiento (EN 60770) Precisión (incluye no linealidad, histéresis y repetibilidad)

≤ ±0,5 % FS (típ.) ≤ ±1,0 % FS (máx.)

No linealidad, BFSL (conformidad)

≤ ±0,2 % FS

Histéresis y repetibilidad

≤ ±0,1 % FS

Desplazamiento del punto cero térmico Desplazamiento de la sensibilidad térmica (intervalo térmico)

≤ ±0,1 % FS/10 K (típ.) ≤ ±0,2 % FS/10 K (máx.) ≤ ±0,1 % FS/10 K (típ.) ≤ ±0,2 % FS/10 K (máx.) < 4 ms

Tiempo de respuesta

Aire y gases (MBS 1750)

< 35 ms

Presión de sobrecarga (estática)

6 × FS (1500 bar, máx.)

Presión de rotura

6 × FS (2000 bar, máx.)

Durabilidad, P: 10 – 90 % FS

> 10 × 106 ciclos

Especificaciones eléctricas Señal de salida nom. (con protección contra cortocircuito)

4 – 20 mA

Tensión de alimentación [UB], con polaridad protegida

9 – 32 V c.c.

Alimentación (consumo de corriente) Dependencia de la tensión de alimentación Límite de corriente

28 mA (típ.)

Impedancia de salida

–

Carga [RL] (conectada a 0 V)

© Danfoss A/S (IA-MS/IM) 2014-02

– ≤ ±0,1 % FS/10 V

IC.PD.P21.Q3.05 / 520B6083

RL ≤ (UB - 9 V)/0,02 A [Ω]

2

Folleto técnico

Transmisor de presión para aplicaciones de carácter general, tipos MBS 1700 y MBS 1750

Datos técnicos (continuación)

Condiciones ambientales Rango de temperatura del sensor

Normal

-40 – 85 °C

ATEX Zona 2

-10 – 85 °C

Temperatura máx. del medio

115 - (0,35 × temperatura ambiente)

Rango de temperatura ambiente

-40 – 85 °C

Rango de temperatura compensada

0 – 80 °C

Rango de temperatura de transporte/almacenamiento

-50 – 85 °C

EMC (emisión)

EN 61000-6-3

EMC (inmunidad)

EN 61000-6-2

Resistencia de aislamiento

> 100 MΩ a 100 V

Prueba de frecuencia de red

Según norma SEN 361503

Sinusoidales

Estabilidad ante vibraciones Resistencia a impactos

15,9 mm-pp, 5 Hz – 25 Hz 20 g, 25 Hz – 2 kHz

IEC 60068-2-6

Aleatorias

7,5 grms, 5 Hz – 1 kHz

IEC 60068-2-64

Impacto

500 g/1 ms

IEC 60068-2-27

Caída libre

1m

IEC 60068-2-32

Carcasa

IP65

Atmósferas explosivas

Aplicaciones en Zona 2

EN 60079-0 y EN 60079-15

Cuando se usa enáreas ATEX zona 2, a temperaturas 20 % de la diferencia de presión, sino elevada cavitación – Vida útil 50 hasta 100 % en comparación con servicio con aceite mineral HL, HLP ▶ Biodegradable: Al utilizar fluidos hidráulicos biodegradables, que simultáneamente liberan Cinc, puede ocurrir un enriquecimiento del medio con Cinc (por tubo polar 700 mg Cinc).

En los sistemas hidráulicos se deben mantener las clases de pureza indicadas para los componentes. Una filtración efectiva evita fallas y aumenta simultáneamente la vida útil de los componentes. Requisitos relativos a la conservación del fluido hidráulico así como valor límite de suciedad, ver catálogo RS 07300. Para seleccionar los filtros ver www.boschrexroth.com/filter.

RS 23178, edición: 2013-06, Bosch Rexroth AG

8/20

WE | Válvula direccional de corredera

Datos técnicos (¡consúltenos en caso de utilizar el equipo fuera de los valores indicados!) eléctricos Tipo de tensión Tensiones suministrables 2) (datos para el pedido para solenoides a tensión alterna ver abajo)

V

Tensión continua

Tensión alterna 50/60 Hz

12, 24, 96, 205

110, 230

Tolerancia de tensión (tensión nominal)

% ±10

Consumo de potencia

W

30

–

Potencia de retención

VA

–

50

Potencia de conexión

VA

–

220

Duración de conexión (DC)

% 100

– CONECTAR Tiempo de conmutación según ISO 6403 3) – DESCONECTAR Frecuencia de conmutación máxima Temperatura superficial máxima de la bobina Tipo de protección según DIN EN 60529

25 … 45

10 … 20

ms

10 … 25

15 … 40

1/h 4)

°C [°F]

15000

7200

120 [248]

180 [356]

– con enchufe "K4", "K72L", "K73L"

IP 65 (con conector montado y enclavado)

– con enchufe "C4"

IP 66A (con conector montado y enclavado)

– con enchufe "K40"

IP 69K (con conector montado y enclavado)

2)

Tensiones especiales según consulta.

3)

Los tiempos de conmutación fueron determinados para una temperatura del fluido de 40 °C [104 °F] y una viscosidad de 46 cSt. Temperaturas del fluido diferentes pueden ocasionar tiempos de conmutación diferentes! Los tiempos de conmutación dependen de las condiciones de aplicación y tiempo de servicio.

4)

ms

Debido a las temperaturas superficiales de las bobinas del solenoide, se deben tener en cuenta las normas ISO 13732-1 y ISO 4413! La temperatura superficial para solenoides a tensión alterna indicada vale para un servicio sin fallas. En caso de falla (por ej. al bloquearse la corredera de mando) la temperatura superficial puede superar los 180 °C [356 °F]. Por ello debe comprobarse la instalación a posibles peligros según el punto de inflamación (ver página 7). Como seguridad deben preverse interruptores de protección de conductores (ver tabla página 19), si no se puede evitar una atmósfera incendiable de otra manera. La temperatura superficial puede con ello, en caso de falla, limitar a un máximo de 220 °C [428 °F]. La corriente de activación debe ser, en un intervalo de tiempo de 0,6 s, de 8 a 10 veces superior al consumo de corriente nominal. (Característica de activación "K"). La corriente de no activación necesaria del fusible no puede ser inferior al valor I1 (ver tabla página 19). La corriente necesaria máxima de activación del fusible no puede superar al valor I2 (ver tabla página 19). La dependencia de temperatura del comportamiento de activación del interruptor de protección del conductor debe considerarse según las indicaciones del fabricante.

Bosch Rexroth AG, RS 23178, edición: 2013-06

Avisos! ▶ El accionamiento del dispositivo auxiliar es posible sólo hasta aprox. 50 bar [725 psi] de presión de tanque. Evitar dañar al agujero del dispositivo de accionamiento auxiliar! (herramienta especial para accionamiento, pedido por separado, nro. de material R900024943). Cuando el dispositivo de accionamiento auxiliar está bloqueado, debe excluirse el accionamiento de los solenoides opuestos! ▶ Debe excluirse el accionamiento simultáneo de los 2 solenoides de una válvula!

¡Aviso! Solenoides a tensión alterna son utilizables para 2 o 3 redes; por ej. solenoide tipo W110 para: 110 V, 50 Hz; 110 V, 60 Hz; 120 V, 60 Hz

Datos para el pedido

Redes

W110

110 V, 50 Hz 110 V, 60 Hz 120 V, 60 Hz

W230

230 V, 50 Hz 230 V, 60 Hz

En la conexión eléctrica se debe conectar el conductor de protección (PE ) según prescripciones.

Válvula direccional de corredera | WE

Curvas características (medidas con HLP46,

aceite

= 40 ± 5 °C [104 ± 9 °F])

Diferencia de presión en bar [psi] ࣅ

Curvas características Δp-qV [160]

11

[140]

10

[120]

8

7 6

5 4 3

2 Símbolo

1

8

[100] [80] [60] [40] [20] [0]

6 4 2

0

10

[0]

[2]

20 [4]

[6]

9/20

30 [8]

40 [10]

50 [12]

[14]

60 [16]

Caudal en l/min [US gpm]ࣅ 7 Símbolo "R" en posición de conmutación B – A

70 [18]

80 [21]

Dirección del caudal P–A

P–B

A–T

B–T

A; B

5

5

–

–

C

3

3

5

3

D; Y

6

6

5

5

E

5

5

3

3

F

3

5

3

3

T

8

8

4

4

H

2

1

2

2

J; Q

3

3

2

3

L

5

5

1

4

M

2

1

5

5

P

5

3

3

3

R

6

6

1

–

V

3

2

3

3

W

3

3

2

2

U

5

5

4

1

G

7

7

4

4

8 Símbolo "G" y "T" en posición media P – T 9 Símbolo "H" en posición media P – T

RS 23178, edición: 2013-06, Bosch Rexroth AG

10/20

WE | Válvula direccional de corredera

Límites de potencia (medidos con HLP46,

aceite

= 40 ± 5 °C [104 ± 9 °F]) (por ej. de P hacia A y conexión B cerrada) el límite de potencia admisible ser bastante menor! Consúltenos para dichos casos de aplicación! El límite de potencia fue calculado con solenoides a temperatura de servicio, tensión 10 % inferior y sin pretensión del tanque.

Aviso! Los límites de potencia indicados valen para utilización con dos direcciones de caudal (por ej. de P hacia A y retorno de flujo simultáneo de B hacia T). Debido a las fuerzas de flujo actuantes dentro de la válvula puede, para una única dirección de caudal

Presión de servicio en bar [psi] ࣅ

[5000] [4000] [3000]

350

7

300 1

200

5 2

[0]

6

3

[2000] [1000]

[0]

[2]

20 [4]

[6]

Símbolo

1

A; B1)

3 1

2 10

Solenoide de tensión continua Curva característica

4

100

0

10

9

8

30 [8]

40 [10] [12]

50

60

[14] [16]

70

80

[18]

[21]

Caudal en l/min [US gpm]ࣅ

Tensión del solenoide (solenoide de tensión continua) 12; 24; 48; 96; 125; 205 V (otras tensiones ver página 11)

Bosch Rexroth AG, RS 23178, edición: 2013-06

2

V

3

A; B

4

F; P

5

J

6

G; H; T

7

A/O; A/OF; L; U

8

C; D; Y

9

M

10

E; E1–2); R3); C/O; C/OF; D/O; D/OF; Q; W

1)

Con dispositivo de accionamiento auxiliar

2)

Preapertura P – A/B

3)

Retorno del consumidor hacia el tanque

Válvula direccional de corredera | WE

Límites de potencia (medidos con HLP46,

aceite

11/20

= 40 ± 5 °C [104 ± 9 °F])

Ver avisos en página 10.

Presión de servicio en bar [psi] →

[5000] [4000] [3000]

350

200

1

[0]

3

4

6

100

0 [0]

10 [2]

[6]

[8]

40

7

11

5

1

2 30

20 [4]

10

9

8

6

2

[2000] [1000]

11

5

300

50

60

70

80

[10] [12] [14] [16] [18]

Caudal en l/min [US gpm]

[21]

→

Tensión del solenoide (solenoide de tensión continua)

Presión de servicio en bar [psi] →

110; 180 V

[5000] [4000] [3000]

350

5

300 2 1

[2000] [1000] [0]

0 [0]

20 [4]

[6]

6

12 4 7

[2]

11

3

10

2 30 [8]

1

A; B

2

V

3

F; P

4

J; L; U

5

G

6

T

7

H

8

D; C

9

M

10

C/O; C/OF; D/O; D/OF; E; E1–; R, Q; W

11

A/O; A/OF

Solenoide de tensión continua

4

100

Símbolo

10 6

200

Solenoide de tensión continua Curva característica

8 1 40

5

9 50

60

70

[10] [12] [14] [16] [18]

Caudal en l/min [US gpm]

→

80 [21]

Curva característica

Símbolo

1

A; B

2

V

3

F; P

4

J; L; U

5

A/O; A/OF

6

E

7

T

8

G

9

H

10

D; C

Tensión del solenoide (solenoide de tensión continua)

11

M

42; 80; 220 V

12

C/O; C/OF; D/O; D/OF; E1–; R, Q; W

RS 23178, edición: 2013-06, Bosch Rexroth AG

12/20

WE | Válvula direccional de corredera

Límites de potencia (medidos con HLP46,

aceite

= 40 ± 5 °C [104 ± 9 °F])

Ver avisos en página 10.

Presión de servicio en bar [psi] ࣅ

[5000] [4000] [3000]

350

17

[0]

18

16

13

100

14

11

12

0 [0]

15

14

200

[2000] [1000]

Solenoide a tensión alterna – 50 Hz

300

10 [2]

20 [4]

[6]

30

40

[8]

60

50

Tensión del solenoide (solenoide a tensión alterna) 110 V; 50 Hz 120 V; 60 Hz

W230

Símbolo

11

A; B1)

12

V

13

A; B

14

F; P

15

G; T

16

H

17

A/O; A/OF; C/O; C/OF; D/O; D/OF; E; E1–2); J; L; M; Q; R3); U; W

18

C; D; Y

[10] [12] [14] [15.8]

Caudal en l/min [US gpm]ࣅ

W110

Curva característica

1)

Con dispositivo de accionamiento auxiliar

2)

Preapertura P – A/B

3)

Retorno del consumidor hacia el tanque

230 V; 50 Hz

(otras tensiones según consulta)

Presión de servicio en bar [psi] ࣅ

[5000] [4000] [3000]

350

26

300

21

23 24

22

200

Solenoide a tensión alterna – 60 Hz

28

25

[2000] [1000] [0]

100

0 [0]

27

20

19 10 [2]

20 [4]

[6]

30 [8]

40

50

60

[10] [12] [14] [15.8]

Caudal en l/min [US gpm]ࣅ

Curva característica

Símbolo

19

A; B1)

20

V

21

A; B

22

F; P

23

G; T

24

J; L; U

25

A/O; A/OF; Q; W

26

C; D; Y

27

H

28

C/O; C/OF; D/O; D/OF; E; E1–2); M; R3)

Tensión del solenoide (solenoide a tensión alterna) W110 W230

110 V; 60 Hz 230 V; 60 Hz

(otras tensiones según consulta)

Bosch Rexroth AG, RS 23178, edición: 2013-06

1)

Con dispositivo de accionamiento auxiliar

2)

Preapertura P – A/B

3)

Retorno del consumidor hacia el tanque

Válvula direccional de corredera | WE

13/20

 

Dimensiones: Válvula con solenoide de tensión continua – conexión individual (medidas en mm [inch])

15

14 7.2 7.3

 

B

42 (22)

23 50,5

15

 

14

8

63  

14

 

 

  

8,4 

  

16

¯5,3

¯9,4

A

7.1

64 

11 13

 

13

15  

7.1

92  

102  

16

20  

15

90   

B

97,5   

7.4

8,4 



1.1

50,5

64 

22

18

17 12

1.2

 

15

69,2 

F1

7  

A F4

T

B

P

F2 F3

45 

13,6  

G

Medidas para dispositivos de accionamiento auxiliar ver página 15. Explicación de posiciones, tornillos de sujeción de válvulas y placas de conexión ver página 18.

0,01/100

[0.0004/4.0]

Rzmax 4 Terminación superficial requerida de la superficie de montaje de la válvula

RS 23178, edición: 2013-06, Bosch Rexroth AG

Válvula direccional de corredera | WE

15/20

Dimensiones: Válvula con solenoide de tensión continua – dispositivos de accionamiento auxiliar (medidas en mm [inch])

6.2

6.1

A

2 4

82 

 85,5   

B

2 4

124  

 127,5 

5

122,5   

164,5  

3 5

6

143  

185  

6

3

96   

Explicación de posiciones, tornillos de sujeción de válvulas y placas de conexión ver página 18.

138  

0,01/100

[0.0004/4.0]

Rzmax 4 Terminación superficial requerida de la superficie de montaje de la válvula

RS 23178, edición: 2013-06, Bosch Rexroth AG

16/20

WE | Válvula direccional de corredera

¯9,4

[0.67]

17

92 [3.62]

[0.91]

8,4 [0.33]

17

3 44,5

205 [4.08]

1.1

18 2; 4

12

17

1.2

[1.75]

15

F1

[0.28]

A F4

T PG

B

F2 F3

0,01/100

[0.0004/4.0]

Rzmax 4 Terminación superficial requerida para la superficie de montaje de la válvula

Explicación de posiciones, tornillos de sujeción de válvulas y placas de conexión ver página 18.

Bosch Rexroth AG, RS 23178, edición: 2013-06

45 [1.77]

69,2 [2.72] 13,6 [0.54] 7

[0.59]

[0.67]

123 [4.84]

44,5

15

B

64 [2.52]

81 [3.19] [1.75]

16 14

15

[ 0.21]

8,4 [0.33] 22 [0.87]

3

7

¯5,3

[ 0.37]

42 (22)

A

13

14

15

11

98 [3.86]

13

23

7

[1.65 (0.87)]

16

[0.59]

Dimensiones: Válvula con solenoide a tensión alterna – conexión individual (medidas en mm [inch])

B

8

18/20

WE | Válvula direccional de corredera

Dimensiones 1.1 Solenoide "a" 1.2 Solenoide "b" 2 Medida para solenoide con dispositivo de accionamiento auxiliar cubierto "N9" (estándar) 3 Medida para solenoide con dispositivo auxiliar de accionamiento "N" 4 Medida para solenoide sin dispositivo auxiliar de accionamiento 5 Medida para solenoide con dispositivo auxiliar de accionamiento "N7" 6 Medida para solenoide con dispositivo auxiliar de accionamiento "N5" y "N6" 6.1 Dispositivo de accionamiento auxiliar "N5" 6.2 Dispositivo de accionamiento auxiliar "N6" 7.1 Conector sin circuito de conexionado para enchufe "K4" (pedido por separado, ver página 4 y catálogo 08006) 7.2 Conector (AMP Junior-Timer) con enchufe "C4" (pedido por separado, ver catálogo 08006) 7.3 Conector DT 04-2PA (enchufe Deutsch) con enchufe "K40" (pedido por separado, ver catálogo 08006) 7.4 Conector en ángulo con enchufe M12x1 con indicador de servicio LED "K72L" (pedido por separado, ver catálogo 08006)

Placas de conexión según catálogo 45052 (pedido por separado) (sin agujero de fijación) G 341/01 (G1/4) G 342/01 (G3/8) G 502/01 (G1/2) (con agujero de fijación) G 341/60 (G1/4) G 342/60 (G3/8) G 502/60 (G1/2) G 341/12 (SAE-6) 1) G 342/12 (SAE-8) 1) G 502/12 (SAE-10) 1) 1) Según consulta Tornillos de sujeción de las válvulas (pedido por separado) ▶ Longitud de apriete 42 mm: 4 tornillos cilíndricos métricos ISO 4762 - M5 x 50 - 10.9-flZn-240h-L (coeficiente de rozamiento μtotal = 0,09 hasta 0,14); torque de apriete MA = 7 Nm [5.2 ft-lbs] ± 10 %, nro. de material R913000064 o 4 tornillos cilíndricos ISO 4762 - M5 x 50 - 10.9 2) (coeficiente de rozamiento μtotal = 0,12 hasta 0,17); torque de apriete MA = 8,1 Nm [6 ft-lbs] ± 10 %

8 Conector con circuito de conexionado para enchufe "K4" (pedido por separado, ver página 4 y catálogo 08006)

4 tornillos cilíndricos UNC 10-24 UNC x 2" ASTM-A574 (coeficiente de rozamiento μtotal = 0,19 hasta 0,24); torque de apriete MA = 11 Nm [8.2 ft-lbs] ± 15 %, (coeficiente de rozamiento μtotal = 0,12 hasta 0,17); torque de apriete MA = 8 Nm [5.9 ft-lbs] ± 10 %, nro. de material R978800693

9 Racor del cable Pg 16 [1/2" NPT] "DL" 10 Conexión central "DKL" 10.1 Enchufe angular (color rojo, pedido por separado) Nro. de material. R900005538 11 Placa de características 12 Juntas anulares idénticas para conexiones A, B, P, T Aviso! Las conexiones están claramente definidas de acuerdo a sus funciones y no pueden ser intercambiadas o cerradas a voluntad. 13 Tornillo de cierre para válvulas con un solenoide 14 Espacio requerido para retirar el conector/zócalo curvo 15 Espacio necesario para retirar la bobina 16 Tuerca de sujeción, torque de apriete MA = 4+1 Nm [2.95+ 0.74 ft-lbs]

▶ Longitud de apriete 22 mm: 4 tornillos cilíndricos métricos ISO 4762 - M5 x 30 - 10.9-flZn-240h-L (coeficiente de rozamiento μtotal = 0,09 hasta 0,14); torque de apriete MA = 7 Nm [5.2 ft-lbs] ± 10 %, nro. de material R913000316 o 4 tornillos cilíndricos ISO 4762 - M5 x 30 - 10.9 2) (coeficiente de rozamiento μtotal = 0,12 hasta 0,17); torque de apriete MA = 8,1 Nm [6 ft-lbs] ± 10 %

17 Posición de las conexiones según DIN 24340 forma A (sin agujero de fijación), o ISO 4401-03-02-0-05 y NFPA T3.5.1 R2-2002 D03 (con agujero de fijación para espiga elásticaISO 8752-3x8-St, nro. de material R900005694, pedido por separado)

4 tornillos cilíndricos UNC 10-24 UNC x 1 1/4" (coeficiente de rozamiento μtotal = 0,19 hasta 0,24); torque de apriete MA = 11 Nm [8.2 ft-lbs] ± 15 %, (coeficiente de rozamiento μtotal = 0,12 hasta 0,17); torque de apriete MA = 8 Nm [5.9 ft-lbs] ± 10 %, nro. de material R978802879

18 Longitud de apriete alternativa (): 22 mm [0.87 inch] 19 Tapa Atención! La válvula sólo debe operar con la tapa debidamente montada!

Bosch Rexroth AG, RS 23178, edición: 2013-06

2)

No incluido en el programa de suministro

Válvula direccional de corredera | WE

19/20

Interruptor de protección del conductor con característica de activación "K" según EN 60898-1 (VDE 0641-11), EN 60947-2 (VDE 0660-101), IEC 60898 y IEC 60947-2

Corriente de medición inferior I1 en A

Corriente de medición superior I2 en A

W24

2,30

3,60

W42

1,45

1,92

Solenoide a tensión alterna

Corriente de medición inferior I1 en A

Corriente de medición superior I2 en A

W24

1,73

2,40

W42

1,13

1,92

Solenoide a tensión alterna

50 Hz

50 Hz

W48

1,15

1,92

W48

1,09

1,92

W100

0,64

0,90

W100

0,58

0,90

W110

0,60

0,90

W110

0,52

0,90

W115

0,52

0,90

W115

0,43

0,90

W127

0,48

0,60

W127

0,37

0,60

W200

0,33

0,60

W200

0,30

0,60

W220

0,31

0,60

W220

0,26

0,36

W230

0,26

0,36

W230

0,20

0,36

W240

0,26

0,36

W240

0,22

0,36

Más informaciones ▶ Placas de conexión

Catálogo 45052

▶ Interruptor de posición inductivo y sensores de proximidad (sin toque ni contacto)

Catálogo 24830

▶ Versión de conmutación suave

Catálogo 23183

▶ Fluidos hidráulicos a base de aceite mineral

Catálogo 90220

▶ Valores característicos de confiabilidad según EN ISO 13849

Catálogo 08012

▶ Información de productos general para productos hidráulicos

Catálogo 07008

▶ Montaje, puesta en marcha, mantenimiento de válvulas industriales

Catálogo 07300

▶ Válvulas hidráulicas para aplicaciones industriales

Catálogo 07600-B

▶ Selección del filtro

www.boschrexroth.com/filter

RS 23178, edición: 2013-06, Bosch Rexroth AG

20/20

Notas

Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics Zum Eisengießer 1 97816 Lohr am Main, Alemania Teléfono +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 [email protected] www.boschrexroth.de

Bosch Rexroth AG, RS 23178, edición: 2013-06

© Todos los derechos de Bosch Rexroth AG, también para el caso de solicitudes de derechos protegidos. Nos reservamos todas las capacidades dispositivas tales como derechos de copia y de tramitación. Los datos indicados sirven sólo para describir el producto. De nuestras especificaciones no puede derivarse ninguna declaración sobre una cierta composición o idoneidad para un cierto fin de empleo. Las especificaciones no liberan al usuario de las propias evaluaciones y verificaciones. Hay que tener en cuenta que nuestros productos están sometidos a un proceso natural de desgaste y envejecimiento.

9iOYDQWLUHWURFGLVWULE&(723 SODFDLQWHUPHGLD FRQ;H[WHUQD :59=&&% 

 ,0$9+\GUDXOLN*PE+ %UHLWH6WUDVVH 0HHUEXVFK*HUPDQ\ IRQ  ID[  HPDLOLQIR#LPDYFRP LQWHUQHWKWWSZZZLPDYFRP 

,=



FRQH[LyQ ; *







 £5HVHUYDGRPRGLILFDFLRQHV 

9iOYDQWLUHWURFGLVWULE&(723 SODFDLQWHUPHGLD FRQ;H[WHUQD :59=&&%

 ,0$9+\GUDXOLN*PE+ %UHLWH6WUDVVH 0HHUEXVFK*HUPDQ\ IRQ  ID[  HPDLOLQIR#LPDYFRP LQWHUQHWKWWSZZZLPDYFRP 

 (MHPSORGHSHGLGR  :59=  6  &&%

,=

 £5HVHUYDGRPRGLILFDFLRQHV 



&yGLJRGHWLSR (MHFXFLyQGHODSDUDWR 3ODFDYiOYXODDQWLUHWURFHVRGLVWULEXLGRUD  FRQSDWUyQGHSHUIRUDGR',1)RUPD $  0RGRGHFRQVWUXFFLyQSODFDLQWHUPHGLD

7DPDxRFRQVWUXFWLYR\PDWHULDOGH FRQVWUXFFLyQ $ $OX)   6 DFHUR60Q3E.y***  (MHFXFLyQ &&% YiOYXODDQWLUHWURFHVRGLVWULEXLGRUD %'69

&DUDFWHUtVWLFDVWpFQLFDV 3UHVLyQQRPLQDO

EDUHV$  EDUHV6 

3HVR

.J$6 

9iOYXODDQWLUHWURFHVR GLVWULEXLGRUD

%'69YpDVH+RMDGHGLPHQVLRQHVQƒ&&

&LHUUHKHUPpWLFR

)RUPDSDUWHGHOYROXPHQGHVXPLQLVWUR XQLGDQLOORVWyULFRV[

Displacem.

1/10 RS 50205/01.07 Reemplaza a: AB 31-38

Manómetro con relleno de líquido

Tipo ABZMM

Manómetro DN63/100 Conexión lado inferior

Tamaño nominal 40, 63 y 100 Indicación máx. 1000 bar [14500 psi]

Indice Contenido

Manómetro DN40/63/100 Conexión lado posterior

Características Página

Características

1

– Los manómetros son aparatos de medición de presión para medir e indicar presiones en instalaciones hidráulicas

Símbolo

1

– Carcasa de acero fino

1

– Versión según norma EN 837-1

Repuestos Código de pedido Datos técnicos Dimensiones

2 hasta 4 5 6, 7

Adaptador para montaje directo del manómetro

8

Marcado en la esfera

9

Indicaciones de montaje

9

Advertencia de seguridad según la Directiva equipos a presión 97/23/CE 9 Utilización en áreas con peligro de explosiones según Directiva 94/9/CE (ATEX)

9

Referencias normativas

9

– Indicación de presión en bar/MPa ó bar/psi – Escala bicolor – Conexión de medición del lado posterior o inferior – Modo de fijación con racor o estribo

Símbolo

Repuestos – Al hacer el pedido de repuestos para el manómetro se debe indicar la designación de tipo completa.

2/10

Bosch Rexroth AG

Hydraulics

ABZMM

RS 50205/01.07

Código de pedido ABZM M G= T=

Accesorios para el grupo Dispositivos de medición = ABZM Manómetro Disp. de medic. de pres. con tubo elást. = M Tamaño nominal DN40 DN63 DN100

Versión Escala doble en rango de presión bar y MPa Escala doble en rango de presión bar und psi

Opción sin opción marca roja en la esfera, p. ej. a 330 bar

–= 330 =

= 40 = 63 = 100

Rango de indicación ver tablas de selección pág. 2 hasta 4 p. ej. rango de indicación 160 bar

Relleno del manómetro glicerina (estándar) silicona como versión para bajas temperaturas

= 160 = BAR/MPA = BAR/PSI

Posición de la conexión de medición lado posterior lado inferior

Modo de fijación racor estribo

V= B=

=R =U

Rango de indicación en bar

MPa

psi

10

1,0

145

16

1,6

230

25

2,5

362

40

4,0

580

Ejemplo de pedido:

60

6,0

870

Manómetro con carcasa Ø63 mm y escala doble con un rango de indicación de 0 hasta 25 bar, conexión de medición lado inferior, sin elemento de fijación:

100

10,0

1450

160

16,0

2320

250

25,0

3625

400

40,0

5800

ABZMM-63-25 BAR/MPA-U/V-G Material No. R900219546

600

60,0

8700

1000

100,0

14500

Tabla de selección: Manómetro DN40, con escala doble, Δ = tipos preferentes Conexión lado posterior centrada, rango de indicación en bar/MPa

Rango de indicación en bar

1)

Rango de indicación en bar Tipo

Material No.

1)

10

ABZMM40-10 BAR/MPA-R/V-G

R901123463

16

ABZMM40-16 BAR/MPA-R/V-G

R901123227

25

ABZMM40-25 BAR/MPA-R/V-G

R901123465

40

ABZMM40-40 BAR/MPA-R/V-G

R901123468

60

ABZMM40-60 BAR/MPA-R/V-G

R901101535

Δ

100

ABZMM40-100 BAR/MPA-R/V-G

R901101536

Δ

160

ABZMM40-160 BAR/MPA-R/V-G

R901101537

Δ

250

ABZMM40-250 BAR/MPA-R/V-G

R901096694

Δ

400

ABZMM40-400 BAR/MPA-R/V-G

R901101538

Δ

Tipos preferentes

Tablas de selección DN63 y 100, ver páginas 3 y 4.

RS 50205/01.07

Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG

ABZMM

3/10

Tabla de selección: Manómetro DN63, con escala doble, Δ = tipos preferentes Conexión lado inferior, rango de indicación en bar/MPa y bar/psi

Rango de indicación en bar 10

1)

Rango de indicación en bar/MPa Tipo ABZMM63-10 BAR/MPA-U/V-G

Material No.

Rango de indicación en bar/psi 1)

Tipo

Material No.

R901108774

Δ

ABZMM63-16 BAR/PSI-U/V-G

R900067158

ABZMM63-25 BAR/PSI-U/V-G

R900027960

16

ABZMM63-16 BAR/MPA-U/V-G

R901108567

Δ

25

ABZMM63-25 BAR/MPA-U/V-G

R900219546

Δ

ABZMM63-10 BAR/PSI-U/V-G

R900067155

40

ABZMM63-40 BAR/MPA-U/V-G

R901108775

Δ

ABZMM63-40 BAR/PSI-U/V-G

R900027961

60

ABZMM63-60 BAR/MPA-U/V-G

R900222365

Δ

ABZMM63-60 BAR/PSI-U/V-G

R900027962

100

ABZMM63-100 BAR/MPA-U/V-G

R900051035

Δ

ABZMM63-100 BAR/PSI-U/V-G

R900027963

160

ABZMM63-160 BAR/MPA-U/V-G

R900077650

Δ

ABZMM63-160 BAR/PSI-U/V-G

R900027964

250

ABZMM63-250 BAR/MPA-U/V-G

R900771208

Δ

ABZMM63-250 BAR/PSI-U/V-G

R900027965

400

ABZMM63-400 BAR/MPA-U/V-G

R900053460

Δ

ABZMM63-400 BAR/PSI-U/V-G

R900027966

600

ABZMM63-600 BAR/MPA-U/V-G

R901037755

ABZMM63-600 BAR/PSI-U/V-G

R900067154

1000

ABZMM63-1000 BAR/MPA-U/V-G

R901150441

ABZMM63-1000 BAR/PSI-U/V-G

R900034024

Tipos preferentes

Conexión lado posterior centrada, estribo de fijación, rango de indicación en bar/MPa y bar/psi

Rango de indicación en bar 10

1)

Rango de indicación en bar/MPa Tipo ABZMM63-10 BAR/MPA-R/B-G

Material No.

Rango de indicación en bar/psi 1)

R900029132

16

ABZMM63-16 BAR/MPA-R/B-G

R900072025

25

ABZMM63-25 BAR/MPA-R/B-G

R900033955

40

ABZMM63-40 BAR/MPA-R/B-G

Tipo ABZMM63-10 BAR/PSI-R/B-G

Material No. R900027254

ABZMM63-16 BAR/PSI-R/B-G

R900027255

Δ

ABZMM63-25 BAR/PSI-R/B-G

R900027256

R900072026

Δ

ABZMM63-40 BAR/PSI-R/B-G

R900027257

ABZMM63-60 BAR/PSI-R/B-G

R900027258

ABZMM63-100 BAR/PSI-R/B-G

R900027259

60

ABZMM63-60 BAR/MPA-R/B-G

R900072024

Δ

100

ABZMM63-100 BAR/MPA-R/B-G

R900022458

Δ

160

ABZMM63-160 BAR/MPA-R/B-G

R900022457

Δ

ABZMM63-160 BAR/PSI-R/B-G

R900027260

250

ABZMM63-250 BAR/MPA-R/B-G

R900072028

Δ

ABZMM63-250 BAR/PSI-R/B-G

R900027261

Δ

400

ABZMM63-400 BAR/MPA-R/B-G

R900022459

ABZMM63-400 BAR/PSI-R/B-G

R900027262

600

ABZMM63-600 BAR/MPA-R/B-G

R900072027

ABZMM63-600 BAR/PSI-R/B-G

R900067183

1000

ABZMM63-1000 BAR/MPA-R/B-G

R900072029

ABZMM63-1000 BAR/PSI-R/B-G

R900072022

Tipos preferentes

RS 50205/01.07

Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG

ABZMM

5/10

Datos técnicos (!Para utilización fuera de los valores indicados, se ruega consultar!) Tamaño nominal

DN40

DN63

DN100

2,5

1,6

1,0

ver tabla de selección pág. 2

ver tabla de selección pág. 3

ver tabla de selección pág. 4

3/4 x valor escala

3/4 x valor escala

1,0 x valor escala

Forma constructiva

Clase de exactitud según DIN EN 837 Indicación máx. Rango de aplicación: – Carga en reposo – Carga variable

2/3 x valor escala

Seguro exceso de presión

1,0 x valor escala (brevem.)

Rango de temperatura adm.:

2/3 x valor escala

0,9 x valor escala

1,0 x valor escala (brevem.)

1,3 x valor escala (brevem.)

1)

1)

1)

– Ambiente

°C [°F]

–20 - +60 [–4 - +140]

–20 - +60 [–4 - +140]

–20 - +60 [–4 - +140]

– Material (medio)

°C [°F]

–20 - +60 [–4 - +140]

–20 - +60 [–4 - +140]

–20 - +60 [–4 - +140]

– Carcasa

acero fino 1.4301 pulido

acero fino 1.4301 pulido

acero fino 1.4301 pulido

– Anillo frontal plano

acero fino 1.4301 pulido

acero fino 1.4301 pulido

acero fino 1.4301 pulido

– Visor

Plexiglas

Plexiglas

Plexiglas

– Esfera

Al blanco, cifras negras

Al blanco, cifras negras

Al blanco, cifras negras

Al negro

Al negro

Al negro

CuZn (Ms)

CuZn (Ms)

CuZn (Ms)

Material manómetro:

– Aguja según DIN EN 837 – Mecanismo segmento

aleación de Cu aleación de Cu hasta 40 bar tubo elástico, hasta 40 bar tubo elástico, desde 60 bar muelle cilíndrico desde 60 bar muelle cilíndrico

– Pieza de medición

Conexión según DIN EN 837-1

aleación de Cu hasta 60 bar tubo elástico, desde 100 bar 1.4571 muelle cilíndrico

G1/4B

G1/4B

G1/2B

CuZn (Ms)

CuZn (Ms)

CuZn (Ms)

Líquido de llenado

glicerina (grado llen. = 90 %)

glicerina (grado llen. = 90 %)

glicerina (grado llen. = 90 %)

Estribo de fijación

–

acero galvanizado

acero galvanizado

2,5

1,6

1,0

0,11 [0.24]

0,2 [0.44]

0,8 [1.76]

Material

Exactitud de indicación del valor de escala

%

kg [lbs]

Masa 1)

¡Atención! Para temp. de –40 hasta +60 °C [–40 hasta +140 °F] se deben emplear manómetros con relleno de silicona.

Resistencia (todos los tamaños nominales) – Fluidos hidráulicos • aceites minerales

aceites minerales

• fluidos poco inflamables

soluciones acuosas HFC

HLP

ésteres fosfóricos HFD-R ésteres orgánicos • fluidos rápidamente biodegradables

• agua – Gases

HFD-U

según DIN 51524 según VDMA 24317 resistente

triglicéridos (ac. colza) HETG ésteres sintéticos

HEES

poliglicoles

HEPG

según VDMA 24568

agua nitrógeno (otros gases según consulta)

6/10

Bosch Rexroth AG

Hydraulics

ABZMM

RS 50205/01.07

Dimensiones (medidas nominales en mm [inch]) Manómetro DN40, con escala doble – conexión lado posterior centrada 54 [2.13] 30 [1.18]

1

Ø40 [ 1.58]

Ø5[ 0.2] G1/4B

Ø47[ 1.85]

13 [0.51]

3 [0.12]

SW14 [0.55 A/F]

1 Orificio de purgado o descarga de presión

6 [0.24]

Manómetro DN63, con escala doble – conexión lado inferior 32 [1.26]

1

13 [0.51]

13

[0.51]

54 [2.13]

Ø62[ 2.44]

Ø68 [ 2.68]

6,5 [0.26]

SW14

1 Orificio de purgado o descarga de presión

3 [0.12]

[0.55 A/F]

Ø5[ 0.2] G1/4B

Manómetro DN63, con escala doble – conexión lado posterior centrada, con estribo de fijación

1 32 [1.26] 6,5 [0.26]

SW14

Orificio Ø63+1mm [Ø2.48+0.04 inch]

Ø68[ 2.68]

Ø5[ 0.2]

Ø62 [ 2.44]

1 Orificio de purgado o descarga de presión

G1/4B

[0.55 A/F]

3 [0.12] 13 [0.51]

El estribo de fijación forma parte del suministro del manómetro. Versión a elección del fabricante.

56 [2.20]

8/10

Bosch Rexroth AG

Hydraulics

ABZMM

RS 50205/01.07

Adaptador para montaje directo del manómetro Dimensiones (medidas nominales en mm [inch]) Versión “A“

Versión “B“

SW

SW

d2

l

l

l2

l2

d2

2 l1

l1

2

1

1 Ød3

Ød3

d1

d1

Ød4

Ød4 Pieza de reducción para orificio roscado según ISO 1179 Versión

A B

PN

Medidas

630

d1

d2

Ød3

Ød4

l

l1

l2

SW [A/F]

G1/4 A

G1/4

4 [0.16]

19 [0.75]

34 [1.34]

12 [0.47]

14,5 [0.57]

22 [0.87]

400

G1/4 A

G1/2

4 [0.16]

19 [0.75]

35 [1.38]

12 [0.47]

16,0 [0.63]

27 [1.06]

630

7/16-20 UNF

G1/4

4 [0.16]

16 [0.63]

31 [1.22]

9 [0.35]

14,5 [0.57]

22 [0.87]

400

7/16-20 UNF

G1/2

4 [0.16]

16 [0.63]

32 [1.26]

9 [0.35]

16,0 [0.63]

27 [1.06]

Versión

A B

Pieza de reducción para orificio roscado según ISO 11926-1

Denominación

Material No.

REDUZIERSTUECK G1/4-G1/4 /FKM

R901156422

REDUZIERSTUECK G1/4-G1/2 /FKM

R901156423

REDUZIERSTUECK 7/16-20UNF-G1/4 /FKM

R901156316

REDUZIERSTUECK 7/16-20UNF-G1/2 /FKM

R901156317

Ejemplo de pedido Pieza de reducción de acero con protección de superficie galvanizada y cromada amarillo G1/4 A, rosca interior = G1/2 con junta anular Pos. 1 material FKM y junta anular Pos. 2 material Cu REDUZIERSTUECK G1/4-G1/2 /FKM, Material No. R901156423 Repuesto: Junta anular Pos. 1 Versión

Material

A

FKM

PROFILDICHTUNG M14X1,5+G1/4 FKM

Denominación

R900012502

Material No.

B

FKM

O-Ring 8,92x1,83-FKM80+-5SH

R900024577

Repuesto: Junta anular Pos. 2

d2

Material

Dimensiones Ød5

Ød6

Denominación s

Material No.

Ød5

DICHTRING.... s

Para rosca

G1/4

Cu

5,9 [0.23]

9,3 [0.37]

3,2 [0.13] 5,4/9,3X3,2-CU NR:9090800

R900004667

G1/2

Cu

8,0 [0.32] 14,8 [0.58]

4,2 [0.17] 8,0/14,8X4,2-CU NR:9090819

R900218724

Junta anular para obturación metálica. Después de obturado, el manómetro aún se puede girar 360°, de manera que sea posibe ajustar cualquier posición deseada.

Ød6

RS 50205/01.07

ABZMM

Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG

9/10

Marcado en la esfera

1

1 Material No. (ver tablas de selección pág. 2 hasta 4)

2

2 Clase de exactitud seg. DIN EN 837 3 Logotipo “REXROTH”

3

En las escalas dobles, la división externa (bar) se realiza en caracteres negros, la división interna en caracteres rojos. Atención: Escalas simples o dobles para otros rangos de presión (psi, kPa, MPa) según consulta.

Indicaciones de montaje – En el montaje del conducto de medición al manómetro, la pieza de conexión del manómetro (SW14; SW22 [0.55A/F; 0.87A/F]) se debe retener con una contrallave. – Orificio de purgado y descarga de presión Los manómetros están equipados con dispositivos de purgado en el lado superior de la carcasa. Antes de poner en marcha el manómetro, los dispositivos de purgado se deben colocar manualmente de posición “closed” a posición “open”, a fin de evitar errores de medición.

Advertencia de seguridad según la Directiva equipos a presión 97/23/CE Según Art. 1, inciso 2.1.4 de la Directiva equipos a presión, los manómetros son piezas de equipamiento que mantienen la presión. El volumen de la carcasa sujeta a presíón es < 0,1 litros. Según Anexo 2, Diagrama 4 (fluidos) o Diagrama 2 (nitrógeno) según la presente Hoja de Datos RS 50205 hasta PS = 1000 bar, están sujetos a la Directiva equipos a presión. Según Art. 3, inciso 3 se fabrican según la “buena práctica ingenieril” y no obtienen un marcado CE.

Utilización en áreas con peligro de explosiones según Directiva 94/9/CE (ATEX) Los manómetros disponen de carcasas de acero fino, que según DIN EN 13463-5, no pueden desarrollar chispas inflamables. La temperatura superficial máxima no depende de los manómetros, sino esencialmente de la temperatura del fluido respectivo y, por lo tanto, debe ser evaluada dentro del marco del análisis de peligro del grupo/bloque. Dado que según la presente Hoja de Datos RDS 50205 los manómetros no contienen fuentes de ignición potenciales, no caen bajo las Directivas ATEX ni obtienen ninguna marcación CE.

Referencias normativas DIN EN 837-1

Aparatos medidores de presión - Parte 1: Aparatos de presión con tubos elásticos; dimensiones, técnicas de medición, requisitos y pruebas

DIN EN 837-2

Aparatos medidores de presión - Parte 2: Recomendaciones para la selección y el montaje de aparatos medidores de presión

DIN 51524

Fluidos hidráulicos; aceites hidráulicos

VDMA 24317

Técnica de fluidos - fluidos hidráulicos poco inflamables – requisitos técnicos mínimos

VDMA 24568

Técnica de fluidos; fluidos hidráulicos rápidamente biodegradables; requisitos técnicos mínimos

10/10

Bosch Rexroth AG

Hydraulics

ABZMM

RS 50205/01.07

Notas

Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics Zum Eisengießer 1 97816 Lohr am Main, Germany Teléfono +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 Telefax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 [email protected] www.boschrexroth.de

© Todos los derechos de Bosch Rexroth AG, también para el caso desolicitudes de derechos protegidos. Nos reservamos todas las capacidades dispositivas tales como derechos de copia y de tramitación. Los datos indicados sirven sólo para describir el producto. De nuestras especificaciones no puede derivarse ninguna declaración sobre una cierta composición o idoneidad para un cierto fin de empleo. Las especificaciones no liberan al usuario de las propias evaluaciones y verificaciones. Hay que tener en cuenta que nuestros productos están sometidos a un proceso natural de desgaste y envejecimiento.

RS 50205/01.07

ABZMM

Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG

11/10

Notas

Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics Zum Eisengießer 1 97816 Lohr am Main, Germany Teléfono +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 Telefax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 [email protected] www.boschrexroth.de

© Todos los derechos de Bosch Rexroth AG, también para el caso desolicitudes de derechos protegidos. Nos reservamos todas las capacidades dispositivas tales como derechos de copia y de tramitación. Los datos indicados sirven sólo para describir el producto. De nuestras especificaciones no puede derivarse ninguna declaración sobre una cierta composición o idoneidad para un cierto fin de empleo. Las especificaciones no liberan al usuario de las propias evaluaciones y verificaciones. Hay que tener en cuenta que nuestros productos están sometidos a un proceso natural de desgaste y envejecimiento.

12/10

Bosch Rexroth AG

Hydraulics

ABZMM

RS 50205/01.07

Notas

Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics Zum Eisengießer 1 97816 Lohr am Main, Germany Teléfono +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0 Telefax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58 [email protected] www.boschrexroth.de

© Todos los derechos de Bosch Rexroth AG, también para el caso desolicitudes de derechos protegidos. Nos reservamos todas las capacidades dispositivas tales como derechos de copia y de tramitación. Los datos indicados sirven sólo para describir el producto. De nuestras especificaciones no puede derivarse ninguna declaración sobre una cierta composición o idoneidad para un cierto fin de empleo. Las especificaciones no liberan al usuario de las propias evaluaciones y verificaciones. Hay que tener en cuenta que nuestros productos están sometidos a un proceso natural de desgaste y envejecimiento.

"DVNVMBEPSBWFKJHB

 34 3FFNQMB[BB

5JQP)"#

4FSJFEFMBQBSBUP9 7PMVNFOOPNJOBMIBTUBMJUSPT .”YJNBQSFTJ¥OEFTFSWJDJPCBS

*OEJDF $POUFOJEP

$BSBDUFS TUJDBT 1”HJOB

$BSBDUFS TUJDBT



¾ "DVNVMBEPSIJES”VMJDPTFH¬OMB%JSFDUJWB&( ¾ .BUFSJBMEFMBWFKJHBQBSBBQMJDBDJPOFTEJGFSFOUFT

%BUPTQBSBFMQFEJEP *OTUSVDDJPOFTQBSBFMTFSWJDJPZ EFDMBSBDJPOFTEFDPOGPSNJEBE



&NQMFP



'VODJPOBNJFOUP DPSUF T NCPMP



%BUPTUœDOJDPT



"QMJDBDJPOFT NPEPEFBDUVBS



$”MDVMP

IBTUB

%JNFOTJPOFTEFMBQBSUP UJQPTQSFGFSFOUFT "DDFTPSJPT

¾ 3FTFSWBFOFSHœUJDBQBSBDBTPTEFFNFSHFODJB ¾ $PNQFOTBDJ¥OEFQœSEJEBTQPSGVHBT ¾ "NPSUJHVBDJ¥OEFHPMQFTZPTDJMBDJPOFT ¾ $PNQFOTBDJ¥OEFWPMVNFOFODBTPEFNPEJGJDBDJPOFTEF QSFTJ¥OZUFNQFSBUVSB

 IBTUB

6TPDPOGPSNFBTVEFTUJOP



"EWFSUFODJBTEFTFHVSJEBEQBSBBDVNVMBEPSFTIJES”VMJDPT



%JTQPTJDJPOFTMFHBMFT



%JTQPTJUJWPTEFTFHVSJEBE



*OGPSNBDJPOFTTPCSFSFQVFTUPTTVNJOJTUSBCMFT XXXCPTDISFYSPUIDPNTQD

¾ "DVNVMBDJ¥OEFFOFSH BFOFRVJQPTDPOTFSWJDJPJOUFSNJUFOUF

"EWFSUFODJB -B%JSFDUJWBTPCSFFRVJQPTBQSFTJ¥O$&EFM1BSMBNFO UP&VSPQFPZEFM$POTFKPEFMEFNBZPEFQBSBMBIP NPMPHBDJ¥OEFMBTEJTQPTJDJPOFTMFHBMFTEFMPTQB TFTNJFN CSPTTFFODVFOUSBWJHFOUFEFTEFFMEFOPWJFNCSFEF "QBSUJSEFMEFNBZPEFMBBQMJDBDJ¥OEFMPTBDVNVMB EPSFTIJES”VMJDPTEFCFFGFDUVBSTFFYDMVTJWBNFOUFEFDPOGPSNJ EBEDPOEJDIB%JSFDUJWB



#PTDI3FYSPUI"( )ZESBVMJDT

)"#34

%BUPTQBSBFMQFEJEP )"# 7PMVNFOOPNJOBM MJUSP  MJUSPT MJUSPT MJUSPT MJUSPT MJUSPT MJUSPT MJUSPT

9 

(









 0USPTEBUPTFO UFYUPDPNQMFNFOUBSJP QPSFKWFSTJPOFTFTQFDJBMFT

        

$FSUJGJDBDJ¥O SFDFQDJ¥O

 $& SFDFQDJ¥OTFH¬O &(  #" JOTUSVDDJ¥OEFVTP 4VQFSGJDJFEFMMBEPEFDPOFYJ¥O

 BDFSP

1SFTJ¥OTFSWJDJPN”YBENJTJCMF CBS IBTUBMJUSPT   CBS IBTUBMJUSPT   4FSJFEFMBQBSBUP 4FSJFIBTUB NFEJEBTEFJOTUBMBDJ¥OZ DPOFYJPOFTJOWBSJBCMFT

4VQFSGJDJFMBEPJOUFSJPSEFMSFDJQJFOUF

 BDFSP .BUFSJBMEFMSFDJQJFOUF

BDFSP



9

.BUFSJBMEFMBWFKJHB

/#3 &$0

/ &

1SFTJ¥OEFMMFOBEPEFHBT CBS





5BNB£PEFDPOFYJ¥OQBSBGMVJEPIJES”VMJDP

( ( ( ( ( ( .PEPEFGJKBDJ¥O GPSNBEFDPOFYJ¥OEFBDFJUF  3PTDBDPOTVQFSGJDJFEFPCUVSBDJ¥OJOUFSOBSBEJBM

'PSNBEFMBDPOFYJ¥OEFHBT W”MWVMBEFHBTQBSBEJTQPTJUJWPEFMMFOBEPZQSVFCB WFSQ”HJOB

( &KFNQMPEFQFEJEP )"#9((/$&

 0USBTWBSJBOUFTTFH¬ODPOTVMUB

5JQPTQSFGFSFOUFT WFSQ”HJOB

*OTUSVDDJPOFTQBSBFMTFSWJDJPZEFDMBSBDJPOFTEFDPOGPSNJEBE *OTUSVDDJPOFTEFTFSWJDJP

%FDMBSBDJPOFTEFDPOGPSNJEBE

W”MJEBTQBSB)"#IBTUB)"#

*EJPNBTBMFN”O JOHMœT GSBODœT

*EJPNBT

/SPEFNBUFSJBM *OTUSVDDJPOFTEFTFSWJDJP

"MFN”O

3

7PMNFO OPNJOBM

*OHœT

3

M

'SBODœT

3

 M

&TQB£PM

3

M

*UBMJBOP

3

M

$IJOP

3

M

3VTP

3

M

/PSVFHP

3

M

1PMBDP

3

M

3FQ¬CMJDB$IFDB

3

%FDMBSBDJPOFTEFDPOGPSNJEBE .BUFSJBMWFKJHB/#3 /SPEFNBUFSJBM

.BUFSJBMWFKJHB&$0 /SPEFNBUFSJBM

¾

¾

3

3

3

3

)ZESBVMJDT#PTDI3FYSPUI"(

34)"#



'VODJPOBNJFOUP DPSUF T NCPMP (FOFSBMJEBEFT -PTBDVNVMBEPSFTIJES”VMJDPTTPOFRVJQPTIJESPTU”UJDPTDB QBDFTEFBDVNVMBSVOBDJFSUBDBOUJEBEEFFOFSH BZFOUSFHBS MBBMFRVJQPIJES”VMJDPTFH¬OEFNBOEB -PTGMVJEPTTPONVZQPDPDPNQSFTJCMFT NJFOUSBTRVFMPTHB TFTQPTFFOVOBDPNQSFTJCJMJEBEFMFWBEB4PCSFFTUBEJGFSFO DJBTFCBTBFMQSJODJQJPEFUSBCBKPEFUPEPTMPTBDVNVMBEPSFT IJES”VMJDPTEFHBT

4 7

4JVOWPMVNFOEFHBTBQSFTJ¥OEFUFSNJOBEPTFTPNFUFB VOBQSFTJ¥OEFM RVJEPN”TFMFWBEB BNBZPSQSFTJ¥OEFM RVJ EPTFSFEVDFFMWPMVNFOEFHBT NJFOUSBTRVFMBQSFTJ¥OEF HBTBVNFOUBDPOMBQSFTJ¥OEFMM RVJEP 4JMBQSFTJ¥OEFMM RVJEPTFSFEVDF QPSMBFYQBOTJ¥OEFMHBT FMGMVJEPTFDPNQSJNFEFOUSPEFMFRVJQPIJES”VMJDPIBTUBRVF MBQSFTJ¥OTFDPNQFOTFOVFWBNFOUF "DVNVMBEPSBWFKJHB -PTBDVNVMBEPSFTEFWFKJHBTFDPNQPOFOEFVOSFDJQJFOUFEF QSFTJ¥ODJM OESJDPTJOTPMEBEVSB  EFBDFSPBMUBNFOUFSFTJTUFOUF $POMBWFKJHBFM”TUJDB  NPOUBEBFOFMFTQBDJPJOUFSJPSEFM SFDJQJFOUF FMBDVNVMBEPSTFTFQBSBFOVOMBEPEFHBTZPUSP EFGMVJEP "USBWœTEFMBW”MWVMBEFHBT  MBWFKJHBTFMMFOBDPOOJUS¥ HFOPBMBQSFTJ¥OEFMMFOBEPEFHBTQQSFWJTUB

8

4.1 4.2

4

1 6

4.3 5

2

3

3FDJQJFOUF 7FKJHB 7”MWVMBEFBDFJUF 7”MWVMBHBT 4PQPSUFW”MWVMB EFHBT 5VFSDB 5BQBEFUJQP 5BQBDPCFSUPSB 4FH¬OFMUJQPEFFMFNFOUPTFQBSBEPS TFEJGFSFODJBFOUSFBDV NVMBEPSFTEFWFKJHBPEFNFNCSBOB-PTBDVNVMBEPSFTIJ ES”VMJDPTTFDPNQPOFOC”TJDBNFOUFEFVOBQBSUFM RVJEBZEF VOBQBSUFHBTFPTB DPOVOFMFNFOUPTFQBSBEPSIFSNœUJDPBM HBT-BQBSUFM RVJEBFTU”DPOFDUBEBDPOFMDJSDVJUPIJES”VMJDP

4JFMGMVJEPFTQSFTJPOBEPEFOUSPEFMBDVNVMBEPS FMHBTFO MBWFKJHBTFDPNQSJNF MPHS”OEPTFDPOFMMPVOBVNFOUPEF QSFTJ¥O&MWPMVNFOEFHBTTFSFEVDFZEFMMBEPEFMGMVJEP œTUF¬MUJNPQVFEFDJSDVMBSIBDJBFMBDVNVMBEPS&ODVBOUPMB QSFTJ¥OEFMMBEPEFMGMVJEPTFBJOGFSJPSBMBQSFTJ¥OEFHBT FM BDVNVMBEPSTFWBD B &OMBDPOFYJ¥OEFBDFJUFEFMBDVNVMBEPSEFWFKJHBTFFO DVFOUSBMBW”MWVMBEFBDFJUF 

RVFTFDJFSSBFODBTPEFQSF TJ¥ON”TFMFWBEBEFMMBEPEFHBTDPOSFTQFDUPBMMBEPEF M RVJEP%FFTUBNBOFSBTFFWJUBRVFMBWFKJHBTBMHBIBDJBFM DBOBMEFBDFJUFZTFEFTUSVZBMBNJTNB "MBMDBO[BSMBQSFTJ¥OEFTFSWJDJPN OJNB FOUSFMBWFKJHBZ MBW”MWVMBEFBDFJUFEFCFRVFEBSVOQFRVF£PWPMVNFOEF M RVJEP BQSPYEFMWPVNFOOPNJOBMEFMBDVNVMBEPS  QBSBRVFMBWFKJHBOPDIPRVFDPOUSBMBW”MWVMBFODBEBQSP DFEJNJFOUPEFFYQBOTJ¥O-BW”MWVMBEFHBT  TFDPNQP OFEFVOBUBQBPCUVSBEPSB 

VODBSUVDIPEFW”MWVMBEF HBT  ZFMDVFSQPEFMMFOBEPEFHBT  &TUBTQJF[BTTF QVFEFOSFDBNCJBSTFQBSBEBNFOUF -BUBQBEFUJQP  DPOUJFOFMPTEBUPTUœDOJDPTZMBTDBSBDUF S TUJDBTEFMBDVNVMBEPSIJES”VMJDP 4 NCPMP



#PTDI3FYSPUI"( )ZESBVMJDT

)"#34

%BUPTUœDOJDPT aDPOT¬MUFOPTFODBTPEFVUJMJ[BSFMFRVJQPGVFSBEFMPTWBMPSFTJOEJDBEPTÝ

HFOFSBMFT .BTB

LH WFSUBCMBQBHJOB

5JQPDPOTUSVDUJWP

BDVNVMBEPSBWFKJHB

1PTJDJ¥OEFNPOUBKF

CPRVJMMBEFDPOFYJ¥OEFGMVJEPBCBKP PUSBTBQFEJEP

.PEPEFGJKBDJ¥O

DPOBCSB[BEFSBTEFBQSJFUFZDPOTPMB m$ ¾IBTUB 

3BOHPEFUFNQFSBUVSBBNCJFOUF $POFYJ¥ODPOEVSDUP

SPTDBBUPSOJMMBCMF

IJES”VMJDPT 7PMVNFOOPNJOBM 7PMVNFOEFHBTFGFDUJWP

7OPN

M



 













7FG

M

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

MNJO

















$BVEBMN”YBENJTJCMF

RN”Y

1SFTJ¥OEFTFSWJDJP N”YJNBBENJTJCMF

QN”Y

CBS

















"NQMJUVEEFGMVDUVBDJ¥O EFQSFTJ¥ON”YBENJTJCMF

6QEJO

CBS

















1SFTJPOFTEFTFSWJDJPZWPMVNFO¬UJM

WFSD”MDVMPFOQ”HJOBTIBTUB

'MVJEPIJES”VMJDP

BDFJUFIJES”VMJDPTFH¬O%*/PUSPTGMVJEPTTFH¬ODPOTVMUBÝ

3BOHPEFUFNQFSBUVSBEFMGMVJEPIJES”VMJDP 0USPTTFH¬ODPOTVMUB

m$ ¾IBTUB  /#3

¾IBTUB  &$0 

OFVN”UJDPT (BTEFMMFOBEP

OJUS¥HFOP DMBTFEFQVSF[B / 7PM

1SFTJ¥OEFMMFOBEPEFHBT

Q

CBS 

'MVJEPTIJES”VMJDPTBQMJDBCMFT 'MVJEPTIJES”VMJDPT

3BOHPUFNQFSBUVSB

.BUFSJBM

"DFJUFTNJOFSBMFT

¾IBTUB m$ ¾IBTUB m$

/#3 &$0

)'$

¾IBTUB ࡞

/#3

1BSBPUSPTGMVJEPTIJES”VMJDPTZUFNQFSBUVSBTEJGFSFOUFTTF SVFHBDPOTVMUBS

/#3 &$0

$BVDIPBDSJMOJUSJMPCVUBEJFOP 1FSCVOBO  $BVDIPFQJDMPSIJESJOP

)ZESBVMJDT#PTDI3FYSPUI"(

34)"#



"QMJDBDJPOFT NPEPEFBDUVBS "QMJDBDJPOFT

.PEPEFBDUVBS

-PTBDVNVMBEPSFTIJESPOFVN”UJDPTPGSFDFON¬MUJQMFTQPTJCJMJ EBEFTEFBQMJDBDJ¥O

-PTM RVJEPTTPOQS”DUJDBNFOUFJODPNQSFTJCMFTZQPSFTPOP QVFEFOBDVNVMBSFOFSH BEFQSFTJ¥O&OMPTBDVNVMBEPSFT IJESPOFVN”UJDPT3FYSPUITFBQSPWFDIBMBDPNQSFTJCJMJEBEEF VOHBTQBSBBMNBDFOBNJFOUPEFGMVJEPa4¥MPTFEFCFFN QMFBSOJUS¥HFOPDPODMBTFEFQVSF[BÝ / 7PM

¾ "DVNVMBDJ¥OEFFOFSH BQBSBBIPSSPEFQPUFODJBEFBDDJP OBNJFOUPEFCPNCBTFOFRVJQPTDPOTFSWJDJPJOUFSNJUFOUF ¾ 3FTFSWBFOFSHœUJDBQBSBDBTPTEFFNFSHFODJB  QPSFKFNQMP GBMMPEFMBCPNCBIJES”VMJDB ¾ $PNQFOTBDJ¥OEFQœSEJEBTQPSGVHBT ¾ "NPSUJHVBDJ¥OEFHPMQFTZPTDJMBDJPOFTFODBTPEF PTDJMBDJPOFTQFSJ¥EJDBT ¾ $PNQFOTBDJ¥OEFWPMVNFOFODBTPEFNPEJGJDBDJPOFTEF QSFTJ¥OZUFNQFSBUVSB

DBSHB

DBSHB

V0 p0

V1 p1

EFTDBSHB

V2 p2

EFTDBSHB

$”MDVMP 1SFTJPOFT 1BSBFMD”MDVMPEFVOBDVNVMBEPSMBTQSFTJPOFTTJHVJFOUFT SFWJTUFOVOBJNQPSUBODJBEFDJTJWB Q 

 QSFTJ¥OEFMMFOBEPEFHBTBUFNQFNQBSUVSB  BNCJFOUFZD”NBSBEFGMVJEPWBD B

Q U 

 QSFTJ¥OEFMMFOBEPEFHBTBUFNQFNQBSUVSBEFTFSWJDJP

Q UN”Y  QSFTJ¥OEFMMFOBEPEFHBTBUFNQFSBUVSBEFTFSWJDJPN”Y Q 

 TPCSFQSFTJ¥OEFTFSWJDJPN O

Q

 TPCSFQSFTJ¥OEFTFSWJDJPN”Y

1BSBBMDBO[BSVOBQSPWFDIBNJFOUP¥QUJNPEFMWPMVNFOEFM BDVNVMBEPSZVOBQSPMPOHBEBWJEB¬UJM TFSFDPNJFOEBNBO UFOFSMPTWBMPSFTTJHVJFOUFT Q UN”Y   Q

 

-BQSFTJ¥OIJES”VMJDBN”YJNBOPEFCFS”FYDFEFSDVBUSPWFDFT MBQSFTJ¥OEFMMFOBEP QPSRVFEFPUSBNBOFSBTFTPMJDJUBS BEF NBTJBEPMBFMBTUJDJEBEEFMBWFKJHB QSPEVDJFOEPNPEJGJDBDJPOFT EFDPNQSFTJ¥OFYDFTJWBTDPOGVFSUFDBMFOUBNJFOUPEFMHBT Q ÈQ



-BWJEB¬UJMEFMBWFKJHBBDVNVMBEPSBFTUBOUPN”TQSPMPOHB EBDVBOUPNFOPSTFBMBEJGFSFODJBFOUSFQVOEQ4JOFN CBSHP EFCJEPBFMMPTFSFEVDFEFGPSNBDPSSFTQPOEJFOUFFM HSBEPEFBQSPWFDIBNJFOUPEFMBDBQBDJEBEEFBDVNVMBDJ¥O N”YJNB



#PTDI3FYSPUI"( )ZESBVMJDT

)"#34

$”MDVMP 7PMVNFOEFBDFJUF $PSSFTQPOEJFOEPBMBTQSFTJPOFQÉQSFTVMUBOMPTWPM¬NF OFTEFHBT7É7 "RV 7FTBMNJTNPUJFNQPFMWPMVNFOOPNJOBMEFMBDVNVMBEPS &MWPMVNFOEFBDFJUFEJTQPOJCMF 7DPSSFTQPOEFBMBEJGFSFO DJBEFMPTWPM¬NFOFTEFHBT7Z7 

7 7¾7 &MWPMVNFOEFHBTWBSJBCMFEFOUSPEFVOBEJGFSFODJBEFQSF TJ¥OFTU”EFUFSNJOBEPQPSMBTFDVBDJPOFTTJHVJFOUFT B 1BSBMBNPEJGJDBDJ¥OJTPUœSNJDBEFFTUBEPEFHBTFT FT EFDJS DVBOEPMBNPEJGJDBDJ¥OEFMSFMMFOPEFHBTFTUBOMFO UBRVFIBZTVGJDJFOUFUJFNQPEJTQPOJCMFQBSBFMJOUFSDBNCJP DPNQMFUPEFDBMPSFOUSFFMOJUS¥HFOPZFMNFEJPBNCJFOUF  ZEFFTUBNBOFSBMBUFNQFSBUVSBQFSNBOFDFDPOTUBOUF  FOUPODFTWBMF QÈ7QÈ7QÈ7

C 1BSBMBNPEJGJDBDJ¥OBEJBC”UJDBEFMFTUBEP FTEFDJS FO DBTPEFNPEJGJDBDJ¥OS”QJEBEFMSFMMFOPEFHBTFOMBDVBMMB UFNQFSBUVSBEFMOJUS¥HFOPUBNCJœOTFNPEJGJDB WBMF 

Q È7r Q È7r Q È7r 











r SFMBDJ¥OEFMPTDBMPSFTFTQFD GJDPTEFMHBT   FYQPOFOUFBEJBC”UJDP

QBSBOJUS¥HFOP  &OMBQS”DUJDBMBTNPEJGJDBDJPOFTEFFTUBEPHFOFSBMNFOUF USBOTDVSSFOTFH¬OMBTMFZFTBEJBC”UJDBT$PN¬ONFOUFMBDBS HBFTJTPUœSNJDB MBEFTDBSHBBEJBC”UJDB $POTJEFSBOEPMBTFDVBDJPOFT  Z   7TFFODVFOUSBFO IBTUBEFMWPMVNFOOPNJOBMEFMBDVNVMBEPS $PNPWBMPSJOEJDBUJWPWBMF 7 ÉY 7





6UJMJ[BDJ¥OEFMEJBHSBNBEFD”MDVMP

1BSBMBEFUFSNJOBDJ¥OHS”GJDBTFDPOWJFSUFOMBTG¥SNVMBT   Z  FOEJBHSBNBTFOQ”HJOBTIBTUB4FH¬OMBUBSFB EFMBDVBMTFUSBUFTFQVFEFODBMDVMBSFMWPMVNFOEFBDFJUF EJTQPOJCMF FMUBNB£PEFMBDVNVMBEPSPMBTQSFTJPOFT

WFSQ”HJOBTIBTUB

'BDUPSEFDPSSFDDJ¥O,JZ,B

-BFDVBDJ¥O  ¥  T¥MPWBMFQBSBHBTFTJEFBMFT4JO FNCBSHP FOFMDPNQPSUBNJFOUPEFHBTFTSFBMFTBQSFTJPOFT EFTFSWJDJPTVQFSJPSFTBCBSTFQSPEVDFOEFTWJBDJPOFT OPUBCMFTRVFEFCFOTFSDPOTJEFSBEBTDPOGBDUPSFTEFDPSSFD DJ¥O&TUPTTFQVFEFOFYUSBFSEFMPTEJBHSBNBTTJHVJFOUFT -PTGBDUPSFTEFDPSSFDDJ¥ODPOMPTDVBMFTTFEFCFNVMUJQMJDBS FMWPMVNFOEFFYUSBDDJ¥OJEFBM 7TFFODVFOUSBOFOFMSBOHP EF É 7SFBM 7JEFBMÈ,J JTPUœSNJDP

1SFTJ¥OEFMMFOBEPEFHBT

V2

s2 po

7PMVNFOEF BDFJUFEJTQPOJCMF

7FOMA

%JBHSBNBEFD”MDVMP

s1

V1

QFOCBSA P1

P2

3BOHPEFQSFTJ¥OEFUSBCBKP

7SFBM 7JEFBMÈ,B

BEJBC”UJDP

1,0

1,0

0,9

0,9

p2

=2

00

ba

0,8

Ki

0,8

,BA

,JA

r

p

2

=

30

0

ba

r

0,7

0,7

0,6 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0 QQA

0,6 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0 QQA

7FOMA

20

2,0

4,0

6,0

8,0

10,0

12,0

35

5

10

15

20

25

10

1,0

2,0

3,0

4,0

5,0

6,0

7,0

1,0

2,0

3,0

4,0

6

0,5

1,0

1,5

2,0

2,5

4 2,5

0,5

1,0

1,5

11

0,1

0,2

0,3

0,4

0,5

0,6

0,7

0,8

5BNB£POPNJOBMEFBDVNVMBEPSFO MA

50

5

10

15

20

25

20

35

2,0

2

Q

5,0

SA 3

CB  FO

14,0

1

4 5

4

10

6

5

Q QFOCBSA

30 40 50

100

7 8 9 10 12 14 16 18 20 25 30 40 50 60 70 80 90

20

200 300

400

34)"# )ZESBVMJDT#PTDI3FYSPUI"(

$”MDVMP

$BNCJPTEFFTUBEPJTPUœSNJDPT

QIBTUBCBS



3

2

7FOMA

5

10

15

20

2,0

4,0

6,0

8,0

10,0

12,0

1,0

2,0

3,0

4,0

5,0

6,0

7,0

1,0

2,0

3,0

4,0

5,0

0,5

1,0

1,5

2,0

2,5

0,5

1,0

1,5

2,0

0,1

0,2

0,3

0,4

0,5

0,6

0,7

0,8

4 2,5 1 100 50 35 20 10 6 5BNB£POPNJOBMEFBDVNVMBEPSFOMA

5

10

15

20

25

20

35

25

14,0

Q

A BS C O F

200

0 15

Q QFOCBSA

0 10

0 20

30 300

400

 #PTDI3FYSPUI"( )ZESBVMJDT )"#34

$”MDVMP

$BNCJPTEFFTUBEPJTPUœSNJDPT

QIBTUBCBS

0

25

0

7FOMA

20

2,0

4,0

6,0

8,0

10,0

35

5

10

15

20

12,0

10

1,0

2,0

3,0

4,0

5,0

6,0

7,0

1,0

2,0

3,0

4,0

6

0,5

1,0

1,5

2,0

2,5

4

0,1

0,2

0,3

0,4

0,5

0,6

0,7

0,8

2,5 1 1

0,5

1,0

1,5

2,0

5BNB£POPNJOBMEFBDVNVMBEPSFOMA

50

5

10

15

20

25

20

35

25

5,0

A 2

3

BS Q  F OC 4 5

5

4

20

30 40 50

Q QFOCBSA

3

2

10

6 7

100

8 19 120 1 1 4 1 6 208 25 30 40 50 60 70 80 90

14,0

200 300

400

34)"# )ZESBVMJDT#PTDI3FYSPUI"(

$”MDVMP

$BNCJPTEFFTUBEPBEJBC”UJDPT

QIBTUBCBS



1

7FOMA

20

2,0

4,0

6,0

8,0

10,0

35

5

10

15

20

12,0

10

1,0

2,0

3,0

4,0

5,0

6,0

7,0

1,0

2,0

3,0

4,0

5,0

6

0,5

1,0

1,5

2,0

2,5

4 2,5

0,5

1,0

1,5

2,0

1 100

0,1

0,2

0,3

0,4

0,5

0,6

0,7

0,8

5BNB£POPNJOBMEFBDVNVMBEPSFOMA

50

5

10

15

20

25

20

35

25

14,0

Q

200 Q QFOCBSA

SA CB O F

100

0 15

0 20

300

25

0

0 30

400

 #PTDI3FYSPUI"( )ZESBVMJDT )"#34

$”MDVMP

$BNCJPTEFFTUBEPBEJBC”UJDPT

QIBTUBCBS

)ZESBVMJDT#PTDI3FYSPUI"(

34)"#



b

%JNFOTJPOFTEFMBQBSBUP UJQPTQSFGFSFOUFT NFEJEBTFONN

h max

d max

a

SW

e f 7PMVNFO OPNJOBM MJUSPT         

$¥EJHPEFQFEJEP5JQP

/SPEF NBUFSJBM

)"#9((/#"

3

)"#9((&#"

3

)"# 9((/$&

3

)"# 9((&$&

3

)"#9((/$&

3

)"#9((&$&

3

)"#9((/$&

3

)"#9((&$&

3

)"#9((/$&

3

)"#9((&$&

3

)"#9((/$&

3

)"#9((&$&

3

)"#9((/$&

3

)"#9((&$&

3

)"#9((/$&

3

)"#9((&$&

3

I N”Y

E N”Y

B

C

F

G

48

.BTB LH

 

 





(Ü









 





(Ü







 







(Ü







 







(Ü







 

 





(Ü







 

 





(Ü









 





(Ü









 





(Ü









#PTDI3FYSPUI"( )ZESBVMJDT

)"#34

"DDFTPSJPT NFEJEBTFONN

&MFNFOUPTEFGJKBDJ¥O)"# 5BNB£POPNJOBMEFBDVNVMBEPS 5JQPEF BCSB[BEFSB

1

/SPEF NBUFSJBM





 



 







"CSB[BEFSB





"CSB[BEFSB



"CSB[BEFSB



"CSB[BEFSB



$POTPMB









"OJMMPEFDBVDIP













3 2

"CSB[BEFSB $POTPMB "OJMMPEFDBVDIP

$POTPMBZBOJMMPEFBQPZPEFDBVDIP

100

14

75

35

/N

200 260

170 123 225

$POTPMB /SPEFNBUFSJBM



"OJMMPEFDBVDIP /SPEFNBUFSJBM

)ZESBVMJDT#PTDI3FYSPUI"(

34)"#



"DDFTPSJPT NFEJEBTFONN

"CSB[BEFSBTEFGJKBDJ¥O 5JQP' M

5JQP'

M

D

Fry

C

Fa

H

H

D

C

Frx

B

B

L

L

9

E

9

E

S

A K

S

A

%JNFOTJPOFT

5JQPEFBCSB[BEFSB

"

#

$

%

&

/SPEF

)

,

-

.

4

NBUFSJBM

"CSB[BEFSB

'







 



¾



.





"CSB[BEFSB

'













¾



.





"CSB[BEFSB

'













¾



.





"CSB[BEFSB

'

















.







#PTDI3FYSPUI"( )ZESBVMJDT

)"#34

"DDFTPSJPT NFEJEBTFONN

%JTQPTJUJWPEFMMFOBEPZQSVFCB 1JF[BTDPNQMFNFOUBSJBT QFEJSQPSTFQBSBEP

/SPEFNBUFSJBM

.BO¥NFUSPIBTUBCBS

3

.BO¥NFUSPIBTUBCBS



.BO¥NFUSPIBTUBCBS



.BOHVJUPTEFQBTP 'PSNB



/SPEFNBUFSJBM

'PSNB



 .BMFUBEFNFEJDJ¥ODPNQMFUB  BDVNVMBEPSEFWFKJHB)"#



'PSNB



 .BMFUB JOEJWJEVBM

3

,03 'PSNB



 7”MWVMBEFMMFOBEPZQSVFCB



+"1 'PSNB



 .BO¥NFUSPIBTUBCBS



(64 'PSNB



 5VCPGMFYJCMFM N  DPONBOHVJUPEFQBTPGPSNB쮕



.BOHVFSBMN DPONBOHVJUPEFQBTPGPSNB쮕



.BMFUBEFNFEJDJ¥O

%JNFOTJPOFTW”MWVMBEFMMFOBEPZQSVFCB DVFSQPEFW”MWVMBDPOW”MWVMBBOUJSSFUPSOP  W”MWVMBEFESFOBKF DPOFYJ¥ONBO¥NFUSPZ DPOFYJ¥OEFNBOHVFSBQBSBHBT

D

1

2

W 24,32 x 1/14”

100

M14x1,5

150

1500 2000 2500

1000

50

200

3000

500

psi 3500 bar 0

1537231001

Rexroth l = 2,5 m

SAE 7/8”-14 UNF

 3FQVFTUP OSPEFNBUFSJBM  "EBQUBEPS WFSQ”HJOB

250

)ZESBVMJDT#PTDI3FYSPUI"(

34)"#



"DDFTPSJPT NFEJEBTFONN

"EBQUBEPSQBSBHBSSBGBEFOJUS¥HFOPIBDJBUVFSDBEFVOJ¥O

SW32



#SBTJM

Y

#VMHBSJB

Y

'SBODJB







W 24,32 x 1/14” SW36



Y

(SFDJB

Y

(SBO#FSUB£B

Y

*OEJB

Y

+BQ¥O

Y

$BOBE”

Y

$PSFBEFM/PSUF

Y

$PSFBEFM4VS

Y Y

3VNBOJB

Y

3VTJB &TQB£B



45

G 3 /4 - ISO 228

81

SW32

.BMBTJB

1533391015 W 24,32 x 1/14”

W 24,51 x 1/14”

81

1B T

SW32

SW32

1533391012 W 24,32 x 1/14”

G 5/ 8-ISO 228

1533391011

52

W 24,32 x 1/14”

SW32

W 23 x 1/14”

68

W 22 x 1/14”

W 21,8 x 1/14”

37

1533391013 W 24,32 x 1/14”

1533391014 W 24,32 x 1/14”

1533391010

Y Y

"SBCJB4BVEJUB

Y

4JOHBQVS

Y

5VSRV B

Y

&&66 0USPTQB TFTTFH¬ODPOTVMUB

Y



#PTDI3FYSPUI"( )ZESBVMJDT

)"#34

"DDFTPSJPT NFEJEBTFONN

"EBQUBEPSEFBDVNVMBEPSQBSBCMPRVFTEFDJFSSFEFBDV NVMBEPSUJQP"#;44 4FMFDDJPOBSFMUJQPDPSSFTQPOEJFOUFTFH¬ODBU”MPHP

D5±0,3 #PRVJMMBEFDPOFYJ¥OQBSBCMPRVFTEFDJFSSFEFBDVNVMB EPS5/%/UJQP7"8TFH¬ODBU”MPHP

%

."

-

-

FO/N

/SPEF NBUFSJBM CPRVJMMB

   48 % % %

/SPEFQFEJ EPDPNQMF UPDPOKVOUBT BOVMBSFT 3Z3

 

  







 3

.Y   (  

  







 3

 

  







 3

( (

R2 L2

." FO/N

%JNFOTJPOFTFONN

D1

D2 D4

)"#¾9B)"#¾9

 B

." FO/N

) -

  48 % %

/SPEF NBUFSJBM CPRVJMMB

/SPEFQFEJ EPDPNQMF UPDPOKVOUB BOVMBS3

  .Y      



  3

(   .Y      



  3

  .Y      



  3

(

B (

R2 L2

%

%JNFOTJPOFTFONN

SW

H



TFH¬O*40

R1

46±0,3 D3

#PRVJMMBEFUSBOTJDJ¥OEFSPTDBFOQVMHBEBTBNœUSJDB

7PMVNFO TFH¬O*40 OPNJOBM % ." MJUSPT FO/N

SW

18

%

TFH¬O*40

L

#MPRVFEF TFHVSJEBE

D2 D4

D1 D3

#PRVJMMBSFEVDUPSBQBSBDPOFYJ¥OEFUVCP

 B

B

%

." FO/N

TFH¬O*40 %

."

%JNFOTJPOFTFONN )

-

FO/N

  48 % %

/SPEF NBUFSJBM CPRVJMMB

/SPEFQFEJ EPDPNQMF UPDPOKVOUB BOVMBS3

(

  (

 



  



 3

(

 

(

 



  



 3

(   (

 



  



 3

(

 

(

 

   



 3

(

  (

 

   



 3

(

 

 

   



 

(

  (  

   



 3

(

D2 D4 R2 L2



TFH¬O*40

SW

H

7PMVNFO OPNJOBM MJUSPT

D1 D3

)ZESBVMJDT#PTDI3FYSPUI"(

34)"#



6TPDPOGPSNFBTVEFTUJOP -PTBDVNVMBEPSFTEFWFKJHB3FYSPUI)"#9FTU”OQSFWJT UPTQBSBNPOBKFFOTJTUFNBTEFBDDJPOBNJFOSPIJES”VMJDPT FOMBDPOTUSVDDJ¥OEFN”RVJOBTZFRVJQPTFTUBDJPOBSJPT &OBQMJDBDJPOFTN¥WJMFTPBQMJDBDJPOFTFOMBTDVBMFTEVSBOUF FMTFSWJDJPDPOGPSNFBTVEFTUJOPBDU¬FOTPCSFFMBDVNVMBEPS EFWFKJHBGVFS[BTEFBDFMFSBDJ¥O T¥MPFTU”BVUPSJ[BEPFMVTP QSFWJPDPOTFOUJNJFOUPQPSQBSUFEFM1SPEVDU.BOBHFSDPNQF UFOUFEF3FYSPUI4FSVFHBDPOTVUBSBMTFSWJDJPUœDOJDP

-PTBDVNVMBEPSFTEFWFKJHB3FYSPUI)"#9OPFTU”OEFT UJOBEPTQBSBFMVTPQSJWBEP /PEFCFOTFSFNQMFBEPTFOVOBNCJFOUFDPOQFMJHSPEFFY QMPTJPOFTTFH¬OMB%JSFDUJWB&( "5&9 

"EWFSUFODJBTEFTFHVSJEBEQBSBBDVNVMBEPSFTIJES”VMJDPT 1BSBMPTBDVNVMBEPSFTIJES”VMJDPTTFEFCFOPCTFSWBSMBT EJTQPTJDJPOFTWJHFOUFTFOFMMVHBSEFNPOUBKFBOUFTEFMB QVFTUBFONBSDIBZEVSBOUFFMTFSWJDJP &MPQFSBEPSFTSFTQPOTBCMFFYDMVTJWBNFOUFQPSFMDVNQMJ NJFOUPEFMBTEJTQPTJDJPOFTFYJTUFOUF &O&/TFFODVFOUSBOBEWFSUFODJBTHFOFSBMFTQBSBBDV NVMBEPSFTIJES”VMJDPTFOFRVJQPTIJES”VMJDPT -PTEPDVNFOUPTTVNJOJTUSBEPTKVOUPDPOFMBDVNVMBEPS TFEFCFOHVBSEBSDVJEBEPTBNFOUFFMQFSJUPMPTOFDFTJUBS” FOPDBTJ¥OEFMPTFY”NFOFTQFSJ¥EJDPT

"UFODJ¥O a&OFMSFDJQJFOUFEFMBDVNVMBEPSOPSFBMJ[BSUSBCBKPTEF TPMEBEVSBOJUSBCBKPTNFD”OJDPTÝ



¾a1FMJHSPEFFYQMPTJ¥OBMSFBMJ[BSUSBCBKPTEFTPM EBEVSBÝ ¾a1FMJHSPEFSFWFOUBNJFOUPZQœSEJEBEFMQFSNJTP EFFYQMPUBDJ¥OFODBTPEFNFDBOJ[BDJ¥OÝ /PDBSHBSMPTBDVNVMBEPSFTDPOPY HFOPP DPOBJSFa1FMJHSPEFFYQMPTJ¥OÝ

"OUFTEFSFBMJ[BSUSBCBKPTFOFRVJQPTIJES”VMJDPT EFTDPOFD UBSMBQSFTJ¥OEFMTJTUFNBZQSPUFHFSMPDPOUSBSFDPOFYJ¥OÝ a6ONPOUBKFJOBEFDVBEPQVFEFDBVTBSBDDJEFOUFTHSBWFTÝ -BQVFTUBFONBSDIBTPMBNFOUFEFCFTFSFGFDUVBEBQPSQFS TPOBMUœDOJDPDVBMJGJDBEP

%JTQPTJDJPOFTMFHBMFT -PTBDVNVMBEPSFTIJES”VMJDPTTPOSFDJQJFOUFTBQSFTJ¥OZ FTU”OTVKFUPTBMBTEJTQPTJDJPOFTZSFHMBNFOUPTOBDJPOBMFT WJHFOUFTFOFMTJUJPEFNPOUBKF &O"MFNBOJBWBMFFM3FHMBNFOUPEFTFHVSJEBEEFTFSWJDJP #FUS4JDI7 

a"EWFSUFODJBÝ 5PEBTMBTDMBTFTEFEFQ¥TJUPTTFEFCFOBTFHVSBSDPOVOB W”MWVMBMJNJUBEPSBEFQSFTJ¥OEFDPOGPSNJEBEDPOMB%JSFDUJWB $&

&OMBDPOTUSVDDJ¥OOBWBM BFSPO”VUJDB NJOFSB FUDTFEFCFO PCTFSWBSMBTEJTQPTJDJPOFTSFTQFDUJWBTWJHFOUFT

%JTQPTJUJWPTEFTFHVSJEBE x

&O"MFNBOJBTFSFRVJFSFFMTJHVJFOUFFRVJQBNJFOUPEFTFHVSJEBE  %JTQPTJUJWPDPOUSBTPCSFQSFTJ¥O DPOEJTF£PIPNPMPHBEP

 %JTQPTJUJWPEFEFTDBSHB  %JTQPTJUJWPEFNFEJDJ¥OEFQSFTJ¥O  $POFYJ¥OQBSBNBO¥NFUSPEFQSVFCB  %JTQPTJUJWPEFCMPRVFP 0QDJ¥O  %JTQPTJUJWPEFEFTDBSHBDPOBDDJPOBNJFOUPFMFDSPNBH OœUJDP  %JTQPTJUJWPEFTFHVSJEBEDPOUSBFYDFTPEFUFNQFSBUVSB

3

7

A

4

M2

M1

5

&TUPTEJTQPTJUJWPTEFTFHVSJEBEFTU”OSFVOJEPTFOCMPRVF DPNQBDUPEFTFHVSJEBEQBSBBDVNVMBEPSFT#PTDI3FYSPUI ¾5JQP"#;44TFH¬ODBU”MPHP ¾5JQP7"8TFH¬ODBU”MPHP

6

T

P

1

2



#PTDI3FYSPUI"( )ZESBVMJDT

)"#34

/PUBT

#PTDI3FYSPUI"( )ZESBVMJDT ;VN&JTFOHJF’FS -PISBN.BJO (FSNBOZ 5FMœGPOP    5FMFGBY    EPDVNFOUBUJPO!CPTDISFYSPUIEF XXXCPTDISFYSPUIEF

g5PEPTMPTEFSFDIPTEF#PTDI3FYSPUI"( UBNCJœOQBSBFMDBTPEF TPMJDJUVEFTEFEFSFDIPTQSPUFHJEPT/PTSFTFSWBNPTUPEBTMBTDBQBDJ EBEFTEJTQPTJUJWBTUBMFTDPNPEFSFDIPTEFDPQJBZEFUSBNJUBDJ¥O -PTEBUPTJOEJDBEPTTJSWFOT¥MPQBSBEFTDSJCJSFMQSPEVDUP%FOVFTUSBT FTQFDJGJDBDJPOFTOPQVFEFEFSJWBSTFOJOHVOBEFDMBSBDJ¥OTPCSFVOB DJFSUBDPNQPTJDJ¥OPJEPOFJEBEQBSBVODJFSUPGJOEFFNQMFP-BT FTQFDJGJDBDJPOFTOPMJCFSBOBMVTVBSJPEFMBTQSPQJBTFWBMVBDJPOFTZ WFSJGJDBDJPOFT)BZRVFUFOFSFODVFOUBRVFOVFTUSPTQSPEVDUPTFTU”O TPNFUJEPTBVOQSPDFTPOBUVSBMEFEFTHBTUFZFOWFKFDJNJFOUP

34)"#

)ZESBVMJDT#PTDI3FYSPUI"(



/PUBT

#PTDI3FYSPUI"( )ZESBVMJDT ;VN&JTFOHJF’FS -PISBN.BJO (FSNBOZ 5FMœGPOP    5FMFGBY    EPDVNFOUBUJPO!CPTDISFYSPUIEF XXXCPTDISFYSPUIEF

g5PEPTMPTEFSFDIPTEF#PTDI3FYSPUI"( UBNCJœOQBSBFMDBTPEF TPMJDJUVEFTEFEFSFDIPTQSPUFHJEPT/PTSFTFSWBNPTUPEBTMBTDBQBDJ EBEFTEJTQPTJUJWBTUBMFTDPNPEFSFDIPTEFDPQJBZEFUSBNJUBDJ¥O -PTEBUPTJOEJDBEPTTJSWFOT¥MPQBSBEFTDSJCJSFMQSPEVDUP%FOVFTUSBT FTQFDJGJDBDJPOFTOPQVFEFEFSJWBSTFOJOHVOBEFDMBSBDJ¥OTPCSFVOB DJFSUBDPNQPTJDJ¥OPJEPOFJEBEQBSBVODJFSUPGJOEFFNQMFP-BT FTQFDJGJDBDJPOFTOPMJCFSBOBMVTVBSJPEFMBTQSPQJBTFWBMVBDJPOFTZ WFSJGJDBDJPOFT)BZRVFUFOFSFODVFOUBRVFOVFTUSPTQSPEVDUPTFTU”O TPNFUJEPTBVOQSPDFTPOBUVSBMEFEFTHBTUFZFOWFKFDJNJFOUP



#PTDI3FYSPUI"( )ZESBVMJDT

)"#34

/PUBT

#PTDI3FYSPUI"( )ZESBVMJDT ;VN&JTFOHJF’FS -PISBN.BJO (FSNBOZ 5FMœGPOP    5FMFGBY    EPDVNFOUBUJPO!CPTDISFYSPUIEF XXXCPTDISFYSPUIEF

g5PEPTMPTEFSFDIPTEF#PTDI3FYSPUI"( UBNCJœOQBSBFMDBTPEF TPMJDJUVEFTEFEFSFDIPTQSPUFHJEPT/PTSFTFSWBNPTUPEBTMBTDBQBDJ EBEFTEJTQPTJUJWBTUBMFTDPNPEFSFDIPTEFDPQJBZEFUSBNJUBDJ¥O -PTEBUPTJOEJDBEPTTJSWFOT¥MPQBSBEFTDSJCJSFMQSPEVDUP%FOVFTUSBT FTQFDJGJDBDJPOFTOPQVFEFEFSJWBSTFOJOHVOBEFDMBSBDJ¥OTPCSFVOB DJFSUBDPNQPTJDJ¥OPJEPOFJEBEQBSBVODJFSUPGJOEFFNQMFP-BT FTQFDJGJDBDJPOFTOPMJCFSBOBMVTVBSJPEFMBTQSPQJBTFWBMVBDJPOFTZ WFSJGJDBDJPOFT)BZRVFUFOFSFODVFOUBRVFOVFTUSPTQSPEVDUPTFTU”O TPNFUJEPTBVOQSPDFTPOBUVSBMEFEFTHBTUFZFOWFKFDJNJFOUP

#MPRVF
EF
DJFSSF
EF
BDVNVMBEPS

 34
 3FFNQMB[B
B


5JQP
"#;44

%J¡NFUSP
OPNJOBM
%/


 4FSJF
EFM
BQBSBUP
9 1SFTJ³O
EF
TFSWJDJP
N¡YJNB

CBS
"#;44

*OEJDF $POUFOJEP
4­NCPMPT
GVODJPOBNJFOUP
%BUPT
QBSB
FM
QFEJEP
5JQPT
QSFGFSFOUFT


1¡HJOB   


$POFDUPSFT




%BUPT
U©DOJDPT




5PSRVF
EF
BQSJFUF
FO
GVODJ³O
EF
MB
W¡MWVMB MJNJUBEPSB
EF
QSFTJ³O
Z
FM
UBNB±P
OPNJOBM




%JNFOTJPOFT
W¡MWVMBT
MJNJUBEPSBT
EF
QSFTJ³O
EF
UJQP
QSPCBEP



߫


"DDFTPSJPT
"EBQUBEPS
EF
BDVNVMBEPS EBUPT
QBSB
FM
QFEJEP



߫


*OEJDBDJPOFT
EF
TFHVSJEBE



߫


*OGPSNBDJ³O
TPCSF
SFQVFTUPT
TVNJOJTUSBCMFT XXXCPTDISFYSPUIDPNTQD




#PTDI
3FYSPUI
"(
)ZESBVMJDT

"#;44



34


4­NCPMPT %/ 7FSTJ³O
.
EFTDBSHB
NBOVBM

S M

%FOPNJOBDJ³O
EF
DPOFYJPOFT .
$POFYJ³O
EF
NFEJDJ³O 1
$POFYJ³O
EF
CPNCBT 1
$POFYJ³O
EF
CPNCBT 4 $POFYJ³O
EF
BDVNVMBEPS 5
$POFYJ³O
EF
UBORVF

P2 P1 T

2

1

 

(SJGP
EF
DJFSSF
EFM
TJTUFNB
DPO
EFTDBSHB
NBOVBM 7¡MWVMB
MJNJUBEPSB
EF
QSFTJ³O

%/

Z
 7FSTJ³O
.
EFTDBSHB
NBOVBM

7FSTJ³O
&
EFTDBSHB
NBOVBM
Z
FMFDUSPNBHO©UJDB

M1 M2

S M1 M2

S

a

P P

1 3    

T

1 3

T

2

7¡MWVMB
EF
DJFSSF
EFM
TJTUFNB 7¡MWVMB
MJNJUBEPSB
EF
QSFTJ³O %FTDBSHB
NBOVBM %FTDBSHB
FMFDUSPNBHO©UJDB
PQDJPOBM

b

2

4

%FOPNJOBDJ³O
EF
DPOFYJPOFT .
.
$POFYJ³O
EF
NFEJDJ³O 1
$POFYJ³O
EF
CPNCBT 4
$POFYJ³O
EF
BDVNVMBEPS 5
$POFYJ³O
EF
UBORVF

'VODJPOBNJFOUP &M
CMPRVF
EF
DJFSSF
EF
BDVNVMBEPS
TJSWF
QBSB
MB
QSPUFDDJ³O
DJFSSF
Z
EFTDBSHB
EF
VO
BDVNVMBEPS
IJES¡VMJDP
$VNQMF
DPO
MPT
SFRVFSJNJFOUPT
Z
QSFTDSJQDJPOFT
EF
TFHVSJEBE
TFHºO
MBT
OPSNBT
%*/

QBSB
EFQ³TJUPT
B
QSFTJ³O
Z
MBT
3FHVMBDJPOFT
5©DOJDBT
QBSB
%FQ³TJUPT
B
1SFTJ³O
53#

ZP
53#
  -B
DPOFYJ³O
FOUSF
FM
CMPRVF
EF
DJFSSF
Z
FM
BDVNVMBEPS
TF
SFB MJ[B
QPS
NFEJP
EF
VO
BEBQUBEPS

$PO
BZVEB
EF
MB
W¡MWVMB
MJNJUBEPSB
EF
QSFTJ³O
TF
QSPUFHF
BM
BDVNVMBEPS
BOUF
VOB
TPCSFQSFTJ³O
JOBENJTJCMF
&TUB
W¡MWVMB
MJNJUBEPSB
EF
QSFTJ³O
OP
EFCF
BTVNJS
UBSFBT
EF
SFVMBDJ³O
4F
EFCF
QSFTUBS
BUFODJ³O
B
RVF
MB
QSFTJ³O
EF
TFSWJDJP
N¡YJ NB
UFOHB
VOB
EFTWJBDJ³O
TVGJDJFOUFNFOUF
HSBOEF
DPO
SFTQFD UP
B
MB
QSFTJ³O
EF
USBCBKP
4F
EFCFS­B
FWJUBS
FO
MP
QPTJCMF
MB
SFTQVFTUB
EF
MB
W¡MWVMB
MJNJUBEPSB
EF
QSFTJ³O

)ZESBVMJDT


#PTDI
3FYSPUI
"(

34




"#;44



%BUPT
QBSB
FM
QFEJEP "#;44 #MPRVF
EF DJFSSF
EF BDVNVMBEPS

"#;44

9

&






0USPT
EBUPT
FO
UFYUP
FYQMJDJUP QPS
FK
40
WFS
Q¡HJOB


5JQP
EF
DPOFYJ³O $POFYJ³O
EF
UVCFS­B

TJO
EFTJH .POUBKF
FO
QMBDBT

‫ݗ‬1


%J¡NFUSP
OPNJOBM %/
%/
%/
%/


3PTDB
EF
DPOFYJ³O TJO
EFTJH


3PTDB
#41
*40

QBSUF

3PTDB
4"&




"/4*
#



 
 
 


7

8




%FTDBSHB .BOVBM

. .BOVBM
Z
FMFDUSPNBHO©UJDB

&


TJO
EJTQPTJUJWP
EF
BDDJPOBNJFOUP
BVYJMJBS

4FSJF
EFM
BQBSBUP
4FSJF
EFM
BQBSBUP

IBTUB


IBTUB

NFEJEBT
EF
JOTUBMBDJ³O
Z
DPOFYJPOFT
JOWBSJBCMFT

"KVTUF
EF
QSFTJ³O
PUSPT
B
QFEJEP


CBS


CBS


CBS


CBS


CBS



.BUFSJBM
EF
KVOUB
FMBTU³NFSP

+VOUBT
',.
+VOUBT
/#3
QBSB
BHVBHMJDPM
)'$
$POFYJ³O
FM©DUSJDB


4JO
DPOFDUPS
$PO
DBQVDI³O
QSPUFDUPS


,




5JQP
EF
UFOTJ³O


5FOTJ³O
DPOUJOVB

7 5FOTJ³O
BMUFSOB

7 5FOTJ³O
BMUFSOB

7



9 (


(


(



 
 
 
 



7¡MWVMB
MJNJUBEPSB
EF
QSFTJ³O
EF
UJQP
QSPCBEP
DPO
JEFOUJGJDBDJ³O
$&



&

%/ 4
 4

4

4

4


%/ %/ 4
 4
 4
 4
 4
 4
 4
 4
 4
 4
 %/ %/ 4
 4
 4
 4
 4
 4
 4
 4
 TJO
EFTJH


"EBQUBEPS
BDVNVMBEPS %/ DPO
SPTDB
#41 ( ( ( (
 4
 ( 4
 %/ DPO
SPTDB
4"& 


6/' 



6/ 4
 



6/ 4
 



6/ TJO
BEBQUBEPS
EF
BDVNVMBEPS


4³MP
EJTQPOJCMF
FO
%/ 
/P
EJTQPOJCMF
QBSB
%/

&M
UJQP
40
TF
TVNJOJTUSB
DPO
OJWFM
EF
QSFTJ³O



4³MP
QBSB
WFSTJ³O
ߡ&ߢ
DPO
EFTDBSHB
FMFDUSPNBHO©UJDB 
&M
DPOFDUPS
EF
TPMJDJUBSTF
QPS
TFQBSBEP
WFS
Q¡HJOB



7FSTJ³O
FTQFDJBM 
1BSB
MB
DPOFYJ³O
FO
MB
SFE
EF
UFOTJ³O
BMUFSOB
TF
EFCF


FNQMFBS
VO
TPMFOPJEF
EF
DPOUJOVB
DPNBOEBEP
B
USBW©T
EF
VO
SFDUJGJDBEPS
WFS
UBCMB
B
MB
EFSFDIB  1BSB
DPOFYJ³O
JOEJWJEVBM
TF
QVFEF
FNQMFBS
VO
DPOFDUPS
HSBOEF
DPO
SFDUJGJDBEPS
JODPSQPSBEP
QFEJEP
QPS
TFQBSBEP
WFS
Q¡HJOB
 

3FE
EF
UFOTJ³O BMUFSOB UPMFSBODJB
EF
UFOTJ³O
BENJTJ CMF
q


5FOTJ³O
OPNJOBM
EFM
TPMFOPJEF
EF
DPOUJOVB
QBSB
TFS WJDJP
DPO
UFOTJ³O
BMUFSOB

%BUPT
QBSB FM
QFEJEP


CBS

4FHºO
OPSNB
&(
OPSNB
EF
EJTQPTJUJWPT
B
QSFTJ³O


7


)[ 
7


)[


7

(


7


)[


7

(




#PTDI
3FYSPUI
"(
)ZESBVMJDT

"#;44



34


5JQPT
QSFGFSFOUFT 5JQP
EF
BDVNVMB EPS

5/
EF
1SFTJ³O
BKVTUBEB
EF
MB
W¡MWV BDVNVMBEPS
MB
MJNJUBEPSB
EF
QSFTJ³O
FO
FO
M
CBS
 






 





"DVNVMBEPS
B
NFNCSBOB

 


 


 


 

 





 



 


"DVNVMBEPS
B
WFKJHB

 


 





%/
EF
CMPRVF
EF
DJFSSF
EF
BDVNVMBEPS

%FOPNJOBDJ³O

/SP
EF
NBUFSJBM



"#;44

.9&47

3



"#;44

.9&47

3



"#;44

.9&47

3



"#;44

.9&47

3



"#;44

.9&47

3



"#;44

.9&47

3



"#;44

.9&47

3



"#;44

.9&47

3



"#;44

.9&47

3



"#;44

.9&47

3



"#;44

.9&47

3



"#;44

.9&47

3



"#;44

.9&47

3



"#;44

.9&47

3



"#;44

.9&47

3



"#;44

.9&47

3



"#;44

.9&47

3



"#;44

.9&47

3



"#;44

.9&47

3



"#;44

.9&47

3



"#;44

.9&47

3



"#;44

.9&47

3



"#;44

.9&47

3



"#;44

.9&47

3



"#;44

.9&47

3



"#;44

.9&47

3



"#;44

.9&47

3



"#;44

.9&47

3



"#;44

.9&47

3



"#;44

.9&47

3



"#;44

.9&47

3







-PT
UJQPT
QSFGFSFOUFT
Z
EJTQPTJUJWPT
FTU¡OEBS TF
JOEJDBO
FO
MB
&14
MJTUB
EF
QSFDJPT
FTU¡OEBS 

"#;44

.9&4
7

3

"#;441

.9&47

3

"#;44

.9&4
7

3

"#;441

.9&47

3

0USPT
UJQPT
QSFGFSFOUFT
WFS
Q¡HJOB


)ZESBVMJDT


#PTDI
3FYSPUI
"(

34




"#;44



5JQPT
QSFGFSFOUFT
DPOUJOVBDJ³O

5JQP
EF
BDVNVMB EPS

5/
EF
BDVNVMBEPS
FO
M
 
 
 
 
 
 
 


1SFTJ³O
BKVTUBEB
EF
MB
%/
EF
CMP W¡MWVMB
MJNJUBEPSB
EF
RVF
EF
TF QSFTJ³O HVSJEBE
EF
FO
CBS
BDVNVMBEPS

 







"#;44

&9&4(
,7

3



"#;44

&9&4(
,7

3






"#;44

&9&4(
,7

3






"#;44

&9&4(
,7

3






"#;44

&9&4(
,7

3






"#;44

&9&4(
,7

3






"#;44

&9&4(
,7

3






"#;44

&9&4(
,7

3






"#;44

&9&4(
,7

3



"#;44

&9&4(
,7

3







 





/SP
EF
NBUFSJBM




 
 


%FOPNJOBDJ³O



"#;44

&9&4(
,7

3



"#;44

&9&4(
,7

3



"#;44

&9&4(
,7

3



"#;44

&9&4(
,7

3



"#;44

&9&4(
,7

3



"#;44

&9&4(
,7

3







-PT
UJQPT
QSFGFSFOUFT
Z
EJTQPTJUJWPT
FTU¡OEBS TF
JOEJDBO
FO
MB
&14
MJTUB
EF
QSFDJPT
FTU¡OEBS 

"#;44

&9&4
(
,7

3

"#;441

&9&4
(
,7

3

"#;44

&9&4
(
,7

3

"#;441

&9&4
(
,7

3




#PTDI
3FYSPUI
"(
)ZESBVMJDT

"#;44



34


$POFDUPSFT
TFHºO
%*/
&/
 %FUBMMFT Z
PUSPT
DPOFDUPSFT
WFS


-BEP
W¡MWVMB

/SP
EF
NBUFSJBM

$PMPS

TJO
DPOFYJPOBEP

DPO
JOEJDBEPS
MVNJOPTP 
IBTUB

7

DPO
SFDUJGJDBEPS 
IBTUB

7

DPO
JOEJDBEPS
MVNJOPTP
Z
EJPEPT
[FOFS
EF
QSPUFDDJ³O 
7 ߘ

B

HSJT

3

ߘ

ߘ

C

OFHSP

3

ߘ

ߘ

ߘ

BC

OFHSP

ߘ

3

3

3

%BUPT
U©DOJDPT
FO
DBTP
EF
VUJMJ[BS
FM
FRVJQP
GVFSB
EF
MPT
WBMPSFT
JOEJDBEPT
DPOTºMUFOPT

+VOUBT
',.
ZP
KVOUBT
/#3


.BUFSJBM
EF
KVOUBT 3BOHP
EF
UFNQFSBUVSB
EF
TFSWJDJP

p$


Y 48




4

)

 
 


%

˜%

"OJMMP
U³SJDP

6/'"




 
Y
 


 
 

6/" 


 
Y
 


 
 

6/" 


 
Y
 


 
 

6/"




 
Y
 


 
 

6/"




 
Y
 


 
 

6/"




 
Y
 


 
 

6/"




 
Y
 


4 

)

48

.BUFSJBM
FTU¡OEBS



"

Y

Y

Y

Y

௼

DPOFYJ³O
FTU¡OEBS



Y

DPOFYJ³O
BMUFSOBUJWB


‫ݩ‬ 
‫ݩ‬

*OEJDBEPS
EF
NBOUFOJNJFOUP 4JO

 .FD¡OJDP³QUJDP
QPMJBNJEB
QSFTJ³O
EF
DPONVUBDJ³O
 
CBS


1  .FD¡OJDP³QUJDP
BMVNJOJP
QSFTJ³O
EF
DPONVUBDJ³O
 
CBS


7  .FD¡OJDP³QUJDP
BMVNJOJP
QSFTJ³O
EF
DPONVUBDJ³O
 
CBS


7  .FD¡OJDP³QUJDP
BMVNJOJP
QSFTJ³O
EF
DPONVUBDJ³O
 
CBS


7  .BO³NFUSP
߫
CBS

EFSFDIB

.3 .FD¡OJDP³QUJDP

NBO³NFUSP
EFSFDIB

.37 

&OUSBEB
QSJODJQBM 5BNB±P
DPOTUSVDUJWP   ௼ Y ௼ Y

+VOUBT KVOUB
/#3 KVOUB
',.


.

7



&KFNQMP
5&/)9-"1 .3


5&/)9-".3.3

0USBT
WFSTJPOFT
QPS
FK
NBUFSJBMFT
EFM
GJMUSP
DPOFYJPOFT
FTU¡O
EJTQPOJCMFT
B
QFEJEP

34




5&/


5&



)ZESBVMJDT



#PTDI
3FYSPUI
"(

%BUPT
QBSB
FM
QFEJEP EFM
GJMUSP
EFM
UBNB±P
OPNJOBM

IBTUB


 5&/

"




1SFTJ³O

CBS




%BUPT
DPNQMFNFOUBSJPT
TJ
FT
OFDFTBSJP

/#

TJO
CZQBTT .

DPOFYJ³O
.JOJNFY
OP
QPTJCMF
DPO
NBO³NFUSP

4

DPOFYJ³O
EF
DBSHB T³MP
QPTJCMF
DPO
JOEJDBEPS
EF
NBOUFOJNJFOUP
NFD¡OJDP³QUJDP


5JQP
DPOTUSVDUJWP 'JMUSP
EF
SFUPSOP
TJNQMF
DPO
FMFNFOUP
GJMUSBOUF
TFHºO
%*/


5&/ 
 
 
 



(‫ݩ‬ 
1‫ݩ‬

4
 4



)‫ݩ‬9-

%JGFSFODJB
EF
QSFTJ³O %JGFSFODJB
EF
QSFTJ³O
N¡Y
BENJTJCMF
EFM
FMFNFOUP
GJMUSBOUF 
CBS

JODMVTJWF
W¡MWVMB
CZQBTT
QSFTJ³O
EF
BQFSUVSB
 
CBS


" 7FSTJ³O
EF
FMFNFOUP 1FHBNFOUP
FTU¡OEBS
5


p$




41 
41


.Y

&/



$POFDUPS FODIVGF
SFEPOEP
.Y

QPMPT FODIVGF
SFDUBOHVMBS

QPMPT
GPSNB
"
TFHºO
&/





4146

/ºNFSP
EF
NBUFSJBM
EFM
JOEJDBEPS
EF
NBOUFOJNJFOUP
NFD¡OJDP³QUJDP /SP
EF
NBUFSJBM

5JQP

3

8&41.Y

3

8&41.Y

3

8&4146.Y

3

8&41&/

4F±BM


1VOUPT
EF
DPONVUBDJ³O

$PONVUBEPS



/PSNBM
BCJFSUP
QBSB


OPSNBM
DFSSBEP
QBSB




/PSNBM
DFSSBEP



$POFDUPS

-&% /P

.Y


VOJEBEFT

&/


/P

&KFNQMP
EF
QFEJEP
'JMUSP
EF
SFUPSOP
QBSB
NPOUBKF
TPCSF
UBORVF
DPO
JOEJDBEPS
EF
NBOUFOJNJFOUP
NFD¡OJDP³QUJDP
QBSB
QOPN


CBS

UBNB±P
OPNJOBM

DPO
FMFNFOUP
GJMUSBOUF
EF

˧N
Z
FMFNFOUP
EF
DPONVUBDJ³O
FMFDUS³OJDP
.Y
DPO

QVOUP
EF
DPONV UBDJ³O
QBSB
GMVJEP
IJES¡VMJDP
BDFJUF
NJOFSBM
)-1
TFHºO
%*/
 'JMUSP


*OEJDBEPS
EF
NBOUFOJNJFOUP


5&/)9-"1 .3

8&41.Y



&ODIVGFT
SFEPOEPT
WFS
DBU¡MPHP


/SP
EF
NBUFSJBM
3
/SP
EF
NBUFSJBM
3










#PTDI
3FYSPUI
"(



)ZESBVMJDT

5&/


5&



34


4­NCPMPT 1BSUF
EF
DPONVUBDJ³O

$POFDUPS 3(–) 2 4

1(+) 8&41.Y 1BSUF
EF
DPONVUBDJ³O

$POFDUPS

2 100% 1(+)

A

8&41&/ 1BSUF
EF
DPONVUBDJ³O

$POFDUPS

&TRVFNB
EJCVKBEP
FO
FTUBEP
DPOFDUBEP
1VOUP
EF FTUBEP
EF
DPONVUB TFSWJDJP 100% DJ³O



B

-&%
SPKP

&MFNFOUP
FMFDUS³OJDP
EF
DPONVUBDJ³O


2 4

75%

1VOUP
EF DPONVUBDJ³O

-&%
BNBSJMMP 1(+)

QBSB
JOEJDBEPS
EF
NBOUFOJNJFOUP

A

-JTUP
QBSB
FM
TFSWJDJP -&%
WFSEF

3(–)

8&41.Y

B

1BSUF
EF
DPONVUBDJ³O &TRVFNB
EJCVKBEP
FO
FTUBEP
DPOFDUBEP
B
UFNQ


p$
K2 FTUBEP
EF
100% TFSWJDJP


p$


p$ 
p'


p' K1 4*





/0 75% S1 S2-100% 75% K1 K2 8&4146.Y

$POFDUPS 1VOUP
EF DPONVUBDJ³O

-&%
SPKP

2 4

1VOUP
EF
DPO NVUBDJ³O

-&%
BNBSJMMP 1(+) -JTUP
QBSB
FM
TFSWJDJP 3(–) -&%
WFSEF

34




5&/


5&

)ZESBVMJDT



#PTDI
3FYSPUI
"(



'VODJPOBNJFOUP
DPSUF -PT
GJMUSPT
EF
SFUPSOP
FTU¡O
QSFWJTUPT
QBSB
FM
NPOUBKF
EJSFDUP
TPCSF
FM
EFQ³TJUP
EF
GMVJEP
IJES¡VMJDP

7

$POTUBO
C¡TJDBNFOUF
EF
DBCF[B
EF
GJMUSP



WBTP
EF
GJM USP



UBQB



FMFNFOUP
GJMUSBOUF

BT­
DPNP
W¡MWVMB
CZQBTT
FTU¡OEBS
 

6

-PT
GJMUSPT
QVFEFO
DPOGJHVSBSTF
DPO
EJGFSFOUFT
JOEJDBEPSFT
EF
NBOUFOJNJFOUP
ߘ

BRV­
TF
NVFTUSB
DPO
VOP
NFD¡OJDP
³QUJ DP

FO
DPNCJOBDJ³O
DPO
VO
FMFNFOUP
EF
DPONVUBDJ³O
FMFD US³OJDP
 


3

4FHºO
FM
UBNB±P
OPNJOBM
EFM
GJMUSP
TF
EJTQPOF
EF
PUSBT
GVODJPOFT
BEJDJPOBMFT
ߘ
QPS
FK
VO
GJMUSP
EF
WFOUJMBDJ³O



VOB
QSPUFDDJ³O
DPOUSB
EFSSBNF

P
UVCPT
EF
SFUPSOP
FO
EJTUJOUBT
MPOHJUVEFT

ߘ
WFS
BM
SFTQFDUP
UBNCJ©O
FM
DBQ­UVMP
3FQVFT UPT
Z
BDDFTPSJPT %VSBOUF
FM
TFSWJDJP
FM
GMVJEP
IJES¡VMJDP
MMFHB
B
USBW©T
EF
MB
DPOFYJ³O
M
B
MB
DBSDBTB
EFM
GJMUSP
BUSBWJFTB
BMM­
FM
FMFNFOUP
GJM USBOUF

FO
TFOUJEP
EF
BGVFSB
IBDJB
BEFOUSP
Z
TF
QVSJGJDB
TF HºO
MB
GJOVSB
EFM
GJMUSP
-BT
QBSU­DVMBT
EF
JNQVSF[BT
SFUFOJEBT
TF
EFQPTJUBO
FO
FM
FMFNFOUP
GJMUSBOUF
&M
GMVJEP
IJES¡VMJDP
GJMUSB EP
MMFHB
BM
UBORVF
B
USBW©T
EF
MB
BCFSUVSB
EF
TBMJEB


I 1 8 5

9

4 2

10

O 3FQSFTFOUBDJ³O
FKFNQMBS
CBTBEB
FO
VO
GJMUSP
5&/




#PTDI
3FYSPUI
"(



)ZESBVMJDT

5&/


5&



34


%BUPT
U©DOJDPT
aDPOTºMUFOPT
FO
DBTP
EF
VUJMJ[BS
FM
FRVJQP
GVFSB
EF
MPT
WBMPSFT
JOEJDBEPT

(FOFSBMFT 1PTJDJ³O
EF
NPOUBKF

7FSUJDBM

3BOHP
EF
UFNQFSBUVSB
BNCJFOUF

p$
ߘ߫ 
< ɤ >

$POEVDUJWJEBE
N­OJNB
EFM
NFEJP

Q4N


3FTJTUFODJB
B
MB
GBUJHB
TFHºO
*40


$JDMPT
EF
DBSHB


QBSB
QSFTJ³O
EF
TFSWJDJP
N¡YJNB

1SFTJ³O
EF
BQFSUVSB
EF
MB
W¡MWVMB
CZQBTT

CBS
 
q
 


5JQP
EF
NFEJDJ³O
EF
QSFTJ³O
EFM
JOEJDBEPS
EF
NBOUFOJNJFOUP

1SFTJ³O
EJO¡NJDB

1SFTJ³O
EF
SFBDDJ³O
EFM
JOEJDBEPS
EF
NBOUFOJNJFOUP
1 

CBS
 
 ߘ 


1SFTJ³O
EF
SFBDDJ³O
EFM
JOEJDBEPS
EF
NBOUFOJNJFOUP
7

CBS
 
q
 

 
q
 

 
q
 


&M©DUSJDPT

FMFNFOUP
FMFDUS³OJDP
EF
DPONVUBDJ³O
&ODIVGF
SFEPOEP
.Y

QPMPT

$POFYJ³O
FM©DUSJDB

7FSTJ³O 41.Y 41.Y $BSHB
EF
DPOUBDUP
UFOTJ³O
DPOUJOVB

"N¡Y 

3BOHP
EF
UFOTJ³O


7N¡Y 
$"$$

1PUFODJB
N¡Y
EF
DPONVUBDJ³O
QBSB
DBSHB
³INJDB
5JQP
EF
DPONVUBDJ³O

8

41.Y


$$

$POFYJ³O
OPSNBMJ[BEB
&/
 41&/ 
$"


$$






EF
TF±BM

ߘ

/PSNBM
BCJFSUP

ߘ


EF
TF±BM

$PONVUBEPS

/PSNBM
DFSSBEP

/PSNBM
DFSSBEP

4146

$POFYJ³O
EF
TF±BM
B
p$


*OEJDBDJ³O
NFEJBOUF
-&%
FO
FM
FMFNFOUP
FMFDUS³OJDP
EF
DPONVUBDJ³O
41

-JTUP
QBSB
FM
TFSWJDJP
-&%
WFS EF 

EFM
QVOUP
EF
DPONV UBDJ³O
-&%
BNBSJMMP 

EFM
QVOUP
EF
DPONVUBDJ³O
-&%
SPKP

5JQP
EF
QSPUFDDJ³O
TFHºO
&/
 3BOHP
EF
UFNQFSBUVSB
BNCJFOUF


*1
 p$
40 bar

TK Process

[mbar/10 K]

Weight diaphragm seal

[kg]

m

f

h

APV-ISS nozzles with coupling nut

SW/AF

dM

G D P01-PMP75xxx-06-09-xx-xx-011

Process connection PMP75, material AISI 316L, surface roughness of the surfaces in contact with the medium Ra  0.8 m as standard. Lower surface roughness on request.

Version Nomi- Nominal dia- nal meter pressure

Diameter

Adapter height

Thread

Height Across flat

TK Height max. diaphragm Ambient seal 40 bar

D

f

G

m

h

dM

[mm]

[mm]

AF

TK Process

[mbar/10 K]

Weight Diaphragm seal

[inch]

[bar]

[mm]

[mm]

TP

1

PN 40

54.1

4

1 1/2" – 1/8"

30

46.8

50

24

+15.66

+24.42

+4.21

0.4

TQ

1 1/2

PN 40

72

4

2" – 1/8"

30

62

50

34

+8.14

+12.39

+2.59

0.6

TS

2

PN 40

89

4

2 1/2" – 1/8"

30

77

50

45

+5.4

+8.18

+1.76

1.1

52

[mm]

TK Ambient > 40 bar

[kg]

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S

f m k

40

Taper adapter with coupling nut, DIN 11851

dM D G P01-FMD78xxx-06-09-xx-xx-007

Process connection PMP75, material AISI 316L, surface roughness of the surfaces in contact with the medium Ra  0.8 m as standard. Lower surface roughness on request.

Taper adapter Version

Nominal diameter

Nominal pressure

Slotted nut

Diaphragm seal

Diameter

Adapter height

Thread

Height

Height

max. Dia- TK phragm Ambient diameter 40 bar

D

f

G

k

m

dM

[mm]

[mm]

[mm]

[mm]

[mm]

TK Ambient > 40 bar

TK Process

[mbar/10 K]

Diaphragm seal weight

[kg]

MR

DN 50

PN 25

68.5

11

Rd 78 x 1/6"

22

19

52

+2.21

+3.02

+1.40

1.1

MS

DN 65

PN 25

86

12

Rd 95 x 1/6"

35

21

66

+1.6

+2.1

+0.60

2.0

MT

DN 80

PN 25

100

12

Rd 110 x 1/4" 30

26

81

+0.66

+0.81

+0.40

2.55

h

Threaded adapter, DIN 11851

dM d1 G P01-FMD78xxx-06-09-xx-xx-008

Process connection PMP75, material AISI 316L, surface roughness of the surfaces in contact with the medium Ra  0.8 m as standard. Lower surface roughness on request.

Threaded adapter Version

Nominal diameter

Nominal pressure

Diaphragm seal Diameter

Thread

Height

max. Diaphragm diameter

d1

G

h

dM

[mm]

[mm]

[mm]

TK Ambient 40 bar

TK Ambient > 40 bar

TK Process

[mbar/10 K]

Diaphragm seal weight

[kg]

M3

DN 50

PN 25

54

Rd 78 x 1/6"

35

52

+2.21

+3.02

+0.88

0.9

M4

DN 65

PN 25

71

Rd 95 x 1/6"

40

66

+1.6

+2.1

+0.60

1.7

M5

DN 80

PN 25

85

Rd 110 x 1/4" 40

81

+0.66

+0.81

+0.40

2.0

Endress+Hauser

53

Cerabar S

EN/DIN flanges, connection dimensions as per EN 1092-1/DIN 2527 and DIN 2501-1

b

40

g2

L

f

dM (m)

60 g k D

dM g

P01-PMP75xxx-06-09-xx-xx-002

Process connection PMP75, EN/DIN flange with flush-mounted process isolating diaphragm, material AISI 316L

Flange 1 Ver- Nosion minal diameter

Boltholes Nominal pressure

Shape DiaThick2 meter ness

Raised face

D

b

g

f

[mm]

[mm]

[mm] [mm] [mm]

Diaphragm seal

Quan- DiaHole max. Diatity meter circle phragm diameter

(m)

g2

k

dM

[mm]

[mm]

[mm]

TK Ambient 40 bar

TK Pro> 40 bar cess

[mbar/10 K]

Diaphragm seal weight

[kg]

CN

DN 25

PN 10-40

B1 (D) 115

18

66

3

33

4

14

85

32

+16.03

+24.33

+3.20

2.1

DN

DN 25

PN 63-160

E

140

24

68

2

-

4

18

100

28

+16.03

+24.33

+3.20

2.5

EN

DN 25

PN 250

E

150

28

68

2

-

4

22

105

28

+16.03

+24.33

+5.17

3.7

E1

DN 25

PN 400

E

180

38

68

2

-

4

26

130

28

+16.03

+24.33

+5.17

7.0

CP

DN 32

PN 10-40

B1 (D) 140

18

77

2.6

8.5  4

18

100

34

+8.14

+12.39

+2.59

1.9

CQ

DN 40

PN 10-40

B1 (D) 150

18

87

2.6

-

4

18

110

48

+5.40

+8.18

+2.15

2.2

B3

DN 50

PN 10-40

B1 (D) 165

26

102

3

-

4

18

125

59

+2.21

+3.02

+1.50

3.0

C3

DN 50

PN 63

B2 (E) 180

26

102

3

-

4

22

135

59

+2.21

+3.02

+1.00

4.6

EF

DN 50

PN 100/160 E

195

30

102

3

-

4

26

145

59

+2.21

+3.02

+1.00

6.2

ER

DN 50

PN 250

E

200

38

102

3

-

8

26

150

59

+2.21

+3.02

+1.15

7.7

E3

DN 50

PN 400

E

235

52

102

3

-

8

30

180

59

+2.21

+3.02

+1.15

14.7

B4

DN 80

PN 10-40

B1 (D) 200

24

138

3.5

-

8

18

160

89

+0.19

+0.25

+0.20

5.3

C4

DN 80

PN 100

B2 (E) 230

32

138

4

-

8

24

180

89

+0.19

+0.25

+0.35

8.9

C5

DN 100 PN 100

B2 (E) 265

36

175

5

-

8

30

210

89

+0.19

+0.25

+0.11

13.7

D3 4

DN 50

PN 10-40

B1 (D) 165

20

102

3

-

4

18

125

47

+3.45

+4.81

+1.67



D4 

DN 80

PN 10-40

B1 (D) 200

24

138

3.5

-

8

18

160

72

+0.19

+0.25

+0.70



1)

The roughness of the surface in contact with the medium, including the raised face of the flanges (all standards), made of Hastelloy C, Monel or Tantalum is Ra 0.8 m. Lower surface roughness on request.

2)

Designation as per DIN 2527 in brackets

3)

With these process connections the width of the raised face is smaller than described in the standard. Due to a smaller width of the raised face a special seal must be used. Refer to a manufacturer of seals or your local Endress+Hauser Sales Center.

4)

50 mm, 100 mm or 200 mm extension selectable, for extension diameter and weight see the following table.

54

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S

Version

Nominal diameter

Nominal pressure

Extension length

Extension diameter d3

Diaphragm seal weight

[mm]

[mm]

[kg]

D3

DN 50

PN 10-40

50 / 100 / 200

48.3

3.2 / 3.8 / 4.4

D4

DN 80

PN 10-40

50 /100 / 200

76

6.2 / 6.7 / 7.8

ANSI flanges, connection dimensions as per ANSI B 16.5, raised face RF

400 – 2500 lb/sq.in 0.25 in (6.4 mm)

dM

L

150, 300 lb/sq.in 0.06 in (1.6 mm)

b

40

g2

(m)

60 g k D

dM g

P01-PMP75xxx-06-09-xx-xx-001

Process connection PMP75, ANSI flange with and without extended diaphragm seal

Flange 1 Version

Material

Boltholes 2

Class Nominal diameter

Diameter

Thickness

Raised face

D

b

g

Quan Dia-tity meter

(m)

[in]

[lb./ sq.in]

[in] [mm]

[in] [mm]

[in] [in] [mm] [mm]

Diaphragm seal TK Ambient

TK Pro40 bar > 40 bar cess

Diaphragm seal weight

[in] [mm]

[mbar/10 K]

[kg]

Hole circle

max. Diaphragm diameter

g2

k

dM

[in] [mm]

[in] [mm]

AC

AISI 316/ 316L

1

150

4.25 108

0.56 14.2

2 50.8

-

4

0.62 15.7

3.12 79.2

1.26 32

+16.03

+24.33

+3.65

1.2

AN

AISI 316/ 316L

1

300

4.88 124

0.69 17.5

2.76 70

2 53

4

0.75 19.1

3.5 88.9

1.26 32

+16.03

+24.33

+3.65

1.3

HC

AISI 316/ 316L

1

400/ 600

4.88 124

0.69 17.5

2 50.8

-

4

0.75 19.1

3.5 88.9

1.26 32

+16.03

+24.33

+5.17

1.4

HN

AISI 316/ 316L

1

900/ 1500

5.88 149.4

1.12 28.4

2 50.8

-

4

1 25.4

4 101.6

1.26 32

+16.03

+24.33

+5.17

3.2

HO

AISI 316/ 316L

1

2500

6.25 158.8

1.38 35.1

2 50.8

-

4

1 25.4

4.25 108

1.26 32

+16.03

+24.33

+5.17

4.6

AE

AISI 316/ 316L

1 1/2

150

5 127

0.69 17.5

2.88 73.2

0.52 6.6 

4

0.62 15.7

3.88 96.6

1.89 48

+8.14

+12.39

+1.90

1.5

AQ

AISI 316/ 316L

1 1/2

300

6.12 155.4

0.81 20.6

2.88 73.2

0.52 6.6 

4

0.88 22.4

4.5 114.3

1.89 48

+8.14

+12.39

+2.59

2.6

AF

AISI 316/ 316L

2

150

6 152.4

0.75 19.1

3.62 91.9

-

4

0.75 19.1

4.75 120.7

2.32 59

+2.21

+3.02

+1.60

2.2

J3 4

AISI 316/ 316L

2

150

6 152.4

0.75 19.1

3.62 91.9

-

4

0.75 19.1

4.75 120.7

1.85 47

+3.45

+4.81

+1.67



AR

AISI 316/ 316L

2

300

6.5 165.1

0.88 22.4

3.62 91.9

-

8

0.75 19.1

5 127

2.32 59

+2.21

+3.02

+0.85

3.4

HF

AISI 316/ 316L

2

400/ 600

6.5 165.1

1 25.4

3.62 91.9

-

8

0.75 19.1

5 127

2.32 59

+2.21

+3.02

+0.85

4.3

Endress+Hauser

55

Cerabar S

Flange 1 Version

Boltholes

Class Material 2 Nominal diameter

Diameter

Thickness

Raised face

D

b

g

Quan Dia-tity meter

(m)

[in]

[lb./ sq.in]

[in] [mm]

[in] [mm]

[in] [in] [mm] [mm]

Diaphragm seal TK Ambient

TK Pro40 bar > 40 bar cess

Diaphragm seal weight

[in] [mm]

[mbar/10 K]

[kg]

Hole circle

max. Diaphragm diameter

g2

k

dM

[in] [mm]

[in] [mm]

HR

AISI 316/ 316L

2

900/ 1500

8.5 215.9

1.5 38.1

3.62 91.9

-

8

1 25.4

6.5 165.1

2.32 59

+2.21

+3.02

+0.75

10.3

H3

AISI 316/ 316L

2

2500

9.25 235

2 50.8

3.62 91.9

-

8

1.12 28.4

6.75 171.5

2.32 59

+2.21

+3.02

+0.75

15.8

AG

AISI 316/ 316L

3

150

7.5 190.5

0.94 23.9

5 127

-

4

0.75 19.1

6 152.4

3.50 89

+0.19

+0.25

+0.18

5.1

AS

AISI 316/ 316L

3

300

8.25 209.5

1.12 28.4

5 127

-

8

0.75 19.1

6 152.4

3.5 89

+0.19

+0.25

+0.11

7.0

J4 

AISI 316/ 316L

3

150

7.5 190.5

0.94 23.9

5 127

-

4

0.75 19.1

6 152.4

2.83 72

+0.19

+0.25

+0.70



J7 

AISI 316/ 316L

3

300

8.25 209.5

1.12 28.4

5 127

-

8

0.88 22.4

6.62 168.1

2.83 72

+0.19

+0.25

+0.70



AH

AISI 316/ 316L

4

150

9 228.6

0.94 23.9

6.19 157.2

8

0.75 19.1

7.5 190.5

3.50 89

+0.19

+0.25

+0.33

7.2

AT

AISI 316/ 316L

4

300

10 254

1.25 31.8

6.19 157.2

8

0.88 22.4

7.88 200.2

3.50 89

+0.19

+0.25

+0.11

11.7

J5 

AISI 316/ 316L

4

150

9 228.6

0.94 23.9

6.19 157.2

8

0.75 19.1

7.5 190.5

3.50 89

+0.19

+0.25

+0.11



J8 

AISI 316/ 316L

4

300

10 254

1.25 31.8

6.19 157.2

8

0.88 22.4

7.88 200.2

3.50 89

+0.19

+0.25

+0.11



1)

The roughness of the surface in contact with the medium, including the raised face of the flanges (all standards), made of Hastelloy C, Monel or Tantalum is Ra 0.8 m. Lower surface roughness on request.

2)

Combination of AISI 316 for required pressure resistance and AISI 316L for required chemical resistance (dual rated)

3)

With these process connections the width of the raised face is smaller than described in the standard. Due to a smaller width of the raised face a special seal must be used. Refer to a manufacturer of seals or your local Endress+Hauser Sales Center.

4)

2", 4", 6" or 8" extension selectable, for extension diameter and weight see the following table

Version

56

Nominal diameter

Class

Extension length (L)

Extension diameter

Diaphragm seal weight

[in]

[lb./sq.in]

[in] [(mm)]

[in] [(mm)]

[kg]

J3

2

150

– – – –

2 (50.8) 4 (101.6) 6 (152.4) 8 (203.2)

1.9 (48.3)

– – – –

3.0 3.4 3.9 4.4

J4

3

150

– – – –

2 (50.8) 4 (101.6) 6 (152.4) 8 (203.2)

2.99 (75.9)

– – – –

6.0 6.6 7.1 7.8

J7

3

300

– – – –

2 (50.8) 4 (101.6) 6 (152.4) 8 (203.2)

2.99 (75.9)

– – – –

7.9 8.5 9.0 9.6

J5

4

150

– – – –

2 (50.8) 4 (101.6) 6 (152.4) 8 (203.2)

3.7 (94)

– – – –

8.6 9.9 11.2 12.4

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S

Version

Nominal diameter

Class

Extension length (L)

Extension diameter

Diaphragm seal weight

J8

4

300

– – – –

3.7 (94)

– – – –

2 (50.8) 4 (101.6) 6 (152.4) 8 (203.2)

13.1 14.4 15.7 16.9

JIS flanges, connection dimensions as per JIS B 2220 BL, raised face RF

b

40

g2

f

dM g k D P01-PMP75xxx-06-09-xx-xx-000

Process connection PMP75, JIS flange with raised face RF, material AISI 316L

Flange 1 Version

Nominal diameter

Boltholes Nominal pressure

Diaphragm seal Diameter

Hole circle

TK Ambient max. TK DiaProcess phragm 40 bar > 40 bar diameter

f

g2

k

dM

[mm]

[mm]

[mm]

[mm]

[mm]

[mbar/10 K]

Diameter

Thickness

Diameter raised face

Height raised face

D

b

g

[mm]

[mm]

Quantity

Diaphragm seal weight 2

[kg]

KC

25 A

10 K

125

14

67

1

4

19

90

32

+16.03

+24.33

+5.17

1.5

KF

50 A

10 K

155

16

96

2

4

19

120

59

+2.21

+3.02

+1.00

2.3

KL

80 A

10 K

185

18

127

2

8

19

150

89

+0.19

+0.25

+0.11

3.3

KH

100 A

10 K

210

18

151

2

8

19

175

89

+0.19

+0.25

+0.11

4.4

1)

The roughness of the surface in contact with the medium, including the raised face of the flanges (all standards), made of Hastelloy C, Monel or Tantalum is Ra 0.8 m. Lower surface roughness on request.

2)

Housing weight  ä 61

Endress+Hauser

57

Cerabar S

Thread 1/2 NPT und 1 NPT, seperator

ø118

26

15

1/2 NPT SW 27 27 AF ø30

27

44.5

19

12

94.5

76

ø118

1 NPT SW 36 36 AF ø52 P01-PMP75xxx-06-09-xx-xx-008

Process connection PMP75, versions "UG" and "UH", screwed, material AISI 316L , seal Viton

Version

Description

Nominal pressure

TK Ambient

TK Process [mbar/10 K]

Diaphragm seal weight [kg]

UG

1/2 NPT

PN 250

+3.45

+1.28

4.75

UH

1 NPT

PN 250

+3.45

+1.28

5.0

Thread ISO 228 G 1/2 A and ANSI 1/2 MNPT, seperator

ø72.6

70

70

ø72.6

21.5

20 3

17

14

SW 30 AF 30

14

SW 30 AF 30 ø18.4

ø11.4 1/2 - 14 NPT

ø4 ø6 G 1/2A

P01-PMP75xxx-06-09-xx-xx-004

Process connection PMP75, versions "UA" and "UB", welded, material AISI 316L

Version

Description

Nominal pressure

TK Ambient

TK Process [mbar/10 K]

58

Diaphragm seal weight [kg]

UA

ISO 228 G 1/2 A

PN 160

+0.9

+0.30

1.43

UB

ANSI 1/2 MNPT

PN 160

+0.9

+0.30

1.43

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S

89

100

90

100

➀

➀

SW22 22 AF

SW22 22 AF

6

1/2 NPT

G½ P01-PMP75xxx-06-09-xx-xx-013

Process connection PMP75, left: version "UC" with threaded connection ISO 228 G 1/2 B, right: version "UD" with threaded connection ANSI 1/2 MNPT 1

PTFE seal as standard max. 260 °C/500 °F (higher temperatures on request)

Version Measuring range Description

Nominal pressure TK Process

Diaphragm seal weight

[mbar/10 K]

[kg]

UC

 40 bar

ISO 228 G 1/2 B

PN 40

+0.75

1.43

UD

 40 bar

ANSI 1/2 MNPT

PN 40

+0.55

1.43

ø115

17

SW 22

3

ø2.5 1/2 NPT

20

SW 36

19

SW 36

92.5

84

ø115

ø4 ø6 G 1/2A P01-PMP75xxx-06-09-xx-xx-007

Process connection PMP75, versions "UC" and "UD", screwed, with integrated sealing lip, material AISI 316L

Version

Measuring Description range

Nominal pressure

TK Ambient

TK Process

[mbar/10 K]

Diaphragm seal weight [kg]

UC

> 40 bar

ISO 228 G 1/2 A

PN 400

+3.45

+1.28

1.43

UD

> 40 bar

ANSI 1/2 MNPT

PN 400

+3.45

+1.28

4.75

Note! With the use of high temperature oils the design can deviate strongly. For further information please contact your local Endress+Hauser Sales Center.

Endress+Hauser

59

Cerabar S

"Separate housing" version 101

118

45.5

131

84

ø51.7 P01-xxxxxxxx-06-xx-xx-xx-000

Dimensions T14 housing, optional display on the side. Housing weight see  ä 61.

101

76

45.5

147

118

ø51.7 P01-xxxxxxxx-06-xx-xx-xx-001

Dimensions T17 housing, optional display on the side. Housing weight see  ä 61.

r ³ 120 mm

r ³ 120 mm

T17

r ³ 120 mm

➀

➀

ø54.1

➀

81

45

45

T14

P01-xxxxxxxx-06-xx-xx-xx-002

Reduction of the mounting height of the process connection, for application of the separate housing. 1 Process connection adapter.

If the separate housing is used, the mounting height of the process connection is reduced by approx. 45 mm as compared to the dimensions of the standard version. The minimum bending radius (r) for the cable is 120 mm (4.7").

60

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S

Weight

Housing T14

T17

Aluminium

AISI 316L

AISI 316L

With electronic insert and on-site display

1.2 kg

2.1 kg

1.2 kg

With electronic insert without on-site display

1.1 kg

2.0 kg

1.1 kg

Separate housing

Weight of housing T14 or T17 + 0.5 kg. Weight of sensor + 0.5 kg.

Process connections • Process connections PMC71 (with ceramic process isolating diaphragm):  ä 33 ff • Process connections PMP71 (with metallic process isolating diaphragm):  ä 40 ff • Process connections PMP75 (with metallic process isolating diaphragm):  ä 47 ff Material

T14 housing: • T14 housing, selectable: – Die-cast aluminium with protective powder-coating on polyester basis: RAL 5012 (blue), cover: RAL 7035 (grey) – Precision cast stainless steel AISI 316L (1.4435) • External operation (keys and key covering): Polycarbonate PC-FR, RAL 7035 (grey) • Sight glass: Mineral glass • Cable gland: Polyamid (PA) • Pressure compensation filter: PA6 GF10 • Blind plug: PBT-GF30 FR, for Dust Ex, Ex d, FM XP and CSA XP: AISI 316L (1.4435) • Seals: – Cable and blind plug seal: Silicone (VMQ) – Pressure compensation filter o-ring: Silicone (VMQ) – Cover: EPDM – Sight glass: Silicone (VMQ) • Nameplates: AISI 304 (1.4301) T17 housing: • Housing: Stainless steel AISI 316L (1.4404) • Sight glass: – Version for non-hazardous area, ATEX Ex ia, NEPSI Zone 0/1 Ex ia, IECEx Zone 0/1 Ex ia, FM NI, FM IS, CSA IS: Polycarbonate (PC) – ATEX 1/2 D, ATEX 1/3 D, ATEX 1 GD, ATEX 1/2 GD, ATEX 3 G, FM DIP, CSA Dust Ex: Mineral glass • Cable gland: Polyamid PA, for Dust-Ex: CuZn nickel-plated • Blind plug: PBT-GF30 FR, for Dust-Ex: AISI 316L (1.4435) • Pressure compensation filter: PA6 GF10 • Seals: – Cable and blind plug seal: Silicone (VMQ) – Pressure compensation filter o-ring: Silicone (VMQ) – Cover: EPDM – Sight glass: EPDM • Nameplates: lasered Process connection • "Clamp connections" and "Hygienic connections" (see also Chapter "Ordering information"): AISI 316L/ 1.4435 • "Threaded connection" and "DIN/EN flanges" (see also Chapter "Ordering information"): stainless steel AISI 316L with the material number 1.4435 or 1.4404 • With regard to their stability-temperature property, the materials 1.4435 and 1.4404 are grouped together under 13E0 in EN 1092-1 Tab.18. The chemical composition of the two materials can be identical.

Endress+Hauser

61

Cerabar S

Cable for separate housing: • PE cable: Slip-resistant cable with strain-relief members made of Dynemo; shielded using aluminium-coated film; insulated with polyethylene (PE-LD), black; copper wires, twisted, UV resistant • FEP cable: Slip-resistant cable; shielded using galvanized steel wire netting; insulated with fluorinated ethylene propylene (FEP), black; copper wires, twisted, UV resistant TSE Certificate of Suitability The following applies to all process wetted device components: • They do not contain any materials derived from animals. • No auxiliaries or operating materials derived from animals are used in production or processing.

!

Note! Process wetted device components are listed in the "Mechanical construction" ( ä 32) and "Ordering information" ( ä 77) sections. Miscellaneous: • Process isolating diaphragm PMC71: Al2O3 Aluminium-oxide-ceramic (FDA 21CFR186.1256, USP Class VI), ultrapure 99.9% ( www.endress.com/ceraphire) • Mounting accessories: Mounting kit with screws AISI 304 (1.4301) • Capillary: AISI 316 Ti (1.4571) • Protective hose for capillary: AISI 304 (1.4301) • External earth terminal: AISI 304 (1.4301) For process connections, process diaphragms, seals and filling oils see ordering information,  ä 77 ff.

62

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S

Human interface Operating elements

On-site display (optional) A 4-line liquid crystal display (LCD) is used for display and operation. The on-site display shows measured values, dialog text as well as fault and notice messages in plain text, thereby supporting the user in every stage of operation. The liquid crystal display of the device can be turned in 90° steps. Depending on the installation position of the device, this makes it easy to operate the device and read the measured value. Functions: • 8-digit measured value display including sign and decimal point, bar graph for 4 to 20 mA HART as current display or for PROFIBUS PA as graphical display of the scaled value of the AI Block • Simple and complete menu guidance thanks to seperation of the parameters into three levels • Ech parameter is given as 3-digit ID number for easy navigation • Option for configuring the display according to individual requirements and desires, such as language, alternating display, display of other measured values such as sensor temperature, contrast setting • Comprehensive diagnostic functions (fault and warning message, peak-hold indicators, etc.) • Rapid and safe commissioning with the Quick Setup menus

Measured value display Function name

Value

Parameter Identification number

Header line Main line Information line –

+

E

Unit Symbol Bargraph

Editing modes Operating keys Selection options

Value that can be edited

Current measured value P01-xxxxxxxx-07-xx-xx-en-011

Endress+Hauser

63

Cerabar S

Operating elements

Operating keys on the exterior of the device The operating keys of the housing T14 (aluminium or stainless steel) are located either outside of the housing, under the protection cap or upon the electronic insert. The operating keys of the housing T17 (ironing stainless steel) are located inside the housing upon the electronic insert 4...20 mA HART

PROFIBUS PA/ FOUNDATION Fieldbus

0% Zero

P01-PMx7xxxx-19-xx-xx-xx-038

The operating keys located externally on the device work on the Hall sensor principle. As a result, no additional openings are required in the device. This guarantees: • Complete protection against environmental influences such as moisture and contamination • Simple operation without any tools • No wear. Operating keys and elements located internally on the electronic insert

➅➆

off

➀

off

➂

➁

on

off

0%

Display

2

on

on

off

off

ON

CK S D A 0

2

3

4

5

6

7

HW-Version: SW-Version:

P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-xx-104

1 2

250002272-–

1 2

250002271-–

HW-Version: SW-Version:

Display

Sensor

1

2

HW

off

PC

PC

R

FIELD COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL

➃

0%

8

8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Address SW HW

HART

➂

2

on 1

PC

1

2

➁ Zero

Histo ROM

➂ 1

1

➄

Zero Sensor

➀

➃

TM

FOUNDATION

HW-Version: SW-Version:

P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-xx-105

1 2

P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-xx-106

Electronic insert HART

Electronic insert PROFIBUS PA

Electronic insert FOUNDATION Fieldbus

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5

5 6

Operating keys Slot for optional display Slot for optional HistoROM®/M-DAT DIP-switch for locking/unlocking measured-value-relevant parameters DIP-switch for damping on/off Green LED to indicate value being accepted

7

64

Green LED to indicate value being accepted Key for position calibration and device reset DIP-switch for bus address Slot for optional display Slot for optional HistoROM®/M-DAT DIP-switch for locking/unlocking measured-value-relevant parameters DIP-switch for damping on/off

Histo ROM

➁

➄➅

t

250002273-–

➀

on

Simulation

on

➅

t

Sim.

➃➄

6

Green LED to indicate value being accepted Key for position calibration and device reset Slot for optional display Slot for optional HistoROM®/M-DAT DIP-switch for locking/unlocking measured-value-relevant parameters DIP-switch for simulation mode on/off

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S

Local operation

Function

Position calibration (zero point correction) Setting lower-range value and upper-range value reference pressure present at the device Device Reset Locking and unlocking measured-value-relevant parameters Value acceptance indicated by green LED Switching damping on and off Setting bus address (PA) Switching simulation mode on and off (FOUNDATION Fieldbus) Remote operation

External operation (operation keys, optional, not T17 housing)

Internal operation (electronic insert)

Display (optional)

X

X

X

X (HART only)

X (HART only)

X

X

X

X



X

X

X

X

X

 

X (HART and PA only) X

X



X

X

X

Depending on the position of the write protection switch at the device, all software parameters are accessible. HART Remote operation via: • Handheld terminal Field Communicator 375 (see Chapter "Hard- und Software for on-site and remote operation"  ä 66) • FieldCare (see Chapter "Hard- und Software for on-site and remote operation"  ä 66 ff) with – Commubox FXA191 (see Chapter "Hard- und Software for on-site and remote operation"  ä 66 ff) – Commubox FXA195 (see Chapter "Hard- und Software for on-site and remote operation"  ä 66 ff) • Field Xpert: Field Xpert is an industrial PDA with integrated 3.5" touchscreen from Endress+Hauser based on Windows Mobile. It communicates via wireless with the optional VIATOR Bluetooth modem connected to a HART device point-to-point or wireless via WiFi and Endress+Hauser’s Fieldgate FXA520. Field Xpert also works as a stand-alone device for asset management applications. For details refer to BA060S/00/en. PROFIBUS PA Remote operation via: • FieldCare (see Chapter "Hard- und Software for on-site and remote operation"  ä 66 ff) – Profiboard: For the Connection of a Personal Computer to PROFIBUS – Proficard: For the Connection of a Laptop to PROFIBUS FOUNDATION Fieldbus Remote operation via: • Handheld terminal Field Communicator 375 (see Chapter "Hard- und Software for on-site and remote operation"  ä 66 ff) • Use an FF-configuration program for e.g. NI-FBUS configurator, to – connect devices with "FOUNDATION Fieldbus signal" into an FF-network – set FF-specific parameter Operation with NI-FBUS Configurator: The NI-FBUS Configurator is an easy-to-use graphical environment for creating linkages, loops and a schedule based on the fieldbus concept. You can use the NI-FBUS Configurator to configure a fieldbus network as follows: – Set block and device tags – Set device addresses – Create and edit function block control strategies (function block applications) – Configure vendor -defined function and transducer blocks – Create and edit schedules – Read and write to function block control strategies (function block applications) – Invoke Device Description (DD) methods

Endress+Hauser

65

Cerabar S

– – – – – –

! Hard- und Software for on-site and remote operation

Display DD menus Download a configuration Verify a configuration and compare it to a saved configuration Monitor a downloaded configuration Replace a virual device by a real device Save and print a configuration

Note! For further information please contact your local Endress+Hauser Sales Center. Commubox FXA191 For intrinsically safe communication with FieldCare via the RS232C interface. For details refer to TI237F700/en. Commubox FXA195 For intrinsically safe communication with FieldCare via the USB interface. For details TI404F/00/en. Commubox FXA291 The Commubox FXA291 connects Endress+Hauser field instruent with CDI interface (=Endress+Hauser Common Data Interface) to the USB interface of a personal computer or a notebook. For details TI405C/07/en. Note! For the following Endress+Hauser instruments you need the "ToF Adapter FXA291" as an additional accessory: • Cerabar S PMC71, PMP7x • Deltabar S PMD7x, FMD7x • Deltapilot S FMB70 ToF Adapter FXA291 The ToF Adapter FXA291 connects the Commubox FXA291 with instruments of the ToF platform, pressure instruments and Gammapilot via the USB interface of a personal computer or a notebook. For details refer to KA271F.

Field Communicator 375 With a handheld terminal, all the parameters can be configured anywhere along the 4 to 20 mA line via menu operation. HistoROM®/M-DAT (optional) HistoROM®/M-DAT is a memory module, which is attached to the electronic insert. The HistoROM®/M-DAT can be retrofitted at any stage (Order number: 52027785). Your benefits • Quick and safe commissioning of the same measuring points by copying the configuration data of one transmitter to another transmitter • Reliable process monitoring thanks to cyclical recording of pressure and sensor temperature measured values • Simple dagnosis by recording diverse events such as alarms, configuration changes, counters for measuring range undershoot and overshoot for pressure and temperature as well as user limit overshoot and undershoot for pressure and temperature etc. • Analysis and graphic evaluation of the events and process parameters via software (contained in scope of supply). HistoROM®/M-DAT can be ordered via feature 100 "Additional options 1" or feature 110 "Additional options 2" or as spare parts.  ä 77 ff. A CD with Endress+Hauser operating program is also included in the scope of delivery. You can copy data from one transmitter to another transmitter when operating a FOUNDATION Fieldbus device via an FF configuration program. You need the Endress+Hauser FieldCare operating program and the Commubox FXA291 service interface and the ToF Adapter FXA291 to be able to access the data and events saved in the HistoROM®/M-DAT.

66

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S

FieldCare FieldCare is an Endress+Hauser asset management tool based on FDT technology. With FieldCare, you can configure all Endress+Hauser devices as wella s devices from other manufacturers that support the FDT standard. FieldCare supports the following functions: • Configuration of transmitter in offline and online operation • Loading and saving device data (upload/download) • HistoROM®/M-DAT analysis • Documentation of the measuring point Connection options: • HART via Commubox FXA191 and the RS232C serial interface of a computer • HART via Commubox FXA195 and the USB port on a computer • PROFIBUS PA via segment coupler and PROFIBUS interface card • FOUNDATION Fieldbus via Commubox FXA193 and the RS232C serial interface of a computer • Service interface with adapter Commubox FXA291 and ToF Adapter FXA291 (USB). For further information È www.endress.com

Endress+Hauser

67

Cerabar S

Planning instructions, diaphragm seal systems With the Endress Hauser selection tool "Applicator" you will find the optimum diaphragm seal for your application. Online on "www.endress.com/applicator" or offline on CD. For further information please contact your local Endress+Hauser Sales Center. Applications

Diaphragm seal systems should be used if the process media and the device should be separated. Diaphragm seal systems offer clear advantages in the following instances: • In the case of high process temperatures ( ä 30, section "Process temperature limits".) • For aggressive media • If good and rapid measuring point cleaning is necessary • If the measuring point is exposed to vibrations • For mounting locations that are difficult to access • For very humid mounting locations

Planning instructions

Diaphragm seals are separating equipment between the measuring system and the process medium. A diaphragm seal system consists of: • A diaphragm seal in a one-sided system • Capillary tube • Fill fluid and • A pressure transmitter. The process pressure acts via the process isolating diaphragm of a diaphragm seal on the liquid-filled system, which transfers the process pressure via the capillary tube onto the sensor of the pressure transmitter. Endress+Hauser delivers all diaphragm seal systems as welded versions. The system is hermetically sealed, which ensures the highest reliability. Note! The correlations between the individual diaphragm seal components are presented in the following section. For further information and comprehensive diaphragm seal system designs, please contact your local Endress+Hauser Sales Center. Diaphragm seal The diaphragm seal determines the application range of the system by • the process isolating diaphragm diameter • the diaphragms: stiffness and material • the design (oil volume). Process isolating diaphragm diameter The larger the process isolating diaphragm diameter (less stiffness), the smaller the temperature effect on the measurement result. Note: To keep the temperature effect in practice-oriented limits, you should select diaphragm seals with a nominal diameter of DN 80, in as far as the process connection allows for it. Process isolating diaphragm stiffness The stiffness is dependent on the process isolating diaphragm diameter, the material, any available coating and on the process isolating diaphragm thickness and shape. The process isolating diaphragm thickness and the shape are defined constructively. The stiffness of a process isolating diaphragm of a diaphragm seal influences the temperature operating range and the measuring error caused by temperature effects. Capillary Capillaries with an internal diameter of 1 mm are used as standard. The capillary tube influences the TK zero point, the ambient temperature operating range and the response time of a diaphragm seal system as a result of its length and internal diameter.  ä 69 ff, sections "Influence of the temperature on the zero point" and "Ambient temperature range". Observe the installation instructions regarding capillary tubes.  ä 74 ff, section "Installation instructions".

68

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S

Filling oil When selecting the filling oil, fluid and ambient temperature as well as the operating pressure are of crucial importance. Observe the temperatures and pressures during commissioning and cleaning. A further selection criterion is the compatibility of the filling oil with the requirements of the process medium. For this reason, only filling oils that are harmless to health are used in the food industry, such as vegetable oil or silicone oil See also the following section "Diaphragm seal filling oils" section. The filling oil used influences the TK zero point and the temperature operating range of a diaphragm seal system and the response time.  ä 69 ff, section "Influence of the temperature on the zero point". Pressure transmitter The pressure transmitter influences the temperature operating range, the TK zero point and the response time as a result of its volume change. The volume change is the volume that has to be shifted to pass through the complete measuring range. Pressure transmitters from Endress+Hauser are optimised with regard to minimum volume change. Diaphragm seal filling oils Version 1

Filling oil

Permissible Density Permissible temperature range 2 at temperature 2 range 0.05 bar pabs  1 bar at pabs  1 bar

Viscosity

Coefficient of thermal expansion

[g/cm3]

[cSt at 25°C (77°F)]

[1/K]

TK correction factor

Note

A, H, 1 or 2 Silicone oil

–40...+180°C (–40...+356°F)

–40...+250°C (–40...+482°F)

0.96

100

0.00096

1

suitable for foods FDA 21 CFR 175.105

G, 3 or 4

High temperature oil

–10...+200°C (+14...+392°F)

–10...+400°C (+14...+752°F)

1.07

37

0.0007

0.72

high temperatures

F or N

Inert oil

–40...+80°C (–40...+176°F)

–40...+175°C (–40...+347°F)

1.87

27

0.000876

0.91

for ultra pure gas and oxygen applications

D, 5 or 6

Vegetable oil

–10...+120°C (+14...+248°F)

–10...+200°C (+14...+392°F)

0.94

9.5

0.00101

1.05

suitable for foods FDA 21 CFR 172.856

7 or 8

Low temperature oil

–70...+80°C –94...+176°F

–70...+180°C –94...+356°F

0.92

4.4

0.00108

1.12

low temperatures

1)

Version for feature 90 in the order code

2)

Observe temperature limits of the device ( ä 28 and  ä 30).

Influence of the temperature on the zero point

A temperature change results in a volume change of the filling oil. The volume change is dependent on the coefficient of thermal expansion of the filling oil and on the volume of the filling oil at calibration temperature (constant in the range: +21 to +33°C (+69.8 to 91.4°F)).  ä 69, "Filling oil" section. For example, the filling oil expands in the event of a temperature increase. The additional volume presses against the process isolating diaphragm of a diaphragm seal. The stiffer a process isolating diaphragm is, the greater its return force, which counteracts a volume change and acts on the measuring cell together with the operating pressure, thus shifting the zero point. For the "TK Process" and "TK Ambient (for devices without capillary)", see  ä 47 ff, section "Process connections PMP75". The following diagrams display the temperature coefficient "TK Ambient" dependent on the capillary length. The following application is displayed: capillary temperature and transmitter temperature (ambient temperature) change, the process temperature corresponds to the calibration temperature. The temperature coefficients obtained from the diagrams apply to silicone oil and the process isolating diaphragm material AISI 316L/1.4435. For other filling oils, these temperature coefficients must be multiplied by the TK correction factor of the corresponding filling oil. For the TK correction factors, see  ä 69, section "Diaphragm seal filling oils". With regard to the temperature coefficient "TK Ambient", devices with temperature isolator behave like devices with the same process connection and 0.1 m capillary.

Endress+Hauser

69

Cerabar S

PN < 40 bar TK Ambient 16 [mbar/10 K]

14 6

12 10 8.4

mbar 10 K

8 6 4 2 0 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Capillary length [m] P01-PMP75xxx-05-xx-xx-en-007

Diagram TK Ambient dependent on the capillary length for PMP75, PN 200: Suitable for stable gases in group 1, category 1 – PMP75 with threaded connection PN > 200

Endress+Hauser

75

Cerabar S

Standards and guidelines

DIN EN 60770 (IEC 60770): Transmitters for use in industrial-process control systems Part 1: Methods for inspection and routine testing DIN 16086: Electrical pressure measuring instruments, pressure sensors, pressure transmitters, pressure measuring instruments, concepts, specifications in data sheets EN 61326-X: EMC product family standard for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use.

76

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S

Ordering information PMC71

This overview does not mark options which are mutually exclusive. 10

m

–

+

E

20

n ➂ 1

2

PC

30

T14

T17

40

Approval: A For non-hazardous areas E Combi-certification ATEX II Ex ia + FM IS + CSA IS ATEX II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T6 + FM/CSA IS Class I, II, III Division 1 Group A - G 1 ATEX II 1/2 G Ex ia IIC T6 6 ATEX II 1/2 G Ex ia IIC T6, overspill protection WHG 2 ATEX II 1/2 D Ex ia IIC T6 8 ATEX II 1 GD Ex ia IIC T6 3 ATEX II 1/2 GD Ex ia IIC T6 5 ATEX II 2 G Ex d[ia] IIC T6 7 ATEX II 3 G Ex nA II T6 S FM IS, Class I, II, III Division 1, Groups A – G; NI Class I Division 2, Groups A – D; AEx ia T FM XP, Class I Division 1, Groups A – D; AEx d R FM NI, Class I, Division 2, Groups A – D U CSA IS, Class I, II, III Division 1, Groups A – G; Class I Division 2, Groups A – D, Ex ia V CSA XP, Class I Division 1, Groups B – D; Ex d G NEPSI Ex d[ia] IIC T4/T6 H NEPSI Ex ia IIC T6 L TIIS Ex d (ia) IIC T6 M TIIS Ex d (ia) IIC T4 I IECEx Zone 0/1 Ex ia IIC T6 Output; Operation: A 4...20 mA HART, operation outside, LCD (see Fig. ➀, n) B 4...20 mA HART, operation inside, LCD (see Fig. ➀, o) C 4...20 mA HART, operation inside (see Fig.o) M PROFIBUS PA, operation outside, LCD (see Fig. ➀, n) N PROFIBUS PA, operation inside, LCD (see Fig. ➀, o) O PROFIBUS PA, operation inside (see Fig. o) P FOUNDATION Fieldbus, operation outside, LCD (see Fig. ➀, o) Q FOUNDATION Fieldbus, operation inside, LCD (see Fig. ➀, o) R FOUNDATION Fieldbus, operation inside (see Fig. o) Housing; Cable entry; Protection: A Aluminium T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, Gland M 20x1.5 B Aluminium T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, Thread G 1/2 C Aluminium T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, Thread 1/2 NPT D Aluminium T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, M 12x1 PA plug E Aluminium T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, 7/8" FF plug F Aluminium T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 65/NEMA 4X, Hand 7D plug 90° 1 AISI 316L T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, Gland M 20x1.5 2 AISI 316L T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, Thread G 1/2 3 AISI 316L T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, Thread 1/2 NPT 4 AISI 316L T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, M 12x1 PA plug 5 AISI 316L T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, 7/8" FF plug 6 AISI 316L T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 65/NEMA 4X, Hand 7D plug 90° R T17 316L Hygiene IP66/68 NEMA6P; M20 gland, T17 = side cover S T17 316L Hygiene IP66/68 NEMA6P; G1/2 thread, T17 = side cover T T17 316L Hygiene IP66/68 NEMA6P; NPT1/2 thread, T17 = side cover U T17 316L Hygiene IP66/68 NEMA6P; M12 plug, T17 = side cover V T17 316L Hygiene IP66/68 NEMA6P; 7/8" plug, T17 = side cover

Sensor range; Sensor overload limit (= OPL): Sensors for gauge pressure Measurement limits: –100 % (–1 bar)...+100 % of sensor nominal range Sensor nominal value (URL) OPL (Over pressure limit) 1C 100 mbar/10 kPa/1.5 psi g 4 bar/400 kPa/60 psi g 1E 250 mbar/25 kPa/3.75 psi g 5 bar/500 kPa/75 psi g 1F 400 mbar/40 kPa/6 psi g 8 bar/800 kPa/120 psi g 1H 1 bar/100 kPa/15 psi g 10 bar/1 MPa/150 psi g 1K 2 bar/200 kPa/30 psi g 18 bar/1.8 MPa/270 psi g 1M 4 bar/400 kPa/60 psi g 25 bar/2.5 MPa/375 psi g 1P 10 bar/1 MPa/150 psi g 40 bar/4 MPa/600 psi g 1S 40 bar/4 MPa/600 psi g 60 bar/6 MPa/900 psi g

Endress+Hauser

77

Cerabar S

40

Sensor range; Sensor overload limit (= OPL):

2C 2E 2F 2H 2K 2M 2P 2S

50

Sensors for absolute pressure Sensor nominal value (URL) 100 mbar/10 kPa/1.5 psi abs 250 mbar/25 kPa/3.75 psi abs 400 mbar/40 kPa/6 psi abs 1 bar/100 kPa/15 psi abs 2 bar/200 kPa/30 psi abs 4 bar/400 kPa/60 psi abs 10 bar/1 MPa/150 psi abs 40 bar/4 MPa/600 psi abs

Calibration; Unit: 1 2 3 4 6 B C D K L M

70

Sensor range; mbar/bar Sensor range; kPa/MPa Sensor range; mmH2O/mH2O Sensor range; inH2O/ftH2O Sensor range; psi Customised; see additional specification Factory certificate 5-point; see additional specification DKD certificate; see additional specification Platinum; see additional specification Platinum and factory certificate 5-point; see additional specification Platinum and DKD certificate; see additional specification

Process connection; Material: GA GB GC GD GE GF GG GH GJ GK RA RB RC RD RE RF RG RH RJ RK GL RL GP GQ

1G 1H 1J 1K 1L 1M 2D 2E 2F 2G 2H 2J 1R 1S

78

OPL (Over pressure limit) 4 bar/400 kPa/60 psi abs 5 bar/500 kPa/75 psi abs 8 bar/800 kPa/120 psi abs 10 bar/1 MPa/150 psi abs 18 bar/1.8 MPa/270 psi abs 25 bar/2.5 MPa/375 psi abs 40 bar/4 MPa/600 psi abs 60 bar/6 MPa/900 psi abs

Thread, internal process isolating diaphragm Thread ISO 228 G 1/2 A EN 837, AISI 316L (CRN) Thread ISO 228 G 1/2 A EN 837, Alloy C (CRN) Thread ISO 228 G 1/2 A EN 837, Monel Thread ISO 228 G 1/2 A EN 837, PVDF (max. 15 bar/225 psi, –10...+60°C/+14...+140°F) Thread ISO 228 G 1/2 A G 1/4 (female), AISI 316L (CRN) Thread ISO 228 G 1/2 A G 1/4 (female), Alloy C (CRN) Thread ISO 228 G 1/2 A G 1/4 (female), Monel Thread ISO 228 G 1/2 A hole 11.4 mm, AISI 316L (CRN) Thread ISO 228 G 1/2 A hole 11.4 mm, Alloy C (CRN) Thread ISO 228 G 1/2 A hole 11.4 mm, Monel Thread ANSI 1/2 MNPT 1/4 FNPT, AISI 316L (CRN) Thread ANSI 1/2 MNPT 1/4 FNPT, Alloy C (CRN) Thread ANSI 1/2 MNPT 1/4 FNPT, Monel Thread ANSI 1/2 MNPT, hole 11.4 mm, AISI 316L (CRN) Thread ANSI 1/2 MNPT, hole 11.4 mm, Alloy C (CRN) Thread ANSI 1/2 MNPT, hole 11.4 mm, Monel Thread ANSI 1/2 MNPT hole 3 mm, PVDF (max. 15 bar/225 psi, –10...+60°C/+14...+140°F) Thread ANSI 1/2 FNPT, AISI 316L (CRN) Thread ANSI 1/2 FNPT, Alloy C (CRN) Thread ANSI 1/2 FNPT, Monel Thread JIS B0202 G 1/2 (male), AISI 316L Thread JIS B0203 R 1/2 (male), AISI 316L Thread DIN 13 M 20x1.5 EN 837 hole 3 mm, AISI 316L Thread DIN 13 M 20x1.5 EN 837 hole 3 mm, Alloy C For continuation "Process connection, Material" see next page. Thread, flush-mounted process isolating diaphragm Thread ISO 228 G 1 1/2 A, AISI 316L Thread ISO 228 G 1 1/2 A, Alloy C Thread ISO 228 G 1 1/2 A, Monel Thread ISO 228 G 2 A, AISI 316L Thread ISO 228 G 2 A, Alloy C Thread ISO 228 G 2 A, Monel Thread ANSI 1 1/2 MNPT, AISI 316L (CRN) Thread ANSI 1 1/2 MNPT, Alloy C (CRN) Thread ANSI 1 1/2 MNPT, Monel (CRN) Thread ANSI 2 MNPT, AISI 316L (CRN) Thread ANSI 2 MNPT, Alloy C Thread ANSI 2 MNPT, Monel Thread DIN 13 M 44x1.25, AISI 316L Thread DIN 13 M 44x1.25, Alloy C EN/DIN flanges, flush-mounted process isolating diaphragm

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S

70

Process connection; Material: CP CQ BR B3 C3 BS B4 AE AQ AF JR A3 AR AG JS A4 AS AH JT AT KF KL KH MP MR TD TF TK TR

80

DN 32 PN 10-40 B1, AISI 316L DN 40 PN 10-40 B1, AISI 316L DN 50 PN 10-16 A, PVDF (max. 15 bar/150 psi, –10...+60°C/+14...+140°F) DN 50 PN 10-40 B1, AISI 316L DN 50 PN 63 B2, AISI 316L DN 80 PN 10-16 A, PVDF (max. 15 bar/150 psi, –10...+60°C/+14...+140°F) DN 80 PN 10-40 B1, AISI 316L ANSI flanges, flush-mounted process isolating diaphragm 1 1/2" 150 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN) 1 1/2" 300 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN) 2" 150 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN) 2" 150 lbs RF, AISI 316L with ECTFE-coating 2" 150 lbs RF, PVDF (max. 15 bar/225 psi, –10...+60°C/+14...+140°F) 2" 300 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN) 3" 150 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN) 3" 150 lbs RF, AISI 316L with ECTFE-coating 3" 150 lbs RF, PVDF (max. 15 bar/225 psi, –10...+60°C/+14...+140°F) 3" 300 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN) 4" 150 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN) 4" 150 lbs RF, AISI 316L with ECTFE-coating 4" 300 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN) JIS flanges, flush-mounted process isolating diaphragm 10K 50A RF, AISI 316L 10K 80A RF, AISI 316L 10K 100A RF, AISI 316L Hygienic connections, flush-mounted process isolating diaphragm DIN 11851 DN 40 PN 25, AISI 316L, EHEDG, 3A with HNBR/EPDM seal (CRN) DIN 11851 DN 50 PN 25, AISI 316L, EHEDG, 3A with HNBR/EPDM seal (CRN) Tri-Clamp ISO 2852 DN 51 (2"), AISI 316L, EHEDG, 3A with HNBR/EPDM seal (CRN) Tri-Clamp ISO 2852 DN 76.1 (3"), AISI 316L, EHEDG, 3A with HNBR/EPDM seal (CRN) DRD DN50 (65 mm), PN 25, AISI 316L, EHEDG, 3A with HNBR/EPDM seal Varivent type N for tubes DN 40 – DN 162, PN 40, AISI 316L, EHEDG, 3A with HNBR/EPDM seal (CRN)

Seal: A B D E F L M 1 2

100

FKM Viton EPDM Kalrez Chemraz NBR/3A: HNBR (FDA) FKM Viton, cleaned for silicone-free service Kalrez, cleaned for silicone-free service FKM Viton, cleaned from oil and greace FKM Viton, oxygen service Note application limits pressure/temp.

Additional option 1: A E T B M J N S V 2 3 4

110

not selected SIL/IEC 61508 Declaration of conformity High temperature version Material test certificate for wetted parts, inspection certificate as per EN 10204 3.1 acc. to specification 52005759 Overvoltage protection Software adjustment, see additional spec. HistoROM/M-DAT GL (German Lloyd)/ABS marine certificate Mounting on shut-off valve from above Test report acc. to EN 10204 2.2 Routine test with certificate, inspection certificate as per EN 10204 3.1 Overpressure test with certificate, inspection certificate as per EN 10204 3.1

Additional option 2: A E G T M J

Endress+Hauser

not selected SIL/IEC 61508 Declaration of conformity Separate housing, cable length see additional spec. + mounting bracket, wall/pipe, 316L High temperature version Overvoltage protection Software adjustment, see additional spec.

79

Cerabar S

110

Additional option 2: N S U 2 3 4 5

995

HistoROM/M-DAT GL (German Lloyd)/ABS marine certificate Mounting bracket for wall/pipe, AISI 304 Test report acc. to EN 10204 2.2 Routine test with certificate, inspection certificate as per EN 10204 3.1 Overpressure test with certificate, inspection certificate as per EN 10204 3.1 Helium leak test EN 1518 with test certificate, inspection certificate as per EN 10204 3.1

Marking: 1 2

PMC71

80

Tagging (TAG), see additional spec. Bus adress, see additional spec.

order code

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S

PMP71

This overview does not mark options which are mutually exclusive. 10

A 1 6 2 4 8 3 5 7 S T Q R U V W G H L I B C D E F

m

–

+

E

20

n

For non-hazardous areas ATEX II 1/2 G Ex ia IIC T6 ATEX II 1/2 G Ex ia IIC T6, overspill protection WHG ATEX II 1/2 D ATEX II 1/3 D ATEX II 1 GD Ex ia IIC T6 ATEX II 1/2 GD Ex ia IIC T6 ATEX II 2 G Ex d IIC T6 ATEX II 3 G Ex nA II T6 FM IS, Class I, II, III Division 1, Groups A – G; NI Class I Division 2, Groups A – D; AEx ia FM XP, Class I Division 1, Groups A – D; AEx d FM DIP, Class II, III Division 1, Groups E – G FM NI, Class I, Division 2, Groups A – D CSA IS, Class I, II, III Division 1, Groups A – G; Class I Division 2, Groups A – D, Ex ia CSA XP, Class I Division 1, Groups B – D; Ex d CSA Class II, III Division 1, Groups E – G (Dust Ex) NEPSI Ex d IIC T6 NEPSI Ex ia IIC T6 TIIS Ex d IIC T6 IECEx Zone 0/1 Ex ia IIC T6 Combined certificates: ATEX II 1/2 G Ex ia IIC T6 + II 2 G Ex d IIC T6 Combined certificates: FM IS and XP Class I Division 1, Groups A – D Combined certificates: CSA IS and XP Class I Division 1, Groups A – D Combined certificates: FM/CSA IS and XP Class I Division 1, Groups A – D Combined certificates: ATEX II Ex ia / Ex d + FM/CSA IS + XP ATEX II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T6+ ATEX II 2G Ex d IIC T6+ FM/CSA IS + XP Cl.I Div.1 Gr.A-D

Output; Operation: A B C M N O P Q R

➂ 1

Approval:

2

PC

30 T14

4...20 mA HART, operation outside, LCD (see Fig. ➀, n) 4...20 mA HART, operation inside, LCD (see Fig. ➀, o) 4...20 mA HART, operation inside (see Fig. o) PROFIBUS PA, operation outside, LCD (see Fig. ➀, n) PROFIBUS PA, operation inside, LCD (see Fig. ➀, o) PROFIBUS PA, operation inside (see Fig. o) FOUNDATION Fieldbus, operation outside, LCD (see Fig. ➀, o) FOUNDATION Fieldbus, operation inside, LCD (see Fig. ➀, o) FOUNDATION Fieldbus, operation inside (see Fig. o)

Housing; Cable entry; Protection: A B C D E F 1 2 3 4 5 6 R S T U V

T17

40

Aluminium T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, Gland M 20x1.5 Aluminium T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, Thread G 1/2 Aluminium T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, Thread 1/2 NPT Aluminium T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, M 12x1 PA plug Aluminium T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, 7/8" FF plug Aluminium T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 65/NEMA 4X, Hand 7D plug 90° AISI 316L T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, Gland M 20x1.5 AISI 316L T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, Thread G 1/2 AISI 316L T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, Thread 1/2 NPT AISI 316L T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, M 12x1 PA plug AISI 316L T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, 7/8" FF plug AISI 316L T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 65/NEMA 4X, Hand 7D plug 90° T17 316L Hygiene IP66/68 NEMA6P; M20 gland, T17 = side cover T17 316L Hygiene IP66/68 NEMA6P; G1/2 thread, T17 = side cover T17 316L Hygiene IP66/68 NEMA6P; NPT1/2 thread, T17 = side cover T17 316L Hygiene IP66/68 NEMA6P; M12 plug, T17 = side cover T17 316L Hygiene IP66/68 NEMA6P; 7/8" plug, T17 = side cover

Sensor range; Sensor overload limit (= OPL): Sensors for gauge pressure Measurement limits: –100 % (–1 bar)...+100 % of sensor nominal range Sensor nominal value (URL) OPL (Over pressure limit) 1F 400 mbar/40 kPa/6 psi g 6 bar/600 kPa/90 psi g 1H 1 bar/100 kPa/15 psi g 10 bar/1 MPa/150 psi g 1K 2 bar/200 kPa/30 psi g 20 bar/2 MPa/300 psi g

Endress+Hauser

81

Cerabar S

40

Sensor range; Sensor overload limit (= OPL): 1M 4 bar/400 kPa/60 psi g 1P 10 bar/1 MPa/150 psi g 1S 40 bar/4 MPa/600 psi g 1U 100 bar/10 MPa/1500 psi g 1W 400 bar/40 MPa/6000 psi g 1X 700 bar/70 MPa/10500 psi g Sensors for absolute pressure Sensor nominal value (URL) 2F 400 mbar/40 kPa/6 psi abs 2H 1 bar/100 kPa/15 psi abs 2K 2 bar/200 kPa/30 psi abs 2M 4 bar/400 kPa/60 psi abs 2P 10 bar/1 MPa/150 psi abs 2S 40 bar/4 MPa/600 psi abs 2U 100 bar/10 MPa/1500 psi g 2W 400 bar/40 MPa/6000 psi g 2X 700 bar/70 MPa/10500 psi g

50

Sensor range; mbar/bar Sensor range; kPa/MPa Sensor range; mmH2O/mH2O Sensor range; inH2O/ftH2O Sensor range; psi Customised; see additional specification Factory certificate 5-point; see additional specification DKD certificate; see additional specification Platinum; see additional specification Platinum and factory certificate 5-point; see additional specification Platinum and DKD certificate; see additional specification

Membrane material: 1 2 6

70

AISI 316L Alloy C276 AISI 316L with Gold-Rhodium coating

Process connection; Material: GA GB GE GF GH GJ RA RB RD RE RH RJ GL RL

GP GQ 1A 1B 1D 1E 1G 1H 1K 1L 2A 2B 2D 2E

82

OPL (Over pressure limit) 6 bar/600 kPa/90 psi abs 10 bar/1 MPa/150 psi abs 20 bar/2 MPa/300 psi abs 28 bar/2.8 MPa/420 psi abs 40 bar/4 MPa/600 psi abs 160 bar/16 MPa/2400 psi abs 400 bar/40 MPa/6000 psi g 600 bar/60 MPa/9000 psi g 1050 bar/105 MPa/15700 psi g

Calibration; Unit: 1 2 3 4 6 B C D K L M

60

28 bar/2.8 MPa/420 psi g 40 bar/4 MPa/600 psi g 160 bar/16 MPa/2400 psi g 400 bar/40 MPa/6000 psi g 600 bar/60 MPa/9000 psi g 1050 bar/105 MPa/15700 psi g

Thread, internal process isolating diaphragm Thread ISO 228 G 1/2 A EN 837, AISI 316L Thread ISO 228 G 1/2 A EN 837, Alloy C Thread ISO 228 G 1/2 A G 1/4 (female), AISI 316L Thread ISO 228 G 1/2 A G 1/4 (female), Alloy C Thread ISO 228 G 1/2 A hole 11.4 mm, AISI 316L Thread ISO 228 G 1/2 A hole 11.4 mm, Alloy C Thread ANSI 1/2 MNPT 1/4 FNPT, AISI 316L (CRN) Thread ANSI 1/2 MNPT 1/4 FNPT, Alloy C (CRN) Thread ANSI 1/2 MNPT hole, AISI 316L (CRN) Thread ANSI 1/2 MNPT hole, Alloy C (CRN) Thread ANSI 1/2 FNPT, AISI 316L Thread ANSI 1/2 FNPT, Alloy C Thread JIS B0202 G 1/2 (male), AISI 316L Thread JIS B0203 R 1/2 (male), AISI 316L For continuation "Process connection; Material", see next page. Thread, internal process isolating diaphragm (continued) Thread DIN 13 M 20x1.5 EN 837 hole 11.4 mm, AISI 316L Thread DIN 13 M 20x1.5 EN 837 hole 11.4 mm, Alloy C Thread, flush-mounted process isolating diaphragm Thread ISO 228 G 1/2 A, DIN 3852, AISI 316L Thread ISO 228 G 1/2 A, DIN 3852, Alloy C Thread ISO 228 G 1 A, AISI 316L Thread ISO 228 G 1 A, Alloy C Thread ISO 228 G 1 1/2 A, AISI 316L Thread ISO 228 G 1 1/2 A, Alloy C Thread ISO 228 G 2 A, AISI 316L Thread ISO 228 G 2 A, Alloy C Thread ANSI 1 MNPT, AISI 316L (CRN) Thread ANSI 1 MNPT, Alloy C (CRN) Thread ANSI 1 1/2 MNPT, AISI 316L (CRN) Thread ANSI 1 1/2 MNPT, Alloy C (CRN)

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S

70

Process connection; Material: 2G 2H 1N 1P 1R 1S CN CP CQ B3 B4 AN AE AQ AF AR AG AS AH AT KA KF KL KH UR U1

90

Thread ANSI 2 MNPT, AISI 316L (CRN) Thread ANSI 2 MNPT, Alloy C Thread DIN 16288 M 20x1.5, AISI 316L Thread DIN 16288 M 20x1.5, Alloy C Thread DIN 13 M 44x1.25, AISI 316L Thread DIN 13 M 44x1.25, Alloy C EN/DIN flanges, flush-mounted process isolating diaphragm DN 25 PN 10-40 B1, AISI 316L DN 32 PN 10-40 B1, AISI 316L DN 40 PN 10-40 B1, AISI 316L DN 50 PN 10-40 B1, AISI 316L DN 80 PN 10-40 B1, AISI 316L ANSI flanges, flush-mounted process isolating diaphragm 1" 300 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN) 1 1/2" 150 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN) 1 1/2" 300 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN) 2" 150 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN) 2" 300 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN) 3" 150 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN) 3" 300 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN) 4" 150 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN) 4" 300 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN) JIS flanges, flush-mounted process isolating diaphragm 20K 25A RF, AISI 316L 10K 50A RF, AISI 316L 10K 80A RF, AISI 316L 10K 100A RF, AISI 316L Other Ovalflange adapter 1/4-18 NPT, mounting: 7/16-20 UNF, AISI 316L (CRN) Prepared for diaphragm seal mount, AISI 316L (CRN)

Fill fluid: A F K N

100

Silicone oil fill Inert oil fill Inert oil fill, cleaned from oil and greace Inert oil fill, cleaned for oxygen services (Note application limits pressure/temperature)

Additional option 1: A E B C D

M J N S 2 3 4

110

not selected SIL/IEC 61508 Declaration of conformity Material test certificate for wetted parts, inspection certificate as per EN 10204 3.1 acc. to specification 52005759 NACE MR0175 (wetted parts) Material test certificate for wetted parts as per EN 10204 3.1 and NACE MR0175 material, inspection certificate as per EN 10204 acc. to specification 52010806 Overvoltage protection Software adjustment, see additional spec. HistoROM/M-DAT GL (German Lloyd)/ABS marine certificate Test report acc. to EN10204 2.2 Routine test with certificate, inspection certificate as per EN 10204 3.1 Overpressure test with certificate, inspection certificate as per EN 10204 3.1

Additional option 2: A E G M J N S U 2 3 4 5

Endress+Hauser

not selected SIL/IEC 61508 Declaration of conformity Separate housing, cable length see additional spec. + mounting bracket, wall/pipe, 316L Overvoltage protection Software adjustment, see additional spec. HistoROM/M-DAT GL (German Lloyd)/ABS marine certificate Mounting bracket for wall/pipe, AISI 304 Test report acc. to EN10204 2.2 Routine test with certificate, inspection certificate as per EN 10204 3.1 Overpressure test with certificate, inspection certificate as per EN 10204 3.1 Helium leak test EN 1528 with test certificate, inspection certificate as per EN 10204 3.1

83

Cerabar S

995

Marking: 1 2

PMP71

84

Tagging (TAG), see additional spec. Bus adress, see additional spec.

order code

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S

PMP75

This overview does not mark options which are mutually exclusive. 10

m

–

+

E

20

n

2

PC

30

T14

A 1 6 2 4 8 3 5 7 S T Q R

For non-hazardous areas ATEX II 1/2 G Ex ia IIC T6 ATEX II 1/2 G Ex ia IIC T6, overspill protection WHG ATEX II 1/2 D ATEX II 1/3 D ATEX II 1 GD Ex ia IIC T6 ATEX II 1/2 GD Ex ia IIC T6 ATEX II 2 G Ex d IIC T6 ATEX II 3 G Ex nA II T6 FM IS, Class I, II, III Division 1, Groups A – G; NI Class I Division 2, Groups A – D; AEx ia FM XP, Class I Division 1, Groups A – D; AEx d FM DIP, Class II, III Division 1, Groups E – G FM NI, Class I, Division 2, Groups A – D

U V W G H L I B C D E F

CSA IS, Class I, II, III Division 1, Groups A – G; Class I Division 2, Groups A – D, Ex ia CSA XP, Class I Division 1, Groups B – D; Ex d CSA Class II, III Division 1, Groups E – G (Dust Ex) NEPSI Ex d IIC T6 NEPSI Ex ia IIC T6 TIIS Ex d IIC T6 IECEx Zone 0/1 Ex ia IIC T6 Combined certificates: ATEX II 1/2 G Ex ia IIC T6 + II 2 G Ex d IIC T6 Combined certificates: FM IS and XP Class I Division 1, Groups A – D Combined certificates: CSA IS and XP Class I Division 1, Groups A – D Combined certificates: FM/CSA IS and XP Class I Division 1, Groups A – D Combined certificates: ATEX II Ex ia / Ex d + FM/CSA IS + XP ATEX II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T6+ ATEX II 2G Ex d IIC T6+ FM/CSA IS + XP Cl.I Div.1 Gr.A-D

Output; Operation: A B C M N O P Q R

➂ 1

Approval:

4...20 mA HART, operation outside, LCD (see Fig. ➀, n) 4...20 mA HART, operation inside, LCD (see Fig. ➀, o) 4...20 mA HART, operation inside (see Fig. o) PROFIBUS PA, operation outside, LCD (see Fig. ➀, n) PROFIBUS PA, operation inside, LCD (see Fig. ➀, o) PROFIBUS PA, operation inside (see Fig. o) FOUNDATION Fieldbus, operation outside, LCD (see Fig. ➀, o) FOUNDATION Fieldbus, operation inside, LCD (see Fig. ➀, o) FOUNDATION Fieldbus, operation inside (see Fig. o)

Housing; Cable entry; Protection: A B C D E F 1 2 3 4 5 6 R S T U V

T17

Aluminium T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, Gland M 20x1.5 Aluminium T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, Thread G 1/2 Aluminium T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, Thread 1/2 NPT Aluminium T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, M 12x1 PA plug, Aluminium T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, 7/8" FF plug Aluminium T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 65/NEMA 4X, Hand 7D plug 90° AISI 316L T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, Gland M 20x1.5 AISI 316L T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, Thread G 1/2 AISI 316L T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, Thread 1/2 NPT AISI 316L T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, M 12x1 PA plug AISI 316L T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, 7/8" FF plug AISI 316L T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 65/NEMA 4X, Hand 7D plug 90° T17 316L Hygiene IP66/68 NEMA6P; M20 gland, T17 = side cover T17 316L Hygiene IP66/68 NEMA6P; G1/2 thread, T17 = side cover T17 316L Hygiene IP66/68 NEMA6P; NPT1/2 thread, T17 = side cover T17 316L Hygiene IP66/68 NEMA6P; M12 plug, T17 = side cover T17 316L Hygiene IP66/68 NEMA6P; 7/8" plug, T17 = side cover

40

Sensor range; Sensor overload (= OPL):

1F 1H 1K

Endress+Hauser

Sensors for gauge pressure Measurement limits: –100 % (–1 bar)...+100 % of sensor nominal range Sensor nominal value (URL) OPL (Over pressure limit) 400 mbar/40 kPa/6 psi 6 bar/600 kPa/90 psi 1 bar/100 kPa/15 psi 10 bar/1 MPa/150 psi 2 bar/200 kPa/30 psi 20 bar/2 MPa/300 psi

85

Cerabar S

40

Sensor range; Sensor overload (= OPL): 1M 1P 1S 1U 1W

2F 2H 2K 2M 2P 2S 2U 2W

50

4 bar/400 kPa/60 psi 10 bar/1 MPa/150 psi 40 bar/4 MPa/600 psi 100 bar/10 MPa/1500 psi 400 bar/40 MPa/6000 psi Sensors for absolute pressure Sensor nominal value (URL) 400 mbar/40 kPa/6 psi abs 1 bar/100 kPa/15 psi abs 2 bar/200 kPa/30 psi abs 4 bar/400 kPa/60 psi abs 10 bar/1 MPa/150 psi abs 40 bar/4 MPa/600 psi abs 100 bar/10 MPa/1500 psi abs 400 bar/40 MPa/6000 psi abs

Sensor range; mbar/bar Sensor range; kPa/MPa Sensor range; mmH2O/mH2O Sensor range; inH2O/ftH2O Sensor range; psi Customised; see additional specification Factory certificate 5-point; see additional specification DKD calibration: see additional specification

Membrane material: 1 2 3 5 6 7 8

70

AISI 316L Alloy C276 Monel Tantal AISI 316L with Gold-Rhodium coating AISI 316L with 0.09 mm PTFE foil (not for vacuum applications) AISI 316L with 0.25 mm PTFE foil (not for vacuum applications, only for non-hazardous areas)

Process connection, Material: 1D 1E 1G 1H 1K 1L 2A 2B 2D 2E 2G 2H TB TC TD TF SB SC SD

MR MS MT M3 M4 M5 TG TH TI

86

OPL (Over pressure limit) 6 bar/600 kPa/90 psi abs 10 bar/1 MPa/150 psi abs 20 bar/2 MPa/300 psi abs 28 bar/2.8 MPa/420 psi abs 40 bar/4 MPa/600 psi abs 160 bar/16 MPa/2400 psi abs 400 bar/40 MPa/6000 psi abs 600 bar/60 MPa/9000 psi abs

Calibration; Unit: 1 2 3 4 6 B C D

60

28 bar/2.8 MPa/420 psi 40 bar/4 MPa/600 psi 160 bar/16 MPa/2400 psi 400 bar/40 MPa/6000 psi 600 bar/60 MPa/9000 psi

Thread, flush-mounted process isolating diaphragm Thread ISO 228 G 1 A, AISI 316L Thread ISO 228 G 1 A, Alloy C Thread ISO 228 G 1 1/2 A, AISI 316L Thread ISO 228 G 1 1/2 A, Alloy C Thread ISO 228 G 2 A, AISI 316L Thread ISO 228 G 2 A, Alloy C Thread ANSI 1 MNPT, AISI 316L Thread ANSI 1 MNPT, Alloy C (CRN) Thread ANSI 1 1/2 MNPT, AISI 316L Thread ANSI 1 1/2 MNPT, Alloy C (CRN) Thread ANSI 2 MNPT, AISI 316L Thread ANSI 2 MNPT, Alloy C (CRN) Clamp connections Tri-Clamp, ISO 2852 DN 25 (1"), DIN 32676 DN 25, AISI 316L (CRN), EHEDG Tri-Clamp, ISO 2852 DN 38 (1 1/2"), DIN 32676 DN 40, AISI 316L (CRN), EHEDG Tri-Clamp, ISO 2852 DN 40 – DN 51 (2")/DN 50, AISI 316L (CRN), EHEDG Tri-Clamp, ISO 2852 DN 70 – DN 76.1 (3"), AISI 316L (CRN), EHEDG Pipe diaphragm seal, Clamp Tri-Clamp, ISO 2852 DN 25 (1"), AISI 316L (CRN) Tri-Clamp, ISO 2852 DN 38 (1 1/2"), AISI 316L, 3.1 + Pressure test acc. to PED Cat.II (CRN) Tri-Clamp, ISO 2852 DN 51 (2"), AISI 316L, 3.1 + Pressure test acc. to PED Cat.II (CRN) Hygienic connections DIN 11851 DN 50 PN 25, AISI 316L, EHEDG DIN 11851 DN 65 PN 25, AISI 316L, EHEDG DIN 11851 DN 80 PN 25, AISI 316L, EHEDG DIN 11851 DN 50 PN 25 thread, AISI 316L, EHEDG DIN 11851 DN 65 PN 25 thread, AISI 316L, EHEDG DIN 11851 DN 80 PN 25 thread, AISI 316L, EHEDG SMS 1" PN 25, AISI 316L, EHEDG SMS 1 1/2" PN 25, AISI 316L, EHEDG SMS 2" PN 25, AISI 316L, EHEDG

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S

70

Process connection, Material: TL TM TN TP TQ TS TK TR CN DN EN E1 CP CQ B3 C3 EF ER E3 B4 C4 C5

D3 D4 AC AN HC HN H0 AE AQ AF AR HF HR H3 AG AS AH AT J3 J4 J7 J5 J8 KC KF KL KH UA UB UC UD UG UH

90

APV-RJT 1" PN 40, AISI 316L APV-RJT 1 1/2" PN 40, AISI 316L APV-RJT 2" PN 40, AISI 316L APV-ISS 1" PN 40, AISI 316L APV-ISS 1 1/2" PN 40, AISI 316L APV-ISS 2" PN 40, AISI 316L DRD DN50 (65 mm) PN 25, AISI 316L Varivent Type N for pipes DN 40 – DN 162 PN 40, AISI 316L, EHEDG EN/DIN flanges, flush-mounted process isolating diaphragm DN 25 PN 10-40 B1, AISI 316L DN 25 PN 63-160 E, AISI 316L DN 25 PN 250 E, AISI 316L DN 25 PN 400 E, AISI 316L DN 32 PN 10-40 B1, AISI 316L DN 40 PN 10-40 B1, AISI 316L DN 50 PN 10-40 B1, AISI 316L DN 50 PN 63 B2, AISI 316L 2 DN 50 PN 100-160 E, AISI 316L DN 50 PN 250 E, AISI 316L DN 50 PN 400 E, AISI 316L DN 80 PN 10-40 B1, AISI 316L DN 80 PN 100 B2, AISI 316L DN 100 PN 100 B2, AISI 316L EN/DIN flanges with extended diaphragm seal, flush-mounted process isolating diaphragm DN 50 PN 10-40 B1, Tubus 50 mm/100 mm/200 mm, AISI 316L DN 80 PN 10-40 B1, Tubus 50 mm/100 mm/200 mm, AISI 316L ANSI flanges, flush-mounted process isolating diaphragm 1" 150 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN) 1" 300 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN) 1" 400/600 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN) 1" 900/1500 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN) 1" 2500 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN) 1 1/2" 150 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN) 1 1/2" 300 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN) 2" 150 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN) 2" 300 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN) 2" 400/600 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN) 2" 900/1500 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN) 2" 2500 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L 3" 150 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN) 3" 300 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN) 4" 150 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN) 4" 300 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN) ANSI flanges with extended diaphragm seal 2" 150 lbs RF, Tubus 2"/4"/6"/8", AISI 316/316L (CRN) 3" 150 lbs RF, Tubus 2"/4"/6"/8", AISI 316/316L (CRN) 3" 300 lbs RF, Tubus 2"/4"/6"/8", AISI 316/316L (CRN) 4" 150 lbs RF, Tubus 2"/4"/6"/8", AISI 316/316L (CRN) 4" 300 lbs RF, Tubus 2"/4"/6"/8", AISI 316/316L (CRN) JIS flanges, flush-mounted process isolating diaphragm 10K 25A RF, AISI 316L 10K 50A RF, AISI 316L 10K 80A RF, AISI 316L 10K 100A RF, AISI 316L Other Thread ISO 228 G 1/2 A PN 160, seperator, EN 837, welded, AISI 316L Thread ANSI 1/2 MNPT PN 160, seperator, welded, AISI 316L (CRN) Thread ISO 228 G 1/2 B, seperator, EN 837, threaded, AISI 316L Thread ANSI 1/2 MNPT, seperator, threaded, AISI 316L Thread 1/2 NPT PN 250, seperator, threaded, AISI 316L Thread 1 NPT PN 250, seperator, threaded, AISI 316L

Fill fluid: A B C D F

Endress+Hauser

Silicone oil ...m capillary, inert oil ...ft capillary, inert oil Vegetable oil Inert oil

87

Cerabar S

90

Fill fluid: G H K N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

100

High temperature oil, Temp. isolator 100 mm Silicone oil, Temp. isolator 100 mm Inert oil, cleaned from oil and greace Inert oil, cleaned for oxygen services ... m capillary, silicone oil ... ft capillary, silicone oil ... m capillary, high temperature oil ... ft capillary, high temperature oil ... m capillary, vegetable oil ... ft capillary, vegetable oil ... m capillary, Low temperature oil ... ft capillary, Low temperature oil

Additional option 1: A E B C D

M J N S 2 3 4

110

not selected SIL/IEC 61508 Declaration of conformity Material test certificate for wetted parts, inspection certificate as per EN 10204 3.1 acc. to specification 52005759 NACE MR0175 (wetted parts) Material test certificate for wetted parts, inspection certificate as per EN 10204 3.1 and NACE MR0175 material, inspection certificate as per EN 10204 acc. to specification 52010806 Overvoltage protection Software adjustment, see additional spec. HistoROM/M-DAT GL (German Lloyd)/ABS marine certificate Test report acc. to EN 10204 2.2 Routine test with certificate, inspection certificate as per EN 10204 3.1 Overpressure test with certificate, inspection certificate as per EN 10204 3.1

Additional option 2: A E G M J N P

S U 2 3 4

995

not selected SIL/IEC 61508 Declaration of conformity Separate housing, cable length see additional spec. + mounting bracket, wall/pipe, 316L Overvoltage protection Software adjustment, see additional spec. HistoROM/M-DAT Ra < 0.38 m/15.75 in, electropolished + EN10204-3.1 material (wetted) inspection certificate; in conjunction with process connection versions "TC", "TD" and "TR" please order roughness test separetely GL (German Lloyd)/ABS marine certificate Mounting bracket for wall/pipe, AISI 304 Test report acc. to EN 10204 2.2 Routine test with certificate, inspection certificate as per EN 10204 3.1 Overpressure test with certificate, inspection certificate as per EN 10204 3.1

Marking: 1 2

PMP75

88

Tagging (TAG), see additional spec. Bus adress, see additional spec.

order code

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S

Additional documentation Field of Activities

• Pressure measurement, Powerful instruments for process pressure, differential pressure, level and flow: FA004P/00/en

Technical Information

• Deltabar S: TI382P/00/en • Deltapilot S: TI416P/00/en • EMC test basic principles TI241F/00/en

Operating Instructions

4...20 mA HART: • Cerabar S: BA271P/00/de • Description of device functions Cerabar S/Deltabar S/Deltapilot S: BA274P/00/en PROFIBUS PA: • Cerabar S: BA295P/00/de • Description of device functions Cerabar S/Deltabar S/Deltapilot S: BA296P/00/en FOUNDATION Fieldbus: • Cerabar S: BA302P/00/de • Description of device functions Cerabar S/Deltabar S: BA303P/00/en

Brief operating instructions

• 4...20 mA HART, Cerabar S: KA1019P/00/en • PROFIBUS PA, Cerabar S: KA1022P/00/en • FOUNDATION Fieldbus, Cerabar S: KA1025P/00/en

Manual for Functional Safety (SIL)

• Cerabar S (4...20 mA): SD190P/00/en

Endress+Hauser

89

Cerabar S

Safety Instructions

90

Certificate/Type of Protection Device

Electronic insert

Documentation

Version in the order code

ATEX II 1/2 G Ex ia IIC T6

PMC71, PMP71, PMP75

– 4...20 mA HART, PROFIBUS PA, FOUNDATION Fieldbus

– XA244P

1

ATEX II 1/2 D

PMP71, PMP75

– 4...20 mA HART – PROFIBUS PA, FOUNDATION Fieldbus

– XA246P – XA289P

2

ATEX II 1/2 D Ex ia IIC

PMC71

– 4...20 mA HART – PROFIBUS PA, FOUNDATION Fieldbus

– XA247P – XA290P

2

ATEX II 1/3 D

PMP71, PMP75

– 4...20 mA HART – PROFIBUS PA, FOUNDATION Fieldbus

– XA248P – XA291P

4

ATEX II 2 G Ex d IIC T6

PMP71, PMP75

– 4...20 mA HART, PROFIBUS PA, FOUNDATION Fieldbus

– XA249P

5

ATEX II 2 G Ex d[ia] IIC T6

PMC71

– 4...20 mA HART, PROFIBUS PA., FOUNDATION Fieldbus

– XA250P

5

ATEX II 3 G Ex nA II T6

PMC71, PMP71, PMP75

– 4...20 mA HART, PROFIBUS PA, FOUNDATION Fieldbus

– XA251P

7

ATEX II 1/2 GD Ex ia IIC T6

PMC71, PMP71, PMP75

– 4...20 mA HART, PROFIBUS PA, FOUNDATION Fieldbus

– XA253P

3

ATEX II 1 GD Ex ia IIC T6

PMC71, PMP71, PMP75

– 4...20 mA HART, PROFIBUS PA, FOUNDATION Fieldbus

– XA276P

8

ATEX II 1/2 G Ex ia IIC T6 + ATEX II 2 G Ex d IIC T6

PMP71, PMP75

– 4...20 mA HART, PROFIBUS PA, FOUNDATION Fieldbus

– XA252P

B

Certificate/Type of Protection Device

Electronic insert

Documentation Version in the order code

IECEx Zone 0/1 Ex ia IIC T6

– 4...20 mA HART

– XB005P

I

Certificate/Type of Protection Device

Electronic insert

Documentation

Version in the order code

NEPSI Ex ia IIC T6

PMC71, PMP71, PMP75

– 4...20 mA HART, PROFIBUS PA, FOUNDATION Fieldbus

– XC003P

H

NEPSI Ex d IIC T6

PMP71, PMP75

– 4...20 mA HART, PROFIBUS PA, FOUNDATION Fieldbus

– XC005P

G

NEPSI Ex d[ia] IIC T6

PMC71

– 4...20 mA HART, PROFIBUS PA, FOUNDATION Fieldbus

– XC005P

G

PMC71, PMP71, PMP75

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S

Installation/Control Drawings

Overspill protection

Endress+Hauser

Certificate/Type of Protection

Device

Electronic Insert

Documentation

Version in the order code

FM IS Class I, II, III, Division 1, Groups A – G; NI, Class I Division 2, Groups A – D; AEx ia

PMC71, PMP71, PMP75

– 4...20 mA HART – PROFIBUS PA, FOUNDATION Fieldbus

– ZD147P – ZD188P

S

CSA IS Class I, II, III, Division 1, Groups A – G; Class I Division 2, Groups A – G

PMC71, PMP71, PMP75

– 4...20 mA HART – PROFIBUS PA, FOUNDATION Fieldbus

– ZD148P – ZD189P

U

FM IS + XP Class , Division 1, Groups A – D

PMP71, PMP75

– 4...20 mA HART – PROFIBUS PA, FOUNDATION Fieldbus

– ZD187P – ZD190P

C

CSA IS + XP Class I Division 1, Groups A – D

PMP71, PMP75

– 4...20 mA HART – PROFIBUS PA, FOUNDATION Fieldbus

– ZD154P – ZD191P

D

FM/CSA IS + XP Class I Division 1, Groups A – D

PMP71, PMP75

– 4...20 mA HART – PROFIBUS PA, FOUNDATION Fieldbus

– ZD154P + ZD187P – ZD190P + ZD191P

E

CSA +XP Class I Division 1, Groups B - D, Class II Division 1, Groups E - G, Class III

PMP71, PMP75

– 4...20 mA HART – PROFIBUS PA, FOUNDATION Fieldbus

– in Vorbereitung

-

• WHG: ZE260P/00/de

91

Cerabar S

Instruments International Endress+Hauser Instruments International AG Kaegenstrasse 2 4153 Reinach Switzerland Tel. +41 61 715 81 00 Fax +41 61 715 25 00 www.endress.com [email protected]

TI383P/00/EN/06.09 No. 71095447 CCS/FM+SGML 6.0

71095447

Operating Instructions

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 Process pressure measurement

BA302P/00/EN/05.10 71111799 Valid as of software version 03.00.zz

Overview of documentation

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Overview of documentation Device

Documentation

Content

Cerabar S FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Technical Information TI383P (PMC71, PMP71, PMP75) Technical Information TI438P (PMP72)

Technical data

Operating Instructions BA302P

– – – – –

2

Identification Installation Wiring Operation Commissioning, description of Quick Setup menus – Maintenance – Troubleshooting and spare parts – Appendix: illustration of menus

Remarks

– The documentation can be found on the documentation CD supplied. – The documentation is also available on the Internet. See: www.endress.com Download

Operating Instructions BA303P

– Examples of configuration for pressure and level measurement – Description of parameters – Troubleshooting – Appendix: illustration of menus

Brief Operating Instructions KA1025P

– – – – –

Installation Wiring Local operation Commissioning Description of Quick Setup menus

– The documentation is supplied with the device. – The documentation can also be found on the documentation CD supplied. – The documentation is also available on the Internet. See: www.endress.com Download

Fold-out brochure KA252P

– – – –

Wiring Operation without display Description of Quick Setup menus Operation HistoROM®/M-DAT

– The documentation is supplied with the device. See cover of the terminal compartment. – The documentation can also be found on the documentation CD supplied.

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Table of contents

Table of contents 1

Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4

Designated use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation, commissioning and operation . . . . . . . . Operational safety and process safety . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes on safety conventions and icons . . . . . . . . . . .

2

Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4

Device designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scope of delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CE mark, Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 4 4 5

6 9 9 9

3

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4

Incoming acceptance and storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4

Connecting the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the measuring unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overvoltage protection (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9

Onsite display (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FOUNDATION Fieldbus interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local operation – onsite display connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HistoROM®/M-DAT (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locking/unlocking operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Factory setting (reset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

Commissioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7

Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commissioning via an FF configuration program . . Selecting the language and measuring mode . . . . . Position adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scaling the OUT parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

7.1

Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

8

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

8.1 8.2

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Response of outputs to errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Endress+Hauser

10 10 10 19

8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9

Confirming messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repair of Ex-certified devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returning the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

72 72 72 73 74 74 74

9

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

10

Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

10.1 10.2

Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Patents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

20 21 22 22

23 25 28 40 43 43 46 48 48

51 51 53 54 55 57 61

3

Safety instructions

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

1

Safety instructions

1.1

Designated use

The Cerabar S is a pressure transmitter for measuring pressure and level. The manufacturer accepts no liability for damages resulting from incorrect use or use other than that designated.

1.2

Installation, commissioning and operation

The device is designed to meet state-of-the-art safety requirements and complies with applicable standards and EC regulations. If installed incorrectly or used for applications for which it is not intended, however, it is possible that application-related dangers may arise, e.g. product overflow due to incorrect installation or configuration. For this reason, installation, connection to the electricity supply, commissioning, operation and maintenance of the measuring system must only be carried out by trained, qualified specialists authorized to perform such work by the facility's owner-operator. The specialist staff must have read and understood these Operating Instructions and must follow the instructions they contain. Modifications and repairs to the device are permissible only if they are expressly approved in the Operating Instructions. Pay particular attention to the technical data on the nameplate.

1.3

Operational safety and process safety

Alternative monitoring measures must be taken to ensure operational safety and process safety during configuration, testing and maintenance work on the device.

1.3.1

Hazardous areas (optional)

Devices for use in hazardous areas are fitted with an additional nameplate ( ä 6). If using the measuring system in hazardous areas, the appropriate national standards and regulations must be observed. The device is accompanied by separate "Ex documentation", which is an integral part of these Operating Instructions. The installation regulations, connection values and safety instructions listed in this Ex document must be observed. The documentation number of the related safety instructions is also indicated on the additional nameplate. • Ensure that all personnel are suitably qualified.

4

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

1.4

Safety instructions

Notes on safety conventions and icons

In order to highlight safety-relevant or alternative operating procedures in the manual, the following conventions have been used, each indicated by a corresponding icon in the margin. Symbol

Meaning

# " !

Warning! A warning highlights actions or procedures which, if not performed correctly, will lead to personal injury, a safety hazard or the destruction of the device.

0

Explosion-protected, type-examined equipment If the device has this symbol embossed on its nameplate, it can be used in a hazardous area or a non-hazardous area, depending on the approval.

-

Hazardous area This symbol is used in the drawings of these Operating Instructions to indicate hazardous areas.

. % & ) * +

Caution! Caution highlights actions or procedures which, if not performed correctly, may lead to personal injury or the incorrect operation of the device. Note! A note highlights actions or procedures which, if not performed correctly, can have an indirect effect on operation or trigger an unexpected response on the part of the device.

– Devices used in hazardous areas must possess an appropriate type of protection. Safe area (non-hazardous area) This symbol is used in the drawings of these Operating Instructions to indicate non-hazardous areas. – Devices used in hazardous areas must possess an appropriate type of protection. Cables used in hazardous areas must meet the necessary safety-related characteristic quantities.

Direct current A terminal to which DC voltage is applied or through which direct current flows. Alternating current A terminal to which alternating voltage (sine-wave) is applied or through which alternating current flows. Ground connection A grounded terminal, which as far as the operator is concerned, is already grounded by means of a grounding system. Protective grounding (earth) terminal A terminal which must be connected to ground prior to establishing any other connections. Equipotential connection A connection that has to be connected to the plant grounding system: This may be a potential equalization line or a star grounding system depending on national or company codes of practice.

Safety instruction For safety instructions refer to the manual for the appropriate instrument version.

Endress+Hauser

5

Identification

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

!

2

Identification

2.1

Device designation

2.1.1

Nameplates

Note! • The MWP (maximum working pressure) is specified on the nameplate. This value refers to a reference temperature of 20°C (68°F) or 100°F (38 °C) for ANSI flanges. • The pressure values permitted at higher temperatures can be found in the following standards: – EN 1092-1: 2001 Tab. 18 1) – ASME B 16.5a – 1998 Tab. 2-2.2 F316 – ASME B 16.5a – 1998 Tab. 2.3.8 N10276 – JIS B 2220 • The test pressure corresponds to the overpressure limit (OPL) of the device = MWP x 1.5 2). • The Pressure Equipment Directive (EC Directive 97/23/EC) uses the abbreviation "PS". The abbreviation "PS" corresponds to the MWP (maximum working pressure) of the measuring device. 1) 2)

With regard to their stability-temperature property, the materials 1.4435 and 1.4404 are grouped together under 13EO in EN 1092-1 Tab. 18. The chemical composition of the two materials can be identical. The equation does not apply for PMP71 and PMP75 with a 40 bar (600 psi) or a 100 bar (1500 psi) measuring cell.

Aluminum and stainless steel housing (T14) R1

55

2 4

MWP

2,5

P

3

Span

6

7 8

Mat.

13

1 5

14

U=

10 14 15

9

12 11

23,5

Order Code: Ser.-No.:

Made in Germany, D-79689 Maulburg

Cerabar S

2,1 -0,1 26 P01-PMx7xxxx-18-xx-xx-xx-001

Fig. 1: 1

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

6

Nameplate for Cerabar S Order code See the specifications on the order confirmation for the meanings of the individual letters and digits. Serial number Degree of protection MWP (maximum working pressure) Symbol: Note: pay particular attention to the data in the "Technical Information"! Minimum/maximum span Nominal measuring range Electronic version (output signal) Supply voltage Wetted materials ID number of notified body with regard to Pressure Equipment Directive (optional) ID number of notified body with regard to ATEX (optional) GL-symbol for GL marine certificate (optional) not used Layout identification of the nameplate

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Identification

Devices for use in hazardous areas are fitted with an additional nameplate.

1 2 3 4

5

Dat.:

6

P01-xMD7xxxx-18-xx-xx-xx-002

Fig. 2: 1 2 3 4 5 6

Additional nameplate for devices for hazardous areas EC type-examination certificate number Type of protection e.g. II 1/2 G EEx ia IIC T4/T6 Electrical data Safety Instructions number e.g. XA235P Safety Instructions index e.g. A Date of device manufacture

Devices suitable for oxygen applications are fitted with an additional nameplate.

Bei Sauerstoffeinsatz/ for oxygen service Pmax 1 2 Tmax

3

P01-xxxxxxxx-18-xx-xx-xx-000

Fig. 3: 1 2 3

Endress+Hauser

Additional nameplate for devices suitable for oxygen applications Maximum pressure for oxygen applications Maximum temperature for oxygen applications Layout identification of the nameplate

7

Identification

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Hygenic stainless steel housing (T17)

18 19

Cerabar S

20

Made in Germany, D-79689 Maulburg

MWP Span p

21

1

Order Code: Ser.-No.:

2 3

22 4

5

23

6

7 Mat.

8

U=

24

-

25

9 Dat.:

10 12

13

14

15

16

11

26

Bei Sauerstoffeinsatz/for oxygen service: Tmax 27 Pmax 28

17 P01-PMx7xxxx-18-xx-xx-xx-003

Fig. 4: 1

Nameplate for Cerabar S

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Order code See the specifications on the order confirmation for the meanings of the individual letters and digits. Serial number MWP (maximum working pressure) Symbol: Note: pay particular attention to the data in the "Technical Information"! Minimum/maximum span Nominal measuring range Electronic version (output signal) Supply voltage Wetted materials Degree of protection

11 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

Optional: ID number of notified body with regard to Pressure Equipment Directive ID number of notified body with regard to ATEX 3A-symbol CSA-symbol FM-symbol GL-symbol for GL marine certificate Ex-symbol EC type-examination certificate Type of protection e.g. II 1/2 G EEx ia IIC T4/T6 Approval number for WHG overfill protection Temperature operating range for devices for use in hazardous areas Electrical data for devices for use in hazardous areas Safety Instructions number e.g. XA283P Safety Instructions index e.g. A Date of device manufacture Maximum temperature for devices suitable for oxygen applications Maximum pressure for devices suitable for oxygen applications

2.1.2

Identifying the sensor type

See parameter "Sensor Meas.Type" in Operating Instruction BA303P. The Operating Instruction BA303P can be found on the supplied documentation CD.

8

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

2.2

Identification

Scope of delivery

The scope of delivery comprises: • Cerabar S pressure transmitter • For devices with the "HistoROM/M-DAT" option: CD-ROM with Endress+Hauser operating program and documentation • Optional accessories Documentation supplied: • Operating Instructions BA302P and BA303P, Technical Information Cerabar S TI383P (PMC71, PMP71, PMP75); TI438P (PMP72) and the Safety Instructions and brochures can be found on the documentation CD supplied.  ä 2, "Overview of documentation" section. • Brief Operating Instructions KA1025P • Fold-out brochure KA252P • Final inspection report • Additional Safety Instructions with ATEX, IECEx and NEPSI devices • Optional: factory calibration form, test certificates

2.3

CE mark, Declaration of Conformity

The devices are designed to meet state-of-the-art safety requirements, have been tested and left the factory in a condition in which they are safe to operate. The devices comply with the applicable standards and regulations as listed in the EC Declaration of Conformity and thus comply with the statutory requirements of the EC Directives. Endress+Hauser confirms the conformity of the device by affixing to it the CE mark.

2.4

Registered trademarks

KALREZ, VITON, TEFLON Registered trademarks of E.I. Du Pont de Nemours & Co., Wilmington, USA TRI-CLAMP Registered trademark of Ladish & Co., Inc., Kenosha, USA FOUNDATIONTM Fieldbus Registered trademark of the Fieldbus Foundation Austin, Texas, USA GORE-TEX® Registered trademark of W.L. Gore & Associates, Inc., USA

Endress+Hauser

9

Installation

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

3

Installation

3.1

Incoming acceptance and storage

3.1.1

Incoming acceptance

• Check the packaging and the contents for damage. • Check the shipment, make sure nothing is missing and that the scope of supply matches your order.

3.1.2

Storage

The device must be stored in a dry, clean area and protected against impact (EN 837-2). Storage temperature range: • PMC71, PMP71, PMP75 – –40 to + 90 °C – Onsite display: –40 to +85°C (–40 to +185°F) – Separate housing: –40 to +60°C (–40 to +140°F) • PMP72 – see TI438P

3.2

Installation conditions

3.2.1

Dimensions

For dimensions, please refer to the Technical Information for Cerabar S TI383P (PMC71, PMP71, PMP75); TI438P (PMP72), "Mechanical construction" section.  ä 2, "Overview of documentation".

3.3

!

10

Installation instructions

Note! • Due to the orientation of the Cerabar S, there may be a shift in the zero point, i.e. when the container is empty or partially full, the measured value does not display zero. You can correct this zero point shift using the "Zero" key on the electronic insert or externally on the device or via the onsite display.  ä 25, Section 5.2.1 "Position of the operating elements",  ä 26, Section 5.2.2 "Function of the operating elements – onsite display not connected" and  ä 54, Section 6.4 "Position adjustment". • For PMP75, please refer to Section 3.3.2 "Installation instructions for devices with diaphragm seals – PMP75",  ä 13. • To ensure optimal readability of the onsite display, it is possible to rotate the housing up to 380°.  ä 19, Section 3.3.8 "Rotating the housing". • Endress+Hauser offers a mounting bracket for installing on pipes or walls.  ä 16, Section 3.3.5 "Wall and pipe-mounting (optional)".

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

3.3.1

!

Installation

Installation instructions for devices without diaphragm seals – PMP71, PMP72, PMC71

Note! • Do not clean or touch the process isolating diaphragm with hard or pointed objects. • If a heated Cerabar S is cooled during the cleaning (e.g. by cold water), a vacuum develops for a short time, whereby water can penetrate the sensor through the pressure compensation (1). If this is the case, mount the sensor with the pressure compensation (1) pointing downwards. 1 FIELD TERMINALS

1

SLANIMRET DLEIF

1

GORE-TEX®

• Keep the pressure compensation and filter (1) free from contamination and water. • Cerabar S devices without a diaphragm seal are mounted as per the norms for a manometer (DIN EN 837-2). We recommend the use of shutoff devices and siphons. The orientation depends on the measuring application. Pressure measurement in gases

➀

➁

P01-PMx7xxxx-11-xx-xx-xx-001

Fig. 5: 1 2

Measuring arrangement for pressure measurement in gases Cerabar S Shutoff device

• Mount Cerabar S with shutoff device above the tapping point so that the condensate can flow into the process.

Endress+Hauser

11

Installation

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Pressure measurement in steams

➀ ➃

➁ ➁

➂ ➀ P01-PMx7xxxx-11-xx-xx-xx-002

Fig. 6: 1 2 3 4

Measuring arrangement for pressure measurement in steams Cerabar S Shutoff device U-shaped siphon Circular siphon

• Mount Cerabar S with siphon below the tapping point. The siphon reduces the temperature to almost ambient temperature. • Fill the siphon with fluid before commissioning. Pressure measurement in liquids

➀

➁

P01-PMx7xxxx-11-xx-xx-xx-003

Fig. 7: 1 2

Measuring arrangement for pressure measurement in liquids Cerabar S Shutoff device

• Mount Cerabar S with shutoff device below or at the same level as the tapping point.

12

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Installation

Level measurement

P01-PMP75xxx-11-xx-xx-xx-000

Fig. 8:

Measuring arrangement for level

• Always mount Cerabar S below the lowest measuring point. • Do not mount the device at the following positions: In the fill flow or at a point in the tank which could be affected by pressure pulses from an agitator. • Do not mount the device in the suction area of a pump. • The calibration and functional test can be carried out more easily if you mount the device after a shutoff device. PVDF interchangeable threaded boss

!

Note! For devices with a PVDF interchangeable threaded boss, a maximum torque of 7 Nm (5.16 lbs ft) is permitted. The thread connection may become loose at high temperatures and pressures. This means that the integrity of the thread must be checked regularly and may need to be tightened using the torque given above. Teflon tape is recommended for sealing with the 1/2 NPT thread.

3.3.2

!

Installation instructions for devices with diaphragm seals – PMP75

Note! • The Cerabar S with a diaphragm seal is screwed in, flanged or clamped, depending on the type of diaphragm seal. • The diaphragm seal and the pressure transmitter together form a closed, calibrated system which is filled with oil. This hole is sealed and may not be opened. • Do not clean or touch process isolating diaphragm of the diaprhagm seal with hard or pointed objects. • Do not remove the protection of the process isolating diaphragm until shortly before installation. • When using a mounting bracket, sufficient strain relief must be ensured for the capillaries in order to prevent the capillary bending down (bending radius 100 mm (3.94 in)). • Please note that the hydrostatic pressure of the liquid columns in the capillaries can cause zero point shift. The zero point shift can be corrected.  ä 54, Section 6.4 "Position adjustment". • Please note the application limits of the diaphragm seal filling oil as detailed in the Technical Information for Cerabar S TI383P, "Planning instructions for diaphragm seal systems" section. In order to obtain more precise measurement results and to avoid a defect in the device, mount the capillaries as follows: • Vibration-free (in order to avoid additional pressure fluctuations) • Not in the vicinity of heating or cooling lines • Insulate if the ambient temperature is below or above the reference temperature • With a bending radius 100 mm (3.94 in).

Endress+Hauser

13

Installation

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Vacuum application For applications under vacuum, Endress+Hauser recommends mounting the pressure transmitter underneath the diaphragm seal. A vacuum load of the diaphragm seal caused by the presence of filling oil in the capillaries is hereby prevented. When the pressure transmitter is mounted above the diaphragm seal, the maximum height difference H1 in accordance with the illustration below left must not be exceeded. The maximum height difference depends on the density of the filling oil and the smallest ever pressure that is permitted to occur at the diaphragm seal (empty container), see illustration below right.

FIELD TERMINALS

12.0

H1

Height difference H1 [m]

Low temperature oil 10.0

Vegetable oil

8.0

Silicone oil 6.0 High temperature oil

4.0

Inert oil

2.0 0.0

50 100 200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900 1000

Pressure at diaphragm seal [mbarabs] P01-PMx7xxxx-11-xx-xx-xx-008

Fig. 9:

Installation above the diaphragm seal

P01-PMP75xxx-05-xx-xx-en-011

Fig. 10:

Diagram of maximum installation height above the diaphragm seal for vacuum applications depending on the pressure at the diaphragm seal

Mounting with temperature isolator

max. 115

P01-PMx7xxxx-11-xx-xx-xx-005

Endress+Hauser recommends the use of temperature isolators in the event of constant extreme fluid temperatures which lead to the maximum permissible electronics temperature of +85°C (+185°F) being exceeded. The additional installation height also brings about a zero point shift of approx. 21 mbar (0.315 psi) due to the hydrostatic columns in the temperature isolator. You can correct this zero point shift.  ä 54, Section 6.4 "Position adjustment".

14

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

3.3.3

Installation

Seal for flange mounting

➀

➁

P01-FMD7xxxx-11-xx-xx-xx-002

Fig. 11: 1 2

#

Mounting the versions with flange or diaphragm seal

Process isolating diaphragm Seal

Warning! The seal is not allowed to press on the process isolating diaphragm as this could affect the measurement result.

3.3.4

Installation with heat insulation – PMC71 high temperature version and PMP72/PMP75

The devices must only be insulated up to a certain height. The maximum permitted insulation height is indicated on the devices and applies to an insulation material with a heat conductivity  0.04 W/(m x K) and to the maximum permitted ambient and process temperature ( see table below). The data were determined under the most critical application "quiescent air".

Insulation material

TA

TP P01-PMx7xxxx-11-xx-xx-xx-010

Fig. 12:

Maximum insulation height, here e.g. PMC71 with flange

PMC71

PMP75

Ambient temperature (TA)

 70 °C (158°F)

70 °C (158°F)

Process temperatur (TP)

150 °C (302°F)  400 °C (752°F)

Heat conductivity insulation material

1)

Endress+Hauser

0,04 W/(m x K)

PMP72 50 °C (122°F) 1

 280 °C (536°F) at 100°C (212°F): 0,04 W/(m x K) at 300°C (572°F): linearly increasing to 0,072 W/(m x xK)

Depending on the diaphragm seal filling oil used ( see Technical Information TI383P Cerabar S)

15

Installation

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

3.3.5

Wall and pipe-mounting (optional)

52

119 133

Endress+Hauser offers a mounting bracket for installing the device on pipes or walls.

70

P01-xMx5xxxx-06-xx-xx-xx-001

Please note the following when mounting: • Devices with capillary lines: mount capillaries with a bending radius of 100 mm (3.94 in). • When mounting on a pipe, tighten the nuts on the bracket uniformly with a torque of at least 5 Nm (3.69 lbs ft).

16

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

3.3.6

Installation

Assembling and mounting the "separate housing" version

6 5 4

7

3 2

1

r ³ 120 mm

P01-PMx7xxxx-11-xx-xx-xx-011

Fig. 13: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

"Separate housing" version

In the "separate housing" version, the sensor is supplied with the process connection and cable ready-fitted. Cable with connection jack Pressure compensation Plug Locking screw Housing fitted with housing adapter, included Mounting bracket suitable for wall and pipe mounting, included

Assembly and mounting

Endress+Hauser

1.

Plug the connector (item 4) into the corresponding connection jack of the cable (item 2).

2.

Plug the cable into the housing adapter (item 6).

3.

Tighten the locking screw (item 5).

4.

Mount the housing on a wall or pipe using the mounting bracket (item 7). When mounting on a pipe, tighten the nuts on the bracket uniformly with a torque of at least 5 Nm (3.69 lbs ft). Mount the cable with a bending radius (r) 120 mm (4.72 in).

17

Installation

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

3.3.7

PMP71, version prepared for diaphragm seal mount – welding recommendation

➀ ➁ ➂

5

A1

ø2.5 ø7.95 P01-PMP71xxx-11-xx-xx-xx-000

Fig. 14: 1 2 3 A1

Version U1: prepared for diaphragm seal mount

Hole for filling fluid Bearing Setscrew See the following "Welding recommendation" table

Welding recommendation For the "U1 Prepared for diaphragm seal mount" version in feature 70 "Process connection; Material" in the order code up to and including 40 bar (600 psi) sensors, Endress+Hauser recommends welding on the diaphragm seal as follows: the total welding depth of the fillet weld is 1 mm (0.04 in) with an external diameter of 16 mm (0.63 in). Welding is performed according to the WIG method. Consecutive seam no.

A1 for sensors  40 bar (600 psi)

Sketch/welding groove shape, dimension as per DIN 8551

s1 a0.8

P01-PMP71xxx-11-xx-xx-xx-001

18

Base material matching

Welding process DIN EN ISO 24063

141 Adapter made of 1.4435 (AISI 316L) to be welded to diaphragm seal made of 1.4435 or 1.4404 (AISI 316L)

Welding position

Inert gas, additives

PB

Inert gas Ar/H 95/5 Additive: 1.4430 (ER 316L Si)

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

3.3.8

Installation

Rotating the housing

The housing can be rotated up to 380° by loosening the setscrew.

FIELD TERMINALS

max. 380°

P01-PMx7xxxx-17-xx-xx-xx-000

Fig. 15:

Aligning the housing

– T14 and T15 housing: loosen setscrew with a 2 mm (0.08 in) Allen key. Hygenic T17 housing: loosen setscrew with a 3 mm (0.12 in) Allen key. – Rotate housing (max. up to 380°). – Retighten setscrew.

3.3.9

Closing the covers on the hygenic stainless steel housing (T17)

P01-PMD75xxx-17-xx-xx-xx-000

Fig. 16:

Closing the covers

The covers for the terminal and electronics compartment are hooked into the housing and closed with a screw. These screws should be tightened handtight (2 Nm (1,48 lbf ft)) to the stop to ensure that the covers sit tightly.

3.4

Post-installation check

After installing the device, carry out the following checks: • Are all screws firmly tightened? • Are the housing covers screwed down tight?

Endress+Hauser

19

Wiring

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

!

4

Wiring

4.1

Connecting the device

Note! • When using the measuring device in hazardous areas, installation must comply with the corresponding national standards and regulations and the Safety Instructions or Installation or Control Drawings. • Devices with integrated overvoltage protection must be grounded. • Protective circuits against reverse polarity, HF influences and overvoltage peaks are installed. • The supply voltage must match the supply voltage on the nameplate. ( ä 6, Section 2.1.1 "Nameplates".) • Switch off the supply voltage before connecting the device. • Remove the housing cover of the terminal compartment. • Guide the cable through the gland. For cable specifications,  ä 21, Section 4.2.3. • Connect the device in accordance with the following diagram. • Screw down the housing cover. • Switch on the supply voltage.

➀

➃

FF

FF

➁

➄ FF

FF

➂ P01-xMx7xxxx-04-xx-xx-xx-009

Fig. 17: 1 2 3 4 5

20

Electrical connection of FOUNDATION Fieldbus Please refer also to Section 4.2.1 "Supply voltage",  ä 21.

Housing Internal ground terminal External ground terminal Supply voltage, for version in non-hazardous area = 9 to 32 V DC Devices with integrated overvoltage protection are labeled OVP (overvoltage protection) here.

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

4.1.1

Wiring

Connecting devices with 7/8" connectors

– + –

7/8”

+

+– Fig. 18:

4.2

!

P01-xxx7xxxx-04-xx-xx-xx-003

Left: electrical connection for devices with 7/8" connector Right: view of the connector at the device

Connecting the measuring unit

Note! For further information on the network structure and grounding and for further bus system components such as bus cables, see the relevant documentation, e.g. Operating Instructions BA013S "FOUNDATION Fieldbus Overview" and the FOUNDATION Fieldbus Guideline.

4.2.1

Supply voltage

• Version for non-hazardous area: 9 to 32 V DC

!

Note! • When using the measuring device in hazardous areas, installation must comply with the corresponding national standards and regulations and the Safety Instructions or Installation or Control Drawings. • All explosion-protection data are given in a separate documentation which is available upon request. The Ex documentation is available as standard with all devices approved for use in explosion hazardous areas.

4.2.2

Current consumption

15 mA ±1 mA, switch-on current corresponds to IEC 61158-2, Clause 21.

4.2.3

Cable specification

• Use a twisted, shielded two-wire cable, preferably cable type A. • Terminals for wire cross-sections: 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 (20 to 14 AWG) • Outer cable diameter: 5 to 9 mm (0.2 to 0.35 in)

!

Endress+Hauser

Note! For further information on the cable specifications, see Operating Instructions BA013S "FOUNDATION Fieldbus Overview", FOUNDATION Fieldbus Guideline and IEC 61158-2 (MBP).

21

Wiring

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

4.2.4

Grounding and shielding

Cerabar S must be grounded, for example by means of the external ground terminal. Different grounding and shielding installation methods are available for FOUNDATION Fieldbus networks such as: • Isolated installation (see also IEC 61158-2) • Installation with multiple grounding • Capacitive installation

4.3

Overvoltage protection (optional)

Devices showing version "M" in feature 100 "Additional options 1" or feature 110 "Additional options 2" in the order code are equipped with overvoltage protection (see also Technical Information TI383P "Ordering information"). • Overvoltage protection: – Nominal functioning DC voltage: 600 V – Nominal discharge current: 10 kA • Surge current check î = 20 kA as per DIN EN 60079-14: 8/20 s satisfied • Arrester AC current check I = 10 A satisfied

#

Warning! Devices with integrated overvoltage protection must be grounded.

4.4

Post-connection check

Perform the following checks after completing electrical installation of the device: • Does the supply voltage match the specifications on the nameplate? • Is the device connected as per Section 4.1? • Are all screws firmly tightened? • Are the housing covers screwed down tight? As soon as voltage is applied to the device, the green LED on the electronic insert lights up for a few seconds or the connected onsite display lights up.

22

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

5

Operation

Operation

Feature 20 "Output; operation" in the order code provides you with information on the operating options available to you. Versions in the order code

Operation

P

FOUNDATION Fieldbus; external operation, LCD

Via onsite display or 1 key on the exterior of the device

Q

FOUNDATION Fieldbus; internal operation, LCD

Via onsite display or 1 key on the inside of the device

R

FOUNDATION Fieldbus; internal operation

Without onsite display, 1 key on the inside of the device

5.1

Onsite display (optional)

A 4-line liquid crystal display (LCD) is used for display and operation. The onsite display shows measured values, fault messages and notice messages. The display of the device can be turned in 90° steps. Depending on the orientation of the device, this makes it easy to operate the device and read the measured value. Functions: • 8-digit measured value display including sign and decimal point, unit display • Bar graph as graphic display of the current pressure measured value in relation to the set pressure range in the Pressure Transducer Block. The pressure range is set by means of the SCALE_IN parameter. • Easy and complete menu guidance by dividing the parameters into several levels and groups. • Each parameter has a 3-digit ID to aid navigation. • Option of configuring the display according to individual requirements and preferences, such as language, alternating display, contrast setting, display of other measured values such as sensor temperature • Comprehensive diagnostic functions (fault and warning message, maximum indicator, etc.) • Rapid and safe commissioning using Quick Setup menus.

Measured value display Function name

Value

Parameter Identification number

Header line Main line Information line –

+

E

Unit Symbol Bargraph

Editing modes Operating keys Selection options

Value that can be edited

Current measured value P01-xxxxxxxx-07-xx-xx-en-011

Endress+Hauser

23

Operation

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

The following table illustrates the symbols that can appear on the onsite display. Four symbols can occur at one time. Symbol

Meaning Alarm symbol – Symbol flashing: warning, device continues measuring. – Symbol permanently lit: error, device does not continue measuring. Note: The alarm symbol may overlie the tendency symbol. Lock symbol The operation of the device is locked. For information on unlocking the device,  ä 46, Section 5.7 "Locking/unlocking operation". Communication symbol Data transfer via communication

Simulation symbol Simulation mode is activated. DIP switch 2 for simulation is set to "On". See also Section 5.2.1 "Position of the operating elements"  ä 25, Page 48 "Simulation". Tendency symbol (increasing) The primary value of the Pressure Transducer Block is increasing.

Tendency symbol (decreasing) The primary value of the Pressure Transducer Block is decreasing.

Tendency symbol (constant) The primary value of the Pressure Transducer Block has remained constant over the past few minutes.

24

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Operation

5.2

Operating elements

5.2.1

Position of the operating elements

The operating keys of the housing T14 (aluminium or stainless steel) are located either outside of the housing, under the protection cap or upon the electronic insert. The operating keys of the hygenic stainless steel housing T17 are located inside the housing upon the electronic insert. In addition, there are three operating keys on the optional onsite display.

Sim.

➄➅ on

➀

➀ off

1

➁

➂

2

➃

0% Zero Simulation

Sensor

0% Zero

on off

HW

Histo ROM

2

PC

1

Display

P01-xMD7xxxx-19-xx-xx-xx-075

Fig. 19: 1

P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-xx-106

Operating key external, under the protective flap Fig. 20:

Operating key for position adjustment (zero point correction) and total reset

1 2 3 4 5 6

Endress+Hauser

Operating key and operating elements, internal

Green LED to indicate value is accepted Operating key for position adjustment (zero point correction) and total reset Slot for optional display Slot for optional HistoROM®/M-DAT DIP switch for locking/unlocking parameters relevant to the measured value DIP switch for simulation mode

25

Operation

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

5.2.2

Function of the operating elements – onsite display not connected

Key(s)

Meaning

0% Zero

Sim.

P02-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-xx-107

on

1

2

off

P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-xx-134

– Position adjustment (zero point correction): press key for at least 3 seconds. The LED on the electronic insert lights up briefly if the pressure applied has been accepted for position adjustment. È See also the following section "Performing POSITION ADJUSTMENT on site." – Total reset: press key for at least 12 seconds. The LED on the electronic insert lights up briefly if a reset is being carried out. – DIP switch 1: for locking/unlocking parameters relevant to the measured value. Factory setting: off (unlocked)  ä 46, Section 5.7 "Locking/unlocking operation". – DIP switch 2: for simulation mode Factory setting: off (simulation mode off)  ä 48, Section 5.8 "Simulation".

Performing position adjustment on site

!

Note! • Operation must be unlocked.  ä 46, Section 5.7 "Locking/unlocking operation". • The device is configured for the Pressure measuring mode as standard. – Operation via FF configuration program: In the Pressure Transducer Block, change the measuring mode by means of the PRIMARY_VALUE_TYPE and LINEARIZATION parameters. – Operation via digital communication: change the measuring mode by means of the MEASURING MODE parameter. – You can change the measuring mode by means of the MEASURING MODE parameter.  ä 53, Section 6.3 "Selecting the language and measuring mode". • The pressure applied must be within the nominal pressure limits of the sensor. See information on the nameplate. Perform position adjustment:

26

1.

Pressure is present at device.

2.

Press key for at least 3 seconds.

3.

If the LED on the electronic insert lights up briefly, the pressure applied has been accepted for position adjustment. If the LED does not light up, the pressure applied was not accepted. Observe the input limits. For error messages,  ä 62, Section 8.1 "Messages".

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

5.2.3

Operation

Function of the operating elements – onsite display connected

Key(s)

Meaning

O S F

– Navigate upwards in the picklist – Edit numerical values or characters within a function – Navigate downwards in the picklist – Edit numerical values or characters within a function – Confirm entry – Go to next item

O and F

Contrast setting of onsite display: increase

S and F

Contrast setting of onsite display: reduce

O and S

ESC functions: – Exit the editing mode without saving the altered value – You are in the menu within a function group: the first time you press the keys simultaneously, you go back one parameter in the function group. Every subsequent time you press the keys simultaneously, you go up one level in the menu. – You are in the menu on a selection level: every time you press the keys simultaneously, you go up one level in the menu.

Sim.

Note: For the terms function group, level, selection level,  ä 40, Section 5.4.1

on

1

2

– DIP switch 1: for locking/unlocking parameters relevant to the measured value. Factory setting: off (unlocked) – DIP switch 2: for the simulation mode Factory setting: off (simulation mode off)

off

P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-xx-134

Endress+Hauser

27

Operation

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

5.3

FOUNDATION Fieldbus interface

5.3.1

System architecture

The following diagram shows two typical examples of a FOUNDATION Fieldbus network with the associated components.

Industrial Network

FF-HSE BT

FF-H1

LD

SB

BT

PS

BT PS

FF-H1 BT

P01-xxxxxxxx-02-xx-xx-xx-001

Fig. 21:

FOUNDATION Fieldbus system architecture with associated components

FF-HSE: High Speed Ethernet, FF-H1: FOUNDATION Fieldbus-H1, LD: Linking Device FF-HSE/FF-H1, PS: Bus Power Supply, SB: Safety Barrier, BT: Bus Terminator The system can be connected in the following ways: – A linking device makes the connection to higher-order fieldbus levels (e.g. High Speed Ethernet (HSE)) possible. – An FF-H1 connecting card is needed for direct connection to a process control system.

!

28

Note! Further information on FOUNDATION Fieldbus can be found in Operating Instructions BA013S "FOUNDATION Fieldbus Overview, Installation and Commissioning Guidelines", the FOUNDATION Fieldbus Specification or on the Internet at "http://www. fieldbus.org".

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

5.3.2

Operation

Number of devices

• Endress+Hauser Cerabar S devices meet the requirements of the FISCO model. • Due to the low current consumption, the following can be operated at one bus segment when installation is performed according to FISCO: Up to HW version 1.10: – Up to 7 Cerabar S devices for EEx ia, CSA and FM IS applications – Up to 25 Cerabar S devices in all other applications, e.g. in non hazardous areas, EEx nA etc. As of HW version 02.00: – Up to 6 Cerabar S devices for EEx ia, CSA and FM IS applications – Up to 24 Cerabar S devices in all other applications, e.g. in non hazardous areas, EEx nA etc. The maximum number of measuring devices at one bus segment is defined by their current consumption, the performance of the bus coupler, and the required bus length. As of hardware version 1.10, you will find a label in the device on the electronic insert.

5.3.3

Operation

You can obtain special configuration and operating programs from various manufacturers for the configuration, such as the FieldCare operating program from Endress+Hauser  ä 43, Section 5.5 "FieldCare". These configuration programs make it possible to configure FF functions and all the device-specific parameters. The predefined function blocks allow uniform access to all the network and device data.

5.3.4

Network configuration

You require the following to configure a device and integrate it into an FF network: • An FF configuration program • The Cff file (Common File Format: *.cff, *.fhx) • The device description (DD: *.sym, *.ffo) Predefined standard DDs, which can be obtained from FOUNDATION Fieldbus, are available for the basic functions of measuring devices. You require the device-specific DD to be able to access all the functions. The files for Cerabar S can be acquired as follows: • Internet Endress+Hauser: http://www.de.endress.com  Search for FOUNDATION Fieldbus • Internet FOUNDATION Fieldbus: http://www.fieldbus.org • On CD-ROM from Endress+Hauser, order number: 56003896 The device is integrated into the FF network as follows: • Start the FF configuration program. • Download the Cff and device description files (ffo, *.sym, *.cff or *.fhx files) to the system. • Configure the interface, see Note. • Configure the device for the measuring task and for the FF system.

!

Endress+Hauser

Note! • For more in-depth information on integrating the device into the FF system, see the description for the configuration software used. • When integrating the field devices into the FF system, make sure you are using the right files. You can read out the required version by means of the DEV_REV and DD_REV parameters in the Resource Block.

29

Operation

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

5.3.5

Device identification and addressing

FOUNDATION Fieldbus identifies the device using its ID code and automatically assigns it a suitable field address. The identity code cannot be changed. The device appears in the network display once you have started the FF configuration program and integrated the device into the network. The blocks available are displayed under the device name. If the device description has not yet been loaded, the blocks report "Unknown" or "(UNK)". Cerabar S reports as follows: –

➀ –

➁

EH_CerabarS-XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX RS_XXXXXXXXXXX (RB2) TRD1_XXXXXXXXXXX (PCD) SERVICE_XXXXXXXXXXX (SERVICE) DIAGNOSTIC_XXXXXXXXXXX (DIAGNOSTIC) DISPLAY_XXXXXXXXXXX (DISP) AI1_XXXXXXXXXXX (AI) AI2_XXXXXXXXXXX (AI) DI_XXXXXXXXXXX (DI) DO_XXXXXXXXXXX (DO) PID_XXXXXXXXXXX (PID) ARTH_XXXXXXXXXXX (ARB) CHAR_XXXXXXXXXXX (SCB) ISEL_XXXXXXXXXXX (ISB) INTG_XXXXXXXXXXX (ITB) AALM_XXXXXXXXXXX (AALB) P01-PMx7xxxx-05-xx-xx-xx-010

Fig. 22: 1 2

Typical Cerabar S display in a configuration program after the connection has been established

Device name Serial number

5.3.6

Cerabar S block model

With FOUNDATION Fieldbus, all the device parameters are categorized according to their functional properties and task and are generally assigned to three different blocks. A FOUNDATION Fieldbus device has the following block types: • A Resource Block (device block): This block contains all the device-specific features of the device. • One or more Transducer Blocks A Transducer Block contains all the measuring and device-specific parameters of the device. The measuring principles, such as pressure or totalizers, are mapped in the Transducer Blocks. • One or more function blocks: Function blocks contain the automation functions of the device. A distinction is made between different function blocks such as the Analog Input Block or PID Block. Each of these function blocks is used to execute different application functions. The function blocks can be connected by means of an FF configuration program, depending on the automation task. The device thus takes on simple control functions, thereby relieving the workload on the higher-order process control system. Cerabar S has the following blocks: • Resource Block (device block)

30

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Operation

• 4 Transducer Blocks – Pressure Transducer Block This Block supplies the output variables PRIMARY_VALUE and SECONDARY_VALUE. It contains all the parameters to configure the measuring device for the measuring task such as measuring mode selection, linearization function and unit selection. – Service Transducer Block This Block supplies the output variables COUNTER P_PMAX, PRESSURE_1_ MAX_ RESETTABLE and PRESSURE_1_AFTER_DAMPING. It also includes all the counters for measuring range overshoot/undershoot for pressure and temperature, minimum and maximum measured values for pressure and temperature and the HistoROM function. – Display Transducer Block This Block does not return any output variables. It contains all the parameters for configuring the onsite display such as DISPLAY_LANGUAGE and DISPLAY_CONTRAST. – Diagnostic Transducer Block This Block does not return any output variables. It contains the simulation function for the Pressure Transducer Block, parameters to configure the alarm response and the user limits for pressure and temperature. • 8 function blocks – 2 Analog Input Blocks (AI) – Discrete Output Block (DO) – Discrete Input Block (DI) – PID Block (PID) – Arithmetic Block (ARB) – Signal Characterizer Block (SCB) – Input Selector Block (ISB) – Analog Alarm Block (AALB) – Integrator Block (IT) In addition to the pre-instantiated blocks already mentioned, the following blocks can also be instantiated: • 3 Analog Input Blocks (AI) • 1 Discrete Output Block (DO) • 1 Discrete Input Block (DI) • 1 PID Block (PID) • 1 Arithmetic Block (ARB) • 1 Signal Characterizer Block (SCB) • 1 Input Selector Block (ISB) • 1 Analog Alarm Block (AALB) • 1 Integrator Block (IT) A total of 20 blocks can be instanced in Cerabar S altogether, including the blocks already instanced. For instancing blocks, see the appropriate Operating Instructions of the configuration program used.

!

Endress+Hauser

Note! Endress+Hauser Guideline BA062S. The guideline provides an overview of the standard function blocks that are described in FOUNDATION Fieldbus Specifications FF 890 - 894. It is designed to help operators use the blocks implemented in the Endress+Hauser field devices.

31

Operation

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Block configuration when device is delivered The block model shown below illustrates the block configuration when the device is delivered.

Measured variable

Sensor Signal evaluation

Pressure Transducer Block

Resource Block

Display with scaling

Primary value Secondary value

Service Transducer Block

Analog Input Block 1 CHANNEL = 1 L_TYPE = Direct

Analog Input Block 2 CHANNEL = 2 L_TYPE = Direct

Display Transducer Block Arithmetic Block

PID Block

Input Selector Block

Discrete Input Block

Discrete Output Block

Signal Characterizer Block

Analog Alarm Block

Integrator Block

Diagnostic Transducer Block

P01-PMx7xxxx-02-xx-xx-en-006

Fig. 23:

Block configuration when delivered

The Pressure Transducer Block returns the Primary Value (pressure measured value) and the Secondary Value (sensor temperature). The Primary Value and Secondary Value are each transferred to an Analog Input Block by means of the CHANNEL parameter (see also the following section). The Discrete Output, Discrete Input, PID, Arithmetic, Signal Characterizer, Input Selector, Integrator and Analog Alarm Block are not connected in the as-delivered configuration. (IT, DI)

!

32

Note! Please note that the links between the blocks are deleted and the FF parameters are reset to the default values following a reset by means of the RESTART parameter in the Resource Block, "Default" option.

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

5.3.7

Operation

Assignment of Transducer Blocks (CHANNEL)

Settings for the Analog Input Block Process variable

Transducer Block

Primary Value, a pressure or level value depending on the measuring mode1

Pressure Transducer Block PRIMARY_VALUE

Secondary Value (sensor temperature)2

Parameter name

CHANNEL parameter in the Analog Input Block 1

SECONDARY_VALUE (TEMP. SENSOR)

2

PRESSURE_1_AFTER_ DAMPING/PRESSURE

3

Maximum measured pressure

PRESSURE_1_MAX_ RESTABLE/ MAX. MEAS. PRESS.

4

Overshoot counter for maximum set user limit for pressure

COUNTER: P > Pmax

5

Pressure after damping

Service Transducer Block

1)

Factory setting for Analog Input Block 1

2)

Factory setting for Analog Input Block 2

Settings for the Discrete Output Block Process variable

Transducer Block

Parameter name

CHANNEL parameter in the Discrete Output Block

Overshoot counter for maximum set user limit for pressure1

Service Transducer Block

COUNTER: P > Pmax

1

1)

Endress+Hauser

Factory setting

33

Operation

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Discrete Input Block settings Alarm conditions

Parameter name

Parameter CHANNEL, Discrete Input Block

General device error

1

Configuration error

2

Sensor overpressure

3

Sensor underpressure

4

Sensor overtemperature

5

Sensor undertemperature

6

Process isolating diaphragm broken

7

Electronic overtemperature

34

Transducer Block

Diagnostic TRD

DIAGNOSTIC_CODE

8

Electronic undertemperature

9

Temperature transmitter override

10

Pressure transmitter underride

11

Pmin PROCESS underrun

12

Pmax PROCESS overrun

13

Tmin PROCESS underrun

14

Tmax PROCESS overrun

15

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

5.3.8

Operation

Index tables of Endress+Hauser parameters

The following tables list the manufacturer-specific device parameters for the Resource Block, the Transducer Blocks and the Analog Input Blocks. For the FF parameters, see either the FF specification or Operating Instructions BA303P "Description of Device Functions, Cerabar S/ Deltabar S/Deltapilot S" ( ä 2). General explanatory remarks Data type • DS: data structure, contains data types such as Unsigned8, Octet String etc. • Float: IEEE 754 format • Visible String: ASCII coded • Unsigned: – Unsigned8: value range = 0 to 255 – Unsigned16: value range = 0 to 65535 – Unsigned32: value range = 0 to 4294967295 Storage Class • Cst: constant parameter • D: dynamic parameter • N: nonvolatile parameter • S: static parameter If this is a write parameter, the MODE_BLK column indicates the block mode in which the parameter can be written. Some parameters can only be written in the OOS block mode. The "Reset codes" column indicates which reset codes reset the parameter.

Resource Block Parameter name as per DD

Parameter name, "Label Index Data type parameter" option and display in FieldCare

Size Storage Read Write MODE_BLK Reset (Byte) Class codes

DEVICE_DIALOG SW_LOCK STATUS_LOCKING

DEVICE DIALOG INSERT PIN NO DD= STATUS LOCKING FieldCare= LOCKSTATE HARDWARE REV. ELECTR. SERIAL NO. PROC. CONN. TYPE MAT. PROC. CONN. + MAT. PROC. CONN. SEAL TYPE DD= UP DOWN FEATURE SUPPORTED FieldCare= not supported. DD= UP DOWN CTRL FieldCare= not supported. DD= UP DOWN PARAMETER FieldCare= not supported. DD= SCI_OCTET_STRING FieldCare= not supported. DD= CAPABILITY LEVEL FieldCare= not supported. DD= ENP VERSION FieldCare= not supported. DD= DEVICE TAG FieldCare= PD TAG DD= DEVICE SERIAL NUMBER FieldCare= DEVICE SERIAL No DD= ORDER NUMBER FieldCare= DEVICE DESIGN. DD= FIRMWARE VERSION FieldCare= SOFTWARE VERSION DD= RESOURCE DIRECTORY FieldCare= not supported.

HARDWARE_REVISION ELECTRONIC_SERIAL_NUMBER PROCESS_CONNECTION_TYPE MAT_PROC_CONN_POS MAT_PROC_CONN_NEG SEAL_TYPE UP_DOWN_FEATURE_SUPPORTED UP_DOWN_CTRL UP_DOWN_PARAMETER SCI_OCTET_STRING CAPABILITY_LEVEL ENP_VERSION DEVICE_TAG SERIAL_NUMBER ORDER_CODE FIRMWARE_VERSION RESSOURCE_DIR

Endress+Hauser

42 43 44

Unsigned8 Unsigned16 Unsigned8

1 2 1

D S D

x x x

45 46 47 48 49 50 51

Visible String Visible String Unsigned16 Unsigned16 Unsigned16 Unsigned16 Unsigned8

8 16 2 2 2 2 1

S D S S S S S

x x x x x x x

52

Unsigned8

1

D

x

x

53

Visible String 32

D

x

x

54

Visible String 40

S

x

x

55

Unsigned8

S

x

56

Visible String 32

S

x

57

Visible String 32

S

x

x

58

Visible String 16

S

x

x

59

Visible String 32

S

x

x

60

Visible String 32

S

x

61

Unsigned8

S

x

1

10

x

AUTO, OOS

x x x x

AUTO, OOS AUTO, OOS AUTO, OOS AUTO, OOS

7864, 333

35

Operation

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Pressure Transducer Block Parameter name as per DD

Parameter name, "Label parameter" option and display in FieldCare

Index

Data type

Size (Byte)

Storage Class

Read

Write

MODE_BLK Reset codes

DEVICE_DIALOG SW_LOCK STATUS_LOCKING

31 32 33

Unsigned8 Unsigned16 Unsigned8

1 2 1

D S D

x x x

x

AUTO, OOS

7864, 333

LINEARIZATION SCALE_IN SCALE_OUT DAMPING_VALUE ZERO_POSITION_ADJUST POSITION_INPUT_VALUE

DEVICE DIALOG INSERT PIN NO DD= STATUS LOCKING FieldCare= LOCKSTATE LINEARIZATION SCALE IN SCALE OUT DAMPING VALUE POS. ZERO ADJUST POS. INPUT VALUE

34 35 36 37 38 39

Unsigned8 DS-68 DS-68 Float Unsigned8 Float

2 11 11 4 1 4

S S S S D S

x x x x x x

x x x x x x

OOS AUTO, OOS OOS AUTO, OOS AUTO, OOS AUTO, OOS

7864, 333 7864, 333 7864, 333 7864, 333

CALIBRATION_OFFSET

CALIB. OFFSET

40

Float

4

S

x

x

AUTO, OOS

CUSTOMER_UNIT_PRESSURE CUSTOMER_FACTOR_UNIT_PRESS LOW_TRIM_MEASURED HIGH_TRIM_MEASURED LEVEL_MODE LINEAR_MEASURAND LINEARIZED_MEASURAND COMBINED_MEASURAND DENSITY_UNIT HEIGHT_UNIT CUSTOMER_HEIGHT_UNIT CUSTOMER_UNIT_FACTOR_HEIGHT VOLUME_UNIT CUSTOMER_UNIT_VOLUME CUSTOMER_UNIT_FACTOR_VOLUME MASS_UNIT CUSTOMER_UNIT_MASS CUSTOMER_UNIT_FACTOR_MASS CALIBRATION_MODE ADJUST_DENSITY ZERO_POSITION EMPTY_CALIBRATION FULL_CALIBRATION TANK_VOLUME TANK_HEIGHT HUNDRED_PERCENT_VALUE LEVEL_MIN LEVEL_MAX PROCESS_DENSITY LINEARIZATION_TABLE_SELECTION LINEARIZATION_EDIT_MODE LINEARIZATION_TABLE_PRE_EDIT LINEARIZATION_TABLE_INDEX LINEARIZATION_TABLE_X_VALUE LINEARIZATION_TABLE_Y_VALUE LINEARIZATION_TABLE_POST_EDIT LINEARIZATION_TABLE_POST_VIEW LEVEL_TANK_DESCRIPTION SENSOR_PRESSURE PRESSURE LEVEL_BEFORE_LINEARISATION SENSOR_MEAS_TYPE LEVEL_SELECTION HEIGHT_UNIT_EASY OUTPUT_UNIT_EASY CALIBRATION_MODE_EASY DENSITY_UNIT_EASY ADJUST_DENSITY_EASY EMPTY_HEIGHT_EASY FULL_HEIGHT_EASY PROCESS_DENSITY_EASY

CUSTOMER UNIT P CUST. UNIT. FACT. P LO TRIM MEASURED HI TRIM MEASURED2 LEVEL MODE LIN. MEASURAND LINd. MEASURAND COMB. MEASURAND DENSITY UNIT HEIGHT UNIT CUSTOMER UNIT H CUST. UNIT. FACT. H UNIT VOLUME CUSTOMER UNIT V CUST. UNIT. FACT. V MASS UNIT CUSTOMER UNIT M CUST. UNIT. FACT. M CALIBRATION MODE ADJUST DENSITY ZERO POSITION EMPTY CALIB. FULL CALIB. TANK VOLUME TANK HEIGHT 100% POINT LEVEL MIN. LEVEL MAX. PROCESS DENSITY TABLE SELECTION LIN. EDIT MODE EDITOR TABLE LINE-NUMB: X-VAL: Y-VAL: EDITOR TABLE MEASURING TABLE TANK DESCRIPTION SENSOR PRESSURE PRESSURE LEVEL BEFORE LIN SENSOR MEAS. TYPE LEVEL SELECTION HEIGHT UNIT OUTPUT UNIT CALIBRATION MODE DENSITY UNIT ADJUST DENSITY EMPTY HEIGHT FULL HEIGHT PROCESS DENSITY

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91

Visible String Float Float Float Unsigned8 Unsigned8 Unsigned8 Unsigned8 Unsigned16 Unsigned16 Visible String Float Unsigned16 Visible String Float Unsigned16 Visible String Float Unsigned8 Float Float Float Float Float Float Float Float Float Float Unsigned8 Unsigned8 Unsigned8 Unsigned8 Float Float Unsigned8 Unsigned8 Visible String Float Float Float Unsigned16 Unsigned8 Unsigned16 Unsigned16 Unsigned8 Unsigned16 Float Float Float Float

8 4 4 4 1 1 1 1 2 2 8 4 2 8 4 2 8 8 1 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 1 1 1 4 4 1 1 32 4 4 4 2 1 2 2 1 2 4 4 4 4

S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S D D S S D D S D D D D S S S S S S S S S

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

x x

AUTO, OOS AUTO, OOS

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

OOS OOS OOS OOS AUTO, OOS AUTO, OOS AUTO, OOS AUTO, OOS AUTO, OOS AUTO, OOS AUTO, OOS AUTO, OOS AUTO, OOS AUTO, OOS AUTO, OOS AUTO, OOS AUTO, OOS AUTO, OOS AUTO, OOS AUTO, OOS AUTO, OOS AUTO, OOS AUTO, OOS AUTO, OOS AUTO, OOS AUTO, OOS AUTO, OOS

x x x x x x x x x

OOS OOS

36

7864, 333, 2509 7864, 333, 2509 7864 7864 2509 2509 7864, 333 7864, 333 7864, 333 7864, 333 7864, 333 7864, 333 7864 7864 7864, 333 7864 7864 7864, 333 7864 7864 7864, 333 7864, 333 7864, 333 7864, 333 7864, 333 7864, 333 7864, 333 7864, 333 7864, 333 7864, 333 7864, 333 7864, 333 7864

7864, 333 7864, 333 OOS AUTO, OOS

OOS OOS OOS OOS OOS OOS

7864

7864, 333 7864, 333 7864, 333 7864, 333

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Operation

Parameter name as per DD

Parameter name, "Label parameter" option and display in FieldCare

Index

Data type

Size (Byte)

Storage Class

Read

Write

MODE_BLK Reset codes

MEASURED_LEVEL_EASY FULL_CALIBRATION_EASY EMPTY_CALIBRATION_EASY FULL_PRESSURE_EASY EMPTY_PRESSURE_EASY

MEAS. LEVEL EASY FULL CALIB. EMPTY CALIB. FULL PRESSURE EMPTY PRESSURE

92 93 94 95 96

Float Float Float Float Float

4 4 4 4 4

D S S S S

x x x x x

x x x x

OOS OOS OOS OOS

7864, 333 7864, 333 7864, 333 7864, 333

Service Transducer Block Parameter name as per DD

Parameter name, "Label parameter" option and display in FieldCare

Index

Data type

Size (Byte)

Storage Class

Read Write MODE_BLK Reset codes

DEVICE_DIALOG SW_LOCK STATUS_LOCKING CONFIGURATION_COUNTER ELECTRONICS_TEMPERATURE ELECTRONICS_TEMP_LOW_LIMIT ELECTRONICS_TEMP_HIGH_LIMIT PMAX_PROC_CONN SENSOR_MEAS_TYPE SENSOR_MIN_ABSOLUTE_LIMIT SENSOR_MAX_ABSOLUTE_LIMIT SENSOR_TEMP_LOW_LIMIT SENSOR_TEMP_HIGH_LIMIT SENSOR_HARDWARE_REV COUNTER P_MAX MAX_MEASURED_PRESSURE COUNTER_PMIN MIN_MEASURED_PRESSURE COUNTER_TMAX MAX_MEASURED_TEMP COUNTER_TMIN MIN_MEASURED_TEMP ELECTRONIC_OVER_TEMP_COUNTER ELECTRONIC_OVER_TEMPERATURE ELECTRONIC_UNDER_TEMP_COUNTER ELECTRONIC_UNDER_TEMPERATURE RESET_PEAK_HOLD PRESSURE CORRECTED_PRESSURE MEASURED_VALUE_TREND MAX_TURNDOWN SENSOR_CHANGES PRESSURE_PEAK_HOLD_STEP TEMP_PEAK_HOLD_STEP ACCELERATION_OF_GRAVITY CREEP_FLOW_HYST HISTOROM_SAVING_CYCLE_TIME HISTOROM_AVAIBLE DOWNLOAD_SELECTION HISTOROM_CONTROL PRESSURE_UNIT TEMPERATURE_UNIT INPUT_PRESSURE_INVERSION

DEVICE DIALOG INSERT PIN NO STATUS LOCKING CONFIG RECORDER PCB TEMPERATURE Allowed Min. TEMP Pmax ELECTRONICS Pmax PROC. CONN. SENSOR MEAS. TYPE Pmin SENSOR. DAMAGE Pmax SENS. DAMAGE Tmin SENSOR Tmax SENSOR SENS H/WARE REV COUNTER: P > Pmax MAX. MEAS. PRESS. COUNTER: P < Pmin MIN. MEAS. PRESS. COUNTER: T > Tmax MAX. MEAS. TEMP. COUNTER: T < Tmin MIN. MEAS. TEMP. PCB COUNT: T > Tmax PCB MAX. TEMP PCB COUNT: T < Tmin PCB MIN. TEMP. RESET PEAKHOLD PRESSURE CORRECTED PRESS. MEAS. VAL. TREND MAX TURNDOWN1 SENSOR CHANGES P. PEAKHOLD. STEP T. PEAKHOLD. STEP ACC. OF GRAVITY CREEP FLOW HYST. HIST. SAVING CYCL HistoROM AVAIL. DOWNLOAD SELECT. HistoROM CONTROL PRESS. ENG. UNIT TEMP. ENG. UNIT INP.PRESS INVERS

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53

Unsigned8 Unsigned16 Unsigned8 Unsigned16 Float Float Float Float Unsigned16 Float Float Float Float Unsigned8 DS-65 DS-65 Unsigned16 Float Unsigned16 Float Unsigned16 Float Unsigned16 Float Unsigned16 Float Unsigned8 DS-65 Float Unsigned8 Float Unsigned16 Float Float Float Float Unsigned8 Unsigned8 Unsigned8 Unsigned8 Unsigned16 Unsigned16 Unsigned8

1 2 1 2 4 4 4 4 2 4 4 4 4 1 5 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 1 5 4 1 4 2 4 4 4 4 1 1 1 1 2 2 1

D S D S D S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S D D D D S S S S S S S S D D S S S

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

x

7864, 333

x

AUTO, OOS

x

AUTO, OOS

x x x x x x x

OOS OOS

x x

x

Display Transducer Block Parameter name as per DD

Parameter name, "Label parameter" option and display in FieldCare

Index

Data type

Size (Byte)

Storage Class

Read

Write

BLK_MODE

Reset codes

DEVICE DIALOG DISPLAY_MAINLINE_CONTENT DISPLAY_MAINLINE_FORMAT DISPLAY_ALTERNATING_VALUES

DEVICE DIALOG MAIN LINE CONT. MAIN DATA FORMAT ALTERNATE DATA

10 11 12 13

Unsigned8 Unsigned8 Unsigned8 Unsigned8

1 1 1 1

D S S S

x x x x

x x x

AUTO, OOS AUTO, OOS AUTO, OOS

1864 1864 1864

Endress+Hauser

37

Operation

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Parameter name as per DD

Parameter name, "Label parameter" option and display in FieldCare

Index

Data type

Size (Byte)

Storage Class

Read

Write

BLK_MODE

Reset codes

DISPLAY_CONTRAST DISPLAY_LANGUAGE SIL_DIGITS_TEST_STRING

DISPLAY CONTRAST LANGUAGE DIGITS SET

14 15 16

Unsigned8 Unsigned8 Visible String

1 1 16

S S D

x x x

x x

AUTO, OOS AUTO, OOS

1864 1864

BLK_MODE

Reset codes

Diagnostic Transducer Block Parameter name as per DD

Parameter name, "Label parameter" option and display in FieldCare

Index

Data type

Size (Byte)

Storage Class

Read

Write

DEVICE_DIALOG SW_LOCK STATUS_LOCKING

DEVICE DIALOG INSERT PIN NO DD= STATUS LOCKING FieldCare= LOCKSTATE SIMULATION MODE UNITS_INDEX SIMULATED VALUE SIM. ERROR NO. ALARM STATUS LAST DIAG. CODE ACK. ALARM MODE ACK. ALARM RESET ALL ALARMS ERROR NO. SELECT ALARMTYPE ALARM DELAY ALARM DISPL. TIME PRESS. ENG. UNIT Pmin ALARM WINDOW Pmax ALARM WINDOW TEMP. ENG. UNIT Tmin. ALARM WINDOW Tmax. ALARM WINDOW ENTER RESET CODE OPERATING HOURS STATUS HISTORY

10 11 12

Unsigned8 Unsigned16 Unsigned8

1 2 1

D S D

x x x

x

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34

Unsigned8 Unsigned16 Float Unsigned16 Unsigned16 Unsigned16 Unsigned8 Unsigned8 Unsigned8 Unsigned16 Unsigned8 Float Float Unsigned16 Float Float Unsigned16 Float Float Unsigned16 Unsigned32 Visible String

1 2 4 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 4 4 2 4 4 2 4 4 2 4 18

D S D D D D S D D D D S S S S S S S S D S D

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

SIMULATION_MODE SCALE_OUT_UNITS_INDEX SIMULATED_VALUE SIMULATION_ERROR_NUMBER ALARM_STATUS LAST_DIAGNOSTIC_CODE ACKNOWLEDGE_ALARM_MODE ACKNOWLEDGE_ALARM RESET_ALL_ALARMS ERROR_NUMBER SELECT_ALARM_TYPE ALARM_DELAY ALARM_DISPLAY_TIME PRESSURE_UNIT PMIN_ALARM_WINDOW PMAX_ALARM_WINDOW TEMPERATURE_UNIT TMIN_ALARM_WINDOW TMAX_ALARM_WINDOW ENTER_RESET_CODE OPERATING_HOURS STATUS_HISTORY

7864, 333

x 7864 x x

x x x x x x x

7864

7864 7864 7864, 333 7864 7864 7864, 333 7864 7864

x x x x x

Analog Input Blocks Parameter name as per DD

Parameter name, "Label Index parameter" option and display in FieldCare

Data type

Size (Byte)

Storage Class

Read

Write

BLK_MODE

FSAFE_TYPE FSAFE_VALUE

FAIL SAFE TYPE DD= FAIL SAFE VALUE FieldCare= not supported. DD= High High Alarm Output Discete FieldCare= not supported. DD= High Alarm Output Discrete FieldCare= not supported. DD= Low Alarm Output Discrete FieldCare= not supported. DD= Low Low Alarm Output Discrete FieldCare= not supported. DD= Select Alarm Mode FieldCare= not supported. DD= Alarm Output Discrete FieldCare= not supported. DD= Block Error Description FieldCare= not supported.

37 38

Unsigned8 Float

1 4

S S

x x

x x

39

DS66

2

D

x

x

40

DS66

2

D

x

x

41

DS66

2

D

x

x

42

DS66

2

D

x

x

43

Unsigned8

1

S

x

x

44

DS66

2

D

x

x

45

Unsigned32

4

D

x

OOS, MAN AUTO, OOS, MAN AUTO, OOS, MAN AUTO, OOS, MAN AUTO, OOS, MAN AUTO, OOS, MAN AUTO, OOS, MAN AUTO, OOS, MAN AUTO, OOS, MAN

HIHI_ALM_OUT_D HI_ALM_OUT_D LO_ALM_OUT_D LOLO_ALM_OUT_D ALARM_MODE ALARM_OUT_D BLOCK_ERR_DESC_1

38

Reset codes

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

5.3.9

Operation

Methods

The FOUNDATION Fieldbus Specification includes the use of methods to make device operation easier. A method is a sequence of interactive steps to be carried out in the specified order so as to configure certain device functions. The following methods are available for Cerabar S: • Transmitter data, process connection (Resource Block) • Language, display (Display Block) • Operation, diagnostic, Alarm table (Diagnostic Block) • Transmitter data, process connection, sensor data, process values, peak hold indicator, operation, system 1 (Service Block) • Quick setup, basic adjustment, calibration, sensor data, process values, sensor trimm (TRD Block)

!

Endress+Hauser

Note! For further information on accessing methods, see the description of the FF configuration program used.

39

Operation

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

5.4

Local operation – onsite display connected

If the onsite display is connected, the three operating keys are used to navigate through the operating menu,  ä 27, Section 5.2.3 "Function of the operating elements – onsite display connected".

5.4.1

Menu structure

The menu is split into four levels. The three upper levels are used to navigate while you use the lowest level to enter numerical values, and select and save options. The entire menu is illustrated in Section 10.1 "Menu". The structure of the MEASURING MENU depends on the measuring mode selected, e.g. if "Pressure" is selected as the measuring mode, only the functions needed for this measuring mode are displayed.

Measured value

GROUP SELECTION

LANGUAGE

OPERATING MENU

QUICK SETUP

MEASURING MODE

➁

➀

SETTINGS

DISPLAY

POSITION ADJUSTMENT

BASIC SETUP

POS. ZERO ADJUST

➂

➃

EXTENDED SETUP

POS. INPUT VALUE

CALIB. OFFSET

P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-en-097

Fig. 24: 1 2 3 4

!

40

Menu structure

1st selection level 2nd selection level Function groups Parameters

Note! The LANGUAGE and MEASURING MODE parameters are only displayed via the onsite display on the 1st selection level. In FieldCare, the LANGUAGE parameter is displayed in the DISPLAY group and the MEASURING MODE parameter in the QUICK SETUP menus or in the BASIC SETUP function group.  See also Section 10.1 "Menu".

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

5.4.2

Operation

Selecting an option

Example: selecting "English" as the menu language. Onsite display

Operation "German" has been selected as the menu language. The option currently active is indicated by a ✓ in front of the menu text.

P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-en-017

Use "+" or "–" to select "English" as the menu language.

P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-en-033

1. Press "E" to confirm your choice. The option currently active is indicated by a ✓ in front of the menu text. (English is the language selected.) 2. Go to the next menu item with "E" P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-en-034

5.4.3

Editing a value

Example: changing the DAMPING VALUE function from 2.0 s to 30.0 s.  ä 27, Section 5.2.3 "Function of the operating elements – onsite display connected". Onsite display

Operation The onsite display indicates the parameter to be modified. The value highlighted in black can be modified. The unit "s" is prespecified and cannot be changed.

P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-en-023

1. Press "+" or "–" to enter the editing mode. 2. The first digit is highlighted in black.

P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-en-027

1. Use the "+" key to change the digit "2" to "3". 2. Press the "E" key to confirm "3". The cursor goes to the next position (highlighted in black).

P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-en-028

The decimal point is highlighted in black. This means you can now edit this digit.

P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-en-029

1.

Press "+" or "–" until "0" is displayed.

2. Press the "E" key to confirm "0". The cursor goes to the next position.  is displayed and highlighted in black. See next graphic. P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-en-030

Endress+Hauser

41

Operation

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Onsite display

Operation Press "E" to save the new value and exit the editing mode.  See next graphic.

P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-en-031

The new value for the damping is 30.0 s. – Go to the next parameter with "E" – Press "+" or "–" to go back to the editing mode.

P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-en-032

5.4.4

Accepting pressure present at device as value

Example: performing position adjustment. Onsite display

Operation The bottom line on the onsite display displays the pressure present, 3.9 mbar in this example.

P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-en-158

Use "+" or "–" to switch to the "Confirm" option. The active option is highlighted in black.

P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-en-159

Using the "E" key, assign the value (3.9 mbar) to the POS. ZERO ADJUST parameter. The device confirms the adjustment and goes back to the parameter, here POS. ZERO ADJUST (see next graphic).

P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-en-037

Go to the next parameter with "E"

P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-en-160

42

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

5.5

Operation

FieldCare

FieldCare is Endress+Hauser's plant asset management tool based on FDT technology. You can use FieldCare to configure all Endress+Hauser devices as well as third-party devices which support the FDT standard. FieldCare supports the following functions: • Configuration of transmitters in offline and online mode • Loading and saving device data (upload/download) • HistoROM®/M-DAT analysis • Documentation of the measuring point Connection options: • Service interface with Commubox FXA291 and ToF adapter FXA291 (USB). For further information, see www.endress.com

5.6

HistoROM®/M-DAT (optional)

HistoROM®/M-DAT is a memory module, which is attached to the electronic insert and fulfills the following functions: • Back-up copy of configuration data • Copying configuration data from one transmitter to another transmitter • Cyclic recording of pressure and sensor-temperature measured values • Recording diverse events, such as alarms, configuration changes, counters for measuring range undershoot and overshoot for pressure and temperature, overshooting and undershooting user limits for pressure and temperature, etc.

# !

Endress+Hauser

Warning! Detach HistoROM®/M-DAT from the electronic insert or attach it to the insert in a deenergized state only. Note! • The HistoROM®/M-DAT can be retrofitted at any time (Order No.: 52027785). • To analyze and evaluate the data and events saved in the HistoROM®/M-DAT, you require the Endress+Hauser FieldCare operating program. A CD with the operating program and documentation is provided for devices that were ordered with the "HistoROM/M-DAT" option.  ä 43, Section 5.5 "FieldCare". It is also possible to copy configuration data from one transmitter to another transmitter with an FF configuration program. • The HistoROM data and the data in the device are analyzed once a HistoROM ®/M-DAT is attached to the electronic insert and power is reestablished to the device. During the analysis, the messages "W702, HistoROM data not consistent" and "W706, Configuration in HistoROM and device not identical" can occur. For remedial measures,  ä 62, Section 8.1 "Messages."

43

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

5.6.1

Copying configuration data ➁

Sim.

Operation

on

off

1

2

➀

0% Zero Display

HW

on 2

off

PC

1

1 2

250002273-–

TM

FOUNDATION

HW-Version: SW-Version:

Histo ROM

Simulation

Sensor

P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-xx-123

Electronic insert with optional HistoROM®/M-DAT memory module 1 2

Optional HistoROM®/M-DAT To copy configuration data from the HistoROM/®M-DAT to a device or from a device to a HistoROM®/M-DAT module, operation must be unlocked (DIP switch 1, position "Off", parameter SWLOCK/INSERT PIN No = 100).  ä 46, Section 5.7 "Locking/unlocking operation".

Local operation via onsite display (optional) or remote operation Copying configuration data from a device to a HistoROM®/M-DAT:

!

Note! Operation must be unlocked. 1.

Disconnect the device from the supply voltage.

2.

Remove the protection cap, attach the HistoROM®/M-DAT to the electronic insert.

3.

Reestablish supply voltage to the device.

4.

The option selected for the DOWNLOAD SELECT. parameter (OPERATION menu) does not affect uploading from the device to the HistoROM.

5.

Operation via an FF configuration program: using the DAT_HANDLING/ HistoROM CONTROL parameter in the Service Transducer Block, select the "Device HistoROM" option for the data transfer direction. Operation via FieldCare: using the HistoROM CONTROL parameter, select the "Device  HistoROM" option for the data transfer direction. (Menu path: OPERATING MENU  OPERATION) Using the DOWNLOAD SELECT. parameter (OPERATION menu), select which parameters should be overwritten. The following parameters are overwritten depending on the option selected: – Configuration copy: All the parameters apart from the TRANSMITTER SERIAL NO., DEVICE DESIGNATION and the parameters of the POSITION ADJUSTMENT and PROCESS CONNECTION group. – Device replacement: All the parameters apart from the TRANSMITTER SERIAL NO., DEVICE DESIGNATION and the parameters of the POSITION ADJUSTMENT and PROCESS CONNECTION group. – Electronics replace: All parameters apart from the parameters of the POSITION ADJUSTMENT group Factory setting: Configuration copy

6.

Using the HistoROM CONTROL parameter, select the "Device HistoROM" option for the data transfer direction.

7.

Wait approx. 40 seconds. Configuration data are uploaded from the device to the HistoROM®/ M-DAT. The device is not restarted.

8.

Disconnect the device from the supply voltage again.

9.

Detach the memory module.

10. Reestablish supply voltage to the device. 44

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Operation

Copying configuration data from a HistoROM®/M-DAT to a device:

!

Endress+Hauser

Note! Operation must be unlocked. 1.

Disconnect the device from the supply voltage.

2.

Attach the HistoROM®/M-DAT to the electronic insert. Configuration data from another device are stored in the HistoROM®/M-DAT.

3.

Reestablish supply voltage to the device.

4.

Operation via an FF configuration program: using the DAT_HANDLING/ HistoROM CONTROL parameter in the Service Transducer Block, select the "HistoROM Device" option for the data transfer direction. Operation via FieldCare: using the HistoROM CONTROL parameter, select the "HistoROM  Device" option for the data transfer direction (menu path: OPERATING MENU  OPERATION). Using the DOWNLOAD SELECT. parameter (OPERATION menu), select which parameters should be overwritten. The following parameters are overwritten depending on the option selected: – Configuration copy (factory setting) All the parameters apart from the DEVICE SERIAL No., DEVICE DESIGN, PD-TAG, DESCRIPTION, DEVICE ID, DEVICE ADDRESS and the parameters in the POSITION ADJUSTMENT, PROCESS CONNECTION, SENSOR TRIM and SENSOR DATA group. – Device replacement All the parameters apart from the DEVICE SERIAL No., DEVICE ID, DEVICE DESIGN and the parameters in the POSITION ADJUSTMENT, PROCESS CONNECTION, SENSOR TRIM and SENSOR DATA group. – Electronics replace All parameters apart from the parameters of the SENSOR DATA group. Factory setting: Configuration copy

5.

Using the HistoROM CONTROL parameter (OPERATION menu), select the "HistoROM  Device" option for the data transfer direction.

6.

Wait approx. 40 seconds. Configuration data are loaded from the HistoROM®/M-DAT to the device. The device is restarted.

7.

Before removing the HistoROM®/M-DAT again from the electronic insert, disconnect the device from the supply voltage.

45

Operation

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

5.7

Locking/unlocking operation

Once you have entered all the parameters, you can lock your entries against unauthorized and undesired access. The operation can be locked/unlocked in the following ways: • Via a DIP switch on the electronic insert, locally on the display. • Via communication e.g. FieldCare. The -symbol on the onsite display indicates that operation is locked. Parameters which refer to how the display appears, e.g. LANGUAGE and DISPLAY CONTRAST, can still be altered.

!

Note! • If operation is locked by means of the DIP switch, you can only unlock operation again by means of the DIP switch. If operation is locked by means of remote operation e.g. FieldCare, you can only unlock operation again by means of remote operation. The table provides an overview of the locking functions: View/read parameter

Modify/write via1

DIP switch

Yes

Remote operation

Yes

Locking via

1)

46

Unlocking via DIP switch

Remote operation

No

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

Parameters which refer to how the display appears, e.g. LANGUAGE and DISPLAY CONTRAST, can still be altered.

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

➂ on

0% Zero

on

Display

Sensor

HW

on

2

off

1

2

2

off

PC

1

1

off

–

+

1 2

250002273-–

TM

FOUNDATION

HW-Version: SW-Version:

Histo ROM

➁

Simulation

➀

Simulation

Locking/unlocking operation locally via DIP switch Simulation

5.7.1

Operation

E

P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-xx-177

Fig. 25: 1 2 3

"Hardware locking" DIP switch position on the electronic insert

If necessary, remove onsite display (optional) DIP switch is set to "On": operation is locked. DIP switch is set to "Off": operation is unlocked (operation possible)

5.7.2

Locking/unlocking operation via remote operation Description

Locking operation

1. Operation via FF configuration program: select SWLOCK parameter in the Resource Block. Operation via FieldCare: select INSERT PIN No. parameter, menu path: OPERATING MENU OPERATION INSERT PIN No. 2. To lock operation, enter a number for this parameter between 0...9999 that is  100.

Unlocking operation

1. Operation via FF configuration program: select SWLOCK parameter in the Resource Block. Operation via FieldCare: select INSERT PIN No. parameter. 2. To unlock operation, enter "100" for the parameter.

Endress+Hauser

47

Operation

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

5.8

Simulation

The function of the Analog Input Block, such as input and output scaling, can be simulated as follows:

!

1.

Set the "Simulation" DIP switch on the electronic insert to "On".

2.

In the Analog Input Block, select the "Active" option by means of the SIMULATION parameter, ENABLE_DISABLE element.

3.

Set the Analog Input Block to the AUTO block mode.

4.

Enter the value and status for the SIMULATION_VALUE and SIMULATION_STATUS elements. During the simulation, the output value and status of the Pressure Transducer Block are replaced by the simulated value and status. The OUT parameter shows the result.

5.

End simulation (SIMULATION parameter, ENABLE_DISABLE element, "Disabled" option).

Note! You can check your adjustment for the transmitter by means of the SIMULATION_MODE and SIMULATION_VALUE parameters in the Diagnostic Transducer Block. See Operating Instructions BA303 "Description of Device Functions Cerabar S/Deltabar S/Deltapilot S", SIMULATION_MODE and SIMULATION_VALUE parameter descriptions.

5.9

Factory setting (reset)

• Total reset: Press zero-key for at least 12 seconds. If the LED on the electronic insert lights up briefly, the reset is being carried out. • By entering a certain code, you can completely, or partially, reset the entries for the parameters to the factory settings. (For the factory settings, see Operating Instructions BA303P "Cerabar S/Deltabar S/Deltapilot S, Description of Device Functions").  ä 2, "Overview of documentation"). Enter the code by means of the ENTER RESET CODE parameter (OPERATION menu). There are various reset codes for the device. The following table illustrates which parameters are reset by the particular reset codes. Operation has to be unlocked to be able to perform a reset ( ä 46, Section 5.7 "Locking/unlocking operation").

!

Note! • Any customer-specific configuration carried out by the factory is not affected by a reset (customerspecific configuration remains). If, after a reset, you wish the parameters to be reset to the factory settings, please contact Endress+Hauser Service. • The OUT parameter may have to be rescaled after resetting with code 7864.  ä 61, Section 6.7 "Scaling the OUT parameter".

5.9.1

Performing reset via an FF configuration program

If operating via an FF configuration program, enter the code by means of the RESET_INPUT_VALUE/ENTER RESET CODE parameter in the Diagnostic Transducer Block. The index tables  ä 35 ff. indicate which parameters are reset by the particular reset code.

!

48

Note! • The RESET FF parameter gives you the option of deleting links between function blocks and resetting FF parameters to default values and manufacturer-specific parameters to the factory setting. See also Operating Instructions BA303P, RESTART parameter description.

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

5.9.2

Operation

Performing reset via the FieldCare operating program

If operating via FieldCare, enter the code via the ENTER RESET CODE parameter (menu path: OPERATING MENU OPERATION). The following table illustrates which parameters are reset by the particular reset codes. Reset code

Description and effect 1

7864

Total reset – This reset resets the following parameters: – POSITION ADJUSTMENT function group – BASIC SETUP function group – EXTENDED SETUP function group – LINEARIZATION function group (an existing linearization table is deleted) – OUTPUT group – INFO function group, TAG_DESC parameter – MESSAGES function group – All configurable messages ("Error" type) are set to "Warning".  ä 62, Section 8.1 "Messages" and  ä 71, Section 8.2 "Response of outputs to errors". – USER LIMITS function group – Any simulation which may be running is ended. – The device is restarted.

333

User reset – This reset resets the following parameters: – POSITION ADJUSTMENT function group – BASIC SETUP function group, apart from customer-specific units – EXTENDED SETUP function group – OUTPUT group – Any simulation which may be running is ended. – The device is restarted.

2710

Reset Level measuring mode – Depending on the settings for the LEVEL MODE, LIN MEASURAND, LINd MEASURAND or COMB. MEASURAND parameters, the parameters needed for this measuring task will be reset. – Any simulation which may be running is ended. – The device is restarted. Example LEVEL MODE = linear and LIN. MEASURAND = level • HEIGHT UNIT = m • CALIBRATION MODE = wet • EMPTY CALIB. = 0 • FULL CALIB. = sensor end value converted to mH2O, e.g. for a 500 mbar (7.5 psi) sensor : 50.99 mH2O

Endress+Hauser

2509

Sensor adaption reset – This reset resets the upper and lower sensor calibration limit and the value for position adjustment. – POSITION ADJUSTMENT function group – PRESSURE_1_LOWER_CAL/LO_TRIM_MEASURED and PRESSURE_1_HIGHER_TRIM_MEASURED/HI_TRIM_MEASURED parameters These parameters are not available by means of the FieldCare operating program. – Any simulation which may be running is ended. – The device is restarted.

1846

Display reset – This reset resets all parameters which have to do with how the display appears (DISPLAY group). – Any simulation which may be running is ended. – The device is restarted.

8888

HistoROM reset The measured value and event buffers are deleted. During the reset, the HistoROM has to be attached to the electronic insert.

49

Operation

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Reset code

Description and effect 1

62

PowerUp reset (warm start) – This reset resets all the parameters in the RAM. Data are read back anew from the EEPROM (processor is initialized again). – Any simulation which may be running is ended. – The device is restarted.

1)

50

The table uses the group and parameter names as they appear in FieldCare.  ä 35, Section 5.3.8 "Index tables of Endress+Hauser parameters" for the assignment of the FieldCare parameter names and the FF configuration program.

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

6

#

Commissioning

Commissioning

Warning! • If a pressure that is lower than the minimum permitted pressure is present at the device, messages "E120 sensor low pressure" and "E727 sensor pressure error - overrange" are output in succession. • If a pressure that is greater than the maximum permitted pressure is present at the device, messages "E115 sensor overpressure" and "E727 sensor pressure error - overrange" are output in succession. • The messages E727, E115 and E120 are "Error"-type messages and can be configured as a "Warning" or an "Alarm". The factory setting for these messages is "Warning". This setting prevents the BAD status from being transmitted in applications (e.g. cascade measurement) where the user is aware of the risk of the sensor range being overshot. • We recommend setting messages E727, E115 and E120 to "Alarm" in the following instances: – It is not necessary to violate the sensor range for the measuring application. – A position adjustment must be carried out that has to correct a large measured error as a result of the orientation of the device.

6.1

Function check

Carry out a post-installation and a post-connection check as per the checklist before commissioning the device. • "Post-installation check" checklist see Section 3.4 • "Post-connection check" checklist see Section 4.4

6.2

!

Endress+Hauser

Commissioning via an FF configuration program

Note! • The device is configured for the Pressure measuring mode as standard. The measuring range and the unit in which the measured value is transmitted, as well as the digital output value of the Analog Input Block OUT, correspond to the data on the nameplate. Following a reset with code 7864, the OUT parameter may have to be rescaled ( ä 61, Section 6.7 "Scaling the OUT parameter"). • The standard order configuration is illustrated  ä 30, Section 5.3.6 "Cerabar S block model". 1.

Switch on the device.

2.

Note the DEVICE_ID.  ä 30, Section 5.3.5 "Device identification and addressing" and  ä 6, Section 2.1 "Device designation" for the device serial number.

3.

Open the configuration program.

4.

Load Cff and device description files into the host system or the configuration program. Make sure you are using the right system files.

5.

Identify the device using the DEVICE_ID (see Point 2). Assign the desired tag name to the device by means of the PD_TAG parameter.

51

Commissioning

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Configuring the Resource Block 1.

Open the Resource Block.

2.

If necessary, disable the lock for device operation.  ä 46, Section 5.7 "Locking/unlocking operation". Operating is unlocked as standard.

3.

If necessary, change the block name. Factory setting: RS_452B481007-xxxxxxxxxxx

4.

If necessary, assign a description to the block by means of the TAG_DESC parameter.

5.

If necessary, change other parameters as per the requirements.

Configuring the Transducer Blocks Cerabar S has the following Transducer Blocks: • Pressure Transducer Block • Service Transducer Block • Display Transducer Block • Diagnostic Transducer Block The explanation that follows is an example for the Pressure Transducer Block.

!

1.

If necessary, change the block name. Factory setting: RS_452B481007-xxxxxxxxxxx

2.

Set the block mode to OOS using the MODE_BLK parameter, TARGET element.

3.

Configure the device in accordance with the measuring task. See also these Operating Instructions Section 6.3 to Section 6.7 and  ä 2 "Overview of documentation".

4.

Set the block mode to Auto using the MODE_BLK parameter, TARGET element.

Note! The block mode must be set to "Auto" for the Pressure and Service Transducer Block for the measuring device to function correctly.

Configuring the Analog Input Blocks Cerabar S has 2 Analog Input Blocks that can be assigned as required to the various process variables.

52

1.

If necessary, change the block name. Factory setting: RS_452B481007-xxxxxxxxxxx

2.

Set the block mode to OOS using the MODE_BLK parameter, TARGET element.

3.

Use the CHANNEL parameter to select the process variable which should be used as the input value for the Analog Input Block. The following settings are possible: – CHANNEL = 1: Primary value, a pressure or level value depending on the measuring mode selected – CHANNEL = 2: Secondary value, here the sensor temperature Factory setting: – Analog Input Block 1: CHANNEL = 1: Primary Value (pressure measured value) – Analog Input Block 2: CHANNEL = 2: Secondary Value (sensor temperature)

4.

Use the XD_SCALE parameter to select the desired unit and the block input range for the process variable.  ä 61, Section 6.7 "Scaling the OUT parameter". Make sure that the unit selected suits the process variable selected. If the process variable does not suit the unit, the BLOCK_ERROR parameter reports "Block Configuration Error" and the block mode cannot be set to "Auto".

5.

Use the L_TYPE parameter to select the type of linearization for the input variable (factory setting: Direct). Make sure that the settings for the XD_SCALE and OUT_SCALE parameters are the same for the "Direct" linearization type. If the process values and units do not match, the BLOCK_ERROR parameter reports "Block Configuration Error" and the block mode cannot be set to "Auto".

6.

Enter the alarm and critical alarm messages by means of the HI_HI_LIM, HI_LIM, LO_LO_LIM and LO_LO_LIM parameters. The limit values entered have to be within the value range specified for the OUT_SCALE parameter.

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Commissioning

7.

Specify the alarm priorities by means of the HI_HI_PRI, HI_PRI, LO_LO_PRI and LO_PRI parameters. Reporting to the field host system only takes place with alarms with a priority greater than 2.

8.

Set the block mode to Auto using the MODE_BLK parameter, TARGET element. For this purpose, the Resource Block must also be set to the "Auto" block mode.

Additional configuration 1.

Depending on the control or automation task, configure additional function blocks and output blocks. See also Operating Instructions BA303P "Description of Device Functions Cerabar S/Deltabar S/Deltapilot S" or  ä 2 "Overview of documentation".

2.

Link the function blocks and output blocks.

3.

After specifying the active LAS, download all the data and parameters to the field device.

6.3

Selecting the language and measuring mode

6.3.1

Local operation

The LANGUAGE and MEASURING MODE parameters are on the 1st selection level. See also  ä 40, Section 5.4.1 "Menu structure". The following languages are available: • Deutsch • English • Français • Español • Chinese (CHS) • Japanese (JPN) The following measuring modes are available: • Pressure • Level

6.3.2

Selecting the language and measuring mode via FieldCare

In FieldCare, the MEASURING MODE parameter is displayed in the QUICK SETUP menus and in the BASIC SETUP function group (menu path: OPERATING MENU SETTINGS BASIC SETUP). The following measuring modes are available: • Pressure • Level The LANGUAGE parameter is arranged in the DISPLAY group. • Use the LANGUAGE parameter to select the menu language for the onsite display. • Select the menu language for FieldCare using the "Language Button" in the configuration window. Select the menu language for the FieldCare frame by means of the "Extra" menu  "Options" "Display" "Language". The following languages are available: • Deutsch • English • Français • Español • Chinese • Japanese

Endress+Hauser

53

Commissioning

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

6.4

Position adjustment

Due to the orientation of the device, there may be a shift in the measured value, i.e. when the container is empty or partly filled, the measured value parameter does not display zero. There are two options to choose from when performing position adjustment. • Onsite display menu path: GROUP SELECTION  OPERATING MENU SETTINGS POSITION ADJUSTMENT • FieldCare menu path: OPERATING MENU SETTINGS POSITION ADJUSTMENT

6.4.1

Performing position adjustment via the onsite display or FieldCare

The parameters listed in the following table can be found in the POSITION ADJUSTMENT group (menu path: OPERATING MENU SETTINGS POSITION ADJUSTMENT). Parameter name

Description

POS. ZERO ADJUST Entry

Position adjustment – the pressure difference between zero (set point) and the measured pressure need not be known. Example: – MEASURED VALUE = 2.2 mbar (0.032 psi) – Correct the MEASURED VALUE via the POS. ZERO ADJUST parameter with the "Confirm" option. This means that you are assigning the value 0.0 to the pressure present. – MEASURED VALUE (after pos. zero adjust) = 0.0 mbar The CALIB. OFFSET parameter displays the resulting pressure difference (offset) by which the MEASURED VALUE was corrected. Factory setting: 0.0

POS. INPUT VALUE Entry

Position adjustment – the pressure difference between zero (set point) and the measured pressure need not be known. To correct the pressure difference, you need a reference measurement value (e. g. from a reference device). Example: – MEASURED VALUE = 0.5 mbar (0.0073 psi) – For the POS. INPUT VALUE parameter, specify the desired set point for the MEASURED VALUE, e.g. 2.0 mbar (0.029 psi). (MEASURED VALUEnew = POS. INPUT VALUE) – MEASURED VALUE (after entry for POS. INPUT VALUE) = 2.0 mbar (0.029 psi) – The CALIB. OFFSET parameter displays the resulting pressure difference (offset) by which the MEASURED VALUE was corrected. CALIB. OFFSET = MEASURED VALUEold – POS. INPUT VALUE, here: CALIB. OFFSET = 0.5 mbar (0.0073 psi) – 2.0 mbar (0.029 psi) = – 1.5 mbar (0.022 psi)) Factory setting: 0.0

CALIB. OFFSET Entry

Position adjustment – the pressure difference between zero (set point) and the measured pressure is known. (A reference pressure is not present at the device.) Example: – MEASURED VALUE = 2.2 mbar (0.032 psi) – Via the CALIB. OFFSET parameter, enter the value by which the MEASURED VALUE should be corrected. To correct the MEASURED VALUE to 0.0 mbar, you must enter the value 2.2 here. (The following applies: MEASURED VALUE new = MEASURED VALUEold – CALIB. OFFSET) – MEASURED VALUE (after entry for calib. offset) = 0.0 mbar Factory setting: 0.0

54

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

!

6.5

Pressure measurement

6.5.1

Information on pressure measurement

Note! • A Quick Setup menu is available for each of the measuring modes pressure and level which guides you through the most important basic functions. With the setting in the MEASURING MODE parameter, you specify which Quick Setup menu should be displayed. See also Page 53, Section 6.3 "Selecting the language and measuring mode". • For a detailed description of the parameters, see Operating Instructions BA303P "Cerabar S/ Deltabar S/Deltapilot S, Description of Device Functions" – FF, Table, Pressure Transducer Block – FieldCare: Table, POSITION ADJUSTMENT – FieldCare: Table, BASIC SETUP – FieldCare: Table, EXTENDED SETUP  ä 2, "Overview of documentation" section.

6.5.2

!

Commissioning

Quick Setup menu for the Pressure measuring mode

Note! This operating program is only available by means of the FieldCare operating program.  ä 43, Section 5.5 "FieldCare". MEASURED VALUE

1) GROUP SELECTION

1) LANGUAGE

1)

1)

MEASURING MODE

QUICK SETUP

OPERATING MENU

2) MEASURING MODE

Pressure

Level Absolut pressure sensors

Gauge pressure sensors POS. ZERO ADJUST

POS. INPUT VALUE

1) On-site display only 2) FieldCare only

DAMPING VALUE P01-PMx7xxxx-19-xx-xx-en-078

Fig. 26:

Quick Setup menu for the "Pressure" measuring mode

Local operation

FieldCare

Measured value display Switch from the measured value display to the GROUP SELECTION with F.

Measured value display Select QUICK SETUP menu.

GROUP SELECTION Select the MEASURING MODE parameter.

MEASURING MODE Select "Pressure".

MEASURING MODE Select "Pressure". GROUP SELECTION Select QUICK SETUP menu. POS. ZERO ADJUST Due to orientation of the device, there may be a shift in the measured value. You correct the MEASURED VALUE via the POS. ZERO ADJUST parameter with the "Confirm" option, i.e. you assign the value 0.0 to the pressure present.

Endress+Hauser

POS. ZERO ADJUST Due to orientation of the device, there may be a shift in the measured value. You correct the MEASURED VALUE via the POS. ZERO ADJUST parameter with the "Confirm" option, i.e. you assign the value 0.0 to the pressure present.

55

Commissioning

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

!

56

Local operation

FieldCare

POS. INPUT VALUE Due to orientation of the device, there may be a shift in the measured value. For the POS. INPUT VALUE parameter, specify the desired set point for the MEASURED VALUE.

POS. INPUT VALUE Due to orientation of the device, there may be a shift in the measured value. For the POS. INPUT VALUE parameter, specify the desired set point for the MEASURED VALUE.

DAMPING VALUE Enter damping time (time constant ). The damping affects the speed at which all subsequent elements, such as the onsite display, measured value and OUT Value of the Analog Input Block react to a change in the pressure.

DAMPING VALUE Enter damping time (time constant ). The damping affects the speed at which all subsequent elements, such as the onsite display, measured value and OUT Value of the Analog Input Block react to a change in the pressure.

Note! For local operation,  ä 27, Section 5.2.3 "Function of the operating elements – onsite display connected" and  ä 40, Section 5.4 "Local operation – onsite display connected".

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

!

Endress+Hauser

6.6

Level measurement

6.6.1

Information on level measurement

Commissioning

Note! • A Quick Setup menu is available for each of the measuring modes Pressure and Level which guides you through the most important basic functions. For the "Level" Quick Setup menu,  ä 59. • Furthermore, three level modes are available for the level measurement, namely "Level easy pressure", Level easy height" and "Level standard". For the "Level standard" level mode, you can choose between the "Linear", "Pressure linearized" and "Height linearized" level types. The table in the "Overview of level measurement" section that follows provides you with an overview of the various measuring tasks. – With regard to the "Level easy pressure" and "Level easy height" level modes, the values entered are not tested as extensively as in the "Level standard" level mode. In the "Level easy pressure" and "Level easy height" level modes, the values entered for EMPTY CALIBRATION/FULL CALIBRATION, EMPTY PRESSURE/FULL PRESSURE and EMPTY HEIGHT/FULL HEIGHT have to be at least 1 % apart. The value will be rejected with a warning message if the values are too close together. Further limit values are not checked; i.e. the values entered must be appropriate for the sensor and the measuring task so that the measuring device can measure correctly. – The "Level easy pressure" and "Level easy height" level modes comprise fewer parameters than the "Level standard" mode and are used to quickly and easily configure a level application. – Customer-specific units of level, volume and mass, or a linearization table, can only be entered in the "Level standard" level mode. • For a detailed description of the parameters and configuration examples, see Operating Instructions BA303P "Cerabar S/Deltabar S/Deltapilot S, Description of Device Functions"  ä 2, "Overview of documentation" section.

57

Commissioning

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

6.6.2

Overview of level measurement

Measuring task

LEVEL SELECTION/ LEVEL MODE

Measured variable options

Description

The measured variable is in direct proportion to the measured pressure. Calibration takes place by entering two pressurelevel pairs.

LEVEL SELECTION: Level easy pressure

Via OUTPUT UNIT parameter: %, level, volume or mass units.

– Incorrect entries are – Calibration with possible reference pressure – wet calibration, see Operating – Customer-specific units are not possible Instructions BA303P. – Calibration without reference pressure – dry calibration, see Operating Instructions BA303P.

The measured value display and the LEVEL BEFORE LIN. parameter display the measured value.

The measured variable is in direct proportion to the measured pressure. Calibration takes place by entering the density and two height-level pairs.

LEVEL SELECTION: Level easy height

Via OUTPUT UNIT parameter: %, level, volume or mass units.

– Calibration with reference pressure – wet calibration, see Operating Instructions BA303P. – Calibration without reference pressure – dry calibration, see Operating Instructions BA303P.

– Incorrect entries are possible – Customized units are not possible

The measured value display and the LEVEL BEFORE LIN. parameter display the measured value.

The measured variable is in direct proportion to the measured pressure.

LEVEL SELECTION: Level standard/ LEVEL MODE: Linear

Via LIN. MEASURAND parameter: – % (level) – Level – Volume – Mass

– Incorrect entries are – Calibration with rejected by the device reference pressure – wet calibration, see Operating – Customized level, volume and mass units Instructions BA303P. are possible – Calibration without reference pressure – dry calibration, see Operating Instructions BA303P.

The measured value display and the LEVEL BEFORE LIN. parameter display the measured value.

The measured variable is not in direct proportion to the measured pressure as is the case with tanks with a conical outlet, for example. A linearization table has to be entered for the calibration.

LEVEL SELECTION: level standard/ LEVEL MODE: pressure linearized

– Calibration with Via LINd reference pressure: MEASURAND semiautomatic entry of parameter: linearization table, see – Pressure + % Operating Instructions – Pressure + volume BA303P. – Pressure + mass – Calibration without reference pressure: manual entry of linearization table, see Operating Instructions BA303P.

– Incorrect entries are rejected by the device – Customized level, volume and mass units are possible

The measured value display and the TANK CONTENT parameter show the measured value.

– Two measured variables are required or – the tank shape is given with value pairs, e.g. height and volume.

LEVEL SELECTION: Level standard/ LEVEL MODE: Height linearized

Via COMB. MEASURAND parameter: – Height + volume – Height + mass – Height + % – %-height + volume – %-height + mass – %-height + %

– Calibration with reference pressure: wet calibration and semiautomatic entry of linearization table, see Operating Instructions BA303P. – Calibration without reference pressure: dry calibration and manual entry of linearization table, see Operating Instructions BA303P.

– Incorrect entries are rejected by the device – Customized level, volume and mass units are possible

The measured value display and the TANK CONTENT parameter show the 2nd measured value (volume, mass or %).

The 1st measured variable %-height or height must be in direct proportion to the measured pressure. The 2nd measured variable volume, mass or % must not be in direct proportion to the measured pressure. A linearization table must be entered for the 2nd measured variable. The 2nd measured variable is assigned to the 1st measured variable by means of this table.

58

Comment

Measured value display

The LEVEL BEFORE LIN parameter displays the 1st measured value (%-height or height).

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

6.6.3

!

Commissioning

Quick Setup menu for the Level measuring mode

Note! • Some parameters are only displayed if other parameters are appropriately configured. For example, the EMPTY CALIBRATION parameter is only displayed in the following instances: – LEVEL SELECTION "Level easy pressure" and CALIBRATION MODE "Wet" – LEVEL SELECTION "Level standard", LEVEL MODE "Linear" and CALIBRATION MODE "Wet" The LEVEL MODE and CALIBRATION MODE parameters are in the BASIC SETUP function group. • The following parameters are set to the following values at the factory: – LEVEL SELECTION: Level easy pressure – CALIBRATION MODE: Wet – OUTPUT UNIT or LIN. MEASURAND: % – EMPTY CALIBRATION: 0.0 – FULL CALIBRATION: 100.0 • The Quick Setup is suitable for easy and quick commissioning. If you want to make more complex settings like changing the unit from "%" to "m", the calibration must be performed via the BASIC SETUP group. See Operating Instructions BA303P or  ä 2, "Overview of documentation" section. MEASURED VALUE

1) GROUP SELECTION

1) LANGUAGE

1) MEASURING MODE

1) QUICK SETUP

1) LEVEL SELECTION

OPERATING MENU

2) MEASURING MODE

2) LEVEL SELECTION

Pressure

Level POS. ZERO ADJUST

3)

1) On-site display only

EMPTY CALIB.

2) FieldCare only 3) – LEVEL SELECTION "Level Easy Pressure" and CALIBRATION MODE "Wet" – LEVEL SELECTION = "Level Standard", LEVEL MODE = "Linear" and CALIBRATION MODE = "Wet"

3) FULL CALIB.

DAMPING VALUE

P01-FMB70xxx-19-xx-xx-en-015

Fig. 27:

Quick Setup menu for the "Level" measuring mode"

Local operation

FieldCare

Measured value display Switch from the measured value display to the GROUP SELECTION with F .

Measured value display Select QUICK SETUP menu.

GROUP SELECTION Select the MEASURING MODE.

MEASURING MODE Select "Level".

MEASURING MODE Select "Level". LEVEL SELECTION Select the level mode. For an overview,  ä 58.

LEVEL SELECTION Select the level mode. For an overview,  ä 58.

GROUP SELECTION Select QUICK SETUP menu.

Endress+Hauser

59

Commissioning

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Local operation

FieldCare

POS. ZERO ADJUST Due to orientation of the device, there may be a shift in the measured value. You correct the MEASURED VALUE via the POS. ZERO ADJUST parameter with the "Confirm" option, i.e. you assign the value 0.0 to the pressure present.

POS. ZERO ADJUST Due to orientation of the device, there may be a shift in the measured value. You correct the MEASURED VALUE via the POS. ZERO ADJUST parameter with the "Confirm" option, i.e. you assign the value 0.0 to the pressure present.

EMPTY CALIBRATION 1 Enter level value for the lower calibration point. For this parameter, enter a level value which is assigned to the pressure present at the device.

EMPTY CALIBRATION 1 Enter level value for the lower calibration point. For this parameter, enter a level value which is assigned to the pressure present at the device.

FULL CALIBRATION 1 Enter level value for the upper calibration point. For this parameter, enter a level value which is assigned to the pressure present at the device.

FULL CALIBRATION 1 Enter level value for the upper calibration point. For this parameter, enter a level value which is assigned to the pressure present at the device.

DAMPING VALUE Enter damping time (time constant ). The damping affects the speed at which all subsequent elements, such as the onsite display, measured value and OUT Value of the Analog Input Block react to a change in the pressure.

DAMPING VALUE Enter damping time (time constant ). The damping affects the speed at which all subsequent elements, such as the onsite display, measured value and OUT Value of the Analog Input Block react to a change in the pressure.

1)

!

60

– LEVEL SELECTION "Level easy pressure" and CALIBRATION MODE "Wet" – LEVEL SELECTION "Level standard", LEVEL MODE "Linear" and CALIBRATION MODE "Wet"

Note! For local operation see also  ä 27, Section 5.2.3 "Function of the operating elements – onsite display connected" and  ä 40, Section 5.4 "Local operation – onsite display connected".

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

6.7

Commissioning

Scaling the OUT parameter

In the Analog Input Block, the input value or input range can be scaled in accordance with the automation requirements. Example: The measuring range 0 to 500 (7.5 psi) mbar should be rescaled to 0 to 100 %. • Select XD_SCALE group. – For EU_0, enter "0". – For EU_100, enter "500". – For UNITS_INDEX, enter "mbar". • Select OUT_SCALE group. – For EU_0, enter "0". – For EU_100, enter "10000". – For UNITS_INDEX, select "%" for example. The unit selected here does not have any effect on the scaling. This unit is not displayed on the onsite display or in the operating program such as FieldCare. • Result: At a pressure of 350 mbar (5.25 psi), the value 70 is output to a downstream block or to the PCS as the OUT value. Analog Input Block L_TYPE: Indirect

UNITS_INDEX: mbar

XD_SCALE

EU_100 500

OUT_SCALE

1

PRIMARY_VALUE = 350 mbar Output Pressure Transducer Block

0.7

EU_0 0

0 0

0.7

1

EU_0 0

UNITS_ EU_100 INDEX: % 70 100

OUT Value = 70 P01-xMx7xxxx-05-xx-xx-en-008

!

Endress+Hauser

Note! • If you have selected the "Direct" mode for the L_TYPE parameter, you cannot change the values and units for XD_SCALE and OUT_SCALE. • The L_TYPE, XD_SCALE and OUT_SCALE parameters can only be changed in the OOS block mode. • Make sure that the output scaling of the Pressure Transducer Block SCALE_OUT matches the input scaling of the Analog Input Block XD_SCALE.

61

Maintenance

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

7

Maintenance

Keep the pressure compensation and GORE-TEX® filter (1) free from contamination and water.

1

P01-PMC71xxx-17-xx-xx-xx-001

7.1

Exterior cleaning

Please note the following points when cleaning the device: • The cleaning agents used should not attack the surface and the seals. • Mechanical damage to the process isolating diaphragm, e.g. due to pointed objects, must be avoided.

8

Troubleshooting

8.1

Messages

The following table lists all the possible messages that can occur. The device makes a distinction between the message types "Alarm", "Warning" and "Error". For "Error"-type messages, you can enter whether the device should react as in the event of an alarm or as in the event of a warning. See "Message type/NA 64" column and Section 8.2 "Response of outputs to errors". In addition, the "Message type/NA 64" column classifies the messages in accordance with NAMUR Recommendation NA 64: • Break down: indicated with "B" • Maintenance need: indicated with "C" (check request) • Function check: indicated with "I" (in service) Displaying the messages on the onsite display: • The measured value display shows the message with the highest priority. See the "Priority" column • The ALARM_STATUS parameter shows all the messages present in descending order of priority. You can scroll through all the messages pending using the S or O key. The DIAGNOSTIC_CODE/DIAGNOSE_CODE parameter displays the message with the highest priority. This parameter is displayed in the MESSAGES group in the Diagnostic Transducer Block or in FieldCare. See also Section 8.2 "Response of outputs to errors". Every message is also output as per the FOUNDATION Fieldbus Specification by means of the XD_ERROR and BLOCK_ERROR parameters in the Pressure and Service Transducer Block. Numbers are given for these parameters in the following table which are explained on  ä 70.

!

62

Note! • If the device detects a defect in the onsite display during initialization, special error messages are generated. For the error messages, see  ä 70, Section 8.1.1 "Onsite display error messages". • For support and further information, please contact Endress+Hauser Service. • See also Section 8.4, Section 8.5 and Section 8.6.

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Troubleshooting

Code

Error type/ NA 64

Message/description

XD_ ERROR Value

BLOCK_ ERROR Value Bit

Cause

101 (A101)

Alarm B

B>Sensor electronic EEPROM error

20

5

18 – Wait a few minutes. – Electromagnetic effects are greater than specifications in the – Restart the device. Perform reset (Code 62). technical data. (See Section 9.) This message – Block off electromagnetic effects or eliminate source of normally only appears briefly. disturbance. – Sensor defect.

23

102 (W102) Warning C

C>Checksum error in EEPROM: peakhold segment

106 (W106) Warning C

C>Downloading - please 17 wait

110 (A110)

B>Checksum error in EEPROM: configuration segment

Alarm B

23

Measure

Priority

– Replace sensor.

11

– Main electronics defect. Correct – Replace main electronics. measurement can continue as long as you do not need the peak hold indicator function.

52

0

– Downloading.

– Wait for download to complete.

51

11

– The supply voltage is disconnected when writing.

– Reestablish supply voltage. Perform reset if necessary (code 7864) and recalibrate the device.

6

– Block off electromagnetic effects – Electromagnetic effects are or eliminate sources of greater than specifications in the disturbance. technical data. (See Section 9.) – Main electronics defect.

– Replace main electronics.

113 (A113)

Alarm B

B>ROM failure in transmitter electronic

20

9

– Main electronics defect.

– Replace main electronics.

1

115 (E115)

Error C

C>Sensor overpressure

17

0

– Overpressure present.

– Reduce pressure until message disappears.

30

– Sensor defect.

– Replace sensor.

– The file is defect.

– Use another file.

– During the download, the data are not correctly transmitted to the processor, e.g. because of open cable connections, spikes (ripple) on the supply voltage or electromagnetic effects.

– Check cable connection PC – transmitter. – Block off electromagnetic effects or eliminate sources of disturbance. – Perform reset (code 7864) and recalibrate the device. – Repeat download.

– Pressure too low.

– Increase pressure until message disappears.

– Sensor defect.

– Replace sensor.

116 (W116) Warning C

C>Download error, repeat download

17

120 (E120)

C>Sensor low pressure

17

Error C

0

0

37

31

121 (A121)

Alarm B

B>Checksum error in factory segment of EEPROM

23

11

– Main electronics defect.

– Replace main electronics.

5

122 (A122)

Alarm B

B>Sensor not connected

20

5

– Cable connection sensor –main electronics disconnected.

– Check cable connection and repair if necessary.

14

– Block off electromagnetic effects – Electromagnetic effects are or eliminate source of greater than specifications in the disturbance. technical data. (See Section 9.)

130 (A130)

Alarm B

Endress+Hauser

B>EEPROM is defect.

23

11

– Main electronics defect.

– Replace main electronics.

– Sensor defect.

– Replace sensor.

– Main electronics defect.

– Replace main electronics.

10

63

Troubleshooting

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Code

Error type/ NA 64

Message/description

XD_ ERROR Value

BLOCK_ ERROR Value Bit

Cause

Measure

Priority

131 (A131)

Alarm B

B>Checksum error in EEPROM: min/max segment

23

11

– Main electronics defect.

– Replace main electronics.

9

132 (A132)

Alarm B

B>Checksum error in totalizer EEPROM

23

11

– Main electronics defect.

– Replace main electronics.

7

133 (A133)

Alarm B

B>Checksum error in History EEPROM

23

11

– An error occurred when writing.

– Perform reset (code 7864) and recalibrate the device.

8

– Main electronics defect.

– Replace main electronics.

134 (W134) Warning C

C>EEPROM lifetime WARNING

17

0

– Writing too often to EEPROM.

– Reduce write accessing to EEPROM.

55

135 (A135)

B>Checksum error in EEPROM FF segment

23

11

– Main electronics defect.

– Replace main electronics.

10

602 (W602) Warning C

C>Linearization curve not monoton

19

7

– The linearization table is not monotonic increasing.

– Add to or correct linearization table. Then accept linearization table again.

57

613 (W613) Warning I

I>Simulation is active

17

3

– Simulation is switched on, i.e. the device is not measuring at present.

– Switch off simulation.

60

700 (W700) Warning C

C>Last configuration not 23 stored

11

– An error occurred when writing or reading configuration data or the power supply was disconnected.

– Perform reset (code 7864) and recalibrate the device.

53

– Main electronics defect.

– Replace main electronics.

Alarm B

702 (W702) Warning C

703 (A703)

704 (A704)

705 (A705)

64

Alarm B

Alarm B

Alarm B

C>HistoROM data not consistent.

B>Measurement error

B>Measurement error

B>Measurement error

17

20

20

20

11

5

5

5

– Data were not written correctly – Repeat upload. – Perform reset (code 7864) and to the HistoROM, e.g. if the recalibrate the device. HistoROM was detached during the writing process. – HistoROM does not have any data.

– Copy suitable data to the HistoROM. (  ä 44, Section 5.6.1 "Copying configuration data".)

– Fault in the main electronics.

– Briefly disconnect device from the power supply.

– Main electronics defect.

– Replace main electronics.

– Fault in the main electronics.

– Briefly disconnect device from the power supply.

– Main electronics defect.

– Replace main electronics.

– Fault in the main electronics.

– Briefly disconnect device from the power supply.

– Main electronics defect.

– Replace main electronics.

54

23

13

22

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Troubleshooting

Message/description

XD_ ERROR Value

BLOCK_ ERROR Value Bit

Cause

706 (W706) Warning C

C>Configuration in HistoROM and device not identical

23

11

59 – Copy data from the device to – Configuration (parameters) in the HistoROM. ( ä 44, the HistoROM and in the device Section 5.6.1 "Copying not identical. configuration data".) – Copy data from the HistoROM to the device. ( ä 44, Section 5.6.1 "Copying configuration data".) The message remains if the HistoROM and the device have different software versions. The message disappears if you copy the data from the device to the HistoROM. – Device reset codes such as 1 or 40864 do not have any effect on the HistoROM. This means that if you perform a reset, the configurations in the HistoROM and the device can differ.

707 (A707)

18 B>X-VAL. (TAB_XY _VALUE) of lin. table out of edit limits.

7

– At least one X-VALUE (TAB_XY_VALUE) in the linearization table is either below the value for SCALE_IN, EU_0/HYDR. PRESS MIN. or LINEAR_ LEVEL_MIN/MIN. LEVEL or above the value for SCALE_IN, EU_100/HYDR. PRESS. MAX. or LINEAR_LEVEL_MAX/LEVEL MAX.

B>Set span too small. Not allowed.

7

– Values for calibration (e.g. lower – Adjust calibration to suit sensor. 50 (See also Operating range value and upper range Instructions BA303P, parameter value) are too close together. description for CAL_MIN_SPAN/MINIMUM SPAN or these Operating Instructions,  ä 2)

Code

Error type/ NA 64

Alarm B

710 (W710) Warning C

18

Measure

Priority

38 – Carry out calibration again. (See also Operating Instructions BA303P or these Operating Instructions,  ä 2)

– The sensor was replaced and the – Adjust calibration to suit sensor. customer-specific configuration – Replace sensor with a suitable sensor. does not suit the sensor. – Unsuitable download carried out.

– Check configuration and perform download again. – Carry out calibration again.

713 (A713)

Alarm B

B>100% POINT (LEVEL_100_PERCENT _VALUE) level out of edit limits

18

7

– The sensor was replaced.

715 (E715)

Error C

C>Sensor over temperature

17

0

– The temperature measured in – Reduce process temperature/ the sensor is greater than the ambient temperature. upper nominal temperature of the sensor. (See also Operating Instructions BA303P, parameter description for TEMPERATURE_1 _SENSOR_LIMIT_HIGH/Tmax SENSOR or these Operating Instructions,  ä 2) – Unsuitable download carried out.

Endress+Hauser

39

33

– Check configuration and perform download again.

65

Troubleshooting

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Code

Error type/ NA 64

Message/description

XD_ ERROR Value

BLOCK_ ERROR Value Bit

Cause

Measure

Priority

716 (A716)

Alarm B

B>Process isolating diaphragm broken

20

5

– Sensor defect.

– Replace sensor.

25

Error C

C>Transmitter over temperature

17

717 (E717)

718 (E718)

Error C

C>Transmitter under temperature

– Reduce pressure.

17

0

0

– The temperature measured in the electronics is greater than the upper nominal temperature of the electronics (+88 °C (+190 °F)).

– Reduce ambient temperature.

– Unsuitable download carried out.

– Check configuration and perform download again.

– The temperature measured in the electronics is smaller than the lower nominal temperature of the electronics (–43 °C (-45 °F)).

– Increase ambient temperature. Insulate device if necessary.

– Unsuitable download carried out.

– Check configuration and perform download again. 40 – Carry out calibration again. (See also Operating Instructions BA303P or these Operating Instructions,  ä 2)

719 (A719)

Alarm B

19 B>Y-VAL (TAB_XY_VALUE) of lin. table out of edit limits

7

– At least one Y-VALUE (TAB_XY_VALUE) in the linearization table is below the SCALE_OUT, EU_0/TANK CONTENT MIN. or above the SCALE_OUT, EU_100/TANK CONTENT MAX.

720 (E720)

Error C

C>Sensor under temperature

0

– Increase process temperature/ – The temperature measured in ambient temperature. the sensor is smaller than the lower nominal temperature of the sensor. ( See also Operating Instructions BA303P, parameter description for TEMPERATURE_1_SENSOR_ LIMIT_LOW/Tmin SENSOR or these Operating Instructions,  ä 2)

17

– Unsuitable download carried out.

– Check configuration and perform download again.

– Loose connection at sensor cable.

– Wait a short period of time and tighten the connection, or avoid loose connection.

35

36

34

721 (A721)

Alarm B

B>ZERO POSITION (LEVEL OFFSET) level out of edit limits

18

7

– LEVEL MIN (LINEAR_LEVEL_ MIN) or LEVEL MAX (LINEAR_LEVEL_MAX) has been changed.

– Perform reset (code 2710) and recalibrate the device.

41

722 (A722)

Alarm B

B>EMPTY CALIB. (SCALE_OUT, EU_0) or FULL CALIB. (SCALE_OUT, EU_100) out of edit limits

18

7

– LINEAR_ LEVEL_MIN/LEVEL – Perform reset (code 2710) and MIN or LINEAR_LEVEL_MAX/ recalibrate the device. LEVEL MAX has been changed.

42

723 (A723)

Alarm B

B>MAX. FLOW (SCALE_OUT, EU_100) out of edit limits

18

7

– FLOW_TYPE/FLOW-MEAS. TYPE has been changed.

43

725 (A725)

Alarm B

B>Sensor connection error, cycle disturbance

20

5

– Block off electromagnetic effects 26 – Electromagnetic effects are or eliminate source of greater than specifications in the disturbance. technical data. (See Section 9.) – Sensor or main electronics defect.

66

– Carry out calibration again.

– Replace sensor or main electronics.

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Troubleshooting

Code

Error type/ NA 64

Message/description

XD_ ERROR Value

BLOCK_ ERROR Value Bit

Cause

726 (E726)

Error C

C>Sensor temperature error - overrange

20

5

– Block off electromagnetic effects 32 – Electromagnetic effects are or eliminate source of greater than specifications in the disturbance. technical data. (See Section 9.)

727 (E727)

728 (A728)

729 (A729)

730 (E730)

731 (E731)

Error C

Alarm B

Alarm B

Error C

Error C

Endress+Hauser

C>Sensor pressure error - overrange

B>RAM error

B>RAM error

20

20

20

19 C>PminALARM WINDOW (PRESSURE_1_USER_ LOW_LIMIT) undershot

C>PmaxALARM WINDOW (PRESSURE_1_UER_ HIGH_LIMIT) overshot

19

5

9

9

7

7

Measure

– Process temperature is outside permitted range.

– Check temperature present, reduce or increase if necessary.

– Sensor defect.

– If the process temperature is within the permitted range, replace sensor.

Priority

– Block off electromagnetic effects 29 – Electromagnetic effects are or eliminate source of greater than specifications in the disturbance. technical data. (See Section 9.) – Pressure is outside permitted range.

– Check pressure present, reduce or increase if necessary.

– Sensor defect.

– If the pressure is within the permitted range, replace sensor.

– Fault in the main electronics.

– Briefly disconnect device from the power supply.

– Main electronics defect.

– Replace main electronics.

– Fault in the main electronics.

– Briefly disconnect device from the power supply.

– Main electronics defect.

– Replace main electronics.

2

3

47 – Check system/pressure – Pressure measured value has measured value. undershot the value specified for – Change value for the PRESSURE_1_USER_ PRESSURE_1_USER_ LOW_ LOW_LIMIT/Pmin ALARM LIMIT/Pmin ALARM WINDOW parameter. WINDOW if necessary. (See also Operating Instructions BA303P, parameter description or these Operating Instructions,  ä 2) – Loose connection at sensor cable.

– Wait a short period of time and tighten the connection, or avoid loose connection.

– Pressure measured value has overshot the value specified for the PRESSURE_1_USER_ HIGH_LIMIT/Pmax ALARM WINDOW parameter.

– Check system/pressure 46 measured value. – Change value for PRESSURE_1_USER_ HIGH_ LIMIT/Pmax ALARM WINDOW if necessary. (See also Operating Instructions BA303P, parameter description or these Operating Instructions,  ä 2)

67

Troubleshooting

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Code

Error type/ NA 64

Message/description

XD_ ERROR Value

BLOCK_ ERROR Value Bit

Cause

Measure

Priority

732 (E732)

Error C

C>TminALARM WINDOW (TEMPERATURE_1_ USER_LOW_LIMIT) undershot

19

7

– Temperature measured value has undershot the value specified for the TEMPERATURE_1_USER_ LOW_LIMIT/Tmin ALARM WINDOW parameter.

49 – Check system/temperature measured value. – Change value for TEMPERATURE_1_USER_ LOW_ LIMIT/Tmin ALARM WINDOW if necessary. (See also Operating Instructions BA303P, parameter description or these Operating Instructions,  ä 2)

– Loose connection at sensor cable.

– Wait a short period of time and tighten the connection, or avoid loose connection.

733 (E733)

Error C

C>TmaxALARM WINDOW (TEMPERATURE_1_ USER_HIGH_LIMIT) overshot

19

7

– Temperature measured value has overshot the value specified for the TEMPERATURE_1_USER_ HIGH_LIMIT/Tmax ALARM WINDOW parameter.

48 – Check system/temperature measured value. – Change value for TEMPERATURE_1_USER_HIG H_LIMIT/Tmax ALARM WINDOW if necessary. (See also Operating Instructions BA303P, parameter description or these Operating Instructions,  ä 2)

736 (A736)

Alarm B

B>RAM error

20

9

– Fault in the main electronics.

– Briefly disconnect device from the power supply.

– Main electronics defect.

– Replace main electronics.

– Fault in the main electronics.

– Briefly disconnect device from the power supply.

– Main electronics defect.

– Replace main electronics.

– Fault in the main electronics.

– Briefly disconnect device from the power supply.

– Main electronics defect.

– Replace main electronics.

– Fault in the main electronics.

– Briefly disconnect device from the power supply.

– Main electronics defect.

– Replace main electronics.

– Level measuring mode: the measured pressure has undershot the value for SCALE_IN, EU_0/HYDR. PRESS. MIN. or overshot the value for SCALE_IN, EU_100/ HYDR. PRESS MAX.

– Check configuration and recalibrate the device if necessary. – Select a device with a suitable measuring range.

– Level measuring mode: the measured level has undershot the value for LINEAR_LEVEL_MIN/LEVEL MIN or overshot the value for LINEAR_LEVEL_MAX/LEVEL MAX.

– Check configuration and recalibrate the device if necessary. (See also Operating Instructions BA303P, parameter description LEVEL_MIN or these Operating Instructions,  ä 2)

737 (A)737) Alarm B

738 (A738)

739 (A739)

740 (E740)

741 (A741)

68

Alarm B

Alarm B

Error C

Alarm B

B>Measurement error

B>Measurement error

B>Measurement error

20

20

20

C>Calculation overflow, 20 bad configuration

B>TANK HEIGHT (LEVEL_TANK_ HEIGHT) out of edit limits

18

5

5

5

5

7

– Perform reset (code 2710) and – LINEAR_LEVEL_MIN/LEVEL recalibrate the device. MIN or LINEAR_LEVEL_MAX/ LEVEL MAX has been changed.

4

21

20

24

28

44

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Troubleshooting

Code

Error type/ NA 64

Message/description

XD_ ERROR Value

BLOCK_ ERROR Value Bit

Cause

742 (A742)

Alarm B

B>Sensor connection error (upload)

20

5

– Wait a few minutes. – Electromagnetic effects are greater than specifications in the – Perform reset (code 7864) and recalibrate the device. technical data. (See Section 9.) This message normally only appears briefly.

743 (E743)

Alarm B

B>Electronic PCB error during initialization

20

5

– Cable connection sensor –main electronics disconnected.

– Check cable connection and repair if necessary.

– Sensor defect.

– Replace sensor.

Alarm B

B>Main electronic PCB error

20

5

Priority 19

15 – Wait a few minutes. – Electromagnetic effects are greater than specifications in the – Restart the device. Perform reset (Code 62). technical data. (See Section 9.) This message normally only appears briefly. – Main electronics defect.

744 (A744)

Measure

– Replace main electronics.

– Restart the device. Perform reset 12 – Electromagnetic effects are (Code 62). greater than specifications in the – Block off electromagnetic effects technical data. or eliminate source of (See Section 9.) disturbance. – Main electronics defect.

– Replace main electronics. – Replace sensor with a suitable sensor.

55

745 (W745) Warning C

C>Sensor data unknown 17

0

– Sensor does not suit the device (electronic sensor nameplate). Device continues measuring.

746 (W746) Warning C

C>Sensor connection error - initializing

5

27 – Wait a few minutes. – Electromagnetic effects are greater than specifications in the – Restart the device. Perform reset (Code 7864). technical data. (See Section 9.) This message – Block off electromagnetic effects or eliminate source of normally only appears briefly. disturbance.

20

– Overpressure or low pressure present.

– Reduce or increase pressure. – Replace sensor with a suitable sensor.

747 (A747)

Alarm B

B>Sensor software not 17 compatible to electronics

0

– Sensor does not suit the device (electronic sensor nameplate).

748 (A748)

Alarm B

B>Memory failure in signal processor

5

– Block off electromagnetic effects 16 – Electromagnetic effects are or eliminate source of greater than specifications in the technical data. disturbance. (See Section 9.)

20

– Main electronics defect. 750 (A750)

Alarm B

Endress+Hauser

B>Configuration not permitted

19

7

17

– Replace main electronics.

– By means of the operation – Check configuration. profile, options were selected for – Perform reset (code 7864) and the configuration of the device recalibrate the device. but the options do not suit one another. For example, if the option "1" (linearization table) was selected for LIN_TYPE and the unit "1347 (m3/s)" was selected for PRIMARY_VALUE_UNIT.

45

69

Troubleshooting

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Explanation of XD_ERROR and BLOCK_ERROR Error type

Code

XD_ERROR Value

XD_ERROR Text

BLOCK_ ERROR Value Bit

BLOCK_ERROR Text

PV Status

Alarm

747

17

General Error

0

Other

Bad Sensor Failure

707, 711, 713, 721, 722, 723, 741

18

Calibration Error

7

Output Failure

Uncertain Config Error

719, 750

19

Configuration Error 7

Output Failure

Uncertain Config Error

101, 122, 703, 704, 705, 716, 725, 737, 738, 739, 742, 743, 744, 746, 748

20

Electronics Failure

5

Device Fault State Set

Bad Device Failure

113, 728, 729, 736

20

Electronics Failure

9

Memory Failure

Bad Device Failure

110, 121, 130, 131, 132, 133, 135

23

Data Integrity Error 11

Lost NV Data

Bad Device Failure

115, 120, 715, 717, 718, 720

17

General Error

Other

– Alarm: Bad Non Specific – Warning: Status Uncertain

730, 731, 732, 733

19

Configuration Error 7

Output Failure

– Alarm: Bad Non Specific – Warning: Status Uncertain

122, 727, 726, 740

20

Electronics Failure

5

Device Fault State

– Alarm: Bad Non Specific – Warning: Status Uncertain

106, 116, 134, 745

17

General Error

0

Other

Uncertain Config Error

613

17

General Error

3

Simulate active

Uncertain Sim

702

17

General Error

11

Lost NV Data

Status Uncertain

710

18

Calibration Error

7

Output Failure

Status Uncertain

602, 604

19

Configuration Error 7

Output Failure

Uncertain Config Error

746

20

Electronics Failure

Device Fault State Set

Status Uncertain

102, 700, 706

23

Data Integrity Error 11

Lost NV Data

Status Uncertain

Error

Warning

8.1.1

0

5

Onsite display error messages

If the device detects a defect in the onsite display during initialization, the following error messages can be displayed: Message

Measure

Initialization, VU Electr. Defect A110

Exchange onsite display.

Initialization, VU Electr. Defect A114 Initialization, VU Electr. Defect A281 Initialization, VU Checksum Err. A110 Initialization, VU Checksum Err. A112 Initialization, VU Checksum Err. A171

70

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

8.2

Troubleshooting

Response of outputs to errors

The device makes a distinction between the message types "Alarm", "Warning" and "Error". See the following table and ä 62, Section 8.1 "Messages".

Output

A (Alarm)

W (Warning)

E (Error: Alarm/Warning)

FOUNDATION Fieldbus

The process variable in question is transmitted with the status BAD.

Device continues measuring. The process variable in question is transmitted with the status UNCERTAIN.

For this error, you can enter whether the device should react as in the event of an alarm or as in the event of a warning. See corresponding "Alarm" or "Warning" column. (See also Operating Instructions BA303P, REACTION_ON_ALARM_NR/ SELECT ALARM TYPE parameter description or these Operating Instructions,  ä 2)

Onsite display

– The measured value and message are displayed alternately – Measured value display: -symbol is permanently displayed.

– The measured value and message are displayed alternately – Measured value display: -symbol flashes.

– The measured value and message are displayed alternately – Measured value display: see corresponding "Alarm" or "Warning" column

Message display – A + 3-digit number such as A122 and – Description

Message display: – W + 3-digit number such as W613 and – Description

Message display: – E + 3-digit number such as E731 and – Description

Remote operation (FF configuration program/FieldCare)

1)

In the case of an alarm, the ALARM In the event of a warning, the ALARM STATUS1 parameter displays a 3-digit STATUS  parameter displays a 3-digit number such as 122 for "Sensor connection number such as 613 for "Simulation active". error, incorrect data".

In the event of an error, the ALARM STATUS  parameter displays a 3-digit number such as 731 for "Pmax PROCESS undershot".

FF configuration program: Diagnostic Transducer Block. Menu path FieldCare: OPERATING MENU  MESSAGES

8.2.1

Analog Input Block

If the Analog Input Block receives an input or simulation value with the status BAD, the Analog Input Block uses the failsafe mode defined in the FSAFE_TYPE1 parameter. The following options are available by means of the FSAFE_TYPE parameter: • Last Good Value The last valid value is used for further processing with the status UNCERTAIN. • Fail SafeValue The value specified by means of the FSAFE_VALUE1 parameter is used for further processing with the status UNCERTAIN. • Wrong Value The current value is used for further processing with the status BAD. Factory setting: • FSAFE_TYPE: FsafeValue • FSAFE_VALUE: 0

!

Note! The failsafe mode is also activated if the "Out of Service O/S" option was selected by means of the TARGET_MODE2 parameter. 1 These parameters are not available by means of the FieldCare operating program.

Endress+Hauser

71

Troubleshooting

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

8.3

Confirming messages

Depending on the settings for the ALARM_HOLD_ON_TIME/ALARM DISPL. TIME and ACKNOWLEDGE_ALARM_MODE/ACK. ALARM MODE parameters, the following measures should be taken to clear a message: Settings 1

Measures

– Rectify the cause of the message (see also Section 8.1). – ALARM_HOLD_ON_TIME// ALARM DISPL. TIME = 0 s – ACKNOWLEDGE_ALARM_MODE/ ACK. ALARM MODE = Off – Rectify the cause of the message (see also Section 8.1). – ALARM_HOLD_ON_TIME/ – Wait for the alarm display time to elapse. ALARM DISPL. TIME > 0 s – ACKNOWLEDGE_ALARM_MODE/ ACK. ALARM MODE = Off – Rectify the cause of the message (see also Section 8.1). – ALARM_HOLD_ON_TIME/ – Confirm message using ACKNOWLEDGE_ALARM/ACK. ALARM ALARM DISPL. TIME = 0 s parameter. – ACKNOWLEDGE_ALARM_MODE/ ACK. ALARM MODE = On – Rectify the cause of the message (see also Section 8.1). – ALARM_HOLD_ON_TIME/ – Confirm message using ACKNOWLEDGE_ALARM/ACK. ALARM ALARM DISPL. TIME > 0 s parameter. – ACKNOWLEDGE_ALARM_MODE/ – Wait for the alarm display time to elapse. If a message appears and the alarm ACK. ALARM MODE = On display time elapses before the message has been acknowledged, the message is cleared once it has been acknowledged. 1)

8.4

FF configuration program: The parameters are in the Diagnostic Transducer Blocks. FieldCare: Menu path for ALARM DISPL. TIME and ACK. ALARM MODE: OPERATING MENU DIAGNOSTICS MESSAGES

Repair

The Endress+Hauser repairs concept provides for measuring devices to have a modular design and also that the customer may carry out repairs (see Section 8.6 "Spare parts" on  ä 73).

!

Note! • For certified devices, please consult the "Repair of Ex-certified devices" section. • For more information on service and spare parts contact the Endress+Hauser Service. (  See www.endress.com/worldwide)

8.5

#

72

Repair of Ex-certified devices

Warning! When repairing Ex-certified devices, please note the following: • Only specialist personnel or Endress+Hauser may undertake repairs of certified devices. • Relevant standards, national hazardous area regulations and Safety Instructions and Certificates must be observed. • Only genuine Endress+Hauser spare parts may be used. • When ordering spare parts, please check the device designation on the nameplate. Identical parts may only be used as replacements. • Electronic inserts or sensors already in use in a standard instrument may not be used as spare parts for a certified device. • Carry out repairs according to the instructions. After repairs, the device must fulfill the requirements of the specified individual tests. • A certified device may only be converted into another certified variant by Endress+Hauser. • All repairs and modifications must be documented.

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

8.6

Troubleshooting

Spare parts

Information on the spare parts that are available for your measuring device is provided on the Internet site "www.endress.com". Proceed as follows here: 1.

Select "www.endress.com" and then select the country.

2.

Click "Products"

3.

Enter the product name in the "Product name" field.

4.

Select the measuring device.

5.

Switch to the "Accessories/spare parts" tab

6.

Select the spare parts (also use the overview drawings on the right-hand side of the screen).

When ordering a spare part, always indicate the serial number that is indicated on the nameplate. Where necessary, replacement instructions are provided with the spare parts.

Endress+Hauser

73

Troubleshooting

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

8.7

Returning the device

Before you send in a device for repair or inspection: • Remove all signs of fluids, paying particular attention to seal grooves and gaps in which fluid can become lodged. This is especially important if the fluid is hazardous to health. Please refer also to the "Declaration of Hazardous Material and Decontamination". Please enclose the following when returning the device: • The duly completed and signed "Declaration of Contamination". Only then can Endress+Hauser inspect or repair the returned device. • The chemical and physical properties of the fluid. • A description of the application. • A description of the error which occurred. • Special instructions on handling, if necessary, e.g. safety data sheet as per EN 91/155/EEC.

8.8

Disposal

When disposing, separate and recycle the device components based on the materials.

8.9 Date

03.2005

Software history

Software version

Changes to the software

Documentation

02.00.zz

Original software.

—

Compatible with: – ToF Tool Field Tool Package, version 2.04 or higher

BA302P/00/EN/04.05 BA303P/00/EN/04.05 52027501 52027502

—

BA302P/00/EN/11.05 BA303P/00/EN/04.05 71009599 52027502

CD-ROM

Operating Instructions

Description of Device Functions

CD507P/00/A2/10.07 BA302P/00/EN/10.07 BA303P/00/EN/04.05 71033931 71043307 52027502 CD507P/00/A2/12.07 BA302P/00/EN/12.07 BA303P/00/EN/04.05 71033931 71043307 52027502 CD507P/00/A2/05.08 BA302P/00/EN/05.08 BA303P/00/EN/05.08 71071801 71071782 71062794 08.2008

03.00.zz

Compatible with: – FieldCare version 2.15.00

CD507P/00/A2/08.08 BA302P/00/EN/08.08 BA303P/00/EN/08.08 71077559 71077547 71076564 CD507P/00/A2/06.09 BA302P/00/EN/06.09 BA303P/00/EN/06.09 71095448 71095438 71095456 CD507P/00/A2/05.10 BA302P/00/EN/05.10 BA303P/00/EN/05.10 71111804 71111799 71111814

74

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

9

Technical data

Technical data

For technical data, please refer to Technical Information Cerabar S TI383P (PMC71, PMP71, PMP75); TI438P (PMP72).  ä 2, "Overview of documentation" section.

!

Endress+Hauser

10

Appendix

10.1

Menu

Note! • The entire menu of Endress+Hauser parameters is depicted on the following pages. Some Endress+Hauser parameters correspond to FF standard parameters. All other FF parameters can only be configured by means of an FF configuration program. (See Operating Instructions BA303P "Cerabar S/Deltabar S/Deltapilot S, Description of Device Functions"). • The menu has a different structure depending on the measuring mode selected. This means that some function groups are only displayed for one measuring mode, e.g. the "LINEARIZATION" function group for the "Level" measuring mode. • In addition, there are also parameters that are only displayed if other parameters are appropriately configured. For example the CUSTOMER UNIT P parameter is only displayed if the "User unit" option was selected for the PRESS. ENG. UNIT parameter. These parameters are indicated with a "*". • For a description of the parameters, please refer to Operating Instructions BA303P "Cerabar S/ Deltabar S/Deltapilot S Description of Device Functions". The exact dependency of individual parameters on one another is explained here.  ä 2, "Overview of documentation" section.

75

Appendix

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Measured value

1) GROUP SELECTION

1) LANGUAGE

1)

2)

1) LEVEL SELECTION

MANUFACTURER VIEW

QUICK SETUP

MEASURING MODE

Level measuring mode only

OPERATING MENU

SETTINGS

POSITION ADJUSTMENT

2) MEASURING MODE

Pressure 3) POS. ZERO ADJUST

2) POS. ZERO ADJUST

LEVEL SELECTION

4) POS. INPUT VALUE

Deltabar S only Flow

Level

3) MAX. FLOW

POS. ZERO ADJUST

POS. ZERO ADJUST

4) DAMPING VALUE

MAX PRESS. FLOW

POS. INPUT VALUE

EMPTY CALIB.

*

FULL CALIB.

*

DAMPING VALUE

POS. INPUT VALUE

CALIB. OFFSET

DAMPING VALUE

1) Display via on-site display only 2) Display via FieldCare 3) Cerabar S with gauge pressure sensor, Deltabar S or Deltapilot S 4) Cerabar S with absolute pressure sensor

are parameters that are only displayed if other parameters are * There appropriately configured. For example the CUSTOMER UNIT P parameter is only displayed if the "User unit" option was selected for the PRESS. ENG. UNIT parameter. These parameters are indicated with a "*".

P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-en-167

76

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Appendix

BASIC SETUP

2) MEASURING MODE

Pressure

Flow

Level 2) LEVEL SELECTION

PRESS. ENG. UNIT

CUSTOMER UNIT P

CUST. UNIT FACT. P

PRESS. ENG. UNIT

* Level Easy Pressure

*

Level Easy Height

PRESS. ENG. UNIT

PRESS. ENG. UNIT

CUSTOMER UNIT P

*

CUSTOMER UNIT P

*

CUST. UNIT FACT. P

*

CUST. UNIT FACT. P

*

DAMPING VALUE

CUSTOMER UNIT P

*

CUST. UNIT FACT. P

*

Level Standard

X Continuation, see the following page

FLOW-MEAS. TYPE

A B

OUTPUT UNIT

OUTPUT UNIT

CALIBRATION MODE

HEIGHT UNIT

Dry

Wet EMPTY CALIB.

*

CUST. UNIT FACT. F

*

CALIBRATION MODE

EMPTY CALIB.

Dry

Wet FULL CALIB.

CUSTOMER UNIT F

MAX. FLOW

EMPTY PRESSUE

DENSITY UNIT

DENSITY UNIT

MAX PRESS. FLOW

FULL CALIB.

ADJUST DENSITY

ADJUST DENSITY

DAMPING VALUE

FULL PRESSURE

EMPTY CALIB.

EMPTY CALIB.

FULL CALIB.

EMPTY HEIGHT

DAMPING VALUE FULL CALIB.

FULL HEIGHT

DAMPING VALUE

A Volume p. cond.

Gas norm cond.

Mass

Gas std. cond.

UNIT FLOW

NORM FLOW UNIT

STD. FLOW UNIT

MASS FLOW UNIT

B

B

B

B

2) Display via FieldCare are parameters that are only displayed if other parameters are * There appropriately configured. For example the CUSTOMER UNIT P parameter is only displayed if the "User unit" option was selected for the PRESS. ENG. UNIT parameter. These parameters are indicated with a "*".

P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-en-149

Endress+Hauser

77

Appendix

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

C

X

Continuation BASIC SETUP "Level", see also the previous page

Height

LEVEL SELECTION = Level Standard

Volume

%

Mass

UNIT VOLUME

HEIGHT UNIT

MASS UNIT

PRESS. ENG. UNIT

CUTOMER UNIT H

*

CUSTOMER UNIT V

*

CUSTOMER UNIT M

*

CUSTOMER UNIT P

CUST. UNIT FACT. H

*

CUST. UNIT FACT. V

*

CUST. UNIT FACT. M

*

CUST. UNIT FACT. P

D

D

D

D

LEVEL MODE

Linear

Pressure Linearized

Height Linearized

LIN. MEASURAND

LINd MEASURAND

COMB. MEASURAND

C

E

G

D

F

H

CALIBRATION MODE

HYDR. PRESS MIN.

E

HYDR. PRESS MAX.

F

DAMPING VALUE

LEVEL MIN

Wet

Dry

EMPTY CALIB.

DENSITY UNIT

EMPTY PRESSURE

ADJUST DENSITY

%

VOLUME UNIT

*

FULL PRESSURE

CUSTOMER UNIT V

*

MASS UNIT

*

CUSTOMER UNIT M

*

CUST. UNIT FACT. V

*

CUST. UNIT FACT. M

*

F

F

G

CALIBRATION MODE

Height+... Dry

EMPTY CALIB.

TANK VOLUME

EMPTY PRESSURE

ADJUST DENSITY

HEIGHT UNIT

*

FULL CALIB.

HEIGHT UNIT

*

FULL PRESSURE

CUSTOMER UNIT H

*

CUST. UNIT FACT. H

* *

CUST. UNIT FACT. H

*

TANK HEIGHT

*

100% POINT

100% POINT

*

ZERO POSITION

*

ADJUSTED DENSITY

%Height+...

HEIGHT UNIT

CUTOMER UNIT H

*

CUST. UNIT FACT. H

*

DENSITY UNIT

*

CUSTOMER UNIT H

Mass

CUSTOMER UNIT V

F

Wet

* CUST. UNIT FACT. V

Volume

UNIT VOLUME

LEVEL MAX

FULL CALIB.

ADJUSTED DENSITY*

E

H

H

ZERO POSITION DAMPING VALUE

DAMPING VALUE

are parameters that are only displayed if other parameters are * There appropriately configured. For example the CUST. UNIT FACT. H parameter is only displayed if the "User unit" option was selected for the HEIGHT UNIT parameter. These parameters are indicated with a "*".

P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-en-150

78

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

EXTENDED SETUP

Appendix

Level measuring mode only

TEMP. ENG UNIT

Level

Flow measuring mode only (Deltabar S only)

Display via FieldCare only

Display via on-site display only

Pressure

TOTALIZER SETUP

LINEARISATION

LINEARISATION

Level measuring mode only

Flow

TEMP. ENG UNIT

TEMP. ENG UNIT

TANK CONTENT MIN

TANK CONTENT MIN

TOTALIZER 1 UNIT

DENSITIY UNIT

LOW FLOW CUT-OFF

TANK CONTENT MAX

TANK CONTENT MAX

TOT. 1 USER UNIT

*

ADJUST DENSITIY

SET L. FL. CUT-OFF

TABLE SELECTION

TABLE SELECTION

FACT. U. U. TOTAL.1

*

*

PROCESS DENSITY

Measuring Table

Editor Table

Measuring Table

Editor Table

NEG. FLOW TOT. 1

LIN. EDIT MODE

MEASURING TABLE

LIN. EDIT MODE

LINE-NUMB

RESET TOTALIZER 1

EDITOR TABLE

MEASURING TABLE

EDITOR TABLE

ACTIVE LIN. TAB. X

TOTALIZER 2 UNIT

EDITOR TABLE

LINE-NUMB

ACTIVE LIN. TAB. Y

TOT. 2 USER UNIT

*

EDITOR TABLE

X-VAL.

FACT. U. U. TOTAL. 2

*

Y-VAL.

NEG. FLOW TOT. 2

TANK DESCRIPTION EDITOR TABLE

TANK DESCRIPTION

are parameters that are only displayed if other parameters are * There appropriately configured. For example the TOT. 1 USER UNIT parameter is only displayed if the "User unit" option was selected for the TOTALIZER 1 UNIT parameter. These parameters are indicated with a "*".

P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-en-168

Endress+Hauser

79

Appendix

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

TRANSMITTER INFO

DISPLAY

PA DATA

TRANSMITTER DATA

PROCESS CONNECTION

SENSOR DATA

MENU DESCRIPTOR

IDENT NUMBER SEL

DEVICE SERIAL No

Pmax PROC. CONN.

SENSOR SER. NO.

MAIN DATA FORMAT

SET UNIT TO BUS

ELECTR. SERIAL No

PROC. CONN. TYPE

PRESS. SENS LOLIM

MAT. PROC. CONN. +

PRESS. SENS HILIM

1) ALTERNATE DATA

AI OUT VALUE

TAG DESCRIPTION

2)

2) LANGUAGE

AI OUT STATUS

ADDITIONAL INFO.

MAT. PROC. CONN. –

MINIMUM SPAN

DISPLAY CONTRAST

2ND CYCLIC VALUE

DEVICE DESIGN.

SEAL TYPE

SENSOR MEAS. TYPE

SEL.DISPLAY VALUE

HARDWARE REV.

MAT. MEMBRANE

PA INPUT VALUE

SOFTWARE VERSION

FILLING FLUID

BUS ADDRESS

CONFIG RECORDER

Tmin SENSOR

PCB TEMPERATURE

Tmax SENSOR

ALLOWED MIN. TEMP

SENSOR H/WARE REV.

ALLOWED MAX. TEMP

DIP STATUS

1) Display via on-site display only 2) Display via FieldCare

P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-en-152

80

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

PROCESS INFO

Appendix

OPERATION

DIAGNOSTICS

PEAK HOLD INDICATOR

PROCESS VALUE

MESSAGES

USER LIMITS

Deltabar S only Flow

Level

Pressure

SIMULATION

MEASURED VALUE

MEASURED VALUE

MEASURED VALUE

COUNTER:P > Pmax

ENTER RESET CODE

SIMULATION MODE

ALARM STATUS

Pmin ALARM WINDOW

PRESSURE

PRESSURE

PRESSURE

MAX. MEAS. PRESS.

OPERATING HOURS

I

LAST DIAG. CODE

Pmax ALARM WINDOW

CORRECTED PRESS.

CORRECTED PRESS.

CORRECTED PRESS.

COUNTER:P < Pmin

INSERT PIN NO

ACK. ALARM MODE

Tmin ALARM WINDOW

SENSOR PRESSURE

SENSOR PRESSURE

SENSOR PRESSURE

MIN. MEAS. PRESS.

HistoROM AVAIL.

ACK. ALARM

SENSOR TEMP.

SENSOR TEMP.

SENSOR TEMP.

COUNTER:T > Tmax

DOWNLOAD SELECT.

MEAS. VAL. TREND

MEAS. VAL. TREND

MEAS. VAL. TREND

MAX. MEAS. TEMP.

HistoROM CONTROL

SUPPRESSED FLOW

COUNTER:T< Tmin

SELECT ALARMTYPE

TOTALIZER 1

MIN. MEAS. TEMP.

ALARM DELAY

TOTAL. 1 OVERFLOW

PCB COUNT:T > Tmax

ALARM DISPL. TIME

TOTALIZER 2

PCB MAX. TEMP.

TOTAL. 2 OVERFLOW

PCB COUNT: T< Tmin

LEVEL BEFORE LIN

TANK CONTENT

* *

*

RESET ALL ALARMS

*

ERROR NO.

*

Tmax ALARM WINDOW

Display via FieldCare only

PCB MIN. TEMP.

RESET PEAKHOLD

I none

Pressure SIM. PRESSURE

*

Level

Flow SIM. FLOW VALUE

SIM. LEVEL

Tank content SIM. TANK CONT.

Alarm Warning

SIM. ERROR NO.

There are parameters that are only displayed if other parameters are appropriately configured. These parameters are indicated with a "*".

P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-en-170

Endress+Hauser

81

Appendix

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

3) PROFILE VIEW

ANALOG INPUT BLOCK

TRANSDUCER BLOCK

PHYSICAL BLOCK

PB STANDARD PARAM.

TB PARAMETER

AI STANDARD PARAM.

SENSOR PRESSURE

BLOCK OBJECT

PB PARAMETER

PB E+H PARAMETER

TB STANDARD PARAM.

SOFTWARE VERSION

ALARM STATUS

BLOCK OBJECT

MODE BLK

HARDWARE REV.

LAST DIAG. CODE

MODE BLK

PRIMARY VALUE

ST_REV

MANUFACTOR ID

UP_DOWN_FEAT

ST_REV

SCALE IN

TAG DESCRIPTION

DEVICE NAME STR

BUS ADDRESS

TAG DESCRIPTION

SCALE OUT

STRATEGY

DEVICE SERIAL No

SET UNIT TO BUS

STRATEGY

TEMPERATURE

4)

4) BLOCK OBJECT

4)

4)

4)

AI PARAMETER

4)

4) BATCH

4)

4)

MODE BLK

OUT

ST_REV

PV SCALE

TAG DESCRIPTION

OUT SCALE

STRATEGY

CHANNEL

ALERT_KEY

PV_FTIME

4)

4)

4)

4)

4) 4) ALERT_KEY

DIAGNOSIS

4) PA INPUT VALUE

ALERT_KEY

SEL. DISPLAY VAL.

TARGET_MODE

4) TARGET_MODE

DIAGNOSIS EXT.

4) ALARM SUM

4) DIAGNOSIS MASK

ALARM SUM

PROFILE_REV

FSAFE_TYPE

TARGET_MODE

4)

4) ALARM SUM

FSAFE_VALUE

4) DIAGNOSIS MASK EXT.

RESET ALL ALARMS

ALARM_HYS

DEV_CERTIFIC

IDENT_NUMBER

HI_HI_LIM

INSERT PIN No

2ND CYCLIC VALUE

HI_LIM

ENTER RESET CODE

DEVICE DESIGN

LO_LIM

DESCRIPTION

SEL_3RD_CYCL_VAL

LO_LO_LIM

4) MESSAGE

DIAG ADD EXTENSION

DEV_INSTALL_DATE

MASK ADD EXTENSION

4) HI HI ALARM

4)

4) HI ALARM

4) IDENT_NUMBER_SEL

LO ALARM

DIP STATUS

LO LO ALARM

4) 4) SIMULATE

UNIT_TEXT

3) The "Profile view" menu is available via remote operation e.g. FieldCare only. 4) Parameter group (Data type: Record)

P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-en-154

82

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

10.2

Appendix

Patents

This product is protected by at least one of the following patents. Further patents are pending. • US 5,836,063 A1 i EP 0 797 084 B1 • US 5,877,424 A1 i EP 0 780 674 B1 • DE 203 05 869 U1 • US 6,363,790 A1 i EP 0 995 979 B1 • US 5,670,063 A1 i EP 0 516 579 B1 • US 5,539,611 A1 • US 5,050,034 A1 i EP 0 445 382 B1 • US 5,005,421 A1 i EP 0 351 701 B1 • EP 0 414 871 B1 • EP 1 061 351 B1 • US 5,334,344 A1 i EP 0 490 807 B1 • US 6,703,943 A1

Endress+Hauser

83

Appendix

84

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Endress+Hauser

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Endress+Hauser

Appendix

85

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP71, PMP72, PMP75 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Index

Index A

Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Alarm messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Assignment of Transducer Blocks (CHANNEL) . . . . . . . . . 33

N

B Block configuration, delivery status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Block model, Cerabar S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

C

Nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Network configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Number of devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

O

Cable specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 CHANNEL-Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Current consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Onsite display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Operating elements, function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26–27 Operating elements, position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Overvoltage protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

D

P

Device addressing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diaphragm seals, installation instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diaphragm seals, vacuum application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30 30 13 14 23

Pipe mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Position adjustment, FF configuration program . . . . . . . . . Position adjustment, FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Position adjustment, onsite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16 54 54 26 55

E

Q

Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Quick Setup menu pressure (FieldCare). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

F Factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 FOUNDATION Fieldbus system architecture . . . . . . . . . . 28

Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repair of Ex-certified devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating the housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

G

S

Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Scaling OUT parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Scope of delivery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Selecting the language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Selecting the measuring mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Separate housing, assembly and mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Shielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Software history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

H Hazardous areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Heat insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 HistoROM/M-DAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

I Incoming acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Index tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Installation instructions for devices with diaphragm seals. . 13 Installation instructions for devices without diaphragm seals . . 11

R 72 72 48 19

T

K

Temperature isolator, installation instructions . . . . . . . . . . 14 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Keys, onsite, function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26–27 Keys, position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

U Unlocking operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

L Level measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level measurement, Quick Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level Quick Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locking operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

57 59 59 46

W Wall mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Welding recommendation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

M Measuring arrangement for level measurement . . . . . . . . . 13 Measuring arrangement for pressure measurement . . . 11–12 Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 86

Endress+Hauser

Declaration of Hazardous Material and De-Contamination Erklärung zur Kontamination und Reinigung Please reference the Return Authorization Number (RA#), obtained from Endress+Hauser, on all paperwork and mark the RA# clearly on the outside of the box. If this procedure is not followed, it may result in the refusal of the package at our facility. Bitte geben Sie die von E+H mitgeteilte Rücklieferungsnummer (RA#) auf allen Lieferpapieren an und vermerken Sie diese auch außen auf der Verpackung. Nichtbeachtung dieser Anweisung führt zur Ablehnung ihrer Lieferung.

RA No.

Because of legal regulations and for the safety of our employees and operating equipment, we need the "Declaration of Hazardous Material and De-Contamination", with your signature, before your order can be handled. Please make absolutely sure to attach it to the outside of the packaging. Aufgrund der gesetzlichen Vorschriften und zum Schutz unserer Mitarbeiter und Betriebseinrichtungen, benötigen wir die unterschriebene "Erklärung zur Kontamination und Reinigung", bevor Ihr Auftrag bearbeitet werden kann. Bringen Sie diese unbedingt außen an der Verpackung an. Serial number Seriennummer ________________________

Type of instrument / sensor Geräte-/Sensortyp ____________________________________________

Used as SIL device in a Safety Instrumented System / Einsatz als SIL Gerät in Schutzeinrichtungen Process data/Prozessdaten

Pressure / Druck _____ [psi] _____ [ Pa ] Viscosity /Viskosität _____ [cp] _____ [mm2/s]

Temperature / Temperatur_____ [°F] _____ [°C] Conductivity / Leitfähigkeit ________ [μS/cm]

Medium and warnings Warnhinweise zum Medium Medium /concentration Identification flammable CAS No. Medium /Konzentration entzündlich

toxic giftig

corrosive ätzend

harmful/ irritant gesundheitsschädlich/ reizend

other * harmless sonstiges* unbedenklich

Process medium Medium im Prozess Medium for process cleaning Medium zur Prozessreinigung Returned part cleaned with Medium zur Endreinigung * explosive; oxidising; dangerous for the environment; biological risk; radioactive * explosiv; brandfördernd; umweltgefährlich; biogefährlich; radioaktiv Please tick should one of the above be applicable, include safety data sheet and, if necessary, special handling instructions. Zutreffendes ankreuzen; trifft einer der Warnhinweise zu, Sicherheitsdatenblatt und ggf. spezielle Handhabungsvorschriften beilegen. Description of failure / Fehlerbeschreibung __________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Company data /Angaben zum Absender

P/SF/Konta XIV

Company /Firma ___________________________________ _________________________________________________ Address / Adresse _________________________________________________ _________________________________________________

Phone number of contact person /Telefon-Nr. Ansprechpartner: ____________________________________________ Fax / E-Mail ____________________________________________ Your order No. / Ihre Auftragsnr. ____________________________

“We hereby certify that this declaration is filled out truthfully and completely to the best of our knowledge.We further certify that the returned parts have been carefully cleaned. To the best of our knowledge they are free of any residues in dangerous quantities.” “Wir bestätigen, die vorliegende Erklärung nach unserem besten Wissen wahrheitsgetreu und vollständig ausgefüllt zu haben. Wir bestätigen weiter, dass die zurückgesandten Teile sorgfältig gereinigt wurden und nach unserem besten Wissen frei von Rückständen in gefahrbringender Menge sind.”

(place, date / Ort, Datum)

Name, dept./Abt. (please print /bitte Druckschrift)

Signature / Unterschrift

www.endress.com/worldwide

BA302P/00/EN/05.10 71111799 CCS/FM+SGML6.0

71111763

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

TRANSMISOR DE NIVEL (Rastra)

3.5 Equipo Espesador 36m 325-TK-002

PÁGINA 1 DE 1

Revisión NA

Descripción PROSONIC M FMU40 / Instrumento Tag 325-ZT-008

CAPÍTULO 3 DOCUMENTACIÓN DE COMPONENTES

Technical Information

Prosonic M FMU40/41/42/43/44 Ultrasonic Level Measurement Compact transmitters for non-contact level measurement of fluids, pastes and coarse bulk materials

Application

Features and benefits

• Continuous, non-contact level measurement in fluids, pastes, sullages and coarse bulk materials • Flow measurement in open channels and measuring weirs • System integration via: – HART (standard), 4...20mA – PROFIBUS PA – Foundation Fieldbus • Maximum measuring range: – FMU 40: 5 m in fluids / 2 m in bulk materials – FMU 41: 8 m in fluids / 3,5 m in bulk materials – FMU 42: 10 m in fluids / 5 m in bulk materials – FMU 43: 15 m in fluids / 7 m in bulk materials – FMU44: 20 m in fluids / 10 m in bulk materials

• Quick and simple commissioning via menu-guided onsite operation with four-line plain text display • Envelope curves on the on-site display for simple diagnosis • Easy remote operation, diagnosis and measuring point documentation with the supplied ToF Tool operating program. • Suitable for explosion hazardous areas (Gas-Ex, Dust-Ex) • Linearisation function (up to 32 points) for conversion of the measured value into any unit of length, volume or flow rate • Non-contact measurement method minimizes service requirements • optional remote display and operation (up to 20 m from transmitter) • Installation possible from thread G 1½“ or 1½ NPT upwards • Integrated temperature sensor for automatic correction of the temperature dependent sound velocity

TI365F/00/en/01.09 71089083

Prosonic M

Inhaltsverzeichnis Function and system design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Process conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Equipment architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Process temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Process pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Measured variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Measuring range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Operating frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Design; dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Housing design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process connection, sealing material, sensor material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Load HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Output damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Linearisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

22 24 25

25

Human interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Display and operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 On-site operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Remote operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Auxiliary energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Terminal compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Fieldbus plug connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Cable entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Current consumption (2-wire-instruments) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 HART ripple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Max. noise HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Galvanic isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Performance characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Reaction time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Reference operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Measured value resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Pulse frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Measuring error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Influence of the vapor pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Installation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Installation variants FMU 40, FMU 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Installation variants FMU42, FMU44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Installation variants FMU 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Installation conditions for level measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Installation in narrow shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Installation conditions for flow measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Blocking distance, nozzle installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Resistance to alternating temperature cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Climate class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Ingress protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Vibration resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

2

Certificates and Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 CE mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Ex approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 External standards and guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Ordering information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Product structure FMU 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product structure FMU 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product structure FMU 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product structure FMU 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product structure FMU 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scope of delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31 32 33 35 36 37

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Weather protection cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation bracket for FMU 40/41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adapter flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cantilever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commubox FXA191 HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commubox FXA195 HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Interface FXA193 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote display FHX40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

38 38 39 40 41 41 41 41 42 43

Supplementary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description of device functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Short instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Instructions ATEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Instructions NEPSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control drawings Installation drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

44 44 44 44 44 46 47

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M

Function and system design Measuring principle

BD

20 mA 100% D

E

F

L

4 mA 0% L00-FMU4x-15-00-00-de-001

E: Empty distance; F: Span (full distance); D: Distance from sensor membrane - product surface; L: Level; BD: Blocking distance

Sensor

BD

Max. range fluids

Max. range bulk materials

FMU40

0.25 m

5m

2m

FMU41

0.35 m

8m

3.5 m

FMU42

0.4 m

10 m

5m

FMU43

0.6 m

15 m

7m

FMU44

0.5 m

20 m

10 m

Time-of-flight method The sensor of the Prosonic M transmits ultrasonic pulses in the direction of the product surface. There, they are reflected back and received by the sensor. The Prosonic M measures the time t between pulse transmission and reception. The instrument uses the time t (and the velocity of sound c) to calculate the distance D between the sensor membrane and the product surface: D = c ⋅ t/2 As the device knows the empty distance E from a user entry, it can calculate the level as follows: L=E-D An integrated temperature sensor compensates for changes in the velocity of sound caused by temperature changes. Interference echo suppression The interference echo suppression feature on the Prosonic M ensures that interference echos (e.g. from edges, welded joints and installations) are not interpreted as a level echo. Calibration Enter the empty distance E and the span F to calibrate the device. Blocking distance Span F may not extend into the blocking distance BD. Level echos from the blocking distance cannot be evaluated due to the transient characteristics of the sensor.

Endress+Hauser

3

Prosonic M

Equipment architecture

4…20 mA output with HART protocol The complete measuring system consists of:

PLC

FieldCare FieldCare

Commubox FXA191/195

transmitter power supply unit RMA422 or RN221N (communication resistor included)

service adapter • FXA291/ToF Adapter FXA291 • FXA193

Power supply (for 4-wire)

operating and display module VU331

ENDRESS + HAUSER

%

–

+

E

dsdmdm df das. asdas fa asas la.

DELTABAR: * * * * * * * * ONLINE 1 QUICK SETUP 2 OPERATING MENU 3 PV 4 SV

HELP

SAVE

9

ENDRESS + HAUSER RMA 422

352 mbar 0 °C

Page Up

Bksp

6 Delete

Page On

#%&

2

1 Copy

JKL

4

5

MNO

6

Insert

+ Hot Key

TUV

W XY Z

8

7

3 Hot Key

Paste

GHI

PQRS

FXA191/195 Field Communicator 375

DEF

ABC

9

,()‘

_

+*/

.

0

-

375 FIELD COMMUNICATOR

HART handheld Field Communicator 375

L00-FMxxxxxx-14-00-06-en-007

If the HART communication resistor is not built into the supply unit, it is necessary to insert a communication resistor of 250 Ω into the 2-wire line. On-site operation • with display and operating module VU 331 • with a Personal Computer, FXA 193 and the operating software ToF Tool Remote operation • with HART handheld terminal DXR 375 • with a Personal Computer, Commubox FXA 191 and the operating software COMMUWIN II respectively ToF Tool.

4

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M

System integration using PROFIBUS PA A maximum of 32 transmitters (8 if mounted in an explosion hazardous location EEx ia IIC according to FISCO-model) can be connected to the bus.The segment coupler provides the operating voltage to the bus. Both on-site as well as remote operation are possible. personal computer with FieldCare and Profibard resp. Proficard

PLC

segment coupler PROFIBUS DP ENDRESS + HAUSER

PROFIBUS PA

T

More Functions (valves etc)

operating and display module VU331

service adapter • FXA291/ToF Adapter FXA291 • FXA193

ENDRESS + HAUSER

%

–

+

E

FieldCare

Prosonic M

Micropilot M

Levelflex M L00-FMxxXXXX-14-00-06-en-001

System integration using Foundation Fieldbus (FF) A maximum of 32 transmitters (standard or EEx d) can be connected to the bus. For protection class EEx ia: the maximum number of transmitters depends on the established rules and standards for intrinsically safe circuits (EN 60070-14) and proof of instrinsic safety. Both on-site and remote operation are possible.

personal computer e.g. with NI-FBUS configurator

power supply

FF link

power conditioner

T

T

Additional functions (valves etc.)

operating and display module VU331

service adapter • FXA291/ToF Adapter FXA291 • FXA193

ENDRESS + HAUSER

–

%

+

E

Micropilot M

FieldCare

Prosonic M Levelflex M

L00-FMxxXXXX-14-00-06-en-003

Endress+Hauser

5

Prosonic M

System integration using Endress+Hauser Rackbus You can interconnect a maximum of 64 2-wire devices with HART protocol to a Rackbus. Use an FXN 672 interface module for each device. You can integrate this bus into a higher-level bus by using a ZA gateway. Gateways are available for MODBUS, FIP, PROFIBUS, INTERBUS etc. Both on-site and remote operation are possible.

PLC

personal computer with Commuwin II

RS 232C

Bus

FXN672 FXN 671

FXN 671

FXN 671

+

+

+

mA1

mA1

mA1

ZA 672

ZA 672

Gateway to MODBUS, FIP, PROFIBUS, INTERBUS etc.

4…20 mA with HART

operating and display module VU331

ENDRESS + HAUSER

%

–

+

E

Micropilot M

Prosonic M

FXA193 Levelflex M ToF Tool - FieldTool Package L00-FMxxXXXX-14-00-06-en-006

!

6

Hinweis! The FXN672 can be used with all 2-wire devices of the Prosonic M family.

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M

System integration via Fieldgate Vendor Managed Inventory By using Fieldgates to interrogate tank or silo levels remotely, suppliers of raw materials can provide their regular customers with information about the current supplies at any time and, for example, account for them in their own production planning. For their part, the Fieldgates monitor the configured level limits and, if required, automatically activate the next supply. The spectrum of options here ranges from a simple purchasing requisition via e-mail through to fully automatic order administration by coupling XML data into the planning systems on both sides. Remote maintenance of measuring equipment Fieldgates not only transfer the current measured values, they also alert the responsible standby personnel, if required, via e-mail or SMS. In the event of an alarm or also when performing routine checks, service technicians can diagnose and configure connected HART devices remotely. All that is required for this is the corresponding HART operating software (e.g. ToF Tool - FieldTool Package, FieldCare, ...) for the connected device. Fieldgate passes on the information transparently, so that all options for the respective operating software are available remotely. Some on-site service operations can be avoided by using remote diagnosis and remote configuration and all others can at least be better planned and prepared. Remote configuration/diagnostics

Remote monitoring HTTP script Web browser …

via HART Client: - FieldCare ...

Multidrop-Connector FXN520

e.g. 2 x RN221N-B …

ENDRESS+HAUSER RN 221N

Fieldgate FXA520

Channel 1

Channel 2

Analogue Ethernet GSM FXN 520

ENDRESS+HAUSER RN 221N

Fieldgate FXA520

20...45 VDC

. L00-FXA520xx-14-00-06-en-009

!

Endress+Hauser

Note! The number of instruments which can be connected in mutidrop mode can be calculated by the "FieldNetCalc" program. A description of this program can be found in Technical Information TI 400F (Multidrop Conncector FXN520). The program is available form your Endress+Hauser sales organisation or in the internet at: "www.endress.com É Download" (Text Search = "Fieldnetcalc").

7

Prosonic M

Input Measured variable

The distance D between the sensor membrane and the product surface is measured. Using the linearisation function, the device uses D to calculate: • level L in any units • volume V in any units • flow Q across measuring weirs or open channels in any units

Measuring range

The measuring range is limited by the range of a sensor. The sensor range is, in turn, dependent on the operating conditions. To estimate the actual range, proceed as follows (see also the calculation example in the diagram): 1.

Determine which of the influences shown in the following table are appropriate for your process.

2.

Add the corresponding attenuation values.

3.

From the total attenuation, use the diagram to calculate the range.

Fluid surface

Attenuation

Calm

0 dB

Waves

5 ... 10 dB

Strong turbulence (e.g. stirrers)

10 ... 20 dB

Foaming

Ask Endress+Hauser

Bulk material surface

Attenuation

Hard, rough (e.g. rubble)

40 dB

Soft (e.g. peat, dust-covered clinker)

40 ... 60 dB

Dust

Attenuation

No dust formation

0 dB

Little dust formation

5 dB

Heavy dust formation

5 ... 20 dB

Filling curtain in detection range

Attenuation

None

0 dB

Small quantities

5 ... 10 dB

Large quantities

10 ... 40 dB

Temperature difference between Attenuation sensor and product surface

8

to 20 °C

0 dB

to 40 °C

5 ... 10 dB

to 80 °C

10 ... 20 dB

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M

20 FMU 44 19 18 17 16 15 FMU 43 14 13 12 11 10 FMU 42

range/ m

9 8 7

FMU 41

6 5 4

FMU 40

3 2 1 10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

attenuation / dB L00-FMU4xxxx-05-00-00-en-002

Example (for FMU 43) For typical solid applications, a certain amount of dust coverage is normally present. Therefore, the following range results from the table and the diagram • Dust-covered rubble • no dust formation • No filling curtain in detection range • Temperature diff. < 20°C

approx. 50 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB approx. 50 dB

=> range approx. 7 m

These measuring conditions have been taken into account during the calculation of the maximum measuring range in solid applications. Operating frequency

Endress+Hauser

Sensor

Operating frequency

FMU40

approx. 70 kHz

FMU41

approx. 50 kHz

FMU42

approx. 42 kHz

FMU43

approx. 35 kHz

FMU44

approx. 30 kHz

9

Prosonic M

Output Output signal

according to the instrument version ordered: • 4…20 mA with HART protocol • PROFIBUS PA • Foundation Fieldbus (FF)

Signal on alarm

Error information can be accessed via the following interfaces: • On-site display (error symbol, error code and plain text description) • Current output (error current configurable) • Digital interface

Load HART

Minimum load for HART communication: 250 Ω

Output damping

Freely selectable, 0 ... 255 s

Linearisation

The linearisation function of the Prosonic M allows conversion of the measured value into any unit of length or volume. In open channels or measuring weirs, also a flow linearistion is possible (calculation of the flow from the measured level). The linearisation table for calculating the volume in an horizontal cylindrical tank is preprogrammed. You can also enter any number of other tables containing up to 32 value pairs either manually or semi-automatically (by filling the vessel under controlled conditions). The supplied ToF Tool operating program can automatically calculate the table for any tank, weir or flume and upload it into the device. Flow curves for open channels can be calculated and entered into the instrument by the ToT Tool as well.

10

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M

Auxiliary energy Terminal compartment

In the F12 housing, the terminals are located underneath the housing cover. In the T12 housing, they are under the cover of the separate terminal compartment. T12 housing

F12 housing

sealed terminal compartment

L00-FMR2xxxx-04-00-00-en-001

Terminal assignment

4 ... 20 mA with HART, 2-wire

4 ... 20 mA active with HART, 4-wire

power alternatively

DC

AC / DC

display unit, recorder, PCS

power

Commubox FXA191/195 Field Communicator 375

communication resistor (> 250 W)

alternatively Commubox FXA191/195 Field Communicator 375

communication resistor (> 250 W)

4...20 mA

4...20mA

test sockets for testing of the signal current

1 2 3 4 L- L+ I+

plant ground

I-

5 6 I+ L00-FMxxxxxx-04-00-00-en-015

I-

1 2

plant ground

L1/L+ N/LL00-FMxxxxxx-04-00-00-en-011

• Connect the connecting line to the screw terminals (line cross-sections of 0.5 ... 2.5mm) in the terminal compartment. • Use 2-wire twisted pair cable with screen for the connection. • Protective circuitry against reverse polarity, RFI and over-voltage peaks is built into the device (see also Technical Information TI 241F/00/en "EMC Test Procedures")

Endress+Hauser

11

Prosonic M

Foundation Fieldbus

PROFIBUS PA PROFIBUS PA T-Box

1 2 3 4 – +

plant ground

1 2 3 4 – +

plant ground

L00-FMxxxxxx-04-00-00-en-013

L00-FMxxxxxx-04-00-00-en-012

The digital communication signal is transmitted to the bus via a 2-wire connection. The bus also provides the auxiliary energy. Use 2-wire twisted pair cable with screen. Refer to the following operating manuals for information on cable types, and how to set up and ground the network: • BA 198F/00/de „PROFIBIS -DP/-PA, Guidelines for planning and commissioning“ • BA 013S/04/en „Foundation Fieldbus, Installation and Commissioning Guidelines“ Fieldbus plug connectors

For the versions with fieldbus plug connector (M12 or 7/8"), the signal line can be connected without opening the housing. Pin assignment of the M12 plug connector (PROFIBUS PA plug)

1

3

2

+ 4

– nc

Pin

Meaning

1

Ground

2

Signal +

3

Signal -

4

not connected

L00-FMxxxxxx-04-00-00-yy-016

Pin assignment of the 7/8" plug connector (FOUNDATION Fieldbus plug)

1

– 3

2

+ 4

nc

Pin

Meaning

1

Signal -

2

Signal +

3

not connected

4

ground

L00-FMxxxxxx-04-00-00-yy-017

12

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M

Supply voltage

HART, 2-wire The following values are the voltages across the terminals directly at the instrument: Current consumption

Terminal voltage minimum

Terminal voltage maximum

4 mA

14 V

36 V

20 mA

8V

36 V

4 mA

14 V

30 V

20 mA

8V

30 V

4 mA

14 V

30 V

20 mA

11 V

30 V

Standard

11 mA

10 V

36 V

EEx ia

11 mA

10 V

30 V

Standard

4 mA1)

14 V

36 V

EEx ia

4 mA1

14 V

30 V

Version 2-wire HART Standard

EEx ia

EEx d Fixed current, adjustable, e.g. for solar power operation (measured value via HART) Fixed current for HART multidrop mode 1)

Start-up current 11 mA

HART, 4-wire, active Version

Voltage

max. load

DC

10,5 ... 32 V

600 Ω

AC 50/60 Hz

90 ... 253 V

600 Ω

Terminals

Cable cross-section: 0.5 to 2.5 mm (20 to 14 AWG)

Cable entry

• • • •

Power consumption

Current consumption (2-wire-instruments)

Endress+Hauser

Cable gland: M20x1.5 (recommended cable diameter 6 ... 10 mm) Cable entry G ½ or ½ NPT PROFIBUS-PA M12 plug Fieldbus Foundation 7/8" plug

Version

Power consumption

2-wire

51 mW ... 800 mW

4-wire AC

max. 4VA

4-wire DC; FMU 40/41

330 mW ... 830 mW

4-wire DC; FMU 42/43

600 mW ... 1 W

Communication

Current consumption

HART

3,6 ... 22 mA

PROFIBUS PA

max. 13 mA

Foundation Fieldbus

max. 15 mA

13

Prosonic M

HART ripple

47...125 Hz: Vpp = 200 mV (measured at 500 Ω)

Max. noise HART

500 Hz...10 kHz: Vrms = 2.2 mV (measured at 500 Ω)

Galvanic isolation

With 4-wire devices, the evaluation electronics and mains voltage are galvanically isolated from each other.

14

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M

Performance characteristics Reaction time

Reference operating conditions

Measured value resolution

Pulse frequency

The reaction time depends on the parameter settings. The minimum values are: • • • •

2-wire devices (FMU40/41/42): min. 2 s 2-wire diveces (FMU43 - PROFIBUS PA or FOUNDATION Fieldbus): min. 2 s 2-wire devices (FMU44): min. 3 s 4-wire devices (FMU40/41/42/43/44): 0.5 s

• • • • • •

Temperature = +20 °C Pressure = 1013 mbar abs. Humidity = 50 % Ideal reflective surface (e.g. calm, smooth fluid surface) No interference reflections within signal beam Set application parameters: – Tank shape = flat ceiling – Medium property = liquid – process conditions = calm surface

Sensor

Measured value resolution

FMU40

1 mm

FMU41

1 mm

FMU42

2 mm

FMU43

2 mm

FMU44

2 mm

• • • •

2-wire devices (FMU40/41/42): max. 0.5Hz 2-wire devices (FMU43 - PROFIBUS PA or FOUNDATION Fieldbus): max. 0.5 Hz 2-wire devices (FMU44): max. 0.3 Hz 4-wire devices (FMU40/41/42/43/44): max. 2Hz

The exact values are dependent on the type of device and the parameter settings. Measuring error

Typical specifications for reference operating conditions (include linearity, repeatability, and hysteresis): Sensor

Measuring error

FMU40

±2mm or 0.2% of set measuring distance (empty calibration)1

FMU41

± 2 mm or 0,2% of set measuring distance (empty calibration)1

FMU42

± 4 mm or 0,2% of set measuring distance (empty calibration)1

FMU43

± 4 mm or 0,2% of set measuring distance (empty calibration)1

FMU44

± 4 mm or 0,2% of set measuring distance (empty calibration)1

1

Influence of the vapor pressure

Endress+Hauser

whichever is greater

The vapor pressure at 20 °C (68 °F) gives a hint on the accuracy of the ultrasonic level measurement. If the vapor pressure at 20 °C (68 °F) is below 50 mbar, ultrasonic level measurement is possible with a very high accuracy. This is valid for water, aqueous solutions, water-solid-solutions, dilute acids (hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, ...), dilute bases (caustic soda, ...), oils, greases, slurries, pastes, ... High vapor pressures or outgassing media (ethanol, acetone, ammonia, ...) can influence the accuracy. If conditions like these are present, please contact the Endress+Hauser support.

15

Prosonic M

Installation conditions Installation variants FMU 40, FMU 41

Installation with counter nut

Installation with sleeve

Sealing ring (EPDM) supplied

counter nut (PC) supplied for G 1½” and G 2” instruments

Installation with installation bracket

Installation with adapter flange

ENDRESS+HAUSER Prosonic M

Sealing ring (EPDM) supplied

adapter flange

sensor

nozzle L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-en-002

For installation bracket or adapter flange s. chapter "Accessories". Installation variants FMU42, FMU44

Installation with universal flange

Installation with mounting bracket

ER HAUS ESS+ ENDR nic M Proso

-

e.g. Zone 20

.

Zone 20 L00-FMU42xxxx-17-00-00-en-001

16

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M

Installation variants FMU 43

Installation with universal slip-on flange (option)

Installation with mounting bracket

ER HAUS

ESS+ ENDR ic M Proson

slip-on flange

-

nozzle

.

sensor

e.g.Zone 20

Zone 20 L00-FMU43xxxx-17-00-00-en-001

Installation conditions for level measurements

2

3

4

7 1

5 1/6D D 6

L

α

r

L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-de-005

• Do not install the sensor in the middle of the tank (3). We recommend leaving a distance between the sensor and the tank wall (1) measuring 1/6 of the tank diameter. • Use a protective cover, in order to protect the device from direct sun or rain (2). • Avoid measurements through the filling curtain (4). • Make sure that equipment (5) such as limit switches, temperature sensors, etc. are not located within the emitting angle α. In particular, symmetrical equipment (6) such as heating coils, baffles etc. can influence measurement. • Align the sensor so that it is vertical to the product surface (7). • Never install two ultrasonic measuring devices in a tank, as the two signals may affect each other. • To estimate the detection range, use the 3 dB emitting angle α.

Endress+Hauser

Sensor

α

Lmax

rmax

FMU40

11°

5m

0.48 m

FMU41

11°

8m

0.77 m

FMU42

9°

10 m

0.79 m

FMU43

6°

15 m

0.79 m

FMU44

11 °

20 m

1.93 m

17

Prosonic M

Installation in narrow shafts

In narrow shafts with strong interference echoes, we recommend using an ultrasound guide pipe (e.g. PE or PVC wastewater pipe) with a minimum diameter of 100 mm. Make sure that the pipe is not soiled by accumulated dirt. If necessary, clean the pipe at regular intervals.

ENDRESS+HAUSER Prosonic M

ENDRESS+HAUSER Prosonic M

venting hole

L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-en-010

Installation conditions for flow measurements

• Install the Prosonic M at the inflow side, as close above the maximum water level Hmax as possible (take into account the blocking distance BD). • Position the Prosonic M in the middle of the channel or weir. • Align the sensor membrane parallel to the water surface. • Keep to the installation distance of the channel or weir. • You can enter the "Flow to Level" linearisation curve ("Q/h curve") using ToF Tool or manually via the onsite display. Example: Khafagi-Venturi flume

Khafagi - Venturi - flume

empty calibr.

inflow

outflow

BD

direction of flow

Hmax

1 x b0

b0

L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-en-003

18

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M

Example: Triangular weir min. 2 Hmax α

Hmax (= full calibr.) min. 2 Hmax

min. 3 H max empty calibr.

BD

L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-en-012

Endress+Hauser

19

Prosonic M

Blocking distance, nozzle installation

Install the Prosonic M at a height so that the blocking distance BD is not undershot, even at maximum fill level. Use a pipe nozzle if you cannot maintain the blocking distance in any other way. The interior of the nozzle must be smooth and may not contain any edges or welded joints. In particular, there should be no burr on the inside of the tank side nozzle end. Note the specified limits for nozzle diameter and length. To minimise disturbing factors, we recommend an angled socket edge (ideally 45°). FMU 43 FMU 40/41

FMU 42/44

BD SD

E

F L

L

L D

D D L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-en-004

BD: blocking distance; SD: safety distance; E: empty calibration; F: full calibration (span); D: nozzle diameter; L: nozzle length

Maximum nozzle length[mm]

" !

20

Nozzle diameter

FMU40

FMU41

FMU42

DN50/2"

80

DN80/3"

FMU43

FMU44

240

240

250

DN100/4"

300

300

300

300

DN150/6"

400

400

400

300

400

DN200/8"

400

400

400

300

400

DN250/10"

400

400

400

300

400

DN300/12"

400

400

400

300

400

Emitting angle α

11°

11°

9°

6°

11°

Blocking distance [m]

0,25

0,35

0,4

0,6

0,5

Max. range [m] in liquids

5

8

10

15

20

Max. range [m] in solids

2

3,5

5

7

10

Caution! If the blocking distance is undershot, it may cause device malfunction. Note! In order to notice if the level approaches the blocking distance, you can specify a safety distance (SD). If the level is within this safety distance, the Prosonic M outputs a warning or alarm message.

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M

Ambient conditions Ambient temperature

-40 °C ... +80 °C The functionality of the LC display becomes restricted at Tu+60 °C. If the device is operated outdoors in strong sunlight, you should use a protective cover.

Storage temperature

-40 °C ... +80 °C

Resistance to alternating temperature cycles

to DIN EN 60068-2-14; Nb test : +80°C/-40°C, 1K/min, 100cycles

Climate class

DIN EN 60068-2-38 (Test Z/AD) DIN/IEC 68 T2-30Db

Ingress protection

• With closed housing, tested according to – IP 68, NEMA 6P (24h at 1.83m under water surface) – IP 66, NEMA 4x • With open housing: IP 20, NEMA 1 (also ingress protection of the display)

"

Caution! Degree of protection IP 68 NEMA 6P applies for M12 PROFIBUS-PA plugs only when the PROFIBUS cable is plugged in.

Vibration resistance

DIN EN 60068-2-64 / IEC 68-2-64: 20…2000 Hz, 1 (m/s2)2/Hz; 3 x 100 min

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

• Interference emission to EN 61326, Equipment Class B • Interference immunity to EN 61326, Appendix A (Industrial) and NAMUR Recommendation NE 21 (EMC). • A standard installation cable is sufficient if only the analogue signal is used. Use a screened cable when working with a superimposed communication signal (HART).

Process conditions Process temperature

-40°C ... +80°C A temperature sensor is integrated in the sensor for correction of the temperature-dependent time-of-flight.

Process pressure

• FMU 40/41: 0.7 bar ... 3bar abs. • FMU 42/43/44: 0.7 bar ... 2.5bar abs.

Endress+Hauser

21

Prosonic M

Mechanical construction FMU40, FMU41

F12

65 (2.6)

T12 94 (3.7)

68 (2.7)

ENDRESS+HAUSER Prosonic M

32 (1.3)

ENDRESS+HAUSER Prosonic M

85 (3.3)

85 (3.3)

22 (0.9)

FMU 41 22 (0.9)

~148 (5.8)

G2” 2 NPT

~83 (3.3)

~87 (~3.4)

G1½” 1½ NPT

SW (AF) 60

~148 (5.8)

FMU 40 SW (AF) 60

162 (6.4)

78 (3.1)

150 (5.9)

65 (2.6)

Ø 129 (5.1)

~86 (~3.4)

78 (3.1)

Ø 129 (5.1)

Design; dimensions

Ø 39 (1.5) Ø 50 (2.0) L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-006

Dimensions in mm (inch)

FMU42, FMU44 with slip-on flange

68 (2.7)

ENDRESS+HAUSER Prosonic M

65 (2.6)

94 (3.7)

78 (3.1) 32 (1.3)

ENDRESS+HAUSER Prosonic M

85 (3.3)

162 (6.4)

78 (3.1)

150 (5.9)

65 (2.6)

Ø 129 (5.1)

~86 (~3.4)

T12

Ø 129 (5.1)

F12

85 (3.3)

Ø 70 (2.8)

~ 145 (5.7)

~ 107 (4.2)

~ 110 (4.3)

FMU 44

~ 85 (3.3)

FMU 42

Ø 98 (3.9) L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-007

Dimensions in mm (inch)

22

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M

FMU42, FMU44 with mounting bracket

FMU 42

FMU 44

ENDRESS+HAUSER Prosonic M

ENDRESS+HAUSER Prosonic M

F12/ T12

F12/ T12 M8

75 (3.0)

30 (1.2)

125 (4.9)

30 (1.2)

105 (4.1)

M8

119 (4.7) 119 (4.7)

98 (3.9)

L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-008

Dimensions in mm (inch)

FMU43

A

B

ENDRESS+HAUSER Prosonic M

F12

2 x M8

ER HAUS ESS+ ENDR ic M Proson

~248 (9.8)

Ø 129 (5.1)

78 (3.1)

150 (5.9)

65 (2.6)

~86 (3.4)

75 (3

85 (3.3)

ANSI 4” DN 100 *

.0)

.5) 89 (3 6.2) 158 (

Ø 230 (9.1)

L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-009

Dimensions in mm (inch); A: with slip-on flange; B: with mounting bracket

Mounting bracket for FMU42, FMU43 and FMU44 25 (0.98)

120 (4.7)

~123 (4.8)

119 (4.68)

40 (1.6)

40 (1.6)

2 (0.079) 25 (0.98)

11 (0.43) L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-010

Dimensions in mm (inch)

Endress+Hauser

23

Prosonic M

Flanges for FMU42 and FMU44

A

E

20 (0.79)

D

B

G2” ISO228

C L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-011

Weight

24

suitable for

A

B

C

D

E

number of boreholes

3" 150lbs / DN80 PN16 / 10K 80

150 mm (5,91")

160 mm (6,30")

200 mm (7,87")

19 mm (0,75")

45°

8

4" 150 lbs / DN100 PN16 / 10K 100

175 mm (6,90")

190,5 mm (7,50")

228,6 mm (9,00")

19 mm (0,75")

45°

8

6" 150 lbs / DN150 PN16 / 10 K 150

240 mm (9,45")

241,3 mm (9,50")

285 mm (11,22")

23 mm (0,91")

45°

8

8" 150 lbs

298,5 mm (11,75")

298,5 mm (11,75")

342,9 mm (13,50")

22, 5 mm (0,89")

45°

8

DN200 PN16 / 10 K 200

290 mm (11,42")

295 mm (11,61")

340 mm (13,39")

23 mm (0,91")

30°

12

Sensor

Weight

FMU40

approx. 2,5 kg

FMU41

approx. 2,6 kg

FMU42

approx. 3 kg

FMU43

approx. 3,5 kg

FMU44

approx. 4 kg

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M

Housing design

Types of housings • F12 housing with sealed terminal compartment for standard or EEx ia applications • T12 housing with separate terminal compartment and explosionproof encapsulation Material Aluminium, seawater resistant, powder-coated Cover • Aluminium, for version without on-site display • Inspection glass for version with on-site display. This version cannot be supplied together with the ATEX II 1/2 D certificate.

Process connection, sealing material, sensor material

Sensor

Process connection

Material in contact with process

FMU40

• Thread G 1½“ • Thread NPT 1½“ - 11.5

Sensor: PVDF Seal: EPDM

FMU41

• Thread 2" • Thread NPT 2" - 11,5

Sensor: PVDF Seal: EPDM

FMU42

• Universal flange DN 80 PN16 / ANSI 3" 150 lbs / JIS 10K 80 • Universal flange DN 100 PN16 / ANSI 4" 150 lbs / JIS 10K 100 • Mounting bracket

Sensor: PVDF Seal: VITON or EPDM Flange: PP, PVDF or SS 316L (1.4435 or 1.4404)1)

FMU43

• Universal flange DN 100 / ANSI 4" / JIS16K100 • Mounting bracket

Sensor: UP and SS 316Ti Seal: EPDM Flange: PP or SS 316Ti

FMU44

• Universal flange DN 100 PN16 / ANSI 4" 150 lbs / JIS 10K 100 • Universal flange DN 150 PN16 / ANSI 6" 150 lbs / JIS 10K 150 • Universal flange DN200 PN16 / JIS 10K 200 • Flange ANSI 8" 150 lbs • Mounting bracket

Sensor PVDF Seal: VITON or EPDM Flange: PP, PVDF or SS 316L (1.4435 or 1.4404)1

1)

Endress+Hauser

Endress+Hauser supplies DIN/EN flanges made of stainless steel AISI 316L with the material number 1.4435 or 1.4404. With regard to their temperature stability properties, the materials 1.4435 and 1.4404 are grouped under 13E0 in EN 1092-1 Tab. 18. The chemical composition of the two materials can be identical.

25

Prosonic M

Human interface Display and operating elements

The LCD module VU 331 for display and operation is located beneath the housing cover. The measured value is legible through the glass in the cover. Open the cover to operate the device. LCD (liquid crystal display)

ENDR Order MICR ESS+ Code: OPIL HAUS Ser.-No.

OT

ER

II

Maulburg

IP

65

T

A >70°C

: t >85°C

Made in Germany

:

Messbe Measuri reich ng range U 16...36 max. 4...20 20 m mA V DC

Symbols ENDRESS + HAUSER

–

+

E

3 keys snap-fit

L00-FMxxxxxx-07-00-00-en-001

Symbol in display

Meaning

continuous

flashing

Alarm

Warning

Communication

Security Locking

Function of the keys Key(s)

Meaning

O or V

Navigate upwards in the selection list Edit numeric value within a function

S or W

Navigate downwards in the selection list Edit numeric value within a function

X or Z F O and F or S and F O and S and F

26

Navigate to the left within a function group

Navigate to the right within a function group, confirmation.

Contrast settings of the LCD

Hardware lock / unlock After a hardware lock, an operation of the instrument via display or communication is not possible! The hardware can only be unlocked via the display. An unlock parameter must be entered to do so.

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M

On-site operation

Operation with VU 331 The LC-Display VU 331 allows configuration via 3 keys directly at the instrument. All device functions can be set through a menu system. The menu consists of function groups and functions. Within a function, application parameters can be read or adjusted. The user is guided through a complete configuration procedure. Headline

Position indicator

ENDRESS + HAUSER

Symbol –

+

Main value

Unit

E

Selection list

Function groups -> Functions HOME

X

F O S

X

FG00 FG01 FG02 FG03 FG04 FG05 FG06 FG07 ...

F

F F000 F001 F002 F003 F004 ...

F

X

O S

X

Help text

Envelope curve L00-FMU4xxxx-07-00-00-en-004

Operation with the handheld terminal DXR 375 On devices with HART communication, you can also access the menu using the handheld terminal DXR 375.

dsdmdm df das. asdas fa asas la.

dsdmdm df das. asdas fa asas la.

FMU42: LIC0001 ONLINE 1 GROUP SELECT 2 PV

HELP

8.7 m

FMU43: LIC0001 ONLINE 1 GROUP SELECTION 2 PV

Delete

8.7 m

SAVE

H

9

Page Up

Bksp

6

ABC

Bksp

1 2 3 4 5

BASIC SETUP SAFETY SETTINGS TEMPERATURE LINEARISATION EXTENDED CALIBR.

Delete

DEF

1

2

3

Copy

Paste

Hot Key

GHI

JKL

MNO

4

5

6

Insert

+ Hot Key

TUV

W XY Z

PQRS

dsdmdm df das. asdas fa asas la.

FMU43: LIC0001 GROUP SELECTION

SAVE

Delete

Page On

#%&

HELP

7

8

9

,()‘

_

+*/

.

0

-

H SAVE

HOME

Bksp

FMRU43: LIC0001 BASIC SETUP 1 2 3 4 5

MEASURED VALUE TANK SHAPE MEDIUM PROPERTY PROCESS COND. EMPTY CALIBR.

dsdmdm df das. asdas fa asas la.

Page Up Page On

375 FIELD COMMUNICATOR SAVE

HOME

L00-FMU4xxxx-07-00-00-de-005

Endress+Hauser

27

Prosonic M

Remote operation

Operation with ToF Tool The ToF Tool is a graphical operation software for instruments from Endress+Hauser. It is used to support commissioning, securing of data, signal analysis and documentation of the instruments. It is compatible with the following operating systems: WinNT4.0, Win2000 and WinXP. The ToF Tool supports the following functions: • Online configuration of transmitters • Signal analysis via envelope curve • Linearisation table (graphically supported creation, editing, importing and exporting) • Loading and saving of instrument data (Upload/Download) • Documentation of measuring point

!

Note! Further information you may find on the CD-ROM, which is enclosed to the instrument. Connection options • HART with Commubox FXA 191 (available as accessory) • PROFIBUS PA • Service-interface with adapter FXA 193 (available as accessory) Menu-guided commissioning:

L00-FMU4xxxx-19-00-00-en-003

28

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M

Signal analysis via envelope curve:

L00-FMU4xxxx-19-00-00-en-004

Operation with FieldCare FieldCare is Endress+Hauser's FDT based Plant Asset Management Tool. It can configure all intelligent field devices in your plant and supports you in managing them. By using status information, it also provides a simple but effective means of checking their health. • • • • •

Supports Ethernet, HART, PROFIBUS, FOUNDATION Fieldbus etc. Operates all Endress+Hauser devices Operates all third-party actuators, I/O systems and sensors supporting the FDT standard Ensures full functionality for all devices with DTMs Offers generic profile operation for any third-party fieldbus device that does not have a vendor DTM

Operation with Commuwin II (for communication variants HART or PROFIBUS-PA) Commuwin II is an operating software with graphical support (MS Windows) for intelligent transmitters with the communication protocols Rackbus, Rackbus RS-485, HART and PROFIBUS-PA. Commuwin II supports the following functions: • Online configuration of transmitters • Loading and saving of instrument data (Upload/Download) • Orderly visualisation of measured values and limit values • Display and recording of measured values with a line recorder It is not possible to display envelope curves with Commuwin II. To display them, please use the ToF Tool program supplied. Connections: • HART with Commubox FXA 191 (available as accessory) • PROFIBUS PA

Endress+Hauser

29

Prosonic M

Operation with NI-FBUS Configurator (only Foundation Fieldbus) The NI-FBUS Configurator is an easy-to-use graphical environment for creating linkages, loops, and a schedule based on the fieldbus concepts. You can use the NI-FBUS Configurator to configure a fieldbus network as follows: • Set block and device tags • Set device addresses • Create and edit function block control strategies (function block applications) • Configure vendor-defined function and transducer blocks • Create and edit schedules • Read and write to function block control strategies (function block applications) • Invoke Device Description (DD) methods • Display DD menus • Download a configuration • Verify a configuration and compare it to a saved configuration • Monitor a downloaded configuration • Replace devices • Save and print a configuration

Certificates and Approvals CE mark

The measuring system meets the legal requirements of the EC-guidelines. Endress+Hauser confirms the instrument passing the required tests by attaching the CE-mark.

Ex approval

The available certificates are listed in the ordering information. Note the associated safety instructions (XA) and control or installation drawings (ZD).

External standards and guidelines

EN 60529 Protection class of housing (IP-code) EN 61326 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC requirements) NAMUR Standards committee for measurement and control in the chemical industry

30

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M

Ordering information Product structure FMU 40

Certificates A Variant for non-hazardous area E NEPSI Ex nA II T6 G ATEX II 3G EEx nA II T6 I NEPSI Ex ia IIC T6 J NEPSI Ex d(ia) IIC T6 K TIIS Ex ia II C T6 N CSA General Purpose Q NEPSI DIP S FM IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2 T FM XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G U CSA IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2 V CSA XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G 1 ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G; EEX ia IIC T6 2 ATEX II 1/2D, Alu blind cover 4 ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G; EEX d [ia] IIC T6 5 ATEX II 1/3D Y Special certificate Process connection R G 1½“ threadISO 228 N NPT 1½“ - 11,5 thread Y Special version Power supply/communication B 2 wire, 4...20mA-loop/HART H 4 wire, 10,5...32VDC / 4-20mA HART G 4 wire, 90...253VAC / 4-20mA HART D 2 wire, PROFIBUS PA F 2 wire, Foundation Fieldbus Y Special version Display / on-site operation 1 Without LC display 2 With LC display VU 331 incl. on-site operation 3 Prepared for remote display FHX 40 9 Special version Housing A Aluminium F12 housing coated to IP 68 C Aluminium T12 housing coated to IP 68; with separate terminal compartment D Aluminium T12 housing coated to IP 68; with separate terminal compartment; with overvoltage protection 9 Special version Screw union/entry 2 M20x1.5 screw union 3 G 1/2“ entry 4 NPT 1/2“ entry 5 M12 PROFIBUS-PA plug-in connector 6 7/8" FF plug 9 Special version FMU 40 -

Endress+Hauser

Product designation

31

Prosonic M

Product structure FMU 41

Certificates A Variant for non-hazardous area E NEPSI Ex nA II T6 G ATEX II 3G EEx nA II T6 I NEPSI Ex ia IIC T6 J NEPSI Ex d(Ia) IIC T6 K TIIS Ex ia II C T6 N CSA General Purpose Q NEPSI DIP S FM IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2 T FM XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G U CSA IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2 V CSA XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G 1 ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G; EEX ia IIC T6 2 ATEX II 1/2D, Alu blind cover 4 ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G; EEX d [ia] IIC T6 5 ATEX II 1/3D Y Special certificate Process connection R G 2“ threadISO 228 N NPT 2“ - 11,5 thread Y Special version Power supply/communication B 2 wire, 4...20mA-loop/HART H 4 wire, 10,5...32VDC / 4-20mA HART G 4 wire, 90...253VAC / 4-20mA HART D 2 wire, PROFIBUS PA F 2 wire, Foundation Fieldbus Y Special version Display / on-site operation 1 Without LC display 2 With LC display VU 331 incl. on-site operation 3 Prepared for remote display FHX 40 9 Special version Housing A Aluminium F12 housing coated to IP 68 C Aluminium T12 housing coated to IP 68 with separate terminal compartment D Aluminium T12 housing coated to IP 68; with separate terminal compartment; with overvoltage protection 9 Special version Screw union/entry 2 M20x1.5 screw union 3 G 1/2“ entry 4 NPT 1/2“ entry 5 M12 PROFIBUS-PA plug-in connector 6 7/8" FF plug 9 Special version FMU 41 -

32

Product designation

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M

Product structure FMU 42

Certificates A Variant for non-hazardous area E NEPSI Ex nA II T6 G ATEX II 3G EEx nA II T6 I NEPSI Ex ia IIC T6 J NEPSI Ex d (Ia) IIC T6 K TIIS Ex ia II C T6 (in preparation) N CSA General Purpose Q NEPSI DIP S FM IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2 T FM XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G U CSA IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2 V CSA XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G 1 ATEX II 1/2 G EEX ia IIC T6 2 ATEX II 1/2 D, Alu bond cover 4 ATEX II 1/2 G EEX d [ia] IIC T6 5 ATEX II 1/3D Y Special certificate Process connection M Mounting bracket FAU20 P UNI flange 3"/DN80/80, PP, max. 2.5bar abs./ 36psia suitable for 3" 150lbs / DN80 PN16 / 10K 80 Q UNI flange 3"/DN80/80, PVDF, max. 2.5bar abs./ 36psia suitable for 3" 150lbs / DN80 PN16 / 10K 80 S UNI flange 3"/DN80/80, 316L, max. 2.5bar abs./ 36psia suitable for 3" 150lbs / DN80 PN16 / 10K 80 T UNI flange 4"/DN100/100, PP, max. 2.5bar abs./ 36psia suitable for 4" 150lbs / DN100 PN16 / 10K100 U UNI flange 4"/DN100/100, PVDF, max. 2.5bar abs./ 36psia suitable for 4" 150lbs / DN100 PN16 / 10K100 V UNI flange 4"/DN100/100, 316L, max. 2.5bar abs./ 36psia suitable for 4" 150lbs / DN100 PN16 / 10K100 Y Special version Power supply/communication B 2 wire, 4...20mA-loop/HART H 4 wire, 10,5...32VDC / 4-20mA HART G 4 wire, 90...253VAC / 4-20mA HART D 2 wire, PROFIBUS PA F 2 wire, Foundation Fieldbus Y Special version Display / on-site operation 1 Without LC display 2 With LC display VU 331 incl. on-site operation 3 Prepared for remote display FHX 40 9 Special version Housing A Aluminium F12 housing coated to IP 68 C Aluminium T12 housing coated to IP 68, with separate terminal compartment D Aluminium T 12 housing coated to IP 68, with separate terminal compartment; with overvoltage protection Y Special version Gland/Entry 2 M20x1.5 gland 3 G 1/2“ entry 4 NPT 1/2“ entry 5 M12 PROFIBUS-PA plug 6 7/8" FF plug 9 Special version Sealing Sensor/Flange 2 VITON flat sealing

Endress+Hauser

33

Prosonic M

Sealing Sensor/Flange 3 EPDM flat sealing 9 special version Additional options A Additional options not selected FMU 42 -

34

Product designation

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M

Product structure FMU 43

Certificates A Variant for non-hazardous area M FM DIP Class II, III, Div. 1, Gr. E,F,G NI N CSA General Purpose P CSA DIP, Class II, III, Div. 1, Gr. E,F,G NI Q NEPSI DIP 2 ATEX II 1/2 D or II 2 D, Aluminium Deckel 5 ATEX II 1/3 D or II 3 D, Sichtdeckel Y Special version Process connection/material P Flange DN 100/ANSI 4"/JIS 16K100, PP (universal slip-on flange included) S Flange DN 100/ANSI 4"/JIS 16K100, SS 316TI (universal slip-on flange included) K Without slip-on flange/without mounting bracket (customer mounting equipment) M With mounting bracket Y Special version Power supply/communication H 4 wire, 10,5...32VDC / 4-20mA HART G 4 wire, 90...253VAC / 4-20mA HART D 2 wire, PROFIBUS PA F 2 wire, Foundation Fieldbus Y Special version Display / on-site operation 1 Without LC display 2 With LC display VU 331 incl. on-site operation 3 Prepared for remote display FHX 40 9 Special version Housing A Aluminium F12 housing coated to IP 68 9 Special version Screw union/entry 2 M20x1.5 screw union 3 G 1/2“ entry 4 NPT 1/2“ entry 5 M12 PROFIBUS-PA plug-in connector 6 7/8" FF plug 9 Special version FMU 43 -

Endress+Hauser

Product designation

35

Prosonic M

Product structure FMU 44

Approval A Non-hazardous area 1 ATEX II 1/2G EEx ia IIC T6 (in preparation) 4 ATEX II 1/2G EEx d (ia) IIC T6 (in preparation) G ATEX II 3 G EEx nA II T6 (in preparation) 2 ATEX II 1/2 D, Alu blind cover (in preparation) 5 ATEX II 1/3 D S FM IS Cl.I,II,III Div.1 Gr.A-G, NI Cl.I Div.2 (in preparation) T FM XP Cl.I,II,III Div.1 Gr.A-G (in preparation) N CSA General Purpose U CSA IS Cl.I,II,III Div.1 Gr.A-G, NI Cl.I Div.2 V CSA XP Cl.I,II,III Div.1 Gr.A-G K TIIS EEx ia IIC T6 (in preparation) I NEPSI Ex ia IIC T6 (in preparation) J NEPSI Ex d(ia) IIC T6 (in preparation) E NEPSI Ex nA II T6 (in preparation) Q NEPSI DIP (in preparation) Y Special version, to be specified Process connection A 8" 150lbs FF, 316L, max 2.5bar abs./36psia E UNI flange 6"/DN150/150, PP, max 2.5bar abs./ 36psia, suitable for 6" 150lbs / DN150 PN16 / 10K 150 F UNI flange 6"/DN150/150, PVDF, max 2.5bar abs./36psia, suitable for 6" 150lbs /DN150 PN16 / 10K 150 G UNI flange 6"/DN150/150, 316L, max 2.5bar abs. 36psia, suitable for 6" 150lbs / DN150 PN16 / 10K 150 H UNI flange DN200/200, PP, max 2.5bar abs./ 36 psia, suitable for DN200 PN16 / 10K 200 J UNI flange DN200/200, PVDF, max 2.5bar abs./ 36psia, suitable for DN200 PN16 / 10K 200 K UNI flange DN200/200, 316L, max 2.5bar abs./ 36psia, suitable for DN200 PN16 / 10K 200 L 8" 150lbs FF, PP, max 2.5bar abs./ 36psia M Mounting bracket FAU20 N 8" 150lbs FF, PVDF, max 2.5bar abs./ 36psia T UNI flange 4"/DN100/100, PP, max 2.5bar abs./ 36psia, suitable for 4" 150lbs / DN100 PN16 / 10K 100 U UNI flange 4"/DN100/100, PVDF, max. 2.5bar abs./ 36 psia, suitable for 4" 150lbs / DN100 PN16 / 10K 100 V UNI flange 4"/DN100/100, 316L, max 2.5bar abs./ 36psia, suitable for 4" 150lbs / DN100 PN16 / 10K 100 Y Special version, to be specified Power supply; Output B 2-wire; 4-20mA HART D 2-wire; PROFIBUS PA F 2-wire; FOUNDATION Fieldbus G 4-wire 90-250VAC; 4-20mA HART H 4-wire 10.5-32VDC; 4-20mA HART Y Special version, to be specified Operation 1 w/o display, via communication 2 4-line display VU331, Envelope curve display on site 3 Prepared for FHX40, Remote display (accessory) 9 Special version, to be specified FMU 44 -

36

product designation, part 1

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M

Housing A F12 Alu, coated IP68 NEMA6P C T12 Alu, coated IP68 NEMA6P, Separate conn. compartment D T12 Alu, coated IP68 NEMA6P + OVP, Sep. conn. compartment, OVP = overvoltage protection 9 Special version, to be specified CAble entry 2 Gland M20 (EEx d > thread M20) 3 Thread G1/2 4 Thread NPT 1/2 5 Plug M12 6 Plug 7/8“ 9 Special version, to be specified Process Sealing Sensor/ Flange 2 Viton 3 EPDM 9 Special version, to be specified Additional option A Basic version Y Special version, to be specified FMU 44 -

Scope of delivery

Endress+Hauser

• • • • • • •

complete product designation

Instrument according to the version ordered "ToF Tool FieldTool Package (2 CD-ROMs: Program CD-ROM, Utility CD-ROM) Operating manual according to the communication version for certified instrument versions: Safety Instructions, Control- or Installation drawings for FMU 40 *R**** and FMU 41 *R****: counter nut (PC) for FMU 40/41: sealing ring (EPDM) for gland M20x1.5: – 1 cable gland for 2-wire instruments – 2 cable glands for 4-wire instruments The cable glands are mounted on delivery.

37

Prosonic M

Accessories Weather protection cover

A Weather protection cover made of stainless steel is recommended for outdoor mounting (order code: 543199-0001). The shipment includes the protective cover and tension clamp. m

240 m

°

45

mm

F12 / T12 housing

mm

95

70 mm

135

EN D M RE

Orde ICR SS r OP +HA Se Code r.-N ILO US o.: :

Maulburg

ER

IP T

A >7

0°C

65

: t >8

5°C

Made in Germany

T II

Me Messberei asuri ch ng ran ge U 16 ma x. 20 4...20...36 m mAV DC

L00-FMR2xxxx-00-00-06-en-001

Installation bracket for FMU 40/41

400 120

G A

3

120 30

250

ø16

L00-FMU4x-00-00-00-de-001

• for FMU 40, G1½: Order No. 942669-0000 • for FMU 41, G2: Order No. 942669-0001 suited for NPT 1½" and 2" as well

38

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M

Adapter flange

sealing ring EPDM (supplied)

sensor

adapter flange

nozzle L00-FMUX3XXX-00-00-00-en-001

Version with metrical thread (FAU 70 E) Process Connection 12 DN 50 PN 16 A, flange EN1092-1 (DIN2527 B) 14 DN 80 PN 16 A, flange EN1092-1 (DIN2527 B) 15 DN 100 PN 16, A, flange EN1092-1 (DIN2527 B) Sensor Connection 3 Thread ISO228 G1-1/2 4 Thread ISO228 G2 Flange Material 2 316L 7 Polypropylene FAU 70 E

Product designation

Version with conical thread(FAU 70 A) Process Connection 22 2" 150lbs FF, flange ANSI B16.5 24 3" 150lbs FF, flange ANSI B16.5 25 4" 150lbs FF, flange ANSI B16.5 Sensor Connection 5 Thread NPT1-1/2 6 Thread NPT2 Flange Material 2 316L 7 Polypropylene FAU 70 A

Endress+Hauser

Product designation

39

Prosonic M

Cantilever

50 100

20

20 C

A

25

35

100

22

M8

B

35

15

6.5

C

75

105

75

50/ 62

D

L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-005

A

B

C

D

for Sensor

Material

Order Code

585 mm

250 mm

2 mm

200 mm

FMU 40

316Ti/1.4571

52014132

galv. steel

52014131

316Ti/1.4571

52014136

galv. steel

52014135

316Ti/1.4571

52014134

galv. steel

52014133

316Ti/1.4571

52014138

galv. steel

52014137

FMU 41

1085 mm

750 mm

3 mm

300 mm

FMU 40

FMU 41

• The 50 mm or 62 mm orifices serve for the mounting of the FMU 40 or FMU 41 sensor, respecitvely. • The 22 mm orifice may be used for an additional sensor.

40

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M

25

100

13

Mounting Frame

55

3.2 Ø 33.7

60 4 76 100 200

45 6.5

700/1400

20

100 150

130

L00-FMU4x-00-00-00-yy-005

Height

Material

Order Code

700 mm

galv. steel

919791-0000

700 mm

1.4301 (AISI 304)

919791-0001

1400 mm

galv. steel

919791-0002

1400 mm

1.4301 (AISI 304)

919791-0003

Wall Bracket 3.2 5

ø 33.7

13

25

150

110

213

180

6.5

88

110 150 L00-FMU4x-00-00-00-yy-006

Material

Order Code

galv. steel

919792-0000

316Ti/1.4571

919792-0001

Commubox FXA191 HART

For intrinsically safe communication with ToF Tool/FieldCare via the RS232C interface. For details refer to TI237F/00/en.

Commubox FXA195 HART

For intrinsically safe communication with ToF Tool/FieldCare via the USB interface. For details refer to TI404F/00/en.

Endress+Hauser

41

Prosonic M

Service Interface FXA193

The Service-Interface connects the Service plug of Proline and ToF instruments with the 9 pin RS 232C interface of a PC. (USB connectors must be equipped with a usual commercial USB/Serial adapter.) Product structure Approvals A B C D 9

For use in non-hazardous areas ATEX II (1) GD CSA/FM Class I Div. 1 ATEX, CSA, FM other

Connection cable B E H X 9

FXA193-

Connection cable for ToF devices Connection cable for Proline and ToF devices Connection cable for Proline and ToF devices and Connection cable for Ex two-wire devices without connection cable others

Complete product designation

Associated documentation • Technical Information: TI063D • Safety Instructions for ATEX II (1) GD: XA077D • Supplementary information for the cable adapters: SD092D Commubox FXA291 The Commubox FXA291 connects Endress+Hauser field instruments with CDI interface (= Endress+Hauser Common Data Interface) to the USB interface of a personal computer or a notebook. For details refer to TI405C/07/en.

!

Note! For the following Endress+Hauser instruments you need the "ToF Adapter FXA291" as an additional accessory: • • • • • • • • • • • •

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP7x Deltabar S PMD7x, FMD7x Deltapilot S FMB70 Gammapilot M FMG60 Levelflex M FMP4x Micropilot FMR130/FMR131 Micropilot M FMR2xx Micropilot S FMR53x, FMR540 Prosonic FMU860/861/862 Prosonic M FMU4x Tank Side Monitor NRF590 (with additional adapter cable) Prosonic S FMU9x

ToF Adapter FXA291 The ToF Adapter FXA291 connects the Commubox FXA291 via the USB interface of a personal computer or a notebook to the following Endress+Hauser instruments: • • • • • • • • • • • •

Cerabar S PMC71, PMP7x Deltabar S PMD7x, FMD7x Deltapilot S FMB70 Gammapilot M FMG60 Levelflex M FMP4x Micropilot FMR130/FMR131 Micropilot M FMR2xx Micropilot S FMR53x, FMR540 Prosonic FMU860/861/862 Prosonic M FMU4x Tank Side Monitor NRF590 (with additional adapter cable) Prosonic S FMU9x

For details refer to KA271F/00/a2.

42

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M

Remote display FHX40 Pipe-mounting (mounting bracket and plate supplied optionally, s. product structure) 8, 5

Wall-mounting (without mounting bracket)

Micropilot M Levelflex M Prosonic M

Separate housing FHX40 (IP 65)

180

122

160

0

15

80 ES

S+H

AU

SE

Me Messberei asuri ch ng ran ge U 16 ma x. 20 4...20...36 m mAV DC

88

R

Cable IP

Maulburg

DR

A >7

t >8 5°C

118

96

6, 3

0°C :

120 82

65

T

Made in Germany

EN Orde r Se Code r.-N o.: :

122

106

max. 80 min. 30

pipe

L00-FMxxxxxx-00-00-06-en-003

Technical data (cable and housing) and product structure: Max. cable length

20 m (65 ft)

Temperature range

-30 °C...+70 °C (-22 °F...158 °F)

Degree of protection

IP65/67 (housing); IP68 (cable) acc. to IEC 60529

Materials

Housing: AlSi12; cable glands: nickle plated brass

Dimensions [mm] / [inch]

122x150x80 (HxWxD) / 4.8x5.9x3.2

Approval: A 1 S U N K

Nn-hazardous area ATEX II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6, ATEX II 3D FM IS Cl.I Div.1 Gr.A-D CSA IS Cl.I Div.1 Gr.A-D CSA General Purpose TIIS ia IIC T6 (in preparation)

Cable: 1 5

20m/65ft; for HART 20m/65ft; for PROFIBUS PA/FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Additional option: A B

FHX40 -

Basic version Mounting bracket, pipe 1"/ 2"

Complete product designation

For connection of the remote display FHX40 use the cable which fits the communication version of the respective instrument.

Endress+Hauser

43

Prosonic M

Supplementary documentation System Information

SI 005F Ultrasonic level measurement

Operating manual

Depending on the communication variant ordered, the following operating manuals are supplied with the device: Communication

Operating manual

4 ... 20mA, HART

BA 237F

Profibus PA

BA 238F

Foundation Fieldbus

BA 239F

These instructions describe the installation and first commissioning of the Prosonic M. From the operating menu, all functions are included, which are required for standard measurement tasks. Additional functions are not contained in the manual. Description of device functions

Short instructions

BA 240F This contains a detailed description of all the functions of the Prosonic M and is valid for all communication variants. A pdf file of this document can be found • in the supplied "ToF Tool - FieldTool Package" at "Help/ToF Tool Help/ Online Manual/ Operating Manual/Ultrasonic/Prosonic M FMU4x Functions"1). • in the internet at "www.endress.com". Klick "Download" and enter the product code "FMU4*" into the search form. KA 183F can be found under the device housing cover. The most important menu functions are summarised on this sheet. It is intended primarily as a memory jogger for users who are familiar with the operating concept of Endress+Hauser time-of-flight instruments.

Safety Instructions ATEX

The following safety instructions are supplied with ATEX-certified device versions. If the devices are used in explosive areas, comply with all the specifications in these safety instructions.

Instrument version

Certificate

Communication

Housing

Safety Instructions

• FMU40 - 1*B*A* • FMU41 - 1*B*A* • FMU42 - 1*B*A***

ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G EEx ia II C T6

HART (2-wire)

F12

XA 174F

• FMU40 - 1*B*D* • FMU41 - 1*B*D* • FMU42 - 1*B*D***

ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G EEx ia II C T6

HART (2-wire)

T12 with overvoltage protection

XA 224F

• FMU40 - 1*D*A* - 1*F*A* • FMU41 - 1*D*A* - 1*F*A* • FMU42 - 1*D*A*** - 1*F*A***

ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G EEx ia II C T6

• Profibus-PA • Foundation Fieldbus

F12

XA 175F

• FMU40 - 1*D*D* - 1*F*D* • FMU41 - 1*D*D* - 1*F*D* • FMU42 - 1*D*D*** - 1*F*D***

ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G EEx ia II C T6

• Profibus-PA • Foundation Fieldbus

T12 with overvoltage protection

XA 225F

1)

44

If the Operating Instructions have not been installed together with the "ToF Tool - FieldTool Package", they can be added to the installation subsequently.

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M

Instrument version

Certificate

Communication

Housing

Safety Instructions

• FMU40 - 4*B*C* - 4*D*C* - 4*F*C* • FMU41 - 4*B*C* - 4*D*C* - 4*F*C* • FMU42 - 4*B*C*** - 4*D*C*** - 4*F*C***

ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G EEx d [ia] II C T6

• HART (2-wire) • Profibus-PA • Foundation Fieldbus

T12

XA 176F

• FMU40 - G***** • FMU41 - G***** • FMU42 - G*******

ATEX II 3G EEx nA II T6

• • • • •

• F12 • T12 XA 179F • T12 with overvoltage protection

• FMU40 - 2*B*A* - 2*D*A* - 2*F*A* - 5*B*A* - 5*D*A* - 5*F*A* • FMU41 - 2*B*A* - 2*D*A* - 2*F*A* - 5*B*A* - 5*D*A* - 5*F*A* • FMU42 - 2*B*A*** - 2*D*A*** - 2*F*A*** - 5*B*A*** - 5*D*A*** - 5*F*A***

• ATEX II 1/2D • ATEX II 1/3D

• HART (2-wire) • Profibus-PA • Foundation Fieldbus

F12

XA 180F

• FMU40 - 2*G*A* - 2*H*A* - 5*G*A* - 5*H*A* • FMU41 - 2*G*A* - 2*H*A* - 5*G*A* - 5*H*A* • FMU42 - 2*G*A*** - 2*H*A*** - 5*G*A*** - 5*H*A***

• ATEX II 1/2D • ATEX II 1/3 D

• HART (4-wire, DC) • HART (4-wire, AC)

F12

XA 259

• FMU43 - 2*G*A* - 2*H*A* - 5*G*A* - 5*H*A*

• ATEX II 1/2 D or II 2 D • ATEX II 1/3 D or II 3 D

• HART (4-wire, DC) • HART (4-wire, AC)

F12

XA 177F

• FMU43 - 2*D*A* - 2*F*A* - 5*D*A* - 5*F*A*

• ATEX II 1/2 D or II 2 D • ATEX II 1/3 D or II 3 D

• Profibus-PA • Foundation Fieldbus

F12

XA 178F

Endress+Hauser

HART (2-wire) HART (4-wire, DC) HART (4-wire, AC) Profibus-PA Foundation Fieldbus

45

Prosonic M

Safety Instructions NEPSI

The following safety instructions are supplied with NEPSI-certified device versions. If the devices are used in explosive areas, comply with all the specifications in these safety instructions.

Instrument version

Certificate

Communication

Housing

Safety Instructions

• FMU40 - I*B*A* • FMU41 - I*B*A* • FMU42 - I*B*A***

Ex ia II C T1 ... T6 NEPSI GYJ071468

HART (2-wire)

F12

XA 436F

• FMU40 - I*B*D* • FMU41 - I*B*D* • FMU42 - I*B*D***

Ex ia II C T1 ... T6 NEPSI GYJ071468

HART (2-wire)

T12 with overvoltage protection

XA 442F

• FMU40 - I*D*A* - I*F*A* • FMU41 - I*D*A* - I*F*A* • FMU42 - I*D*A*** - I*F*A***

Ex ia II C T1 ... T6 NEPSI GYK071468

• Profibus-PA • Foundation Fieldbus

F12

XA 437F

• FMU40 - I*D*D* - I*F*D* • FMU41 - I*D*D* - I*F*D* • FMU42 - I*D*D*** - I*F*D***

Ex ia II C T1 ... T6 NEPSI GYJ071468

• Profibus-PA • Foundation Fieldbus

T12 with overvoltage protection

XA 443F

• FMU40 - J*B*C* - J*D*C* - J*F*C* • FMU41 - J*B*C* - J*D*C* - J*F*C* • FMU42 - J*B*C*** - J*D*C*** - J*F*C***

Ex d [ia] II C T1 ... T6 NEPSI GYJ071468

• HART (2-wire) • Profibus-PA • Foundation Fieldbus

T12

XA 438F

• FMU40 - Q*B*A* - Q*D*A* - Q*F*A* • FMU41 - Q*B*A* - Q*D*A* - Q*F*A* • FMU42 - Q*B*A*** - Q*D*A*** - Q*F*A***

DIP A21/A22 TA, T* NEPSI GYJ071468

• HART (2-wire) • Profibus-PA • Foundation Fieldbus

F12

XA 441F

• FMU40 - Q*G*A* - Q*H*A* • FMU41 - Q*G*A* - Q*H*A* • FMU42 - Q*G*A*** - Q*H*A***

DIP A21/A22 TA, T* NEPSI GYJ071468

• HART (4-wire, DC) • HART (4-wire, AC)

F12

XA 444F

• FMU43 - Q*G*A* - Q*H*A*

DIP A21/A22 TA, T*

• HART (4-wire, DC) • HART (4-wire, AC)

F12

XA 439F

• FMU43 - Q*D*A* - Q*F*A*

DIP A21/A22 TA, T*

• Profibus-PA • Foundation Fieldbus

F12

XA 440F

• FMU40 - E***** • FMU41 - E***** • FMU42 - E*******

NEPSI Ex nA IIC T6

• HART • Profibus PA • Foundation Fieldbus

• F12 • T12

XA 403F

46

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M

Control drawings Installation drawings

The following control or installation drawings are supplied with the FM, CSA and TIIS-certified device versions:

Instrument version

Certificate

Communication

Housing

Control or Installation Drawing

• FMU40 - S*B*A* • FMU41 - S*B*A* • FMU42 - S*B*A***

FM IS

HART (2-wire)

F12

ZD 096F

• FMU40 - S*D*A* - S*F*A* • FMU41 - S*D*A* - S*F*A* • FMU42 - S*D*A*** - S*F*A***

FM IS

• Profibus-PA • Foundation Fieldbus

F12

ZD 097F

• FMU40 - S*B*D* • FMU41 - S*B*D* • FMU42 - S*B*D***

FM IS

HART (2-wire)

T12 with overvoltage protection ZD 139F

• FMU40 - S*D* D* - S*F*D* • FMU41 - S*D* D* - S*F*D* • FMU42 - S*D* D*** - S*F*D***

FM IS

• Profibus-PA • Foundation Fieldbus

T12 with overvoltage protection ZD 140F

• FMU40 - T*B*C* - T*D*C* - T*F*C* • FMU41 - T*B*C* - T*D*C* - T*F*C* • FMU42 - T*B*C*** - T*D*C*** - T*F*C***

FM XP

• HART (2-wire) • Profibus PA • Foundation Fieldbus

T12

ZD 098F

• • • •

FMU40 - U*B*A* FMU41 - U*B*A* FMU42 - U*B*A*** FMU44 - U*B*A***

CSA IS

HART (2-wire)

F12

ZD 088F

• FMU40 - U*D*A* - U*F*A* • FMU41 - U*D*A* - U*F*A* • FMU42 - U*D*A*** - U*F*A*** • FMU44 - U*D*A*** - U*F*A***

CSA IS

• Profibus-PA • Foundation Fieldbus

F12

ZD 099F

• • • •

FMU40 - U*B* D* FMU41 - U*B* D* FMU42 - U*B* D*** FMU44 - U*B* D***

CSA IS

HART (2-wire)

T12 with overvoltage protection ZD 101F

• FMU40 - U*D*D* - U*F*D* • FMU41 - U*D*D* - U*F*D* • FMU42 - U*D*D*** - U*F*D*** • FMU44 - U*D*D*** - U*F*D***

CSA IS

• Profibus-PA • Foundation Fieldbus

T12 with overvoltage protection ZD 102F

Endress+Hauser

47

Prosonic M

Instrument version

Certificate

Communication

Housing

Control or Installation Drawing

• FMU40 - V*B*C* - V*D*C* - V*F*C* • FMU41 - V*B*C* - V*D*C* - V*F*C* • FMU42 - V*B*C*** - V*D*C*** - V*F*C*** • FMU44 - V*B*C*** - V*D*C*** - V*F*C***

CSA XP

• HART (2-wire) • Profibus PA • Foundation Fieldbus

T12

ZD 100F

• FMU 40 - K***** • FMU 41 - K*****

TIIS Ex ia IIC T6

HART

F12

ZD 138F

48

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M

Endress+Hauser

49

Prosonic M

50

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M

Endress+Hauser

51

Instruments International Endress+Hauser Instruments International AG Kaegenstrasse 2 4153 Reinach Switzerland Tel. +41 61 715 81 00 Fax +41 61 715 25 00 www.endress.com [email protected]

TI365F/00/en/01.09 71089083 FM+SGML 6.0 ProMoDo

71089083

Operating Instructions

Prosonic M FMU40/41/42/43/44 Ultrasonic Level Measurement

9

BA239F/00/en/01.09 71089089 Valid as of software version: V 01.04

Short instructions

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Short instructions KA 183F/00/a2/02.02 52010993

Prosonic M - Quick Setup

000 measured value -

Contrast:

+

or

+

E

+

E

Group selection

-

+

00 basic setup

002 003 tank shape medium property

01 safety settings

- dome ceiling - horizontal cyl. - bypass …

+

0E temperature 04 linearisation

E

E

004 process cond.

005 empty calibr.

- unknown - standard input E (s. sketch) - calm - liquid surface - > 4 mm - < 4 mm - add. agitator …

059 blocking distance

006 full calibr.

input F BD is displayed (s. sketch) (s. sketch)

008 dist./ meas value

051 008 check dist./ meas value distance

052 range of mapping

D and L are - ok displayed - too small (s. sketch) - too big - unknown - manual

confirm suggestion or specify range

053 start mapping

05 extended calibr. 06 output (HART, FF) profibus param.(PA)

BD

100%

-

0E Envelope curve

0E2 0E1 plot settings recording curve

09 display

092 language

0A diagnostics

0A0 present error

0C system parameter

0C0 tag no.

D E

… …

F

0A1 previous error … …

… …

0A3 reset

0A4 unlock parameter

… …

L

100 (HART) 333 (HART) 33333 (PA,FF) 2457 (PA,FF)

0% BD: blocking distance

52010993 L00-FMU4xxx-05-00-00-en-001

Contents of the operating instructions This operating instructions describes the installation and commissioning of the Prosonic M ultrasonic level transmitter. It contains all the functions required for a normal measuring operation. Also, the Prosonic M provides additional functions for optimising the measuring point and for converting the measured value. These functions are not included in this operating instructions. You can find an overview of all the device functions in the Appendix. You can find a detailed description of all the device functions in the operating instructions BA 240F/00/en "Prosonic M - Description of Instrument Functions". This is located on the supplied documentation CD-ROM.

2

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Table of contents

Table of contents 1

Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

6.5

1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4

Designated use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation, commissioning, operation . . . . . . . . . . . Hazardous area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes on safety conventions and symbols . . . . . . . . .

6.6

2

Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9

Nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Product structure FMU 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Product structure FMU 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Product structure FMU 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Product structure FMU 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Product structure FMU 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Scope of delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Certificates and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

3

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7

Design; dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation hint for FMU 40/41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turn housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Post installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6

Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring with Foundation Fieldbus plug . . . . . . . . . . Cable specifications Foundation Fieldbus . . . . . . . . Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recommended connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Post connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

5.1 5.2

Operating options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Operation with the display and operating module VU331 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Operation with an Endress+Hauser operating program 36 Operation with a FOUNDATION Fieldbus configuration program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Operation with the handheld terminal DXR375/FC375 42

5.3 5.4 5.5

4 4 4 5

15 18 20 23 25 25 25

26 28 28 28 29 29

6

Commissioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4

Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unlocking the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resetting the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commissioning by the display and operatig module VU331 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Endress+Hauser

44 44 46

6.7

Basic Setup with the Endress+Hauser operating program 58 Commissioning with a FOUNDATION Fieldbus configuration tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Commissioning with the handheld terminal DXR375/ FC375 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

7

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

7.1 7.2

System error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Application errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

8

Maintenance and repairs . . . . . . . . . . . 74

8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9 8.10

Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repairs to Ex-approved devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare parts (housing type F12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare parts (housing type T12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contact addresses of Endress+Hauser . . . . . . . . . . .

9

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.8 9.9 9.10

Weather protection cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation bracket for FMU 40/41 . . . . . . . . . . . . Adapter flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cantilever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting bracket for FMU 42/43/44 . . . . . . . . . . Commubox FXA291 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ToF Adapter FXA291 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote display FHX40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10

Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

10.1

Technical data at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

11

Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 11.7 11.8 11.9

Operating menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Block model of the Prosonic M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Resource block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Sensor Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Diagnostic Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Display Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Analog input block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 List of start indices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

74 74 74 74 75 78 81 81 81 82

83 83 84 85 86 86 87 87 87 88

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

48

3

Safety instructions

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

1

Safety instructions

1.1

Designated use

The Prosonic M is a compact measuring device for continuous, non-contact level measurement. Depending on the sensor, the measuring range is up to 15m in fluids and up to 7m in bulk solids. By using the linearisation function, the Prosonic M can also be used for flow measurements in open channels and measuring weirs.

1.2

Installation, commissioning, operation

The Prosonic M is fail-safe and is constructed to the state-of-the-art. It meets the appropriate standards and EC directives. However, if you use it improperly or other than for its designated use, it may pose application-specific hazards, e.g. product overflow due to incorrect installation or configuration. Installation, electrical connection, start-up, operation and maintenance of the measuring device must therefore be carried out exclusively by trained specialists authorised by the system operator. Technical personnel must have read and understood these operating instructions and must adhere to them. You may only undertake modifications or repair work to the device when it is expressly permitted by the operating instructions.

1.3

Hazardous area

Measuring systems for use in hazardous environments are accompanied by separate "Ex documentation", which is an integral part of this Operating Manual. Strict compliance with the installation instructions and ratings as stated in this supplementary documentation is mandatory. • Ensure that all personnel are suitably qualified. • Observe the specifications in the certificate as well as national and local standards and regulations.

4

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Safety instructions

1.4

Notes on safety conventions and symbols

In order to highlight safety-relevant or alternative operating procedures in the manual, the following conventions have been used, each indicated by a corresponding symbol in the margin. Safety conventions

# " !

Warning! A warning highlights actions or procedures which, if not performed correctly, will lead to personal injury, a safety hazard or destruction of the instrument Caution! Caution highlights actions or procedures which, if not performed correctly, may lead to personal injury or incorrect functioning of the instrument Note! A note highlights actions or procedures which, if not performed correctly, may indirectly affect operation or may lead to an instrument response which is not planned

Explosion protection

0

Device certified for use in explosion hazardous area If the device has this symbol embossed on its name plate it can be installed in an explosion hazardous area

-

Explosion hazardous area Symbol used in drawings to indicate explosion hazardous areas. Devices located in and wiring entering areas with the designation “explosion hazardous areas” must conform with the stated type of protection.

.

Safe area (non-explosion hazardous area) Symbol used in drawings to indicate, if necessary, non-explosion hazardous areas. Devices located in safe areas still require a certificate if their outputs run into explosion hazardous areas

Electrical symbols

%

Direct voltage A terminal to which or from which a direct current or voltage may be applied or supplied

&

Alternating voltage A terminal to which or from which an alternating (sine-wave) current or voltage may be applied or supplied

)

Grounded terminal A grounded terminal, which as far as the operator is concerned, is already grounded by means of an earth grounding system

*

Protective grounding (earth) terminal A terminal which must be connected to earth ground prior to making any other connection to the equipment

+ t >85°C

Endress+Hauser

Equipotential connection (earth bonding) A connection made to the plant grounding system which may be of type e.g. neutral star or equipotential line according to national or company practice Temperature resistance of the connection cables States, that the connection cables must be resistant to a temperature of at least 85 °C.

5

Identification

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

2

Identification

2.1

Nameplate

ENDRESS+HAUSER PROSONIC-M Order Code: Ser.-No.:

Made in Germany D-79689 Maulburg

1 2

IP68 / NEMA 6P

Profibus PA Foundation Fieldbus

5

3

90 … 253 V AC 4VA 10,5 …32 V DC 1W 14 … 36 V DC 0,8W 4 … 20 mA HART TA > 70°C : t >85°C

2-wire 4-wire

4 if modification X = see sep. label Dat./Insp.:

Patents D01345-B L00-FMU4xxxx-18-00-00-yy-001

1: Order Code; 2: Serial number; 3: Designation according to Directive 94/9/EC and designation of the type of protection (only for certified device variants); 4: Reference to additional safety-relevant documentation (only for certified device variants); 5: Communication variant and supply voltage (the appropriate option is highlighted)

6

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

2.2

Identification

Product structure FMU 40 Certificates A Variant for non-hazardous area E NEPSI Ex nA II T6 G ATEX II 3G EEx nA II T6 I NEPSI Ex ia IIC T6 J NEPSI Ex d(ia) IIC T6 K TIIS Ex ia II C T6 N CSA General Purpose Q NEPSI DIP S FM IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2 T FM XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G U CSA IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2 V CSA XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G 1 ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G; EEX ia IIC T6 2 ATEX II 1/2D, Alu blind cover 4 ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G; EEX d [ia] IIC T6 5 ATEX II 1/3D Y Special certificate Process connection R G 1½“ threadISO 228 N NPT 1½“ - 11,5 thread Y Special version Power supply/communication B 2 wire, 4...20mA-loop/HART H 4 wire, 10,5...32VDC / 4-20mA HART G 4 wire, 90...253VAC / 4-20mA HART D 2 wire, PROFIBUS PA F 2 wire, Foundation Fieldbus Y Special version Display / on-site operation 1 Without LC display 2 With LC display VU 331 incl. on-site operation 3 Prepared for remote display FHX 40 9 Special version Housing A Aluminium F12 housing coated to IP 68 C Aluminium T12 housing coated to IP 68; with separate terminal compartment D Aluminium T12 housing coated to IP 68; with separate terminal compartment; with overvoltage protection 9 Special version Screw union/entry 2 M20x1.5 screw union 3 G 1/2“ entry 4 NPT 1/2“ entry 5 M12 PROFIBUS-PA plug-in connector 6 7/8" FF plug 9 Special version

FMU 40 -

Endress+Hauser

Product designation

7

Identification

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

2.3

Product structure FMU 41 Certificates A Variant for non-hazardous area E NEPSI Ex nA II T6 G ATEX II 3G EEx nA II T6 I NEPSI Ex ia IIC T6 J NEPSI Ex d(Ia) IIC T6 K TIIS Ex ia II C T6 N CSA General Purpose Q NEPSI DIP S FM IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2 T FM XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G U CSA IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2 V CSA XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G 1 ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G; EEX ia IIC T6 2 ATEX II 1/2D, Alu blind cover 4 ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G; EEX d [ia] IIC T6 5 ATEX II 1/3D Y Special certificate Process connection R G 2“ threadISO 228 N NPT 2“ - 11,5 thread Y Special version Power supply/communication B 2 wire, 4...20mA-loop/HART H 4 wire, 10,5...32VDC / 4-20mA HART G 4 wire, 90...253VAC / 4-20mA HART D 2 wire, PROFIBUS PA F 2 wire, Foundation Fieldbus Y Special version Display / on-site operation 1 Without LC display 2 With LC display VU 331 incl. on-site operation 3 Prepared for remote display FHX 40 9 Special version Housing A Aluminium F12 housing coated to IP 68 C Aluminium T12 housing coated to IP 68 with separate terminal compartment D Aluminium T12 housing coated to IP 68; with separate terminal compartment; with overvoltage protection 9 Special version Screw union/entry 2 M20x1.5 screw union 3 G 1/2“ entry 4 NPT 1/2“ entry 5 M12 PROFIBUS-PA plug-in connector 6 7/8" FF plug 9 Special version

FMU 41 -

8

Product designation

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

2.4

Identification

Product structure FMU 42 Certificates A Variant for non-hazardous area E NEPSI Ex nA II T6 G ATEX II 3G EEx nA II T6 I NEPSI Ex ia IIC T6 J NEPSI Ex d (Ia) IIC T6 K TIIS Ex ia II C T6 (in preparation) N CSA General Purpose Q NEPSI DIP S FM IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2 T FM XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G U CSA IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2 V CSA XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G 1 ATEX II 1/2 G EEX ia IIC T6 2 ATEX II 1/2 D, Alu bond cover 4 ATEX II 1/2 G EEX d [ia] IIC T6 5 ATEX II 1/3D Y Special certificate Process connection M Mounting bracket FAU20 P UNI flange 3"/DN80/80, PP, max. 2.5bar abs./ 36psia suitable for 3" 150lbs / DN80 PN16 / 10K 80 Q UNI flange 3"/DN80/80, PVDF, max. 2.5bar abs./ 36psia suitable for 3" 150lbs / DN80 PN16 / 10K 80 S UNI flange 3"/DN80/80, 316L, max. 2.5bar abs./ 36psia suitable for 3" 150lbs / DN80 PN16 / 10K 80 T UNI flange 4"/DN100/100, PP, max. 2.5bar abs./ 36psia suitable for 4" 150lbs / DN100 PN16 / 10K100 U UNI flange 4"/DN100/100, PVDF, max. 2.5bar abs./ 36psia suitable for 4" 150lbs / DN100 PN16 / 10K100 V UNI flange 4"/DN100/100, 316L, max. 2.5bar abs./ 36psia suitable for 4" 150lbs / DN100 PN16 / 10K100 Y Special version Power supply/communication B 2 wire, 4...20mA-loop/HART H 4 wire, 10,5...32VDC / 4-20mA HART G 4 wire, 90...253VAC / 4-20mA HART D 2 wire, PROFIBUS PA F 2 wire, Foundation Fieldbus Y Special version Display / on-site operation 1 Without LC display 2 With LC display VU 331 incl. on-site operation 3 Prepared for remote display FHX 40 9 Special version Housing A Aluminium F12 housing coated to IP 68 C Aluminium T12 housing coated to IP 68, with separate terminal compartment D Aluminium T 12 housing coated to IP 68, with separate terminal compartment; with overvoltage protection Y Special version Gland/Entry 2 M20x1.5 gland 3 G 1/2“ entry 4 NPT 1/2“ entry 5 M12 PROFIBUS-PA plug 6 7/8" FF plug 9 Special version

Endress+Hauser

9

Identification

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Sealing Sensor/Flange 2 VITON flat sealing 3 EPDM flat sealing 9 special version Additional options A Additional options not selected FMU 42 -

10

Product designation

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

2.5

Identification

Product structure FMU 43 Certificates A Variant for non-hazardous area M FM DIP Class II, III, Div. 1, Gr. E,F,G NI N CSA General Purpose P CSA DIP, Class II, III, Div. 1, Gr. E,F,G NI Q NEPSI DIP 2 ATEX II 1/2 D or II 2 D, Aluminium Deckel 5 ATEX II 1/3 D or II 3 D, Sichtdeckel Y Special version Process connection/material P Flange DN 100/ANSI 4"/JIS 16K100, PP (universal slip-on flange included) S Flange DN 100/ANSI 4"/JIS 16K100, SS 316TI (universal slip-on flange included) K Without slip-on flange/without mounting bracket (customer mounting equipment) M With mounting bracket Y Special version Power supply/communication H 4 wire, 10,5...32VDC / 4-20mA HART G 4 wire, 90...253VAC / 4-20mA HART D 2 wire, PROFIBUS PA F 2 wire, Foundation Fieldbus Y Special version Display / on-site operation 1 Without LC display 2 With LC display VU 331 incl. on-site operation 3 Prepared for remote display FHX 40 9 Special version Housing A Aluminium F12 housing coated to IP 68 9 Special version Screw union/entry 2 M20x1.5 screw union 3 G 1/2“ entry 4 NPT 1/2“ entry 5 M12 PROFIBUS-PA plug-in connector 6 7/8" FF plug 9 Special version

FMU 43 -

Endress+Hauser

Product designation

11

Identification

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

2.6

Product structure FMU 44 Approval A Non-hazardous area 1 ATEX II 1/2G EEx ia IIC T6 (in preparation) 4 ATEX II 1/2G EEx d (ia) IIC T6 (in preparation) G ATEX II 3 G EEx nA II T6 (in preparation) 2 ATEX II 1/2 D, Alu blind cover (in preparation) 5 ATEX II 1/3 D S FM IS Cl.I,II,III Div.1 Gr.A-G, NI Cl.I Div.2 (in preparation) T FM XP Cl.I,II,III Div.1 Gr.A-G (in preparation) N CSA General Purpose U CSA IS Cl.I,II,III Div.1 Gr.A-G, NI Cl.I Div.2 V CSA XP Cl.I,II,III Div.1 Gr.A-G K TIIS EEx ia IIC T6 (in preparation) I NEPSI Ex ia IIC T6 (in preparation) J NEPSI Ex d(ia) IIC T6 (in preparation) E NEPSI Ex nA II T6 (in preparation) Q NEPSI DIP (in preparation) Y Special version, to be specified Process connection A 8" 150lbs FF, 316L, max 2.5bar abs./36psia E UNI flange 6"/DN150/150, PP, max 2.5bar abs./ 36psia, suitable for 6" 150lbs / DN150 PN16 / 10K 150 F UNI flange 6"/DN150/150, PVDF, max 2.5bar abs./36psia, suitable for 6" 150lbs /DN150 PN16 / 10K 150 G UNI flange 6"/DN150/150, 316L, max 2.5bar abs. 36psia, suitable for 6" 150lbs / DN150 PN16 / 10K 150 H UNI flange DN200/200, PP, max 2.5bar abs./ 36 psia, suitable for DN200 PN16 / 10K 200 J UNI flange DN200/200, PVDF, max 2.5bar abs./ 36psia, suitable for DN200 PN16 / 10K 200 K UNI flange DN200/200, 316L, max 2.5bar abs./ 36psia, suitable for DN200 PN16 / 10K 200 L 8" 150lbs FF, PP, max 2.5bar abs./ 36psia M Mounting bracket FAU20 N 8" 150lbs FF, PVDF, max 2.5bar abs./ 36psia T UNI flange 4"/DN100/100, PP, max 2.5bar abs./ 36psia, suitable for 4" 150lbs / DN100 PN16 / 10K 100 U UNI flange 4"/DN100/100, PVDF, max. 2.5bar abs./ 36 psia, suitable for 4" 150lbs / DN100 PN16 / 10K 100 V UNI flange 4"/DN100/100, 316L, max 2.5bar abs./ 36psia, suitable for 4" 150lbs / DN100 PN16 / 10K 100 Y Special version, to be specified Power supply; Output B 2-wire; 4-20mA HART D 2-wire; PROFIBUS PA F 2-wire; FOUNDATION Fieldbus G 4-wire 90-250VAC; 4-20mA HART H 4-wire 10.5-32VDC; 4-20mA HART Y Special version, to be specified Operation 1 w/o display, via communication 2 4-line display VU331, Envelope curve display on site 3 Prepared for FHX40, Remote display (accessory) 9 Special version, to be specified

FMU 44 -

12

product designation, part 1

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Identification

Housing A F12 Alu, coated IP68 NEMA6P C T12 Alu, coated IP68 NEMA6P, Separate conn. compartment D T12 Alu, coated IP68 NEMA6P + OVP, Sep. conn. compartment, OVP = overvoltage protection 9 Special version, to be specified CAble entry 2 Gland M20 (EEx d > thread M20) 3 Thread G1/2 4 Thread NPT 1/2 5 Plug M12 6 Plug 7/8“ 9 Special version, to be specified Process Sealing Sensor/ Flange 2 Viton 3 EPDM 9 Special version, to be specified Additional option A Basic version Y Special version, to be specified FMU 44 -

Endress+Hauser

complete product designation

13

Identification

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

2.7

Scope of delivery

2.7.1

Instrument and accessories

• Instrument according to the version ordered • "ToF Tool - FieldTool Package" (2 CD-ROMs) • for FMU 40/41 in the versions FMU 40 *R**** and FMU 41 *R****: counter nut (PC) • for FMU 40/41: sealing ring (EPDM) • for gland M20x1.5: – 1 cable gland for 2-wire instruments – 2 cable glands for 4-wire instruments The cable glands are mounted on delivery.

2.7.2

Supplied documentation

Short instructions (KA 183F, in the instrument) intended as a memory jogger for users who are familiar with the operating concept of Endress+Hauser Time-of-Flight instruments. Operating instructions (BA 239F, this booklet) This describes the installation and commissioning of the Prosonic M. The operating menu includes all the functions which are required for standard measurement tasks. Any additional functions are not included. Description of Instrument Functions (BA 240F) contains a detailed description of all the functions of the Prosonic M. You can find this document as a pdf file on the supplied ToF Tool - FieldTool CD-ROM 1. Safety instructions Additional safety instructions (XA, ZE, ZD) are supplied with certified device versions. Refer to the nameplate for the names of the safety instructions that apply to your device version.

2.8

Certificates and approvals

CE mark, declaration of conformity The device is designed to meet state-of-the-art safety requirements, has been tested and left the factory in a condition in which it is safe to operate. The device complies with the applicable standards and regulations as listed in the EC declaration of conformity and thus complies with the statutory requirements of the EC directives. Endress+Hauser confirms the successful testing of the device by affixing to it the CE mark.

2.9

Registered trademarks

ToF® Registered trademark of the company Endress+Hauser GmbH+Co. KG, Maulburg, Germany PulseMaster® Registered trademark of the company Endress+Hauser GmbH+Co. KG, Maulburg, Germany FOUNDATION™ Fieldbus Registered trademark of Fieldbus Foundation Austin, Texas, USA

14

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Installation

3.1

Design; dimensions

3.1.1

FMU40, FMU41

F12

65 (2.6)

T12 78 (3.1)

94 (3.7)

68 (2.7)

ENDRESS+HAUSER Prosonic M

ENDRESS+HAUSER Prosonic M

85 (3.3)

85 (3.3)

22 (0.9)

FMU 41 22 (0.9)

~148 (5.8)

G2” 2 NPT

~83 (3.3)

~87 (~3.4)

G1½” 1½ NPT

SW (AF) 60

~148 (5.8)

FMU 40 SW (AF) 60

78 (3.1) 32 (1.3)

150 (5.9)

65 (2.6)

Ø 129 (5.1)

~86 (~3.4)

162 (6.4)

Installation

Ø 129 (5.1)

3

Ø 39 (1.5) Ø 50 (2.0) L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-006

Dimensions in mm (inch)

FMU42, FMU44 with slip-on flange

F12 78 (3.1)

68 (2.7)

ENDRESS+HAUSER Prosonic M

65 (2.6)

94 (3.7)

78 (3.1) 32 (1.3)

150 (5.9)

65 (2.6)

Ø 129 (5.1)

~86 (~3.4)

T12

ENDRESS+HAUSER Prosonic M

85 (3.3)

162 (6.4)

3.1.2

Ø 129 (5.1)

Abb. 1:

85 (3.3)

Ø 70 (2.8)

~ 145 (5.7)

~ 107 (4.2)

~ 110 (4.3)

FMU 44

~ 85 (3.3)

FMU 42

Ø 98 (3.9) L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-007

Dimensions in mm (inch)

Endress+Hauser

15

Installation

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

3.1.3

FMU42, FMU44 with mounting bracket FMU 42

FMU 44

ENDRESS+HAUSER Prosonic M

ENDRESS+HAUSER Prosonic M

F12/ T12

F12/ T12 M8

75 (3.0)

30 (1.2)

125 (4.9)

30 (1.2)

105 (4.1)

M8

119 (4.7) 119 (4.7)

98 (3.9)

L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-008

Dimensions in mm (inch)

3.1.4

FMU43

A

B

ENDRESS+HAUSER Prosonic M

F12

2 x M8

ER HAUS ESS+ ENDR ic M Proson

~248 (9.8)

Ø 129 (5.1)

78 (3.1)

150 (5.9)

65 (2.6)

~86 (3.4)

75 (3

85 (3.3)

.5) 89 (3 6.2) 158 (

Ø 230 (9.1)

ANSI 4” DN 100 *

.0)

L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-009

Abb. 2:

3.1.5

Dimensions in mm (inch); A: with slip-on flange; B: with mounting bracket

Mounting bracket for FMU42, FMU43 and FMU44 25 (0.98)

120 (4.7)

~123 (4.8)

119 (4.68)

40 (1.6)

40 (1.6)

2 (0.079) 25 (0.98)

11 (0.43) L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-010

Abb. 3:

16

Dimensions in mm (inch)

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

3.1.6

Installation

Flanges for FMU42 and FMU44

A

E

20 (0.79)

D

B

G2” ISO228

C L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-011

Endress+Hauser

suitable for

A

B

C

D

E

number of boreholes

3" 150lbs / DN80 PN16 / 10K 80

150 mm (5,91")

160 mm (6,30")

200 mm (7,87")

19 mm (0,75")

45°

8

4" 150 lbs / DN100 PN16 / 10K 100

175 mm (6,90")

190,5 mm (7,50")

228,6 mm (9,00")

19 mm (0,75")

45°

8

6" 150 lbs / DN150 PN16 / 10 K 150

240 mm (9,45")

241,3 mm (9,50")

285 mm (11,22")

23 mm (0,91")

45°

8

8" 150 lbs

298,5 mm (11,75")

298,5 mm (11,75")

342,9 mm (13,50")

22, 5 mm (0,89")

45°

8

DN200 PN16 / 10 K 200

290 mm (11,42")

295 mm (11,61")

340 mm (13,39")

23 mm (0,91")

30°

12

17

Installation

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

3.2

Installation variants

3.2.1

Installation variants FMU 40, FMU 41 Installation with counter nut

Installation with sleeve

Sealing ring (EPDM) supplied

counter nut (PC) supplied for G 1½” and G 2” instruments

Installation with installation bracket

Installation with adapter flange

ENDRESS+HAUSER Prosonic M

adapter flange

sensor

Sealing ring (EPDM) supplied

nozzle L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-en-002

For installation bracket or adapter flange s. chapter "Accessories".

18

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

3.2.2

Installation

Installation variants FMU42, FMU44 Installation with universal flange

Installation with mounting bracket

ER HAUS ESS+ ENDR nic M Proso

.

-

e.g. Zone 20

Zone 20 L00-FMU42xxxx-17-00-00-en-001

3.2.3

Installation variants FMU 43 Installation with universal slip-on flange (option)

Installation with mounting bracket

ER HAUS ESS+ ENDR ic M Proson

slip-on flange

nozzle

-

e.g.Zone 20

sensor

.

Zone 20 L00-FMU43xxxx-17-00-00-en-001

Endress+Hauser

19

Installation

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

3.3

Installation conditions

3.3.1

Installation conditions for level measurements 2

3

4

7 1

5 1/6D D 6

L

α

r

L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-de-005

• Do not install the sensor in the middle of the tank (3). We recommend leaving a distance between the sensor and the tank wall (1) measuring 1/6 of the tank diameter. • Use a protective cover, in order to protect the device from direct sun or rain (2). • Avoid measurements through the filling curtain (4). • Make sure that equipment (5) such as limit switches, temperature sensors, etc. are not located within the emitting angle α. In particular, symmetrical equipment (6) such as heating coils, baffles etc. can influence measurement. • Align the sensor so that it is vertical to the product surface (7). • Never install two ultrasonic measuring devices in a tank, as the two signals may affect each other. • To estimate the detection range, use the 3 dB emitting angle α. Sensor

α

Lmax

rmax

FMU40

11°

5m

0.48 m

FMU41

11°

8m

0.77 m

FMU42

9°

10 m

0.79 m

FMU43

6°

15 m

0.79 m

FMU44

11 °

20 m

1.93 m

3.3.2

Installation in narrow shafts

In narrow shafts with strong interference echoes, we recommend using an ultrasound guide pipe (e.g. PE or PVC wastewater pipe) with a minimum diameter of 100 mm. Make sure that the pipe is not soiled by accumulated dirt. If necessary, clean the pipe at regular intervals.

ENDRESS+HAUSER Prosonic M

ENDRESS+HAUSER Prosonic M

venting hole

L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-en-010

20

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

3.3.3

Installation

Installation conditions for flow measurements

• Install the Prosonic M at the inflow side, as close above the maximum water level Hmax as possible (take into account the blocking distance BD). • Position the Prosonic M in the middle of the channel or weir. • Align the sensor membrane parallel to the water surface. • Keep to the installation distance of the channel or weir. • You can enter the "Flow to Level" linearisation curve ("Q/h curve") using ToF Tool or manually via the on-site display. Example: Khafagi-Venturi flume

Khafagi - Venturi - flume

empty calibr.

inflow

outflow

BD

direction of flow

Hmax

1 x b0

b0

L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-en-003

Endress+Hauser

21

Installation

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Example: Triangular weir min. 2 Hmax α

Hmax (= full calibr.) min. 2 Hmax

min. 3 H max empty calibr.

BD

L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-en-012

22

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Installation

3.4

Measuring range

3.4.1

Blocking distance, Nozzle mounting

Install the Prosonic M at a height so that the blocking distance BD is not undershot, even at maximum fill level. Use a pipe nozzle if you cannot maintain the blocking distance in any other way. The interior of the nozzle must be smooth and may not contain any edges or welded joints. In particular, there should be no burr on the inside of the tank side nozzle end. Note the specified limits for nozzle diameter and length. To minimise disturbing factors, we recommend an angled socket edge (ideally 45°). FMU 43 FMU 40/41

FMU 42/44

BD SD

E

F L

L

L D

D D L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-en-004

BD: blocking distance; SD: safety distance; E: empty calibration; F: full calibration (span); D: nozzle diameter; L: nozzle length

Maximum nozzle length[mm]

"

Endress+Hauser

Nozzle diameter

FMU40

FMU41

FMU42

DN50/2"

80

DN80/3"

FMU43

FMU44

240

240

250

DN100/4"

300

300

300

300

DN150/6"

400

400

400

300

400

DN200/8"

400

400

400

300

400

DN250/10"

400

400

400

300

400

DN300/12"

400

400

400

300

400

Emitting angle α

11°

11°

9°

6°

11°

Blocking distance [m]

0,25

0,35

0,4

0,6

0,5

Max. range [m] in liquids

5

8

10

15

20

Max. range [m] in solids

2

3,5

5

7

10

Caution! If the blocking distance is undershot, it may cause device malfunction.

23

Installation

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

3.4.2

Safety distance

If the level rises to the safety distance SD, the device switches to warning or alarm status. The size of SD can be set freely in the "Safety distance" (015) function.The "in safety distance" (016) function defines how the device reacts if the level enters the safety distance. There are three options: • Warning: The device outputs an error message but continues measurement. • Alarm: The device outputs an error message. The output signal assumes the value defined in the "Output on alarm" (011) function (MAX, MIN, user-specific value or holds the last value). As soon as the level drops below the safety distance, the device recommences measurement. • Self holding: The device reacts in the same way as for an alarm. However, the alarm condition continues after the level drops below the safety distance. The device only recommences measurement when you cancel the alarm using the "Ackn. alarm" (017) function.

3.4.3

Range

The sensor range is dependent on the measuring conditions. Refer to Technical Information TI 365F/00/en for an estimation. The maximum range is shown in the above diagram (valid for good conditions).

24

Sensor

maximum range

FMU40

5m

FMU41

8m

FMU42

10 m

FMU43

15 m

FMU44

20 m

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

3.5

Installation

Installation hint for FMU 40/41

Screw the Prosonic M at the screw-in piece using an 60 AF spanner. Maximum torque: 20 Nm.

F12 or T12 housing

Caution! Use only the screw-in piece to screw in the Prosonic M

60

AF 60

max torque 20 Nm L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-en-009

3.6

Turn housing

After mounting, the housing can be turned 350° in order to simplify access to the display and the terminal compartment. Proceed as follows to turn the housing to the required position: • Undo the fixing screws (1) • Turn the housing (2) in the required direction • Tighten up the fixing screws (1). Maximum torque 0.5 Nm. • Loctite can be used for securing the screw. F12 housing

T12 housing

2

2

1

1

allen key 4 mm/0.1” max. torque 0.5 Nm

L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-en-013

3.7

Post installation check

After installing the device, carry out the following checks: • Is the device damaged (visual inspection)? • Does the device correspond to the measuring point specifications for process temperature, process pressure, ambient temperature, measuring range etc. • If available: Are the measuring point number and labelling correct (visual inspection)? • Is the measuring device sufficiently protected against precipitation and direct sunlight? • Are the cable glands tightened correctly? • After aligning the housing, check the process seal at the nozzle or flange.

Endress+Hauser

25

Wiring

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

" #

4

Wiring

4.1

Electrical connection

Caution! Before connection please note the following: • The power supply must be identical to the data on the nameplate. • Switch off power supply before connecting up the instrument. • Connect equipotential bonding to transmitter ground terminal before connecting up the instrument (s. section "Potential matching") Warning! When you use the measuring system in hazardous areas, make sure to comply with national standards and the specifications in the safety instructions (XA’s). Make sure you use the specified cable gland.

4.1.1

Wiring in the housing F12

1.

Unscrew housing cover (1).

2.

Remove display (2) if fitted.

3.

Remove cover plate (3) from terminal compartment.

4.

Pull out terminal module (4) slightly using pulling loop.

5.

Insert cable (5) through gland (6).

1

"

2

Caution! If possible, insert the cable from above and let a draining loop in order to avoid intrusion of humidity. 6.

ER US HA S+ ES DR EN

Connect cable screen to the grounding terminal (7) within the terminal compartment.

7.

Make connection according to terminal assignment (see below).

8.

Re-insert terminal module (4).

9.

Tighten cable gland (6).

6

3

5

10. Tighten screws on cover plate (3). 11. Insert display (2) if fitted.

4

7

12. Screw on housing cover (1). 13. Switch on power supply. 1 2 3 4

L00-FMU4xxxx-04-00-00-yy-008

26

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Wiring

4.1.2

Wiring in the housing T12

1.

Unscrew the cover (1) of the separate connection room.

2.

Insert cable (2) through gland (3).

1

" Caution! If possible, insert the cable from above and let a draining loop in order to avoid intrusion of humidity. 3.

Connect cable screen to the grounding terminal (4) within the connection room.

4.

Make connection according to the terminal assignment (see below).

5.

Tighten cable gland (3).

6.

Screw on housing cover (1).

7.

Switch on power supply.

3

2 4

1 2 3 4

L00-FMU4xxxx-04-00-00-yy-009

4.1.3

Terminal assignment

1 2 3 4 – +

plant ground

L00-FMxxxxxx-04-00-00-en-013

Endress+Hauser

27

Wiring

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

4.2

Wiring with Foundation Fieldbus plug

1.

Insert plug (1) into bushing (2).

2.

Screw firmly.

3.

Ground instrument according to the desired safety concept.

2

1

L00-FMU4xxxx-04-00-00-yy-011

4.2.1

Pin assignment of the 7/8" plug connector (FOUNDATION Fieldbus plug)

1

– 3

2

+ 4

nc

Pin

Meaning

1

FF -

2

FF +

3

not connected

4

ground

L00-FMxxxxxx-04-00-00-yy-017

4.3

Cable specifications Foundation Fieldbus

Twisted, shielded pairs must be used. The cable specifications can be taken from the FF specification or IEC 61158-2. The following have been found suitable: Non-Ex-area: • Siemens 6XV1 830-5BH10, • Belden 3076F, • Kerpen CEL-PE/OSCR/PVC/FRLA FB-02YS(ST)YFL. Ex-area: • Siemens 6XV1 830-5AH10, • Belden 3076F, • Kerpen CEL-PE/OSCR/PVC/FRLA FB-02YS(ST)YFL.

4.4

Supply voltage

The following values are the voltages across the terminals directly at the instrument: Type

minimum terminal voltage

maximum terminal voltage

standard

9V

32 V

EEx ia (FISCO model

9V

17,5 V

EEx ia (Entity concept)

9V

24 V

The current consumption is approx. 15 mA for the range of voltages given above.

28

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

4.5

Wiring

Recommended connection

1

1

L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-yy-014

1: external ground terminal of the transmitter

For maximum EMC protection please observe the following points: • As the metal housing of the Prosonic M is isolated from the tank by the plastic sensor, a lowimpedance connection between the housing and tank/bracket/flange should be installed in order to ensure electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). For optimum EMC the connection should be as short as possible. Ideally, a ground strap should be used. • The continuity of the cable screening between tapping points must be ensured. • If potential equalisation is present between the individual grounding points, ground the screening at each cable end or connect it to the device housing (as short as possible). • If there are large differences in potential between grounding points, the grounding should run via a capacitor that is suitable for high frequency use (e.g. ceramic 10 nF/250 V&).

"

Caution! Applications, which are subject to the explosion prevention, permit only under special conditions the repeated grounding of the protective screen , see to EN 60 079-14..

4.6

Post connection check

After wiring the device, carry out the following checks: • Are the terminals correctly assigned? • Is the cable gland tight? • If available: Is the Foundation Fieldbus connector screwed tight? • Is the housing cover fully screwed on? • If power supply available: Does a display appear on the display module?

Endress+Hauser

29

Operation

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

5

Operation

This chapter gives an overview of the different operating options for the device. The different methods of parameter access are described and the preconditions for each method are stated. The meaning of the parameters is not described in this chapter. Instead, refer to: • Chapter 6: "Commissioning" • Operating Instructions BA240F: "Prosonic M - Description of Instrument Functions" This chapter contains the following sections: • 5.1 Operating options • 5.2 Operation with the display and operating module VU331 • 5.3 Operation with an Endress+Hauser operating software • 5.4 Operation with a FOUNDATION Fieldbus configuration software • 5.5 Operation with the handheld terminal DXR375/FC375

5.1

Operating options ControlCare DeltaV ...

FieldCommunicator 375/ FC375 Ethernet

dsdmdm df das. asdas fa asas la.

DELTABAR: * * * * * * * * ONLINE 1 QUICK SETUP 2 OPERATING MENU 3 PV 4 SV

HELP

SPS PLC API

Page Up

Bksp

6 Delete

Page On

#%&

ABC

3

Paste

Hot Key

JKL

MNO

5

4

6

Insert

+ Hot Key

TUV

W XY Z

8

7

DEF

2

1 Copy GHI

PQRS

9

,()‘

_

+*/

.

0

-

375 FIELD COMMUNICATOR

FF link

power supply power conditioner

352 mbar 0 °C

SAVE

9

FOUNDATION Fieldbus

T

T

Weitere Funktionen (Ventile etc.)

Anzeige- und Bedienmodul VU331 ENDRESS + HAUSER

%

–

+

E

Levelflex M Micropilot M

Prosonic M

FieldCare FXA193/291

L00-FMxxxxxx-14-00-06-de-011

30

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

5.1.1

Operation

On-site operation

Options for on-site operation • Display and operating module VU331 • Endress+Hauser operating software ("ToF Tool - FieldTool Package" or "FieldCare") Parameter access by on-site operation The following parameters can be accessed by on-site operation: • Parameters of the device specific blocks (Sensor Block, Diagnostic Block, Display Block) • Endress+Hauser service parameters • in the Resource Block: "Device Tag", "Device ID", "Device Revision", "DD Revision" (read only)

Sensorblock Diagnoseblock Display-Block

Resource Block

Arithmetik-Block

AI-Block 1

Input-Selector-Block

AI-Block 2

Signal-Charact.-Block

PID Block

Integrator-Block

Endress+Hauser Service-Parameter L00-FMU4XXXX-02-00-00-YY-005

The highlighted parameters can be edited by on-site operation.

5.1.2

Remote operation

Options for remote operation • FOUNDATION Fieldbus configuration tool (e.g. DeltaV or ControlCare) • Handheld terminal DXR375/FC375 Parameter access by remote operation The following parameters can be accessed by remote operation: • Parameters of the device specific blocks (Sensor Block, Diagnostic Block, Display Block) • Parameters of the FOUNDATION Fieldbus function blocks

Sensorblock Diagnoseblock Display-Block

Resource Block

Arithmetik-Block

AI-Block 1

Input-Selector-Block

AI-Block 2

Signal-Charact.-Block

PID Block

Integrator-Block

Endress+Hauser Service-Parameter L00-FMU4XXXX-02-00-00-YY-006

The highlighted parameters can be edited by remote operation.

Endress+Hauser

31

Operation

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

5.2

Operation with the display and operating module VU331

The LCD module VU 331 for display and operation is located beneath the housing cover. The measured value is legible through the glass in the cover. Open the cover to operate the device. LCD (liquid crystal display)

ENDR MICR ESS+ OPIL HAUS OT : II ER

Order Code: Ser.-No.

65

T

A >70°C

: t >85°C

Made in Germany

IP

Maulburg

Messbe Measuri reich ng range U 16...36 max. 4...20 20 m mA V DC

Symbols ENDRESS + HAUSER

–

+

E

3 keys snap-fit

L00-FMxxxxxx-07-00-00-en-001

5.2.1

Display appearance position in menu label

measured value display

*

symbol

selection list

value

bargraph

unit

group selection

position in menu label

help texts

envelope curve

function with free parameter

envelope curve display

L00-FMxxxxxx-07-00-00-en-002

In the measured value display, the bargraph corresponds to the output. The bargraph is segmented in 10 bars. Each completely filled bar represents a change of 10% of the adjusted span.

32

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Operation

5.2.2

Display symbols

The following table describes the symbols that appear on the liquid crystal display: Sybmol

Meaning ALARM_SYMBOL This alarm symbol appears when the instrument is in an alarm state. If the symbol flashes, this indicates a warning. LOCK_SYMBOL This lock symbol appears when the instrument is locked,i.e. if no input is possible. COM_SYMBOL This communication symbol appears when a data transmission via e.g. HART, PROFIBUS PA or FOUNDATION Fieldbus is in progress. SIMULATION_SWITCH_ENABLE This communication symbol appears when simulation in FOUNDATION Fieldbus is enabled via the DIP switch.

5.2.3

Function of the keys

Key(s)

Meaning

O or V

Navigate upwards in the selection list Edit numeric value within a function

S or W

Navigate downwards in the selection list Edit numeric value within a function

X or Z F O and F or S and F O and S and F

Endress+Hauser

Navigate to the left within a function group

Navigate to the right within a function group, confirmation.

Contrast settings of the LCD

Hardware lock / unlock After a hardware lock, an operation of the instrument via display or communication is not possible! The hardware can only be unlocked via the display. An unlock parameter must be entered to do so.

33

Operation

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

5.2.4

The operating menu

Function codes For easy orientation within the function menus, for each function a position is shown on the display.

005 Function group

Function L00-FMU4xxxx-07-00-00-en-001

The first two digits identify the function group: • basic setup 00 • safety settings 01 • linearisation 04 ... The third digit numbers the individual functions within the function group: → • tank shape 002 • medium property 003 • process cond. 004 ... Hereafter the position is always given in brackets (e.g. "tank shape" (002)) after the described function. • basic setup

34

00

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Operation

Navigation within the menu

ENDRESS + HAUSER

–

+

2x

F O

X

E

X

basic setup

F

temperature linearisation

S

...

S

X

tank shape

O

safety settings

X

>3 s

F

dome ceiling horizontal cyl

medium property

O

Group Selection

liquid solid4mm

sphere

Return to

unknown

bypass flat ceiling

...

S

no ceiling ... L00-FMU4xxxx-19-00-00-en-018

1.

Change from Measured Value Display to Group Selection by pressing F.

2.

Press S or O to select the required Function Group and confirm by pressing F. The active selection is marked by a ¸ in front of the menu text.

3.

Activate Edit mode with O or S . Selection menus a. Select the required Parameter in selected function with S oder O . b. F confirms selection; ¸ appears in front of the selected parameter. c. F confirms the edited value; system quits edit mode. d. O and S (= Q) interrupts selection; system quits edit mode. Typing in numerals and text a. Press O or S to edit the first character of the numeral / text. b. F positions the cursor at the next character; continue with a. until you have completed your input. c. If a ↵ symbol appears at the cursor, press F to accept the value entered; system quits edit mode. d. If a ← symbol appears at the cursor, press F to return to the previous character (e.g. for correction of entries). e. O and S (= Q) interrupts selection; system quits edit mode.

Endress+Hauser

4.

Press F to select the next function.

5.

Press O and S (= Q) once; return to previous function. Press O and S (= Q) twice; return to Group Selection.

6.

Press O and S (= Q) to return to Measured value display.

35

Operation

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

5.3

Operation with an Endress+Hauser operating program

5.3.1

ToF Tool – Fieldtool Package

The ToF Tool is a graphic and menu-guided operating program for measuring devices from Endress+Hauser. It is used for the commissioning, data storage, signal analysis and documentation of the devices. The following operating systems are supported: WinNT4.0, Win2000 and Windows XP. You can set the parameters of the device specific blocks via the ToF Tool. The ToF Tool supports the following functions: • Configuration of transmitters in online operation • Singal analysis via envelope curve • Tank linearisation • Loading and saving device data (upload/download) • Documentation of the measuring point Connection options: • via the FXA193/FXA291 service interface

!

36

Note! You can use the ToF Tool to configure the metrological parameters for devices with "FOUNDATION Fieldbus signal". You need an FF configuration program to be able to configure all the FF-specific parameters and to integrate the device into a FF network (see sections 5.1.1 and 5.1.2).

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

5.3.2

Operation

FieldCare

FieldCare is an Endress+Hauser asset management tool based on FDT technology. With FieldCare, you can configure all Endress+Hauser devices as well as devices from other manufacturers that support the FDT standard. The following operating systems are supported: WinNT4.0, Win2000 and Windows XP. Functions FieldCare supports the following functions: • Configuration of transmitters in online operation • Singal analysis via envelope curve • Tank linearisation • Loading and saving device data (upload/download) • Documentation of the measuring point Connection with FXA193 (RS232C) ToF Tool-Fieldtool Package FieldCare

FXA193 RS232C

L00-FMxxxxxx-04-00-00-yy-023

For details refer to Technical Information TI063D (FXA193).

Connection with FXA291 (USB) ToF Tool-Fieldtool Package FieldCare

ToF Adapter FXA291

Commubox FXA291

USB

L00-FMxxxxxx-04-00-00-yy-024

For details refer to: Technical Information TI405C (Commubox FXA291) Operating Instructions KA271 (ToF Adapter FXA291)

Endress+Hauser

37

Operation

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Menu-guided commissioning

MicropilotM-en-305

Signal analysis via envelope curve

MicropilotM-en-306

38

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Operation

Tank linearisation

MicropilotM-en-307

Endress+Hauser

39

Operation

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

5.4

Operation with a FOUNDATION Fieldbus configuration program

5.4.1

FOUNDATION Fieldbus configuration programs

The user can obtain special configuration and operating programs offered by different manufacturers for use in configuration. These can be used for configuring both the FOUNDATION Fieldbus functions and all the device-specific parameters. The predefined function blocks allow uniform access to all the network and fieldbus device data.

5.4.2

Device Description files

File names You will need the following files for commissioning and network configuration: • Device Description files: *.sym, *.ffo These files describe the structure of the blocks and their parameters. They offer guided setups with the help of menus and methods. • Capability file: *.cff This file enables offline configuration and describes the device capability in terms of communication stack and function blocks. The file names consist of the following parts: • Device Revision (0C3)1) • DD Revision (0C4)1 (use the most current version) • CFF Revision (use the most current version) Example: • Device Revision (0C3) = 03 • DD Revision (0C4) = 01 • CFF Revision = 02 • -> files to be used: "0301.sym", "0301.ffo", "030102.cff" Directory structure The files are normally stored in the following directory structure: • /452B48/1011/*.sym *.ffo *.cff The directory names have the following meaning: • 452B48: manufacturer ID of Endress+Hauser • 1011: device ID of Prosonic M Source of supply

1)

40

Host System

Source of supply for the Device Description and Network Configuration files

ABB (Field Controller 800) Allen Bradley (Control Logix) Endress+Hauser (ControlCare) Honeywell (Experion PKS) Invensys SMAR (System 302)

• www.endress.de (-> Download -> Media type = "Software", "Device Drivers") • CD-ROM (Endress+Hauser order code: 56003896) • www.fieldbus.org

Emerson (Delta V)

• www.easydeltav.com

"Device Revision" (0C3) and "DD Revision" (0C4) can be obtained through the display and operating module VU331. For details refer to section 5.2: "Operation with the display and operating module VU331"

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Operation

Host System

Source of supply for the Device Description and Network Configuration files

Yokogawa (CENTUM CS 3000)

• www.yokogawa.com

5.4.3

Representation of parameters

A FOUNDATION Fieldbus configuration tool offers two types of parameter representation: • Representation by parameter name Examples: "PAROPERATIONCODE", "PARRESET" • Representation by parameter label (identical to the labels on the display module VU331 and in an Endress+Hauser operation tool) Examples: "unlock parameter", "reset"

Endress+Hauser

41

Operation

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

5.5

Operation with the handheld terminal DXR375/FC375

5.5.1

Connection

The handheld terminal is directly connected to the FOUNDATION Fieldbus communication line. An additonal communication resistor is not required.

5.5.2

Device Descriptions

Make sure you have loaded the valid Device Description files (DDs). DDs can be downloaded from the internet at "www.fieldcommunicator.com". The DDs can also be updated by the update functionality of the DXR375/FC375.

5.5.3

User interface

The device parameters are arranged in blocks. The handheld terminal DXR375/FC375 uses this block structure to access the parameters. You can navigate within the structure by the arrow keys and the "Enter" key. Alternatively, you can use the touch-screen functionality of the handheld terminal for navigation. (Double-click on a name opens the respective block or parameter).

42

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

5.5.4

Operation

Example

9 LAS Fieldbus Live Device List Number of Devices found = 1 Tag

basic setup tank shape: dome ceiling

dsdmdm df das. asdas fa asas la.

Address

E+H_PROSONIC_M_XXXXXXX 375 Field Communicator

247 252

dome ceiling horizontal cyl bypass stilling well flat ceiling sphere no ceiling NEXT

HELP

Page Dn

Delete

9 LAS Prosonic M E+H_PROSONIC_M_XXXXXX Endress+Hauser Device Revision 4 Block Type Actual Mode Block Tag dsdmdm df das. asdas fa asas la.

RESOURCE... SENSOR_B... DIAGNOSTI... DISPLAY_B... ANALOG_IN... ANALOG_IN...

CANCEL

RES_BL... Custom Custom Custom AI AI

Auto OOS OOS OOS OOS OOS

basic setup tank shape: dome ceiling dome ceiling horizontal cyl bypass stilling well flat ceiling sphere no ceiling NEXT

CANCEL

HELP

Page Dn

9 LAS Prosonic M E+H_PROSONIC_M_XXXXXX Endress+Hauser Device Revision 4 Block Tag Block Type Actual Mode dsdmdm df das. asdas fa asas la.

RESOURCE... SENSOR_B... DIAGNOSTI... DISPLAY_B... ANALOG_IN... ANALOG_IN...

RES_BL... Custom Custom Custom AI AI

Auto OOS OOS OOS OOS OOS

basic setup medium property: liquid unknown liquid solid4mm

NEXT

CANCEL

HELP

Delete

9 LAS Prosonic M E+H_PROSONIC_M_XXXXXX SENSOR_BLOCK_XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Label Value Units dsdmdm df das. asdas fa asas la.

Process Status Other All Calibration Met...

Page Dn

9 LAS Prosonic M E+H_PROSONIC_M_XXXXXX SENSOR_BLOCK_XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Label Value Units dsdmdm df das. asdas fa asas la.

basic setup method completed successfully

Process Status Other All Calibration Met... FINISH CANCEL

HELP

Delete

9 LAS Prosonic M E+H_PROSONIC_M_XXXXXX SENSOR_BLOCK_XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Label Value Units dsdmdm df das. asdas fa asas la.

basic setup safety settings ackn. alarm temperature linearisation extended calibr.

Delete

L00-FMU4xxxx-07-00-00-yy-010

Endress+Hauser

43

Commissioning

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

6

Commissioning

This chapter consists of the following sections: • 6.1 Function check • 6.2 Unlocking the device • 6.3 Parameter reset • 6.4 Commissioning with display and operating module VU331 • 6.5 Commissioning with Endress+Hauser operating software • 6.6 Commissioning with FOUNDATION Fieldbus configuration tool • 6.7 Commissioning with handheld terminal DXR375/FC375

6.1

Function check

Make sure that all final checks have been completed before you start up your measuring point: • Checklist “Post installation check” (see page → ä 25). • Checklist “Post connection check” (see page → ä 29).

6.2

Unlocking the device

Before commissioning, make sure that the device is not locked against parameter changes. On delivery, the device is unlocked. In other cases, however, it may have been locked in one of the following ways:

6.2.1

DIP switch (under the housing cover)

Locking and unlocking

END RES

Messbe Measur reich ing

II

R

IP T

Maulburg

range U 16...36 max. 4...20 20 m mAV DC

65

A >70°C

: t >85°C

Made in Germany

Order MICR S+HA Code: OPIL Ser.-No OT USE .:

default settings: write protection OFF simulation OFF

on off SIM WP

write protection on off SIM WP simulation L00-FMxxxxxx-19-00-00-en-002

WP = on: parametrization locked WP = off: parametrization unlocked SIM = on: simulation possible in Analog Input Block by configuration tool SIM = off: simulation not possible in Analog Input Block by configuration tool

Parameters affected Locking by the DIP switch affects all parameters.

44

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

6.2.2

Commissioning

Key combination (display and operating module VU331)

Locking Press S, O and F simultaneously. Unlocking If you try to change a parameter, the following appears:

L00-fmrxf0a4-20-00-00-de-001

Press S, O and F simultaneously. The "unlock parameter" (0A4) function appears. Enter "2457". Now parameters can be changed. Parameters affected Locking by the key combination affects the following parameters: • Parameters of the device specific blocks (Sensor Block, Diagnostic Block, Display Block) • Endress+Hauser service parameters

6.2.3

Locking parameter

Locking Enter a number other than "2457" into the "unlock parameter" (0A4) function. (FOUNDATION Fieldbus: Diagnsotic Block, parameter PAROPERATIONMODE) Unlocking Enter "2457" into the "unlock parameter" (0A4) function. (FOUNDATION Fieldbus: Diagnostic Block, parameter PAROPERATIONMODE) Parameters affected Locking by the locking parameter affects the following parameters: • Parameters of the device specific blocks (Sensor Block, Diagnostic Block, Display Block) • Endress+Hauser service parameters

Endress+Hauser

45

Commissioning

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

6.3

Resetting the device

It is advisable to reset the device parameters before the commissioning if you want to use a device with an unknown history.

6.3.1

Resetting the parameters of the FOUNDATION Fieldbus function blocks

Parameters affected • all parameters of the FOUNDATION Fieldbus function blocks

Sensorblock Diagnoseblock Display-Block

Resource Block

Arithmetik-Block

AI-Block 1

Input-Selector-Block

AI-Block 2

Signal-Charact.-Block

PID Block

Integrator-Block

Endress+Hauser Service-Parameter L00-FMU4XXXX-02-00-00-YY-007

Performing the reset Resource Block, parameter RESTART; select the option "defaults".

6.3.2

" !

Resetting the parameters of the transducer blocks

Caution! A reset may lead to impairment of the measurement. As a rule, a basic calibration is required after a reset. Note! The default values of each parameter are shown in bold in the menu overview in the appendix. In order to carry out the reset, enter the number "33333" in the "reset" (0A3) function in the "diagnostics" (0A) function group. (FOUNDATION Fieldbus: Diagnostic Block, Parameter PARRESET (reset))

Parameters affected • all parameters of the device specific blocks (Sensor Block, Diagnostic Block, Display Block)

Sensorblock Diagnoseblock Display-Block

Resource Block

Arithmetik-Block

AI-Block 1

Input-Selector-Block

AI-Block 2

Signal-Charact.-Block

PID Block

Integrator-Block

Endress+Hauser Service-Parameter L00-FMU4XXXX-02-00-00-YY-008

Effects of the reset • All customer parameters are reset to their default values. • Customer interference echo suppression is not deleted.

46

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Commissioning

• Linearisation is switched to "linear", but the table values are kept. The table can be switched back on in the "linearisation" (04) function group in the "linearisation" (041) function. (FOUNDATION Fieldbus: Sensor Block, Parameter PARLINEARISATION (linearisation)) Performing the reset "diagnostics" (0A) function group, "reset" (0A3) function; enter "33333" (FOUNDATION Fieldbus: Diagnostic Block, parameter PARRESET)

6.3.3

Resetting an interference echo suppression (tank map)

It is always adivable to reset the interference echo suppression (tank mapping) when: • a device with an unknown history is used • an incorrect suppression was input Resetting the tank map with the VU331 1.

In the "extended calibr." (05) function group select the "selection" (050) function.

2.

Select "extended map."

3.

Go to the "cust. tank map" (055) function and select the required option: – "reset": deletes the existing tank map. – "inactive": deactivates the tank map but does not delete it. It can be re-activated when required. – "active": activates the tank map.

Resetting the tank map with an Endress+Hauser operating program 1.

In the function group "extended calibr." select the "cust. tank map" (055) function.

2.

Select the required option ("reset", "inactive" or "active")

Resetting the tank map with a FOUNDATION Fieldbus configuration tool

Endress+Hauser

1.

In the Sensor Block select the parameter PARCUSTTANKMAP (cust tank map).

2.

Select the required option ("reset", "inactive" or "active").

47

Commissioning

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

6.4

Commissioning by the display and operatig module VU331

6.4.1

Power up instrument

After switching on the supply voltage, the instrument is first initialised.

L00-fmp-fxxx-20-00-00-en-003

Then the following appear for approximately five seconds: • Device type • Software version • Type of digital communication signal

L00-fmuxfxxx-20-00-00-de-002

Press F to exit this display. On first power-up, you are requested to select the language for the display texts.

L00-fmrxf092-20-00-00-en-001

Then you are requested to select the unit of length for your measurements.

L00-fmrxf0c5-20-00-00-en-001

A measured value is displayed. This is NOT equivalent to the level in your tank. Firstly carry out a basic calibration. L00-fmrxf000-20-00-00-en-001

Press F to switch to the group selection. Press F again to start the basic calibration.

L00-fmrxfg00-20-00-00-en-001

The "Basic setup" (00) function group lists all the functions which are required for a standard measurement task to commission the Prosonic M. When you have completed your input for a function, the next function appears automatically. In this way, you are guided through the complete calibration.

48

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

6.4.2

Commissioning

Application parameters

Function "tank shape" (002) In this function, select one of the following options:

dome ceiling

horizontal cyl

bypass

ENDRESS+HAUSER Prosonic M

no ceiling e.g. dumps, open levels chanels, weirs

sphere

stilling well (ultrasonic guide pipe)

flat ceiling

L00-FMU4xxxx-14-00-06-en-001

Function "medium property" (003) Set the medium type in this function. You have the following options: • unknown (e.g. pasty media such as greases, creams, gels etc.) • liquid • solid, grain size < 4mm (fine) • solid, grain size > 4mm (coarse)

Endress+Hauser

49

Commissioning

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Function "process conditions" (004) For this function, you have the following options: standard liquids

calm surface

turb. surface

For all fluid applications which do not fit in any of the following groups.

Storage tanks with immersion tube or bottom filling

Storage / accumulation tanks with uneven surface due to free filling, mixing nozzles or small bottom stirrers

L00-FMU4xxxx-14-00-00-xx-001

The filters and output damping are set to average values.

add. agitator Moving surfaces (poss. with vortex formation) due to agitators

L00-FMU4xxxx-14-00-00-xx-003

Special filters for stabilising the input signal are set to large values. -> Stable measured value -> Medium reaction time

50

The averaging filters and output damping are set to large values. -> Stable measured value -> Accurate measurement -> Slow reaction time

fast change Rapid level change, particularly in small tanks

L00-FMU4xxxx-14-00-00-xx-004

The averaging filters are set to small values. -> Rapid reaction time -> Possibly unstable measured value

L00-FMU4xxxx-14-00-00-xx-002

Special filters for stabilising the input signal are activated. -> Stable measured value -> Medium reaction time

standard solid For all bulk solids applications which do not fit in any of the following groups.

L00-FMU4xxxx-14-00-00-xx-006

The filter and output damping are set to average values.

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Commissioning

solid dusty Dusty bulk solids

conveyor belt Bulk solids with rapid level change

Test: no filter All the filters can be switched off for purposes of service and diagnosis.

ENDRESS+HAUSER Prosonic M

L00-FMU4xxxx-14-00-00-xx-007

The filters are set to detect even relatively weak signals.

Endress+Hauser

L00-FMU4xxxx-14-00-00-xx-005

The averaging filters are set to small values. -> Rapid reaction time Possibly unstable measured value

All filters off

51

Commissioning

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

6.4.3

Empty and full calibration

BD SD

20 mA 100% D E F

L

4 mA 0% L00-FMU4xxxx-19-00-00-yy-019

Function "empty calibration" (005) In this function, enter the distance E from the sensor membrane to the minimum level (zero point).

"

Caution! With dished boiler heads or conical outflows, the zero point should not be deeper than the point at which the ultrasonic wave impinges on the tank bottom. Function "blocking distance" (059) In this function the blocking distance (BD) of the sensor is displayed.

" !

Caution! When entering the full calibration (span), please take into account, that the maximum level may not project into the blocking distance (BD) Note! After basic calibration, enter a safety distance (SD) in the "safety distance" (015) function. If the level is within this safety distance, the Prosonic M signals a warning or an alarm, depending on your selection in the "in safety distance" (016) function. Function "full calibration" (006) In this function, enter the span F, i.e. the distance from the minimum level to the maximum level.

52

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

6.4.4

Commissioning

Interference echo suppression (tank mapping)

Function "dist./measured value" (008) In the "dist./meas.value" (008) function, the measured distance D from the sensor membrane to the product surface is displayed together with level L. Check these values. Function "check distance" (051) The mapping is initialized by this function.

L00-FMR2xxxx-14-00-06-en-010

Select • "distance=ok" if the correct distance is displayed. Any echoes closer to the sensor will be suppressed by the following interference echo suppression. • "dist. too small" if the displayed distance is too small. In this case, the signal comes from an interference echo which will be suppressed. • "dist. too big" if the displayed distance is too large. This error cannot be cancelled by suppressing the interference echo. This means that the following two functions are skipped. Check the application parameters "tank shape" (002), "medium proerty" (003) and "process cond." (004) and the "empty calibr."(005) in the "basic setup" (00) function group. • "dist. unknown" if you do not know the actual distance. This means that the following two functions are skipped. • "manual" if you want to specify the suppression area yourself in the following function. Function "range of mapping" (052) The suggested suppression area is displayed in this function. The reference point is always the sensor membrane. You can still edit the value. With manual suppression, the default value is 0 m.

"

Endress+Hauser

Caution! The suppression range must end 0.5 m in front of the echo of the actual level. With an empty tank, do not enter E but E – 0.5 m.

53

Commissioning

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Function "start mapping" (053) You have the following options for this function: • off: Nothing is suppressed. • on: Starts suppression.

!

Note! If a mapping already exists, it will be overwritten up to the distance specified in the "range of mapping" (052) function. Beyond this distance the existing mapping remains unchanged. Function dist./measured value (008) After suppression, the measured distance D from the sensor membrane to the product surface is displayed together with the level. Check that the values correspond to the actual level and/or the actual distance. The following cases may occur: • Distance correct – Level correct -> End of basic calibration • Distance incorrect – Level incorrect -> An additional interference echo suppression must be carried out. Go back to the "check distance" (051) function. • Distance correct – Level incorrect -> Check the value of the "empty calibr." (005) function. Rücksprung zur Gruppenauswahl Nach der Störechoausblendung ist der Grundabgleich beendet und das Gerät springt automatisch in die Gruppenauswahl zurück.

54

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Commissioning

6.4.5

Envelope curve

After the basic setup, an evaluation of the measurement with the aid of the envelope curve ("envelope curve" (0E) function group) is recommended. Funxtion "plot settings" (0E1) In this function, select whether you want to display • just the envelope curve • The envelope curve and the echo evaluation line FAC • The envelope curve and interference echo suppression (map)

!

Note! The FAC and the interference echo suppression (map) are explained in BA 240F "Prosonic M Description of Instrument Functions" Function "recording curve" (0E2) In this function, specify whether you want to display • an individual envelope curve • The current envelope curve, with cyclical refreshment. Function "envelope curve display" (0E3) The envelope curve is displayed in this function. You can use it to obtain the following information:

full calibr.

quality of evaluated echo

evaluated echo is marked

empty calibr.

envelope curve only

minimum distance of the plot

map

distance of evaluated echo

interference echo

maximum distance of the plot

level echo

envelope curve and interference echo suppression (map)

L00-FMU4xxxx-07-00-00-en-003

Check that the following conditions are fulfilled: • The echo quality at the end of measuring range should be at least 10dB. • There should be practically no interference echoes in front of the level signal. • If interference echoes cannot be avoided, they must be below the suppression curve.

!

Endress+Hauser

Note! If the cyclical envelope curve display is still active on the display, the measured value is updated at a slower cycle time. We therefore advise you to exit the envelope curve display after optimising the measuring point. To do this, press F. (The instrument does not leave the envelope curve display automatically.)

55

Commissioning

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Navigation in the envelope curve display Using navigation, the envelope curve can be scaled horizontally and vertically and shifted to the left or the right. The active navigation mode is indicated by a symbol in the top left hand corner of the display. Horizontal Zoom mode: - horizontal zoom in

OE3

- horizontal zoom out Move mode: - moved to the left - moved to the right Vertical Zoom mode:

…

- vertical zoom (4 steps) L00-FMxxxxxx-07-00-00-en-004

Horizontal Zoom mode Firstly, go into the envelope curve display. Then press O or S to switch to the envelope curve navigation. You are then in Horizontal Zoom mode. Either or is displayed. • O increases the horizontal scale. • S reduces the horizontal scale.

S

O L00-FMxxxxxx-07-00-00-yy-007

Move mode Then press F to switch to Move mode. Either • O shifts the curve to the right. • S shifts the curve to the left.

or

S

O

is displayed.

L00-FMxxxxxx-07-00-00-yy-008

Vertical Zoom mode Press F once more to switch to Vertical Zoom mode. options. • O increases the vertical scale. • S reduces the vertical scale. The display icon shows the current zoom factor (

S

is displayed. You now have the following

to

).

O L00-FMxxxxxx-07-00-00-yy-009

56

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Commissioning

Exiting the navigation • Press F again to run through the different modes of the envelope curve navigation. • Press O and S to exit the navigation. The set increases and shifts are retained. Only when you reactivate the "recording curve" (0E2) function the display settings return to their standard values.

Endress+Hauser

57

Commissioning

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

6.5

Basic Setup with the Endress+Hauser operating program

To carry out the basic setup with the operating program, proceed as follows: • Start the operating program and establish a connection.2) • Select the "basic setup" function group in the navigation window. The following display appears on the screen: Basic Setup step 1/4: • measured value

ProsonicM-en-301

• The "Next" button moves you to the next screen display:

!

2)

58

Note! Each parameter that is changed must be confirmed with the RETURN key!

If the connection can not be established, make sure that you use the latest versin of the operating program.

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Commissioning

Basic Setup step 2/4: • Enter the application parameters: – tank shape – medium property – process cond.

ProsonicM-en-412

Basic Setup step 3/4: If "dome ceiling", "horizontal cyl", "..." is selected in the "tank shape" function, the following display appears on the screen: • empty calibr. • full calibr.

ProsonicM-en-303

Endress+Hauser

59

Commissioning

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Basic Setup step 4/4: • This step starts the tank mapping • The measured distance and the current measured value are always displayed in the header

ProsonicM-en-304

6.5.1

Signal analysis via envelope curve

After the basic setup, an evaluation of the measurement using the envelope curve is recommended.

MicropilotM-en-306

60

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

6.5.2

Commissioning

User-specific applications (operation)

For details of setting the parameters of user-specific applications, see separate documentation BA240F/00/en "Prosonic M - Description of Instrument Functions" on the enclosed CD-ROM.

Endress+Hauser

61

Commissioning

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

6.6

!

Commissioning with a FOUNDATION Fieldbus configuration tool

Note! For commissioning of the device with a FOUNDATION Fieldbus configuration tool you need to know the DEVICE_ID, which consists of the following parts: Device_ID = 452B481011-XXXXXXXX whereby: 452B48 ID code for Endress+Hauser 1011 ID code for Prosonic M XXXXXXXX Device serial number, as printed on the nameplate

6.6.1

Fist setup

1.

Open the configuration tool and load the Device Descriptions (*.ffo, *.sym and - if required by the tool - *.cff). Ensure you use the correct files (see chapter 5.4).

2.

The first time it is connected, the device reports as follows:

NI-FBUS-FMU4x-en-001

3.

62

Identify the device using the DEVICE_ID and assign the desired field device tag name (PD_TAG). Factory setting: PD_TAG = E+H_PROSONIC_M_XXXXXXXX

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Commissioning

6.6.2

Parametrization of the Resource Block (Start Index: 400)

1.

Enter the desired block name (optional). Factory setting: RESOURCE_XXXXXXXX

2.

Opern the Resource Block

3.

On delivery, write protection is disabled so that you can access the write parameters via FOUNDATION Fieldbus. Check this status by the parameter WRITE_LOCK: – Write protectin activated: WRITE_LOCK = LOCKED – Write protection deactivated: WRITE_LOCK = NOT LOCKED Deactivate the write protection if necessary, see page 44.

4.

Set the operating mode to AUTO in the parameter group MODE_BLK (parameter TARGET).

6.6.3

Parametrization of the Sensor Block (Start Index: 2000)

1.

Enter the desired block name (optional) Factory setting: SENSOR_XXXXXXXX

2.

Open the Sensor Block. The following display appears:

NI-FBUS-FMU4x-en-002

!

Hinweis! There are two possibilities to edit the parameters of the block: • A parameter from the list can be opened for editing by a double click. • You can open one of the FOUNDATION Fieldbus methods. Each method guides you automatically through a number of parameters which are required for a specific configuration task. The following sections describe the parametrization by the "basic setup" method. 3.

Endress+Hauser

Open the FOUNDATION Fieldbus method "basic setup":

63

Commissioning

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

NI-FBUS-FMU4x-en-003

4.

The method contains the following parameters3): a. Application parameters (see section 6.4.2) – PARTANKSHAPE (tank shape) – PARMEDIUMCONDITION (medium property) – PARPROCESSCONDITION (process condition) b. Empty and full calibration (see section 6.4.3) – PAREMPTYCALIBRATION (empty calibration) – PARFULlCALIBRATION (full calibration) c. Interference echo suppression (see section 6.4.4) – PARCHECKDISTANCE (check distance) – PARSUPPRESSIONDISTANCE (range of mapping) – PARSTARTMAPPINGRECORD (start maping) – PARPRESMAPRANGE (pres. map. dist.) – PARCUSTTANKMAP (cust. tank map)

3)

64

5.

Set the operating mode to AUTO in the parameter group MODE_BLK (parameter TARGET). Otherwise the measured value can not be processed correctly by the connected Analog Input Block.

6.

If measuring errors occur or if the measuring value seems unreliable, it is advisable to check the quality of the measurement by the envelope curve display. This can be done in two different ways: – by the display and operating module VU331 (see section 6.4.5) – by an Endress+Hauser operating program (see section 6.5.1)

In the FOUNDATION Fieldbus configuration tool you can select from two types of parameter display: - parameter names (e.g. "PARTANKSHAPE") - label texts (e.g. "tank shape")

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Commissioning

6.6.4

Parametrization of the Analog Input Blocks

Prosonic M has two Analog Input Blocks that can be assigned to the various process variables. The following descripiton provides an example for the Analog Input Block 1 (Start Index 500). 1.

Enter the desired block name (optional). Factory setting: ANALOG_INPUT_1_XXXXXXXX

2.

Open the Analog Input Block.

3.

Set the operating mode to OOS (Out of Service) in the parameter group MODE_BLK (parameter TARGET).

4.

Using the parameter CHANNEL select the process variable that is to be used as the input value for the function block algorithm (scaling and limit value monitoring). The following settings are possible: – CHANNEL = 1: level – CHANNEL = 2: distance – CHANNEL = 3: temperature

5.

In the parameter gorup XD_SCALE select the desired engineering unit and the block input range (measuring range) for the process variable in question (see the example below).

" Caution! Make sure that the selected unit is suitable for the measurement variable of the selected process variable. Otherwies the parameter BLOCK_ERROR will display the error message "Block Configuration Error" and the block operating mode cannot be set to AUTO. 6.

In the L_TYPE prameter, select the mode of linearization for the input variable (Direct, Indirect, Indirect Sq Root). For details refer to section 11.7 in the Appendix.

" Caution! Note that with the type of linearization "Direct" the configuration of the parameter group OUT_SCALE must agree with the configuration of the parameter group XD_SCALE. Otherwise the block operating mode cannot be set to AUTO. Such incorrect configuration is indicated in the parameter BLOCK_ERROR by the "Block Configuration Error" message. Example: • The measuring range of the sensor is 0 to 10 m. • The output range to the automation system should be 0 to 10 m, too. The following settings are to be made: • Analog Input Block 1, Parameter CHANNEL -> "1" (measured level) • Parameter L_TYPE -> DIRECT • Parameter group XD_SCALE XD_SCALE 0% -> 0 XD_SCALE 100% -> 10 XD_SCALE_UNIT -> m • Parameter group OUT_SCALE OUT_SCALE 0% -> 0 OUT_SCALE 100% -> 10 OUT_SCALE_UNIT -> m 7.

Endress+Hauser

If required, use the following parameters to define the limit values for alarm and warning messages: – HI_HI_LIM -> Limit value for the upper alarm – HI_LIM -> Limit value for the upper warning – LO_LIM -> Limit value for the lower warning – LO_LO_LIM -> Limit value for the lower alarm The limit values entered must be within the value range specified in the parameter group OUT_SCALE.

65

Commissioning

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

8.

In addition to the limit values you must also specify the action taken if a limit value is exceeded using the alarm priorities (parameters HI_HI_PRI, HI_PRI, LO_PRI, LO_LO_PRI). Reporting to the the fieldbus host system only takes place if the alarm priority is higher than 2. For details refer to section 11.7 in the Appendix.

6.6.5 1.

Connection of the function blocks

A concluding overall system configuration is essential so that the operating mode of the Analog Input Block can be set to AUTO and so that the field device is integrated into the system application. To do this, a configuration software (e.g. you host system software) is used to connect the function blocks - normally graphically - to the desired control strategy and then the sequence of the individual process control functions is specified.

NI-FBUS-FMxxx-en-001

Example: Connection of the function blocks with the NI-FBUS Configurator

66

2.

Download the configuration data into the field devices by the download function of the FOUNDATION Fieldbus configuration tool.

3.

Set the oerating mode of the AI Block to AUTO (parameter group MODE_BLK, parameter TARGET). However, this is only possible under the following conditions: – The function blocks are correctly connected with each other. – The parametrization of the AI Block is correct (see 6.6.4, steps 5 and 6). – The Resource Block is in operating mode AUTO.

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

6.7

Commissioning

Commissioning with the handheld terminal DXR375/ FC375

The steps of the commissioning procedure are the same as with a FOUNDATION Fieldbus configuration tool (→ Page 62 ff.). The blocks should be parametrized in the following order: • the RESOURCE BLOCK • the SENSOR BLOCK (the "basic setup" method can be used for this, see page → ä 43) • the ANALOG INPUT BLOCKS

Endress+Hauser

67

Troubleshooting

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

7

Troubleshooting

7.1

System error messages

7.1.1

Current error

Errors which the Prosonic M detects during commissioning or operation are displayed in the following way: • VU331: error symbol in the "measured value" (000) function • VU331 or Endress+Hauser operating program: in the "diagnostics" (0A) function group in the "present error" (0A0) function Only the highest priority error is displayed; in the case of multiple errors, you can scroll between the different error messages by pressing O or S. • FOUNDATION Fieldbus: – by the status of the main value in the cyclic data telegram – Diagnostic Block, parameter PARACTUALERROR (present error)

NI-FBUS-FMU4x-en-004

7.1.2

Last error

The last error is displayed in the "diagnostics" (0A) function group in the "previous error" (0A1) function. This display can be deleted in the "clear last error" (0A2) function. (FOUNDATION Fieldbus: Diagnsotic Block; parameters PARLASTERROR and PARCLEARLASTERROR.

68

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Troubleshooting

7.1.3

Types of error

Type of error

Symbol

Meaning The output signal assumes a value which can be set using the "output on alarm" (010) function: • • • •

Alarm (A) continuous

Warning (W)

MAX: 110% MIN: -10% Hold: last value is on hold User-specific value

The device continues measurement. An error message is displayed. flashing

Alarm/Warning (E)

7.1.4

Endress+Hauser

You can define whether the error should behave as an alarm or as a warning.

Error codes

Code

Error description

Action

A102 A110 A152 A160

checksum error

Reset; If alarm still present after reset, replace electronics

W103

initialising

If the message does not disappear after several seconds, replace the electronics

A106

downloading

Wait; Message disappears after load sequence

A111 A113 A114 A115 A121 A125 A155 A164 A171

electronics defect

Reset; Check system for EMC, improve as necessary If alarm still present after reset, replace electronics

A116

download error

Check connection; Restart download

W153

initialising

Wait a few seconds; if error is still displayed, switch the power off and on again

A231

sensor defect

Check connection, if necessary replace HF module or electronics

A281

interruption temperature sensor

Exchange sensor

A502

Sensor type not detected

Exchange sensor and/or electronics

A512

recording of mapping

Alarm disappears after a few seconds

A521

new sensor type detected

Reset

W601

linearisation curve not monotone

Correct table (enter monotonously increasing table)

W611

less than 2 linea-risation points

Enter additional value pairs

W621

simulation on

Switch simulation mode off ["output" (06) function group, "simulation" (065) function]]

E641

no usable echo

Check basic calibration

E651

level in safety distance risk of overspill

Error disappears when the level leaves the safety distance. Possibly reset the lock. ["safety settings" (01) function group, "ackn. alarm" (017) function]]

A661

Sensor overtemperature

A671

Linearisation incomplete

Activate linearisation table

W681

current out of range

Carry out basic calibration; check linearisation

69

Troubleshooting

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Code

Error description

W691

Filling noise detected, level ramp is active

7.1.5

Action

Influence of the error codes on the output signal

The following table describes the influence of the error codes on the status of the cyclic output values as well as on the parameters BLOCK_ERR and XD_ERROR in the Sensor Block. The output values are linked to the following measuring values: • Primary Value (PV): level/volume • Secondary Value (SV): distance between sensor membrane and surface of the material measured • Third Value (TV): sensor temperature Code

PV Status SV Status

PV Substatus SV Substatus

TV Status

TV Substatus

BLOCK_ER

XD_ERROR

A102

BAD

Device Failure

BAD

Device Failure

Memory Failure/ Device needs maintenance now

Electronic Failure

W103

Uncertain

Non specific

GOOD

Non specific

Other

Unspecified Err

A106

BAD

Device Failure

BAD

Device Failure

Other

Unspecified Err

A110

BAD

Device Failure

BAD

Device Failure

Memory Failure/ Device needs maintenance

Electronic Failure

A111

BAD

Device Failure

BAD

Device Failure

Memory Failure/ Device needs maintenance now

Electronic Failure

A113

BAD

Device Failure

BAD

Device Failure

Memory Failure/ Device needs maintenance now

Electronic Failure

A114

BAD

Device Failure

BAD

Device Failure

Memory Failure/ Device needs maintenance now

Electronic Failure

A115

BAD

Device Failure

BAD

Device Failure

Device needs maintenance now

Unspecified Err

A116

BAD

Device Failure

BAD

Device Failure

Device needs maintenance now

Unspecified Err

A121

BAD

Device Failure

BAD

Device Failure

Memory Failure/ Device needs maintenance now

Electronic Failure

A125

BAD

Device Failure

BAD

Device Failure

Memory Failure/ Device needs maintenance now

Electronic Failure

W153

Uncertain

Non specific

GOOD

Non specific

Power up

No Error

A155

BAD

Device Failure

BAD

Device Failure

Device needs maintenace now

Electronic Failure

A160

BAD

Device Failure

BAD

Device Failure

Memory Failure/ Device needs maintenance now

Electronic Failure

A164

BAD

Device Failure

BAD

Device Failure

Memory Failure/ Device needs maintenance now

Electronic Failure

A171

BAD

Device Failure

BAD

Device Failure

Memory Failure/ Device needs maintenance now

Electronic Failure

A231

BAD

Device Failure

BAD

Device Failure

Device needs maintenance now

Unspecified Err

E281 Uncertain (Warning)

Device Failure

BAD

Device FAilure

Device needs maintenance now

Electronic Failure

E281 (Alarm)

BAD

Device Failure

BAD

Device Failure

Device needs maintenance now

Unspecified Err

A502

BAD

Device FAilure

BAD

Device Failure

Device needs maintenance now

Unspecified Err

A512

Uncertain

Non specific

GOOD

Non specific

Other

Unspecified Err

A521

BAD

Device FAilure

BAD

Device Failure

Device needs maintenance now

Unspecified Err

W601

Uncertain

configuration error

GOOD

Non specific

Other

Configuration Error

W611

Uncertain

configuration error

GOOD

Non specific

Other

Configuration Error

W621

Uncertain

Non specific

GOOD

Non specific

simulation active

No Error

70

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Troubleshooting

Code

PV Status SV Status

PV Substatus SV Substatus

TV Status

TV Substatus

BLOCK_ER

XD_ERROR

E641 (Alarm)

BAD

Device Failure

GOOD

Non specific

Device needs maintenance now

Unspecified Err

E641 Uncertain (Warning)

Non specific

GOOD

Non specific

Device needs maintenance now

Unspecified Err

E651 (Alarm)

Device Failure

GOOD

Non specific

Other

Unspecified Err

E651 Uncertain (Warning)

Non specific

GOOD

Non specific

Other

Unspecified Err

A661 (Alarm)

Device Failure

GOOD

Nopn specific

Device needs maintenance now

Unspecified Err

E661 Uncertain (Warning)

Non specific

GOOD

Non specific

Device needs maintenacne soon

Unspecified Err

A671

BAD

Device Failure

GOOD

Non specific

Configuration Error

No Error

W691

Uncertain

Non specific

GOOD

Non specific

Other

Unspecified Err

BAD

BAD

Endress+Hauser

71

Troubleshooting

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

7.2 Error

Application errors

Example

D m/ft (008)

Measured value (00) is incorrect but measured distance (008) is correct

F m/ft

Elimination 1. Check empty calibration (005) and full calibration (006). (FF: Sensor Block, PAREMPTYCALIBRATION, PARFULLCALIBRATION

100%

expected

actual E m/ft t→

0%

Measured value (000) and measured distance (008) are incorrect

L00-FMR2xxxx-19-00-00-en-019

2. Check linearisation – level/ullage (040) (FF: Sensor Block, PARLEVELULLAGEMODE) – max. scale(046) (FF: Sensor Block, PARMAXVOLUME) – diameter vessel (047) (FF: Sensor Block, PARCYLINDERVESSEL – linearisation table 1. For measurements in bypass or stilling well: Select the according option in the "tank shape" (002) function. (FF: Sensor Block, PARTANKSHAPE) 2. Carry out interference echo suppression.

No change in measured value on filling/ emptying

1. Carry out interference echo suppression. 2. Clean sensor if necessary 100%

3. If necessary, select better installation position 4. If necessary due to wide interference echoes, set function "detection window" (0A7) to "off". (FF: Sensor Block, PARDETECTIONWINDOW)

actual

expected t→

0%

L00-FMR2xxxx-19-00-00-en-014

With an uneven surface (e.g. filling, emptying, running agitator) the measured value may jump sporadically to higher levels

1. Carry out interference echo suppression 2. Set the process cond. (004) to "calm surface" or "add. agitator" FF: Sensor Block, PARPROCESSCONDITION)

100% actual

3. Increase output damping (058). (FF: Sensor Block, PAROUTPUTDAMPING)

expected

4. If necessary, select a different installation position and/or a larger sensor

t→

0%

L00-FMR2xxxx-19-00-00-en-015

100% actual

expected 0%

t→ L00-FMR2xxxx-19-00-00-en-016

72

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Error

Troubleshooting

Example

Elimination

On filling/emptying the measured value drops 100% expected

1.

Check tank shape (002), e.g. "dome ceiling" or "horizontal cyl." (FF: Sensor Block, PARTANKSHAPE)

2.

If possible, do not select a central installation position

3.

Possible user stilling well/echo guide pipe

1.

Check application parameters (002), (003) and (004) (FF: Sensor Block, PARTANKSHAPE, PARMEDIUMCONDITION, PARPROCESSCONDITION)

actual

t→

0%

L00-FMR2xxxx-19-00-00-en-017

E 641 (echo loss) 100% eingetreten

2.

If necessary, select a different installation position and/or a larger sensor

3.

Align the sensor parallel to the product surface (particularly for bulk solids applications)

E 641 erwartet 0%

t→ L00-FMR2xxxx-19-00-00-en-018

Endress+Hauser

73

Maintenance and repairs

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

8

Maintenance and repairs

8.1

Exterior cleaning

When cleaning the exterior, always use cleaning agents that do not attack the surface of the housing and the seals.

8.2

Repairs

The Endress+Hauser repair concept assumes that the measuring devices have a modular design and that customers are able to undertake repairs themselves. Spare parts are contained in suitable kits. They contain the related replacement instructions. All the spare parts kits which you can order from Endress+Hauser for repairs are listed with their order numbers in the section "Spare parts". For more information on service and spare parts, contact the Service Department at Endress+Hauser.

8.3

Repairs to Ex-approved devices

When carrying out repairs to Ex-approved devices, please note the following: • Repairs to Ex-approved devices may only be carried out by trained personnel or by the Endress+Hauser Service. • Comply with the prevailing standards, national Ex-area regulations, safety instructions (XA) and certificates. • Only use original spare parts from Endress+Hauser. • When ordering a spare part, please note the device designation on the nameplate. Only replace parts with identical parts. • Carry out repairs according to the instructions. On completion of repairs, carry our the specified routine test on the device. • Only Endress+Hauser Service may convert a certified device into a different certified variant. • Document all repair work and conversions.

8.4

Replacement

After a complete instrument or electronic module has been replaced, the parameters can be downloaded into the instrument again via the communication interface. Prerequisite to this is that the data were uploaded to the PC beforehand using ToF Tool /FieldCare. Measurement can continue without having to carry out a new setup. Only a linearisation and a tank map (interference echo suppression) have to be recorded again.

74

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

8.5 10

Maintenance and repairs

Spare parts (housing type F12)

65

65 11 35 EN DR

PR ES Ord OS S+ er ON HA Se Cod r.-N e IC US o.: :

ER

M

Me Messbere asu ic ring h ran ge U1 ma x. 2 4...26...36 0m 0m VD A C

IP

65

A >7

0°C

l

: t >8

5°C

Made in Germany

T

ina

Maulburg

rm Te

1

2

3

4

30

12

65 20

12

R SE AU +H SS RE D EN

65 40

65 65 55 50

58

65

65

65

58

FMU 40

50 FMU 41

FMU 42/44 FMU 43 L00-FMU4x-00-00-00-yy-007

Endress+Hauser

75

Maintenance and repairs

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

10 Housing 543120-0022 Housing F12, aluminium, G1/2 543120-0023 Housing F12, aluminium, NPT1/2 543120-0024 Housing F12, aluminium, M20 52001992 Housing F12, aluminium, M20, PA connector 52008556 Housing F12, aluminium, M20, FF connector 52013350 Housing F12, aluminium, coated, M20, 4-wire 52013351 Housing F12, aluminium, coated, M20, metal 52013348 Housing F12, aluminium, coated, G1/2, 4-wire 52013349 Housing F12, aluminium, coated, NPT1/2, 4-wire 11 Hood for terminal compartment 52006026 Cover for the connection compartment F12 52019062 Cover for the connection compartment F12, FHX40 12 Set of screws 535720-9020 Set of screws for housing F12/T12 20 Cover 52005936 Cover F12/T12 aluminium, inspection glass, seal 517391-0011 Cover F12/T12 aluminium, coated, seal 30 Electronics 71025600 electronics FMU4x, Ex, 2-wire HART, V4.0 71025602 electronics FMU4x, Ex, 4-wire HART, V4.0 71025603 electronics FMU4x, Ex, PROFIBUS PA, V4.0 52023759 Electronics Prosonic M, Ex, FF, V2.04 35 Terminal module / power unit 52006197 Terminal module 4-pin, HART, 2-wire with connecting cable 52012156 Terminal module 4-pin, PROFIBUS PA, Foundation Fieldbus 52013304 Power unit, 10.5...32V DC (housing F12) for electronics, 4-wire 52013305 Power unit, 90 ...250V AC (housing F12) for electronics, 4-wire 52015585 Power unit, CSA, 10.5...32V DC (housing F12) for electronics, 4-wire 52015586 Power unit, CSA, 90...250V AC (housing F12) for electronics, 4-wire 40 Display 52005585 Display/operating module VU331 50 Probe with process connection 52010509 Sensor FMU40 G1-1/2 52010507 Sensor FMU40 NPT1-1/2 52010510 Sensor FMU41 G2 52010508 Sensor FMU41 NPT2 52023965 Sensor FMU42 52013543 Sensor FMU43 4", gasket

76

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Maintenance and repairs

71037028 Sensor FMU44, gasket 55 Flanges 52023919 Flange, Uni-DN80/ANSI 3"/JIS 80A, PP 52023920 Flange, Uni-DN80/ANSI 3"/JIS 80A, PVDF 52023921 Flange, Uni-DN80/ANSI 3"/JIS 80A, 316L 52023922 Flange, Uni-DN100/ANSI 4"/JIS 100A, PP 52023923 Flange, Uni-DN100/ANSI 4"/JIS 100A, PVDF 58 Hexagon nut 52000599 Hexagon nut (SW60) G1-1/2, bk, PC 52000598 Hexagon nut (SW70) G2, bk, PC 65 Sealing kit 52010526 Sealing kit FMU4x Miscellaneous 52010545 Nameplate Prosonic M, modification Spare parts for FHX40 52018204 Adaption kit housing F12, 2-wire, FHX40 52018205 Adaption kit housing F12, 4-wire, FHX40 52016334 Cable FHX40, 20m

Endress+Hauser

77

Maintenance and repairs

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

8.6

Spare parts (housing type T12) 25 65 35

10 65 11 EN D

PR RES Ord OS S+ er Se Cod ON HA r.-N e IC US o.: :

FM ER U

65

A >7

0°C

30

Maulburg

IP T

: t >8

5°C

Made in Germany

Me Messbere asu ic ring h ran ge U1 ma x. 2 4...26...36 0m 0m VD A C

12

65 20

12 ER

S AU

+H

SS

RE

D EN

65

40

65

65 50

55

65

58

65

58 FMU 40

50

FMU 41

FMU 42/44 L00-FMU4x-00-00-00-yy-008

78

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Maintenance and repairs

10 Housing 543180-1023 Housing T12, aluminium, NPT1/2, PEL 52006204 Housing T12, aluminium, G1/2, PEL, cover 52006205 Housing T12, aluminium, M20, PEL, cover 11 Hood for terminal compartment 52005643 Hood T12 12 Set of screws 535720-9020 Set of screws for housing F12/T12 20 Cover 517391-0011 Cover F12/T12 aluminium, coated, seal 52005936 Cover F12/T12 aluminium, inspection glass, seal 25 Cover for the connection compartment 518710-0020 Cover T3/T12, aluminium, coated, seal 30 Electronics 71025600 electronics FMU4x, Ex, 2-wire HART, V4.0 71025603 electronics FMU4x, Ex, PROFIBUS PA, V4.0 52023759 Electronics Prosonic M, Ex, FF, V2.04 35 Terminal module / power unit 52013302 Terminal module Ex d, 4-pin, 2-wire, HART, T12 52013303 Terminal module Ex d, 2-pin, 2-wire, PROFIBUS PA, Foundation Fieldbus, T12 52018949 Terminal module EEx ia, 4-pin, HART, T12, OVP 52018950 Terminal module EEx ia, 4-pin, PROFIBUS PA, Foundation Fieldbus, T12, OVP 40 Display 52005585 Display/operating module VU331 50 Probe with process connection 52010509 Sensor FMU40 G1-1/2 52010507 Sensor FMU40 NPT1-1/2 52010510 Sensor FMU41 G2 52010508 Sensor FMU41 NPT2 52023965 Sensor FMU42 71037028 Sensor FMU44, gasket 55 Flanges 52023919 Flange, Uni-DN80/ANSI 3"/JIS 80A, PP 52023920 Flange, Uni-DN80/ANSI 3"/JIS 80A, PVDF 52023921 Flange, Uni-DN80/ANSI 3"/JIS 80A, 316L 52023922 Flange, Uni-DN100/ANSI 4"/JIS 100A, PP 52023923 Flange, Uni-DN100/ANSI 4"/JIS 100A, PVDF 52023924 Flange, Uni-DN100/ANSI 4"/JIS 100A, 316L

Endress+Hauser

79

Maintenance and repairs

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

58 Hexagon nut 52000598 Hexagon nut (SW70) G2, bk, PC 52000599 Hexagon nut (SW60) G1-1/2, bk, PC 65 Sealing kit 52010526 Sealing kit FMU4x Miscellaneous 52010545 Nameplate Prosonic M, modification

80

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

8.7

Maintenance and repairs

Return

The following procedures must be carried out before a transmitter is sent to Endress+Hauser e.g. for repair or calibration: • Remove all residue which may be present. Pay special attention to the gasket grooves and crevices where fluid may be present. This is especially important if the fluid is dangerous to health, e.g. corrosive, poisonous, carcinogenic, radioactive, etc. • Always enclose a duly completed "Declaration of contamination" form (a copy of the “Declaration of contamination” is included at the end of this operating manual). Only then can Endress +Hauser transport, examine and repair a returned device. • Enclose special handling instructions if necessary, for example a safety data sheet as per EN 91/ 155/EEC. Additionally specify: • An exact description of the application. • The chemical and physical characteristics of the product. • A short description of the error that occurred (specify error code if possible) • Operating time of the device.

8.8

Disposal

In case of disposal please seperate the different components according to their material consistence.

8.9

Software history

Software version / date

Changes to software

V 01.02.00 / 01.2002 V 01.02.02 / 03.2003

Original software Compatible with:

Changes to documentation

• ToF Tool • Commuwin II (version 2.05.03 and higher • HART Communicator DXR 275 (from OS 4.6) with Rev. 1, DD 1 V 01.02.04/02.2004

• FMU 42 added • compatible with HART Communicator DXR 375

FMU 42 added

V 01.04.00/07.2006

• "detection window" function added

"detection window" added Version: 07.06

can be operated via: • ToF Tool from version 4.50 • HART Communicator DXR375 with Rev. 1, DD1

Description of FOUNDATION Fieldbus interface completely revised. Version: 11.06

FOUNDATION Fieldbus Transducer Block divided into: • Sensor Block • Diagnostic Block • Display Block Execution time of the function blocks reduced: • AI: 30 ms • PID: 80 ms • AR: 50 ms • IS: 30 ms • SC: 40 ms • IT: 60 ms

Endress+Hauser

81

Maintenance and repairs

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

8.10

Contact addresses of Endress+Hauser

Contact addresses can be found on our homepage: www.endress.com/worldwide. If you have any questions, please do not hesitate to contact your Endress+Hauser representative.

82

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Accessories

9

Accessories

9.1

Weather protection cover

A Weather protection cover made of stainless steel is recommended for outdoor mounting (order code: 543199-0001). The shipment includes the protective cover and tension clamp. m

240 m

70 mm

°

45

mm

EN D MIC RES RO S+H PIL AU OT SE R II

r Co r.-N de: o.:

IP

Maulburg

Me Messberei asuri ch ng ran ge U 16 ma x. 20 4...20...36 m mAV DC

65

T

A >7

0°C

: t >8

5°C

Made in Germany

Se

mm

95

F12 / T12 housing

Orde

135

L00-FMR2xxxx-00-00-06-en-001

9.2

Installation bracket for FMU 40/41 400 120

G A

3

120 30

250

ø16

L00-FMU4x-00-00-00-de-001

• for FMU 40, G1½: Order No. 942669-0000 • for FMU 41, G2: Order No. 942669-0001 suited for NPT 1½" and 2" as well

Endress+Hauser

83

Accessories

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

9.3

Adapter flange sealing ring EPDM (supplied)

sensor

adapter flange

nozzle L00-FMUX3XXX-00-00-00-en-001

9.3.1

Version with metrical thread (FAU 70 E) Process Connection 12 DN 50 PN 16 A, flange EN1092-1 (DIN2527 B) 14 DN 80 PN 16 A, flange EN1092-1 (DIN2527 B) 15 DN 100 PN 16, A, flange EN1092-1 (DIN2527 B) Sensor Connection 3 Thread ISO228 G1-1/2 4 Thread ISO228 G2 Flange Material 2 316L 7 Polypropylene

FAU 70 E

9.3.2

Product designation

Version with conical thread(FAU 70 A) Process Connection 22 2" 150lbs FF, flange ANSI B16.5 24 3" 150lbs FF, flange ANSI B16.5 25 4" 150lbs FF, flange ANSI B16.5 Sensor Connection 5 Thread NPT1-1/2 6 Thread NPT2 Flange Material 2 316L 7 Polypropylene

FAU 70 A

84

Product designation

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

9.4

Accessories

Cantilever

50 100

20

20 C

A

25

35

100

22

M8

B

35

15

6.5

C

75

105

75

50/ 62

D

L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-005

A

B

C

D

for Sensor

Material

Order Code

585 mm

250 mm

2 mm

200 mm

FMU 40

316Ti/1.4571

52014132

galv. steel

52014131

316Ti/1.4571

52014136

galv. steel

52014135

316Ti/1.4571

52014134

galv. steel

52014133

316Ti/1.4571

52014138

galv. steel

52014137

FMU 41

1085 mm

750 mm

3 mm

300 mm

FMU 40

FMU 41

• The 50 mm or 62 mm orifices serve for the mounting of the FMU 40 or FMU 41 sensor, respecitvely. • The 22 mm orifice may be used for an additional sensor.

Endress+Hauser

85

Accessories

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Mounting Frame

25

100

13

9.5

55

3.2 Ø 33.7

60 4 76 100 200

45 6.5

700/1400

20

100 150

130

L00-FMU4x-00-00-00-yy-005

Height

Material

Order Code

700 mm

galv. steel

919791-0000

700 mm

1.4301 (AISI 304)

919791-0001

1400 mm

galv. steel

919791-0002

1400 mm

1.4301 (AISI 304)

919791-0003

9.6

Wall Bracket 3.2 5

ø 33.7

13

25

150

110

213

180

6.5

88

110 150 L00-FMU4x-00-00-00-yy-006

86

Material

Order Code

galv. steel

919792-0000

316Ti/1.4571

919792-0001

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

9.7

Accessories

Mounting bracket for FMU 42/43/44 25

120

~123

119

2

Material: 1.4301 Order-Code.: 942666-0000

25

11 L00-FMU4x-00-00-00-en-003.eps

9.8

Commubox FXA291

The Commubox FXA291 connects Endress+Hauser field instruments with CDI interface (= Endress+Hauser Common Data Interface) to the USB interface of a personal computer or a notebook. For details refer to TI405C/07/en.

!

Note! For the following Endress+Hauser instruments you need the "ToF Adapter FXA291" as an additional accessory: • Cerabar S PMC71, PMP7x • Deltabar S PMD7x, FMD7x • Deltapilot S FMB70 • Gammapilot M FMG60 • Levelflex M FMP4x • Micropilot FMR130/FMR131 • Micropilot M FMR2xx • Micropilot S FMR53x, FMR540 • Prosonic FMU860/861/862 • Prosonic M FMU4x • Tank Side Monitor NRF590 (with additional adapter cable) • Prosonic S FMU9x

9.9

ToF Adapter FXA291

The ToF Adapter FXA291 connects the Commubox FXA291 via the USB interface of a personal computer or a notebook to the following Endress+Hauser instruments: • Cerabar S PMC71, PMP7x • Deltabar S PMD7x, FMD7x • Deltapilot S FMB70 • Gammapilot M FMG60 • Levelflex M FMP4x • Micropilot FMR130/FMR131 • Micropilot M FMR2xx • Micropilot S FMR53x, FMR540 • Prosonic FMU860/861/862 • Prosonic M FMU4x • Tank Side Monitor NRF590 (with additional adapter cable) • Prosonic S FMU9x For details refer to KA271F/00/a2. Endress+Hauser

87

Accessories

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

9.10

Remote display FHX40 Pipe-mounting (mounting bracket and plate supplied optionally, s. product structure) 8, 5

Wall-mounting (without mounting bracket)

Micropilot M Levelflex M Prosonic M

Separate housing FHX40 (IP 65)

180

122

160

0

15

80 ES

S+H

AU

SE

Me Messberei asuri ch ng ran ge U 16 ma x. 20 4...20...36 m mAV DC

88

R

Cable IP

Maulburg

DR

A >7

t >8 5°C

118

96

6, 3

0°C :

120 82

65

T

Made in Germany

EN Orde r Se Code r.-N o.: :

122

106

max. 80 min. 30

pipe

L00-FMxxxxxx-00-00-06-en-003

9.10.1

Technical data (cable and housing) and product structure:

Max. cable length

20 m (65 ft)

Temperature range

-30 °C...+70 °C (-22 °F...158 °F)

Degree of protection

IP65/67 (housing); IP68 (cable) acc. to IEC 60529

Materials

Housing: AlSi12; cable glands: nickle plated brass

Dimensions [mm] / [inch]

122x150x80 (HxWxD) / 4.8x5.9x3.2

Approval: A 1 S U N K

Nn-hazardous area ATEX II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6, ATEX II 3D FM IS Cl.I Div.1 Gr.A-D CSA IS Cl.I Div.1 Gr.A-D CSA General Purpose TIIS ia IIC T6 (in preparation)

Cable: 1 5

20m/65ft; for HART 20m/65ft; for PROFIBUS PA/FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Additional option: A B

FHX40 -

Basic version Mounting bracket, pipe 1"/ 2"

Complete product designation

For connection of the remote display FHX40 use the cable which fits the communication version of the respective instrument.

88

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Measured variable

Technical Data

10

Technical Data

10.1

Technical data at a glance

10.1.1

Input

The distance D between the sensor membrane and the product surface is measured. Using the linearisation function, the device uses D to calculate: • level L in any units • volume V in any units • flow Q across measuring weirs or open channels in any units

Maximum range/blocking distance

Sensor

Maximum range in liquids1

Maximum range in solids1

blocking distance

FMU40

5m

2m

0.25 m

FMU41

8m

3.5 m

0.35 m

FMU42

10 m

5m

0.4 m

FMU43

15 m

7m

0.6 m

FMU44

20 m

10 m

0.5 m

1

The actual range is dependent on the measuring conditions. Refer to Technical Information TI 365F/00/en for an estimation.

10.1.2

Output

Output signal

Foundation Fieldbus

Signal Coding

Manchester Bus Powered (MBP); Manchester II

Data transmission rate

31.25 KBit/s, voltage mode

Signal on alarm

• Error symbol, error code and plain text description on the on-site display • Status byte of the digital signal input

10.1.3 Basic Data

Data of the FOUNDATION Fieldbus interface

Device Type

1011 (hex)

Device Revision

04 (hex)

DD Revision

01 (hex)

CFF Revision

01 (hex)

ITK Version

4.61

ITK-Certification Driver-No.

IT035900

Link Master (LAS) cabable

yes

Link Master / Basic Device selectable

yes; Default: Basic Device

Number VCRs

24

Number of Link-Objects in VFD 24

Endress+Hauser

89

Technical Data

Virtual communication references (VCRs)

Link Settings

Transducer Blocks

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Permanent Entries

1

Client VCRs

0

Server VCRs

24

Source VCRs

23

Sink VCRs

0

Subscriber VCRs

23

Publisher VCRs

23

Slot time

4

Min. Inter PDU delay

4

Max. response delay

10

Block

Content

Output values

Sensor Block

contains all parameters related to the mesurement

• level or volume1) (channel 1) • distance (channel 2) • sensor temperature (channel 3)

Diagnsotic Block contains diagnostic information

no output values

Display Block

no output values

1)

Function Blocks

contains parameters to configure the local display

je nach Konfiguration des Sensor-Blocks

Block

Content

Resource Block

The Resource Block contains all the data that uniquely identifies the field device. It is an electronic version of a nameplate of the device.

Analog Input Block 1

The AI block takes the manufacturer's input data, selected by channel number, and makes it available to other function blocks at its output.

30 ms

standard

Analog Input Block 2

The AI block takes the manufacturer's input data, selected by channel number, and makes it available to other function blocks at its output.

30 ms

standard

PID Block

The PID block serves as proportional-integral-derivative controller and is used almost universally to do closedloop-control in the field including cascade and feedforward.

80 ms

standard

50 ms

standard

The input selector block provides selection of up to four 30 ms inputs and generates an output based on the configured action. This block normally receives its inputs from AI blocks. The block performs maximum, minimum, middle, average and ‘first good’ signal selection.

standard

40 ms Signal Characte- The signal characterizer block has two sections, each rizer Block with an output that is a non-linear function of the respective input. The non-linear function is determined by a single look-up table with 21 arbitrary x-y pairs.

standard

Arithmetic Block This block is designed to permit simple use of popular measurement math functions. The user does not have to know how to write equations. The math algorithm is selected by name, chosen by the user for the function to be done. Input Selector Block

90

Execution time

Functionality enhanced

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Technical Data

Block

Content

Integrator Block

60 ms The Integrator Function Block integrates a variable as a function of the time or accumulates the counts from a Pulse Input block. The block may be used as a totalizer that counts up until reset or as a batch totalizer that has a setpoint, where the integrated or accumulated value is compared to pre-trip and trip settings, generating discrete signals when these settings are reached.

10.1.4

Execution time

Functionality standard

Auxiliary energy

Terminals

Cable cross-section: 0.5 to 2.5 mm (20 to 14 AWG)

Cable entry

• Cable gland M20x1.5 (recommended cable diameter 6 ... 10 mm) • Cable entry G½ or ½ NPT • 7/8" Foundation Fieldbus plug

Supply voltage

9 V ... 32 V There may be additional restrictions for devices with an explosion protection certificate. Refer to the notes in the appropriate safety instructions (XA).

Lift-off voltage

9V

Basic current

15 mA

In-rush current

≤ 15 mA

Error current

0 mA

FISCO

Ui

17,5 V

Ii

500 mA; with surge arrester 273 mA

Pi

5,5 W; with surge arrester1, 2 W

Ci

5 mF

Li

0,01 mH

FNICO compliant

yes

Polarity sensitive

no

10.1.5 Reaction time

Performance characteristics

The reaction time depends on the parameter settings. The minimum values are: • FMU40/41/42/43: min. 2 s • FMU44: min. 3 s

Reference operating conditions

Endress+Hauser

• Temperature = +20 °C • Pressure = 1013 mbar abs. • Humidity = 50 % • Ideal reflective surface (e.g. calm, smooth fluid surface) 91

Technical Data

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

• No interference reflections within signal beam • Set application parameters: – Tank shape = flat ceiling – Medium property = liquid – process conditions = calm surface Measured value resolution

Measuring error

Sensor

Measured value resolution

FMU40

1 mm

FMU41

1 mm

FMU42

2 mm

FMU43

2 mm

FMU44

2 mm

Typical specifications for reference operating conditions (include linearity, repeatability, and hysteresis): Sensor

Measuring error

FMU40

±2mm or 0.2% of set measuring distance (empty calibration)1

FMU41

± 2 mm or 0,2% of set measuring distance (empty calibration)1

FMU42

± 4 mm or 0,2% of set measuring distance (empty calibration)1

FMU43

± 4 mm or 0,2% of set measuring distance (empty calibration)1

FMU44

± 4 mm or 0,2% of set measuring distance (empty calibration)1

1

Influence of the vapor pressure

whichever is greater

The vapor pressure at 20 °C (68 °F) gives a hint on the accuracy of the ultrasonic level measurement. If the vapor pressure at 20 °C (68 °F) is below 50 mbar, ultrasonic level measurement is possible with a very high accuracy. This is valid for water, aqueous solutions, watersolid-solutions, dilute acids (hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, ...), dilute bases (caustic soda, ...), oils, greases, slurries, pastes, ... High vapor pressures or outgassing media (ethanol, acetone, ammonia, ...) can influence the accuracy. If conditions like these are present, please contact the Endress+Hauser support.

10.1.6

Ambient conditions

Ambient temperature

-40 °C ... +80 °C The functionality of the LC display becomes restricted at Tu+60 °C. If the device is operated outdoors in strong sunlight, you should use a protective cover.

Storage temperature

-40 °C ... +80 °C

Climate class

DIN EN 60068-2-38 (Test Z/AD) DIN/IEC 68 T2-30Db

Ingress protection

• With closed housing, tested according to – IP 68, NEMA 6P (24h at 1.83m under water surface) – IP 66, NEMA 4x • With open housing: IP 20, NEMA 1 (also ingress protection of the display)

Vibration resistance

DIN EN 60068-2-64 / IEC 68-2-64: 20…2000 Hz, 1 (m/s2)2/Hz; 3 x 100 min

92

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Technical Data

• Interference emission to EN 61326, Equipment Class B • Interference immunity to EN 61326, Appendix A (Industrial) and NAMUR Recommendation NE 21 (EMC). • A standard installation cable is sufficient if only the analogue signal is used. Use a screened cable when working with a superimposed communication signal (HART).

10.1.7

Process conditions

Process temperature

-40°C ... +80°C A temperature sensor is integrated in the sensor for correction of the temperature-dependent timeof-flight.

Process pressure

• FMU 40/41: 0.7 bar ... 3bar abs. • FMU 42/43/44: 0.7 bar ... 2.5bar abs.

Endress+Hauser

93

Appendix

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

basic setup

00

11

Appendix

11.1

Operating menu

tank shape

002

dome ceiling horizontal cyl. bypass stilling well flat ceiling sphere no ceiling

safety settings

01

output on alarm

medium property

003

liquid solid < 4mm solid > 4mm unknown

process cond.

004

standard liquid calm surface turb. surface add. agitator fast change standard solid solid dusty conveyor belt test: no filter

010

outp. echo loss

empty calibr.

005

distance membrane to min. level Default: FMU40: 5 m FMU41: 8 m FMU42: 10 m FMU43: 15 m FMU44: 20 m

006

span max.: empty - BD Default: FMU40: 4,75 m FMU41: 7,6 m FMU42: 9,6 m FMU43: 14,4 m FMU44: 19,5 m

012

delay time

hold alarm

MAX 110% hold MIN - 10%

full calibr.

014

in case of echo loss max. 4000 sec. Default: 30 s

ramp %/min

Rampe %span/min 013 specify value

temperature

03

measured temp.

030

linearisation

extended calibr.

04

05

max. temp. limit

031

max. meas. temp.

032

is displayed

is displayed

is displayed

040

linearisation

level CU ullage CU

040

clear table table on manual semi-automatic horizontal cyl.

customer unit

customer unit

042

linear

customer unit

042

check distance

051

040

selction

050

mapping

dist./meas. value

033

warning alarm

level/ullage

level DU ullage DU

react. high temp

defect temp. sens.

034

alarm warning

041

008

the following are displayed: - distance membrane to level - measured value

042

manual distance = ok distance too small

045

linearisation TabNo Level volum

043 044 045

yes

range of mapping.

052

start mapping

next point no

053

accept proposed value or specify range of mapping

off on

pres. map dist.

cust. tank map

dist. unknown distance too big common

extended map.

054

is displayed

output

06

envelope curve

0E

plot settings

0E1

envelope curve env. curve + FAC env. curve + cust. map display

recording curve

0E2

single curve cyclic

language

09

092

back to home

093

specify time Default: 100 s

diagnostics

0A

present error

0A0

previous error

0A1

clear last error

device tag

0C0

protocol + sw-no.

format display

094

decimal 1/16”

0A2

keep erase system parameters 0C

055

inactive active reset

reset for reset code see manual

0C2

no. of decimalas

095

x x.x x.xx x.xxx 0A3

unlock parameter

0A4

for unlock code see manual device id

0C4

Note! The Default values of the parameters are typed in bold face. L00-FMU4xxxx-19-00-01-en-017

94

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

dist./meas. value

008

the following are displayed: - distance membrane to level - measured value

check distance

Appendix

051

manual distance = ok distance too small

range of mapping.

052

accept proposed value or specify range of mapping

start mapping

053

dist./meas. value

008

the following are displayed: - distance membrane to level - measured value

off on

dist. unknown distance too big

015

in safety dist.

016

from blocking distance Default: 0,1m

warning self holding alarm

max. scale

046

diameter vessel

047

max. scale

046

dist./meas. value

008

echo quality

056

ackn. alarm

017

no yes

the following are displayed: - distance membrane to level - measured value

is displayed

simulation

offset

057

will be added to the measured level

output damping

058

Default: 2 s

blocking dist. is displayed

059

Return to Group selection

safety distance

065

sim. off sim. level sim. volume sim. current

sep. character

096

066

display test

097

off on

. period , comma

measured dist.

simulation value

0A5

measured level

0A6

detection window off on reset

distance unit

0C5

temperature unit

0C6

0A7

application par.

0A8

not modified modified download mode

0C8

parameter only param. + cust. map mapping only L00-FMU4xxxx-19-00-02-en-017

Endress+Hauser

95

Appendix

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

11.2

Block model of the Prosonic M

The Prosonic M contains the follwoing blocks: • Resource Block (RB2) s. Operating Instructions BA013S: "FOUNDATION Fieldbus - Overview" • Sensor Block (TBUL) contains the parameters relevant to the measurement • Diagnostic Block (DIAG) contains the diagnostic parameters of the Prosonic M • Display Block (DISP) contains the configuration parameters for the display module VU331 • Analog-Input-Block 1 bzw. 2 (AI) scale the signal of the Transducer Block and transmit them to the PLCS • PID Block (PID) s. Operating Instructions BA013S: "FOUNDATION Fieldbus - Overview" • Arithmetic Block (AR) s. Operating Instructions BA013S: "FOUNDATION Fieldbus - Overview" • Input Selector Block (IS) s. Operating Instructions BA013S: "FOUNDATION Fieldbus - Overview" • Signal Characterizer Block (SC) s. Operating Instructions BA013S: "FOUNDATION Fieldbus - Overview" • Integrator Block (IT) s. Operating Instructions BA013S: "FOUNDATION Fieldbus - Overview"

11.2.1

Default Block configuration

The input and output variables of the blocks can be interconnected by a network configuration tool (e.g. NI-Fieldbus configurator). The figure below shows, how these connections are set by default.

Sensor signal evaluation

Display

Physical Block parameters of the physical unit, e.g. tag No.

Sensor Block Parameters that Primary value describe the device (calibration, (main value) linearisation etc.) Secondary value (distance) Third value (temperature)

PID Block Automation functions

Analog Input Function Block 1 parameters that are important to the process control system, e.g. scaling, status

Analog Input Function Block 2 parameters that are important to the process control system, e.g. scaling, status

OUT

OUT

L00-FMU4XXXX-02-00-00-en-003

96

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

11.3

Appendix

Resource block

The resource block contains the parameters used to describe physical resources of the device. It has no linkable inputs or outputs.

11.3.1

Operation

The resource block is opened by a click on the resource line. If the NI-FBUS Configurator is being used, a series of file tabs appears on the screen. The files can be opened to view and/or edit the parameters in the following table. A short description of the parameter function appears on the side of the screen. A change in the parameter is stored by pressing the WRITE CHANGES button when the block is out of service. Press the READ ALL button to check the values stored in the device.

11.3.2

Parameters

Parameter

Description

TAG_DESC

User description of the intended application of the block.

MODE_BLK

Lists the actual, target, permitted and normal operating modes of the block. – Target: changes the operating mode of the block – Actual: indicates the current operating mode of the block – Permitted: states which operating modes are allowed – Normal: indicates the normal operating mode of the block The possible operating modes of the resources block are: – AUTO: the block is operating as normal – OOS: the block is out of service. If the resource block is out of service, then all blocks within the device (resource) are forced into the same status.

RS_STATE

Indicates the state of the resource block application state machine – On-line: block in AUTO mode – Standby: block in OOS mode

WRITE_LOCK

Indicates the status of DIP-switch WP – LOCKED: device data can be modified – NOT LOCKED: device data can be modified

RESTART

Allows a manual restart: – UNINITIALISED: no status – RUN: normal operational status – RESOURCE: resets the resource block parameters – DEFAULTS: Resets all FOUNDATION Fieldbus parameters within the device, but not the manufacturer specific parameters. – PROCESSOR: make a warm start of the processor

BLOCK_ERROR

Shows error status of software and hardware components – Out-of-Service: the block is in OOS mode – Simulation active: shows the setting of DIP-switch SIM

BLOCK_ALM

Shows any configuration, hardware, connection and system problems in the lock. The cause of the alert is to be seen in the subcode field.

The function of the resource block parameters not described here can can be taken from the FOUNDATION Fieldbus specification, see "www.fieldbus.org".

Endress+Hauser

97

Appendix

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

11.4

Sensor Block

The Sensor block contains the parameters required to calibrate the device. These parameters can also be addressed by using the VU331 display module. The calibration of the device is described in Chapter 6.

11.4.1

Operation

Parameter changes from the tool are made off-line while the device is operating. The changes are downloaded by first setting MODE_BLK = OOS then pressing the WRITE CHANGES button. Press the READ ALL button to check the values stored in the device. In order to resume operation, change MODE_BLK to AUTO4).

11.4.2

Output values

Parameter

Description

PRIMARY_VALUE

Main value (level, volume or flow)

SECONDARY_VALUE

Measured distance

THIRD_VALUE

Measured temperature

11.4.3

Configuration parameters

The Sensor block also contains the configuration parameters, which are used to commission and calibrate the instrument. They are identical to the functions of the operating menu, except for the service parameters which are not accessible on the bus. Thus, the calibration procedure via the display module (chapter "Commissioning") is equally valid for a calibration via a network configuration tool. A complete list of the configuration parameters can be found in the "Description of Instrument Functions", BA240F/00/en.

4)

98

If MODE_BLK refuses to be changed to AUTO, an error is present. Control all parameters, perform the required changes and try again to change MODE_BLK to AUTO.

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

11.4.4

Appendix

Methods

The FOUNDATION Fieldbus specification provides for the use of so-called methods to simplify the operation of the device. A method is an interactive sequence of steps that must be followed in order to obtain a particular function from the device. The Prosonic M has got the following methods: • Basic setup • Safety settings • Acknowledge alarm • temperature • Linearisation • Extended calibration • Output • System parameters • Lock TB Manufacturer parameters Most of these methods are identical to the respective function group in the operating menu. A detailed description of them can be found in the "Description of Instrument functions", BA240F.

11.4.5

Parameter list of the Prosonic M Sensor Block

Parameter

Position rel. Variable Name Indicator Index

Size Type [bytes]

Access Storage Class

Changeable in Mode

measured value

000

18

PARMEASUREDVALUE

4

FloatingPoint

RO

dynamic

Auto, OOS

tank shape

002

19

PARTANKSHAPE

1

Unsigned8

RW

static

OOS

medium property

003

20

PARMEDIUMCONDITION

1

Unsigned8

RW

static

OOS

process cond.

004

21

PARPROCESSCONDITION

1

Unsigned8

RW

static

OOS

empty calibr.

005

22

PAREMPTYCALIBRATION

4

FloatingPoint

RW

static

OOS

full calibr.

006

23

PARFULLCALIBRATION

4

FloatingPoint

RW

static

OOS

echo quality

056

24

PARECHOQUALITY

1

Unsigned8

RO

dynamic

Auto, OOS

check distance

051

25

PARCHECKDISTANCE

1

Unsigned8

RW

dynamic

OOS

range of mapping

052

26

PARSUPPRESSIONDISTANCE

4

FloatingPoint

RW

dynamic

OOS

start mapping

053

27

PARSTARTMAPPINGRECORD

1

Unsigned8

RW

dynamic

OOS

pres. map dist.

054

28

PARPRESMAPRANGE

4

FloatingPoint

RO

dynamic

Auto, OOS

cust. tank map

055

29

PARCUSTTANKMAP

1

Unsigned8

RW

dynamic

OOS

offset

057

30

PAROFFSETOFMEASUREDDISTANCE

4

FloatingPoint

RW

static

OOS

output damping

058

31

PAROUTPUTDAMPING

4

FloatingPoint

RW

static

Auto, OOS

blocking dist.

059

32

PARBLOCKINGDISTANCE

4

FloatingPoint

RW

static

OOS

output on alarm

010

33

PAROUTPUTONALARM

1

Unsigned8

RW

static

OOS

outp. echo loss

012

34

PARREACTIONLOSTECHO

1

Unsigned8

RW

static

OOS

ramp %span/min

013

35

PARRAMPINPERCENTPERMIN

4

FloatingPoint

RW

static

OOS

delay time

014

36

PARDELAYTIMEONLOSTECHO

2

Unsigned16

RW

static

OOS

safety distance

015

37

PARLEVELWITHINSAFETYDISTANCE

4

FloatingPoint

RW

static

OOS

in safety dist.

016

38

PARINSAFETYDISTANCE

1

Unsigned8

RW

static

OOS

ackn. alarm

017

39

PARACKNOWLEDGEALARM

1

Unsigned8

RW

dynamic

Auto, OOS

measured temp.

030

40

PARMEASUREDTEMPERATURE

4

FloatingPoint

RO

dynamic

Auto, OOS

max. temp. limit

031

41

PARMAXTEMPLIMIT

4

FloatingPoint

RO

dynamic

Auto, OOS

max. meas. temp

032

42

PARMAXMEASUREDTEMPERATURE

4

FloatingPoint

RO

non-vol.

Auto, OOS

react. high temp

033

43

PARONHIGHTEMPERATURE

1

Unsigned8

RW

static

OOS

defect temp sens

034

44

PARDEFECTTEMPERATURESENSOR

1

Unsigned8

RW

static

OOS

Endress+Hauser

99

Appendix

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Parameter

Position rel. Variable Name Indicator Index

Size Type [bytes]

Access Storage Class

Changeable in Mode

level/ullage

040

45

PARLEVELULLAGEMODE

1

Unsigned8

RW

static

OOS

linearisation

041

46

PARLINEARISATION

1

Unsigned8

RW

static

OOS

customer unit

042

47

PARCUSTOMERUNIT

2

Unsigned16

RW

static

OOS

table no.

043

48

PARTABLENUMBER

1

Unsigned8

RW

non-vol.

Auto, OOS

input level

044

49

PARINPUTLEVELHALFAUTOMATIC

4

FloatingPoint

RO

dynamic

Auto, OOS

input level

044

50

PARINPUTLEVELMANUAL

4

FloatingPoint

RW

dynamic

OOS

input volume

045

51

PARINPUTVOLUME

4

FloatingPoint

RW

dynamic

OOS

max. scale

046

52

PARMAXVOLUME

4

FloatingPoint

RW

static

OOS

diameter vessel

047

53

PARCYLINDERVESSEL

4

FloatingPoint

RW

static

OOS

simulation

065

54

PARSIMULATION

1

Unsigned8

RW

dynamic

OOS

simulation value

066

55

PARSIMULATIONVALUELEVEL

4

FloatingPoint

RW

dynamic

Auto, OOS

simulation value

066

56

PARSIMULATIONVALUEVOLUME

4

FloatingPoint

RW

dynamic

Auto, OOS

unlock parameter

0A4

57

PAROPERATIONCODE

2

Unsigned16

RW

non-vol.

OOS

measured dist.

0A5

58

PARMEASUREDDISTANCE

4

FloatingPoint

RO

dynamic

Auto, OOS

measured level

0A6

59

PARMEASUREDLEVEL

4

FloatingPoint

RO

dynamic

Auto, OOS

detection window

0A7

60

PARDETECTIONWINDOW

1

Unsigned8

RW

dynamic

OOS

application par.

0A8

61

PARAPPLICATIONPARAMETER

1

Unsigned8

RO

dynamic

Auto, OOS

distance unit

0C5

62

PARDISTANCEUNIT

2

Unsigned16

RW

static

OOS

temperature unit

0C6

63

PARTEMPERATUREUNIT

2

Unsigned16

RW

static

OOS

download mode

0C8

64

PARDOWNLOADMODE

1

Unsigned8

RW

static

OOS

max meas dist

0D84

65

PARABSMAXMESSDIST

4

FloatingPoint

RO

dynamic

Auto, OOS

max sample dist.

0D88

66

PAREDITRANGEMAXSAMPLEDIST

4

FloatingPoint

RO

dynamic

Auto, OOS

present error

0A0

67

PARACTUALERROR

2

Unsigned16

RO

dynamic

Auto, OOS

100

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Appendix

11.5

Diagnostic Block

11.5.1

Operation

The diagnostic block contains the error messages of the instrument. These parameters can also be addressed by using the VU331 display module. The diagnostic block is opened by clicking on the "diagnostic" line. Parameter changes from the tool are made off-line while the device is operating. The changes are downloaded by first setting MODE_BLK = OOS then pressing the WRITE CHANGES button. Press the READ ALL button to check the values stored in the device. In order to resume operation, change MODE_BLK to AUTO5).

11.5.2

Block administration parameters

Parameter

Description

MODE_BLK

See description in Resource block. The possible operating modes of the Sensor block are: – AUTO: the block is operating as normal. – OOS: the block is out of service.

TAG_DESC

User description of the intended application of the block.

BLOCK_ERROR

Shows the error status associated with the block components – Out-of-Service: the block is in OOS mode.

11.5.3

Methods

The FOUNDATION Fieldbus specification provides for the use of so-called methods to simplify the operation of the device. A method is an interactive sequence of steps that must be followed in order to obtain a particular function from the device. The Prosonic M has got the following methods: • Set to customer default • Diagnostics Most of these methods are identical to the respective function group in the operating menu. A detailed description of them can be found in the "Description of Instrument functions", BA240F.

11.5.4

Instrument specific parameters

Parameter

Position rel. Variable Name Indicator Index

Size Type [bytes]

Access Storage Class

Changeable in Mode

present error

0A0

13

PARACTUALERROR

2

Unsigned16

RO

dynamic

Auto, OOS

previous error

0A1

14

PARLASTERROR

2

Unsigned16

RO

non-vol.

Auto, OOS

clear last error

0A2

15

PARCLEARLASTERROR

1

Unsigned8

RW

dynamic

Auto, OOS

reset

0A3

16

PARRESET

2

Unsigned16

RW

dynamic

OOS

unlock parameter

0A4

17

PAROPERATIONCODE

2

Unsigned16

RW

non-vol.

OOS

protocol+sw-no.

0C2

18

PARPROTSOFTVERSIONSTRING

16

VisibleString

RO

const

Auto, OOS

5)

If MODE_BLK refuses to be changed to AUTO, an error is present. Control all parameters, perform the required changes and try again to change MODE_BLK to AUTO.

Endress+Hauser

101

Appendix

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

11.6

Display Block

11.6.1

Operation

The display block contains the parameters required to parametrise the display module VU331 (which is contained in the remote display and operating unit FHX40). These parameters can also be addressed by using the VU331 display module. The display block is opened by clicking on the "display" line. Parameter changes from the tool are made off-line while the device is operating. The changes are downloaded by first setting MODE_BLK = OOS then pressing the WRITE CHANGES button. Press the READ ALL button to check the values stored in the device. In order to resume operation, change MODE_BLK to AUTO6).

11.6.2

Block administration parameters

Parameter

Description

MODE_BLK

See description in Resource block. The possible operating modes of the sensor block are: – AUTO: the block is operating as normal. – OOS: the block is out of service.

TAG_DESC

User description of the intended application of the block.

BLOCK_ERROR

Shows the error status associated with the block components – Out-of-Service: the block is in OOS mode.

11.6.3

Methods

The FOUNDATION Fieldbus specification provides for the use of so-called methods to simplify the operation of the device. A method is an interactive sequence of steps that must be followed in order to obtain a particular function from the device. The Prosonic M has got the following methods: • Display Most of these methods are identical to the respective function group in the operating menu. A detailed description of them can be found in the "Description of Instrument functions", BA240F.

11.6.4

Instrument specific parameters

Parameter

Position rel. Variable Name Indicator Index

Size Type [bytes]

Access Storage Class

Changeable in Mode

language

092

13

PARLANGUAGE

1

Unsigned8

RW

non-vol.

Auto, OOS

back to home

093

14

PARBACKTOHOME

2

Integer16

RW

non-vol.

Auto, OOS

format display

094

15

PARFORMATDISPLAY_FT

1

Unsigned8

RW

non-vol.

Auto, OOS

no.of decimals

095

16

PARNOOFDECIMALS

1

Unsigned8

RW

non-vol.

Auto, OOS

sep. character

096

17

PARSEPARATIONCHARACTER

1

Unsigned8

RW

non-vol.

Auto, OOS

unlock parameter

0A4

18

PAROPERATIONCODE

2

Unsigned16

RW

non-vol.

OOS

6)

102

If MODE_BLK refuses to be changed to AUTO, an error is present. Control all parameters, perform the required changes and try again to change MODE_BLK to AUTO.

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

11.7

Appendix

Analog input block

The analog input block condito ns the signal output by the Sensor block andoutputs signal to the PCL or other function blocks.

L00-FMR2xxxx-05-00-00-en-008

11.7.1

Operation

The resource block is opened by a click on the resource line. Parameter changes from the tool are made off-line while the device is operating. The changes are downloaded by first setting MODE_BLK = OOS then pressing the WRITE CHANGES button. Press the READ ALL button to check the values stored in the device. Normally operation is resumed as soon as MODE-BLK is set to AUTO.

11.7.2

Endress+Hauser

Block administration parameters

Parameter

Description

MODE_BLK

See description in Resource block. The possible operating modes of the Sensor block are: – AUTO: the block is operating as normal – MAN: the block is operated with a manually entered primary value. – OOS: the block is out of service.

TAG_DESC

User description of the intended application of the block.

BLOCK_ERROR

Shows error status of software and hardware components – Out-of-Service: the block is in OOS mode – Simulation active: shows the setting of DIP-switch SIM. Input failure/process variable has BAD status. – configuration error

103

Appendix

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

11.7.3

Output values

Parameter

Description

PV

Either the primary/secondary Sensor block value used to execute the block or a process value associated with it. Comprises value and status.

OUT

The primary value output as a result of executing the analog input block. Comprises value and status.

FIELD_VALUE

Raw value of field device in % of PV range with a status reflecting the Sensor condition before signal characterisation L_Type or filtering V_TIME. Comprises value and status.

11.7.4

Scaling parameters

Parameter

Description

CHANNEL

Selects the measured value to be input to the analogue input block – 0 = no channel defined – 1 = primary value: measured level/volume – 2 = secondary value: measured distance

XD_SCALE

Scales the Sensor block value in the required engineering units (EU).

OUT_SCALE

Scales the output value in the required engineering units (EU).

L_TYPE

Sets the linearization type: – DIRECT: the Sensor block value bypasses the scaling functions – INDIRECT:the Sensor block value is fed through the linear scaling functions – INDIRECT SQRT: the Sensor block value is fed through the square root scaling functions

The relationship between the output values and scaling paramaters is as follows:

FIELD_VAL = 100 x

CHANNEL_VALUE - XD_SCALE_MIN XD_SCALE_MAX - XD_SCALE_MIN

The L_TYPE parameter influences the signal conversion: • Direct: PV = CHANNEL_VALUE

• Indirect:

PV =

FIELD_VALUE x (OUT_SCALE_MAX - OUT_SCALE_MIN) + OUT_SCALE_MIN 100

• Indirect square root:

PV =

104

FIELD_VALUE x (OUT_SCALE_MAX - OUT_SCALE_MIN) + OUT_SCALE_MIN 100

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

11.7.5

Output response parameters

Parameter

Description

LOW_CUT

Not relevant to level measurement! Determines a threshold for square root linearization below which the output value is set to zero.

PV_FTIME

Sets the time constant for the output value.

11.7.6

Alarm parameters

Parameter

Description

ACK_OPTION

Sets the way in which alarms and warnings are to be acknowledged.

ALARM_HYS

Sets the hysteresis (in output engineering units) for all configured alarms. A hysteresis of e.g. 2% on a HI_HI_LIMIT of 95% would cause the alarm to activate when the level reaches 95% and to deactivate when the level drops below 93%. A hysteresis of e.g. 2% on a LO_LO_LIMIT of 5% would cause the alarm to activate when the level drops below 5% and to deactivate when the level rises to 7%.

HI_HI_PRI

The priority (1 – 15) of the HI_HI alarm

HI_HI_LIM

Sets the HI_HI alarm limit in output engineering units

HI_PRI

The priority (1 – 15) of the HI alarm

HI_LIM

Sets the HI warning limit in output engineering units

LO_PRI

The priority (1 – 15) of the LO alarm

LO_LIM

Sets the LO warning limit in output engineering units

LO_LO_PRI

The priority (1 – 15) of the LO_LO alarm

LO_LO_LIM

Sets the LO_LO alarm limit in output engineering units

11.7.7

Alarm priorities

Parameter

Description

0

Alarm is suppressed

1

Recognised by the system but not reported

2

Reported to the operator, but does not require his attention

3-7

Advisroy alarms of increasing priority

8 - 15

Critical alarms of increasing priority

11.7.8

Endress+Hauser

Appendix

Alarm status

Parameter

Description

HI_HI_ALM

The status of the HI_HI alarm

HI_ALM

The status of the HI alarm

LO_ALM

The status of the LO alarm

LO_LO_ALM

The status of the LO_LO alarm

105

Appendix

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

11.7.9

Simulation

The SIMULATE parameter allows the Sensor block output value to be simulated, provided simulation has also been enabled at the device DIP switch. The simulation must be enabled, a value and/or status entered and the block must be in AUTO mode. During simulation the Sensor output value is substituted by the simulated value. A simulation is also possible by switching MODE_BLK to "MAN" and entering a value for OUT.

106

Parameter

Description

SIMULATE

Enables, sets and displays a simulated value, options: – enable/disable – simulated value – output value

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

11.8

Appendix

List of start indices

The following list indicates the start indices for all blocks and objects:

Endress+Hauser

Object

Start Index

Object Dictionary

298

Object

Start Index

Resource Block

400

Analog Input 1 Function Block

500

Analog Input 2 Function Block

600

PID Function Block

700

Arithmetic Function Block

800

Input Selector Function Block

900

Signal Characterizer Function Block

1000

Integrator Function Block

1100

Sensor Block

2000

Diagnostic Block

2200

Display Block

2400

Object

Start Index

View Objects Resource Block

3000

View Objects Analog Input 1 Function Block

3010

View Objects Analog Input 2 Function Block

3020

View Objects PID Function Block

3030

View Objects Arithmetic Function Block

3040

View Objects Input Selector Function Block

3050

View Objects Signal Characterizer Function Block

3060

View Objects Integrator Function Block

3070

View Objects Sensor Block

4000

View Object Diagnostic Block

4100

View Object Display Block

4200

107

Appendix

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

11.9

Measuring principle

BD

20 mA 100% D

E

F

L

4 mA 0% L00-FMU4x-15-00-00-de-001

E: Empty distance; F: Span (full distance); D: Distance from sensor membrane - product surface; L: Level; BD: Blocking distance

Sensor

BD

Max. range fluids

Max. range bulk materials

FMU40

0.25 m

5m

2m

FMU41

0.35 m

8m

3.5 m

FMU42

0.4 m

10 m

5m

FMU43

0.6 m

15 m

7m

FMU44

0.5 m

20 m

10 m

11.9.1

Time-of-flight method

The sensor of the Prosonic M transmits ultrasonic pulses in the direction of the product surface. There, they are reflected back and received by the sensor. The Prosonic M measures the time t between pulse transmission and reception. The instrument uses the time t (and the velocity of sound c) to calculate the distance D between the sensor membrane and the product surface: D = c ⋅ t/2 As the device knows the empty distance E from a user entry, it can calculate the level as follows: L=E-D An integrated temperature sensor compensates for changes in the velocity of sound caused by temperature changes.

11.9.2

Interference echo suppression

The interference echo suppression feature on the Prosonic M ensures that interference echos (e.g. from edges, welded joints and installations) are not interpreted as a level echo.

11.9.3

Calibration

Enter the empty distance E and the span F to calibrate the device.

108

Endress+Hauser

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

11.9.4

Appendix

Blocking distance

Span F may not extend into the blocking distance BD. Level echos from the blocking distance cannot be evaluated due to the transient characteristics of the sensor.

Endress+Hauser

109

Prosonic M - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Index

Index A

P

alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 application errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

process conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

B basic setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 blocking distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 52

range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 repairs to Ex-approved devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 return. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

C

S

cantilever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CE mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

85 14 74 26

14 81 32 33

E empty calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . envelope curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service Interface FXA291 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

T ToF Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 turn housing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

D declaration of conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . declaration of contamination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . display appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . display symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

R

59 60 69 68

V vessel / silo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

W warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 weather protection cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

F FHX40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 flow measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 full calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 59

H hazardous area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

I installation bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 interference echo suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

K key assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Khafagi-Venturi flume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

L level measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

M mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Measuring range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 medium property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

N nozzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

O on-site display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 operating menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

110

Endress+Hauser

Declaration of Hazardous Material and De-Contamination Erklärung zur Kontamination und Reinigung Please reference the Return Authorization Number (RA#), obtained from Endress+Hauser, on all paperwork and mark the RA# clearly on the outside of the box. If this procedure is not followed, it may result in the refusal of the package at our facility. Bitte geben Sie die von E+H mitgeteilte Rücklieferungsnummer (RA#) auf allen Lieferpapieren an und vermerken Sie diese auch außen auf der Verpackung. Nichtbeachtung dieser Anweisung führt zur Ablehnung ihrer Lieferung.

RA No.

Because of legal regulations and for the safety of our employees and operating equipment, we need the "Declaration of Hazardous Material and De-Contamination", with your signature, before your order can be handled. Please make absolutely sure to attach it to the outside of the packaging. Aufgrund der gesetzlichen Vorschriften und zum Schutz unserer Mitarbeiter und Betriebseinrichtungen, benötigen wir die unterschriebene "Erklärung zur Kontamination und Reinigung", bevor Ihr Auftrag bearbeitet werden kann. Bringen Sie diese unbedingt außen an der Verpackung an. Serial number Seriennummer ________________________

Type of instrument / sensor Geräte-/Sensortyp ____________________________________________

Used as SIL device in a Safety Instrumented System / Einsatz als SIL Gerät in Schutzeinrichtungen Process data/Prozessdaten

Pressure / Druck _____ [psi] _____ [ Pa ] Viscosity /Viskosität _____ [cp] _____ [mm2/s]

Temperature / Temperatur_____ [°F] _____ [°C] Conductivity / Leitfähigkeit ________ [μS/cm]

Medium and warnings Warnhinweise zum Medium Medium /concentration Identification flammable CAS No. Medium /Konzentration entzündlich

toxic giftig

corrosive ätzend

harmful/ irritant gesundheitsschädlich/ reizend

other * harmless sonstiges* unbedenklich

Process medium Medium im Prozess Medium for process cleaning Medium zur Prozessreinigung Returned part cleaned with Medium zur Endreinigung * explosive; oxidising; dangerous for the environment; biological risk; radioactive * explosiv; brandfördernd; umweltgefährlich; biogefährlich; radioaktiv Please tick should one of the above be applicable, include safety data sheet and, if necessary, special handling instructions. Zutreffendes ankreuzen; trifft einer der Warnhinweise zu, Sicherheitsdatenblatt und ggf. spezielle Handhabungsvorschriften beilegen. Description of failure / Fehlerbeschreibung __________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Company data /Angaben zum Absender

P/SF/Konta XIV

Company /Firma ___________________________________ _________________________________________________ Address / Adresse _________________________________________________ _________________________________________________

Phone number of contact person /Telefon-Nr. Ansprechpartner: ____________________________________________ Fax / E-Mail ____________________________________________ Your order No. / Ihre Auftragsnr. ____________________________

“We hereby certify that this declaration is filled out truthfully and completely to the best of our knowledge.We further certify that the returned parts have been carefully cleaned. To the best of our knowledge they are free of any residues in dangerous quantities.” “Wir bestätigen, die vorliegende Erklärung nach unserem besten Wissen wahrheitsgetreu und vollständig ausgefüllt zu haben. Wir bestätigen weiter, dass die zurückgesandten Teile sorgfältig gereinigt wurden und nach unserem besten Wissen frei von Rückständen in gefahrbringender Menge sind.”

(place, date / Ort, Datum)

Name, dept./Abt. (please print /bitte Druckschrift)

Signature / Unterschrift

www.endress.com/worldwide

BA239F/00/en/01.09 71089089 CCS/FM+SGML 6.0/ProMoDo

71089089

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

MEDIDOR DE NIVEL (Bed Level)

3.6 Equipo Espesador 36m 325-TK-0002

PÁGINA 1 DE 1

Revisión NA

Descripción PROBE BLD-2000 SERIES Instrumento Tag 325-LIT-001

CAPÍTULO 3 DOCUMENTACIÓN DE COMPONENTES

OUTOTEC PTY LTD AUSTRALIAN SERVICE CENTRE BED LEVEL DETECTION PROBE BLD-2000 SERIES The BLD - 2000 series Bed Level Probes are constructed of 316L or 904L Stainless Steel, and therefore are resistant to corrosion. They consist of a sealed stainless steel tube and circuit boards with a Reed Switch Relay Matrix housed inside. The output is a 0 -10 k-ohm resistance. This is then converted using a resistance transmitter to produce a 4-20 mA signal. The 4-20 mA signal is transmitted back to the Control Room, where it is used to control the speed of the flocculant dosing pumps. As the Bed Level increases, the pump speed is increased and vice-versa to maintain a constant level. These levels are important in the control of overflow clarity. A Derakain Fibreglass cone-shaped float has been designed to promote self-cleaning and to reduce the build up of solids. The float has a hole through its axis with magnets along its inner sleeve. The float slides up and down the stainless steel tube probe whilst floating on the bed. The magnets activate the Reed Switches installed inside the probe. The Probe has PVC stops, both in the lower and upper positions to prevent the float from falling out of range. By filling the cone float with water, it is weighted so it sinks very slowly in a bucket of Process water. Therefore, it will float on any solids, giving an indication of the Bed Level. The probe position is critical to the operation of the Thickener. The ideal location is at midpoint between the Launder and the Feedwell outer lip. The unit should be at a level where the bottom of the Probe is level with the bottom of the Deflector Cone. The units are available in the following standard sizes that suit most applications. However, any size or range can be built to suit the Client’s requirements. The part numbers and descriptions are as follows: Model 2.5-316-0.75 3.0-316-1.0 4.0-316-1.5 Standard

Description Part Number 2.5m long, SS Gr 316 material, 0.75 m S.T.BL.2500.750.316 sensing range. 3.0m long, SS Gr 316 material, 1.0 m S.T.BL.3000.1000.316 sensing range. 4.0m long, SS Gr 316 material, 1.5 m S.T.BL.4000.1500.316 sensing range. Derakain Cone Float S.T.BL.CF

Outotec Pty Ltd 1/25 Frenchs Forest Rd, Frenchs Forest NSW 2086 Level 2, 1 Walker Street, West Perth WA 6005 ABN 7400 3491 165

Australian Service Centre Page 1 of 7 www.outotec.com

Outotec Pty Ltd 1/25 Frenchs Forest Rd, Frenchs Forest NSW 2086 Level 2, 1 Walker Street, West Perth WA 6005 ABN 7400 3491 165

Australian Service Centre Page 2 of 7 www.outotec.com

Typical wiring diagram

Outotec Pty Ltd 1/25 Frenchs Forest Rd, Frenchs Forest NSW 2086 Level 2, 1 Walker Street, West Perth WA 6005 ABN 7400 3491 165

Australian Service Centre Page 3 of 7 www.outotec.com

ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE The Bed Level Detection Probe BLD-2000 Series is delivered in a two-piece configuration. The lower section (with wire attached) contains the electronics and is Fragile, therefore extra care should be taken when unpacking this unit. The upper section is a hollow tube. Whilst the lower section is fully sealed to IP65 standards, it is recommended that as part of these assembly instructions the Female threaded section be filled with Silicone or equivalent sealant, and the Male threaded section be Teflon taped, before connecting the two components - this ensures an additional seal for the electronic housing section.

ASSEMBLY 1. Remove the cable ties and unroll the cable. 2. Feed the cable through the hollow "upper" tube. 3. When the cable is fed completely through the upper tube, apply Teflon tape to the threaded male section on the upper tube and screw the two component parts together. 4. Then fill the threaded female section on the "sensor" tube with silicon sealant. It is imperative that the join area be sufficiently sealed to reduce any possibility of contamination to the electronics during operation.

Outotec Pty Ltd 1/25 Frenchs Forest Rd, Frenchs Forest NSW 2086 Level 2, 1 Walker Street, West Perth WA 6005 ABN 7400 3491 165

Australian Service Centre Page 4 of 7 www.outotec.com

Outotec Pty Ltd 1/25 Frenchs Forest Rd, Frenchs Forest NSW 2086 Level 2, 1 Walker Street, West Perth WA 6005 ABN 7400 3491 165

Australian Service Centre Page 5 of 7 www.outotec.com

Outotec Pty Ltd 1/25 Frenchs Forest Rd, Frenchs Forest NSW 2086 Level 2, 1 Walker Street, West Perth WA 6005 ABN 7400 3491 165

Australian Service Centre Page 6 of 7 www.outotec.com

5. Finally, fit the rubber boot at the top of the upper tube (where the cable exits). This will stop rain and dust from entering the upper section of the Probe. The Probes are tested and calibrated prior to delivery. However, they should be rechecked upon installation as follows: * * *

* * * * *

Before lowering the Probe into position, remove the lower bolt, locking nut and washers. Loosen and remove the lower PVC collar. Place the weighted Cone Float over the Probe, (pointy end up). If float has not been weighted with process water, remove the bolt from the bottom and fill with enough process water so that when in a container of process water, the float sinks slowly. Refit the bolt. Refit the PVC collar, bolt etc. Lay the Probe across the bridge handrails and connect the wiring to the control panel. Move the float between the two PVC collars, monitoring the output on the Control Panel display. The output is 4-20 mA and should be displayed as 0 - 100%. If, when fully raised, the signal drops out of range (i.e. gets to 100% and returns to 0%) then the PVC collar should be lowered so that the float does not exceed this range. There are “Span” and” Zero” buttons located on the Resistance Transmitter to calibrate the 0 - 100% range.

When complete, install the Probe in its correct position ensuring that it is not positioned lower than the original install - the bottom of the Probe should be level with the lowest point of the Deflector Cone.

Note: The Cable entry end of the Probes are design to be IP 65 NOT fully submersible. Any damage caused by submersing, dropping or failure to comply with assembly procedure is not covered by Warranty.

Probes are manufactured in Australia

Outotec Pty Ltd 1/25 Frenchs Forest Rd, Frenchs Forest NSW 2086 Level 2, 1 Walker Street, West Perth WA 6005 ABN 7400 3491 165

Australian Service Centre Page 7 of 7 www.outotec.com

MANUAL INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO ESPESADOR CONCENTRADO 36m MINERA ESPERANZA – ANTOFAGASTA MINERALS OUTOTEC CHILE S.A.

3.7 Equipo Espesador 36m 325-TK-0002

SEPTIEMBRE 2014

PÁGINA 1 DE 1

LIMITE DE CARRERA (Limit Switch)

Revisión NA

Descripción Sick IQ 40 Instrumento Tag 325-ZSH-006A & 325-ZSL-006B

CAPÍTULO 3 DOCUMENTACIÓN DE COMPONENTES